Skip to main content

Full text of "Duquesne University Bulletin 1987-1988"

See other formats


DUQUESNE 



, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 




Underg raduate Catal og 



r:^j 






7v^ 



1987-88 



Directory 



ADDRESS -University, 600 Forbes Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pa. 15282 

Telephone: Call specific number (see following); 

for other offices, call 434-6000 
ADMISSION -Director of Admissions, Administration Building, First Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6220/6221/6222 
ADVISORS 

College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, College Hall, Room 215 

Telephone: (412) 434-6394/6395/6396 

School of Business and Administration, Rockwell Hall, Room 403 

Telephone: (412) 434-6277/6278 

School of Education, Canevin Hall, Room 214 

Telephone: (412) 434-6118/6119 

School of Music, Room 315 

Telephone: (412) 434-6083 

School of Nursing, College Hall Room 637D 

Telephone: (412) 434-6346/6347 

School of Pharmacy, Mellon Hall of Science, Room 421 

Telephone: (412) 434-6385/6365 

ROTC- College Hall, Fourth Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6614/6664/6665 
BOOKSTORE -Duquesne Union, Second Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6626 
CAMPUS MINISTRY- Administration Building, First Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6020 
CAREER PLANNING AND PLACEMENT- Administration, Third Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6644/6645/6646/6647 
CASHIER- Payment of Tuition and Fees, Administration Building, Ground Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6585/6586/6587/6588 
CHAPLAIN -Administration Building, First Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6020/6021 
COUNSELING/TESTING CENTER- 

Administration Building, Third Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6204/6208. 
DEAN OF STUDENTS -Duquesne Union, Third Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6657/6658/6659 
FINANCIAL AID -Loan, Scholarship, Student Employment, Applications 

Administration Building, Ground Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6607/6608/6609 
HEALTH SERVICE -Duquesne Towers, Second Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-1650/1652 
IDENTIFICATION CARDS -Office Services, Rockwell Hall, Lower Level 

Telephone: (412) 434-6191 
INFORMATION CENTER- For University Events, Duquesne Union, Third Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6632/6633 
INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION ADVISOR- Administration Building, Fourth Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6113 
LEARNING SKILLS PROGRAM- Administration Building, Third Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6661/6662/6636 
PSYCHOLOGICAL COUNSELING -Center for Testing and Research 

Telephone: (412) 434-6561/6562/6563 
PUBLIC SAFETY- Public Safety Building 

Telephone: (412) 434-6001/6002/6003 
REGISTRAR- For Transcripts and Records, Rockwell Hall 

Telephone: (412) 434-6214 (Transcripts) 434-6215 (Records) 
RESIDENCE LIFE -For Housing, Duquesne Towers 

Telephone: (412) 434-6655/6656 (Second Floor: Billing Contract) 

434-7802/7803/7804 (First Floor: Room Assignments) 
STUDENT HEALTH INSURANCE -G & G Building, Second Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6058/6059 
TESTING BUREAU -Administration Building, Third Floor 

Telephone: (412) 434-6204/6208 



Duquesne University 
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 



UNDERGRADUATE 
CATALOG 

1987-1988 

Published annually, in July, by Duquesne University, 600 Forbes Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15282. 

NOTICE OF RIGHT TO PRIVACY 
Under the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, access to student records by non-University person- 
nel is restricted unless granted by the student, or dependency of the student is demonstrated by a parent or 
guardian. 

Duquesne University admits students of any sex, race, color, national and ethnic origin to all rights, privi- 
leges, programs, and activities generally accorded or made available to students at the school. It does not 
discriminate on the basis of sex, race, color, national or ethnic origin, veteran's status or non-performance 
related handicap in the administration of its educational policies, admissions policies, scholarship and loan 
programs, and athletic and other University-administered programs. 

Contents 

Calendar 2 

I. General Information 9 

II. Programs and Courses 14 

Liberal Arts and Sciences 14 

Business and Administration 64 

Education 77 

Music 85 

Nursing 100 

Pharmacy 109 

R.O.T.C 125 

III. Student Life: Programs, Services and Organizations 128 

IV. Campus Ministry 133 

V. Admission, Financial Aid, Tuition and Fees 134 

VI. Registration, Scholastic Policies 149 

VII. Directories 155 

Index 179 

The provisions of this catalog are to be considered directive in character. The University reserves the right to 
make any changes that seem necessary' or desirable, including fees, tuition and room and board. 
Faculty listings contained in this catalog are current as of Fall 1985. 



ACADEMIC CALENDAR 

1986-1987, 1987-1988, 1988-1989 

FALL SEMESTER- 1986 



August 20 
August 21 
August 22 
August 23 
August 23 
August 23 
August 25 
September 1 
September 2 
September 2 
September 2 
September 2 
September 6 

September 13 

September 19 

September 20 

October 4 
October 8 
October 10 



October 13 
October 17 
October 17 

October 18 
October 24 

October 24 

October 25 

October 26 

November 1 
November 6 
November 21 
November 21 

November 22 
December 1 
December 8 
December 9 
December 11 
December 12 
December 12 

December 12 

December 15 
December 20 
December 20 
December 20 



Wednesday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Monday 

Tuesday 

Tuesday 

Tuesday 

Tuesday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Wednesday 

Friday 



Monday 

Friday 

Friday 

Saturday 
Friday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Sunday 

Saturday 
Thursday 
Friday 
Friday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Monday 

Tuesday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Friday 

Friday 

Monday 
Saturday 
Saturday 
Saturday 



December 22 Monday 

*Some Jewish students may be absent; 



Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 

Latest Date to Cancel Registration Without Late Fee. 
Latest Date to Cancel Registration Without Penalty. 
Fall Semester Begins. 
Holiday: Labor Day. 
Latest Date to Register. 
Latest Date for Change of Class Schedule. 
Latest Date to Declare Pass/Fail. 
No Refund After this Date for Credits Dropped. 
Latest Date for 80% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date for 40% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date for December Graduates to Apply for Gradua- 
tion. 

Latest Date for 20% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 
Religious New Year: Rosh Hashanah* 
Reading Day. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates to Complete "I" Graded 
courses of the 1986 Spring Semester and 1986 Summer Ses- 
son. "I" Graded courses not completed by this Date Receive 
the Permanent Grade of "F" 
Day of Atonement: Yom Kippur* 
Latest Date for Reporting Mid- term Grades. 
Due Date for Instructors to Submit Undergraduates 'T" 
Grade Removal Grades. 
Tabernacles: SUCCOT* 

Latest Date for December Graduates to Submit Thesis Out- 
lines and Schedule Comprehensives. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates other than First Semester 
Freshmen to Withdraw with "W" Grade. 
Concluding Day of Tabernacles: 

SH'MINI ATZERT* 
Festival of Rejoicing in the Torah: 

SIMCHAT TORAH 
Holiday: All Saints Day 
Spring 1987 Pre-Registration Begins. 
Spring 1987 Pre-Registration Ends. 

Latest Date for 1987 Spring Semester Pre-Registration with 
Pay-By-Mail Option. 

Last Class Day Before Thanksgiving Holiday. 
First Class Day After Thanksgiving Holiday. 
Holiday: Immaculate Conception. 
Follows the Monday Class Schedule. 
Reading Day. 
Reading Day. 

Latest Date for December Graduates to Submit Approved 
Thesis to School Office and to take Comprehensives. 
Latest Date for First Semester Freshmen to withdraw with 
"W" Grade. 

Final Examinations Begin. 
Final Examinations End. 
Semester Ends. 

Latest Day for Graduating Students to Complete Degrees 
and Pay Account. 
Holiday: Christmas Recess Begins. 

holiday begins at sunset of preceding evening. 



SPRING SEMESTER- 1987 



November 21 

January 8 
January 9 
January 10 
January 10 
January 10 
January 12 
January 16 
January 16 
January 16 
January 16 
January 19 
January 23 
January 24 

January 30 

January 31 

February 7 

February 27 



March 6 
March 6 

March 9 
March 14 
March 16 

April 3 
April 10 
April 14, 15 
April 15 
April 16 
April 17 
April 20, 21 
April 21 
April 28 

April 29 
April 30 

May 6 
May 6 

May 8 
May 8 
May 9 
May 25 
May 28 
June 3, 4 
July 4 
July 15 



Friday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Friday 

Friday 

Friday 

Friday 

Monday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Friday 



Friday 
Friday 

Monday 
Saturday 
Monday 

Friday 

Friday 

Tues., Wed. 

Wednesday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Mon., Tues. 

Tuesday 

Tuesday 

Wednesday 
Thursday 
Wednesday 
Wednesday 

Friday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Thursday 

Wed., Thurs. 

Saturday 

Wednesday 



August 15 Saturday 

*Some Jewish students may be absent; 



Latest Date for 1987 Spring Semester Pre-registration with 
Pay-By-Mail Option. 
Final Registration 
Final Registration 
Final Registration 

Latest Date to Cancel Registration without Penalty. 
Latest Date to Register without Late Fee. 
Semester Begins. 
Latest Date to Register. 
Latest Date for Change of Class Schedule. 
Latest Date to Declare Pass/Fail and Auditor. 
No Refund After this Date for Credits Dropped. 
Holiday, Martin Luther King, Jr.'s Birthday Observance. 
Latest Date for May Graduates to Apply for Graduation. 
Latest Date for 80% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date May Graduates to Submit Thesis Outline and 
Schedule Comprehensives. 

Latest Date for 40% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date for 20% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates to Complete I Graded 
Courses of the 1986 Fall Semseter. I Graded Courses not 
completed by this date receive the permanent Grade of F. 
Latest Date to Submit Mid-term Grades. 
Due Date for Instructors to Submit Undergraduates I Grade 
Removal Grades. 

Last Class Day Before Spring Break. 
First Class Day After Spring Break. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates Other than First Semester 
Freshman to Withdraw with W Grade. 
1987 Fall Semester Pre-registration Begins. 
Latest Date for Graduating Students to Pay Accounts. 
Passover; PESACH* 
Last Class Day Before Easter Holidays. 
Holiday: Holy Thursday 
Holiday: Good Friday 
Concluding Days: PESACH* 
First Class Day After Easter Holidays 

Latest Date for First Semester Freshmen to Withdraw with W 
Grades. 

Will Follow the Friday Class Day Schedule. 
Final Examinations Begin. 
Final Examinations End. 

Semester Ends. Latest Date for Graduating Students to 
Complete Degrees. 

University Convocation and Honors Day. 
Baccalaureate Liturgy. 
Commencement. 
Holiday: Memorial Day. 
Holiday: Ascension Day. 
Shavuot: Pentecost* 
Holiday: Independence Day 

Latest Date for Fall 1987 Preregistration with Pay-By-Mail 
Option. 
Holiday: Assumption. 

holiday begins at sunset of preceeding evening. 



FALL SEMESTER- 1987 



To Be Announced 

August 15 
August 26 
August 27 
August 28 
August 29 
August 31 
September 7 
September 8 



September 12 

September 19 

September 24, 25 
September 26 

October 2 

October 3 
October 8 
October 9 
October 15 

October 16 



October 23 



Saturday 

Wednesday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Monday 

Tuesday 



Saturday 

Saturday 

Thurs., Fri. 
Saturday 

Friday 

Saturday 
Thursday 
Friday 
Thursday 

Friday 



Friday 



November 1 
November 10 


Sunday 
Tuesday 


To Be Announced 




November 21 
November 30 
December 7 


Saturday 
Monday 
Monday 


December 8 
December 15 


Tuesday 
Tuesday 


December 16 


Wednesd 


December 22 


Tuesday 



December 23 Wednesday 

*Some Jewish students may be absent. 



Latest Date for 1987 Fall Semester Pre-registration with Pay- 
by Mail Option. 
Holiday: Assumption. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 

Final Registration. Latest Date to Register without Late Fee. 
Semester Begins. 
Holiday: Labor Day. 
Latest Date to Register. 
Latest Date for Change of Class Schedule. 
Latest Date to Declare Pass/Fail. 
No Refund after this Date for Credits Dropped. 
Latest Date to Resign from ALL CLASSES for the Semester 
and Receive 80% Tuition Refund. 

Latest Date to Resign from ALL CLASSES for the Semester 
and Receive 40*^0 Tuition Refund. 
Religious New Year: ROSH HASHANAH* 
Latest Date to Resign from ALL CLASSES for the Semester 
and Receive 20% Tuition Refund. 

Latest Date for December Prospective Graduates to Apply 
for Graduation. 

Day of Atonement: YOM KIPPUR* 
Tabernacles: SUCCOT* 
Tabernacles: SUCCOT* 
Concluding Day of Tabernacles: 

SH'MINIATZERET* 
Latest Date for Undergraduates to Complete "I" Graded 
Courses from the 1987 Spring Semester and 1987 Summer 
Session. "I" Graded Courses not Completed by this Date Re- 
ceive the Permanent Grade of "F". 
Latest Date to Submit Mid-term Grades. 
Festival of Rejoicing in the Torah: Simchat Torah* 
Due Date for Instructors to Submit Undergraduate "I" Grade 
Removal Grades. 

Latest Date for December Graduates to Submit Thesis Out- 
line and Schedule Comprehensives. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates Other than First Semester 
Freshmen to Withdraw with "W" Grade. 
All Saints Day 

Spring Semester 1988 Pre-registration Begins. 
Other dates: Nov. 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18 & 19. 
(W., H., F, S., M., T, W., H.) 

Latest Date for 1988 Spring Semester Pre-registration with 
Pay-by-Mail Option. 

Last Class Day Before Thanksgiving Holidays. 
First Class Day After Thanksgiving Holidays. 
Latest Date for December Prospective Graduates to Submit 
Approved Thesis to School and to take Comprehensives. 
Holiday: Immaculate Conception. 

Latest Date for First Semester Freshmen to Withdraw with 
"W" Grade. 

Final Examinations Begin. 
Other Dates: 17, 18, 19, 21, 22 
(H., F, S., M., T) 
Semester Ends. 

Latest Date for Graduating Students to Complete Degrees 
and Pay Accounts. 
Holiday: Christmas Recess Begins. 

Holy day begins at sunset of preceding evening. 



SPRING SEMESTER- 1988 



To Be Announced 

January 7 
January 8 
January 9 



January 15 



January 18 
January 22 

January 23 

January 25 

January 30 

February 6 

February 22 
February 29 
March 4 



March 11 



March 30 
March 31 
April 1 
April 2 

April 5 



April 7 



April 9 
April 15 
April 26 

April 27 
April 27 

April 28 



May 4 

May 6 

May 7 
May 12 
May 22, 23 
May 30 
July 4 
July 8 

August 15 



Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 



Friday 



Monday 
Friday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Monday 
Monday 
Friday 



Friday 



Wednesday 
Thursday 
Friday 
Saturday 

Tuesday 



Thursday 



Saturday 

Friday 

Tuesday 

Wednesday 
Wednesday 

Thursday 



Wednesday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Thursday 

Sun., Mon. 

Monday 

Monday 

Friday 

Monday 



Latest Date for 1988 Spring Semester Pre-registration with 
Pay-by-Mail Option. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Semester Begins. 
Final Registration. 

Latest Date to Register without Late Fee. 
Latest Date to Cancel Registration without Penalty. 
Latest Date to Register. 
Latest Date for Change of Class Schedule. 
Latest Date to Declare Pass/Fail and Auditor. 
No Refund after this Date for Credits Dropped. 
Holiday: Martin Luther King, Jr's. Birthday Observance. 
Latest Date for May Prospective Graduates to Apply for 
Graduation. 

Latest Date for 80<yo Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date for May Prospective Graduates to Submit Thesis 
Outline and Schedule Comprehensives. 
Latest Date for 40% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date for 20% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 
Last Class Day Before Spring Break. 
First Class Day After Spring Break. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates to Complete "I" Graded 
Courses from the 1987 Fall Semester. "I" Graded Courses not 
Completed by this Date Receive the Permanent Grade of "F". 
Latest Date to Submit Mid-Term Grades 
Due Date for Instructors to Submit Undergraduate "I" Grade 
Removal Grades. 

Latest Date for Undegraduates Other than First Semester 
Freshmen to Withdraw with "W" Grade. 
Last Class Day Before Easter Holidays. 
Holiday: Holy Thursday 
Holiday: Good Friday 
Holiday: Holy Saturday 
Passover: PESACH 
First Class Day After Easter Holidays. 

Latest Date for May Prospective Graduates to Submit Ap- 
proved Thesis to School Office and Take Comprehensives. 
Fall Semester Pre-registration Begins. 
Other Dates: April 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. 
(R, S., M., T, W, H., R) 
Concluding Days: PESACH 

Latest Date for May Graduating Students to Pay Accounts. 
Classes Meet According to the Thursday Class Day Sched- 
ule. 

Classes Meet According to the Friday Class Day Schedule. 
Latest Date for First Semester Freshmen to Withdraw with 
"W" Grade. 

Final Examinations Begin. 
Other days are: April 29, 30; May 2, 3, 4. 
(R, S., M:,T, W) 
Semester Ends. 

Latest Date for Graduating Students to Complete Degrees. 
University Convocation and Honors Day 
Baccalaureate Liturgy. 
Commencement . 
Holiday: Ascension Day. 
SHAVUOT 

Holiday: Memorial Day. 
Holiday: Independence Day. 

Latest Date for Fall Semester 1988 Pre-registration with Pay- 
by-Mail Option. 
Holiday: Assumption. 



FALL SEMESTER- 1988 



To be Announced 

August 15 
August 24 
August 25 
August 26 
August 27 



August 29 
September 5 
September 6 



September 10 

September 12 
September 13 
September 17 

September 21 
September 24 

September 26 
September 27 
September 30 

October 3 
October 4 

October 7 

October 14 



October 21 



November 1 
November 9 
November 17 



November 19 
November 28 
December 8 
December 9 

December 14 



December 15 
December 16 
December 22 



December 23 



Monday 

Wednesday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 



Monday 
Monday 
Tuesday 



Saturday 

Monday 
Tuesday 
Saturday 

Wednesday 
Saturday 

Monday 
Tuesday 
Friday 

Monday 
Tuesday 

Friday 

Friday 

Friday 



Tuesday 

Wednesday 

Thursday 



Saturday 
Monday 
Thursday 
Friday 

Wednesday 



Thursday 

Friday 

Thursday 



Friday 



Latest Date for Fall Semester Pre-Registration with Pay-by 
Mail Option. 
Holiday: Assumption. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 

Latest Date to Register without Late Fees. 
Latest Date to Cancel Registration without Penalty. 
Semester Begins. 
Hohday: Labor Day. 
Latest Date to Register. 
Latest Date for Change of Class Schedule. 
Latest Date to Declare Pass/Fail. 
No Refund after this Date for Credits Dropped. 
Latest Date for SO^/o Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 
Religious New Year: Rosh Hashanah* 
Religious New Year:Rosh Hashanah* 

Latest Date for 40% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 
Day of Atonement: Yom Kippur* 

Latest Date for 20% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 
Tabernacles: SUCCOT* 
Tabernacles: SUCCOT* 

Latest Date for December Graduates to Submit Thesis Out- 
lines and Schedule Comprehensives. 
Concluding Day of Tabenacles: ATZERET* 
Festival of Rejoicing in the Torah: 

SIMCHAT TORAH 
Latest Date for December Graduates to Apply for Gradua- 
tion. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates to Complete "I" Graded 
Courses of the 1988 Spring Semester and 1988 Summer Ses- 
sion, "l" Graded courses not completed by this date receive 
the Permanent Grade of "F" 
Latest Date for Reporting Mid-term Grades. 
Due Date for Instructors to Submit Undergraduates "I" 
Grade Removal Grades. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates other than First Semester 
Freshmen to Withdraw with "W" Grade. 
Holiday: All Saints Day 
Spring 1989 Pre-Registration Begins. 
Spring 1989 Pre-Registration Ends. 

Latest Date for 1989 Spring Semester Pre-Registration with 
Pay-by-Mail Option. 

Last Class Day before Thanksgiving Holiday. 
First Class Day after Thanksgiving Holiday. 
Holiday: Immaculate Conception. 

Latest Date for December Graduates to Submit Approved 
Thesis to School Office and to take Comprehensives. 
Follows Thursday's Class Schedule. 

Latest Date for First Semester Freshmen to Withdraw with 
"W" Grade. 
Reading Day. 
Final Examinations Begin. 
Final Examinations End. 
Semester Ends. 

Latest Date for Graduating Students to Complete Degrees 
and Pay Accounts. 
Holiday: Christmas Recess Begins. 



'Some Jewish students may be absent; holyday begins at sunset of preceding evening. 



SPRING SEMESTER- 1989 



To be Announced 

January 5 
January 6 
January 7 



January 13 



January 16 
January 20 
January 21 

January 27 

January 28 

February 4 

February 20 
February 27 
March 3 



March 10 



March 17 

March 22 
March 23 
March 24 
March 25 
March 28 
March 30 



April 14 
April 20 
April 21 
April 25 
April 26 



April 26 
April 27 

May 3 



May 4 
May 5 
May 6 
May 29 
June 9 
June 10 
July 4 
August 15 



Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 



Friday 



Monday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Saturday 

Sunday 

Saturday 

Monday 
Monday 
Friday 



Friday 



Friday 

Wednesday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Tuesday 

Thursday 



Friday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Tuesday 

Wednesday 



Wednesday 
Thursday 

Wednesday 



Thursday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Tuesday 

Tuesday 



Latest Date for 1989 Spring Semester Pre-Registration with 
Pay-by-Mail Option. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Final Registration. 
Semester Begins: First Class Day. 
Latest Date to Cancel Registration without Penalty. 
Latest Date to Register without Late Fee. 
Latest Date to Register. 
Latest Date for Change of Class Schedule. 
Latest Date to Declare Pass/Fail and Auditor. 
No Refund after this Date for Credits Dropped. 
Holiday: Martin Luther King, Jr's. Birthday Observance. 
Latest Date for May Graduates to Apply for Graduation. 
Latest Date for 80% Tuition Remission for TOTAL 
WITHDRAWL from the University. 

Latest Date for May Graduates to Submit Thesis Outline and 
Schedule Comprehensives. 

Latest Date for 40% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 

Latest Date for 20% Tuition Remission for TOTAL WITH- 
DRAWAL from the University. 
Last Class Day before Spring Break. 
First Class Day after Spring Break. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates to Complete "I" Graded 
Courses from the 1988 Fall Semester, "l" Graded Courses not 
completed by this date receive permanent "F" grade 
Latest Date to Submit Mid-Term Grades 
Due Date for Instructors to Submit Undergraduate "I" Grade 
Removal Grades. 

Latest Date for Undergraduates Other than First Semester 
Freshmen to Withdraw with "W" Grade. 
Latest Date for May Graduates to Submit Approved Thesis 
to School Office and Take Comprehensives. 
Last Class Day before Easter Holidays. 
Holiday: Holy Thursday 
Holiday: Good Friday 
Holiday: Holy Saturday 
First Class Day after Easter Holidays 
1989 Fall Semester Pre-Registration Begins 
(Other Dates: March 31; April 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7; F., S., M., T, W., 
H., R) 

Latest Date for Graduating Students to Pay Accounts. 
Passover: PESACH* 
Passover: PESACH* 

Will Follow the Thursday Class Day Schedule. 
Will Follow the Friday Class Day Schedule. 
Latest Date for First Semester Freshmen to Withdraw with 
"W" Grades. 

Concluding Days: PESACH* 
Concluding Days: PESACH* 
Final Examinations Begin. 
Final Examinations End. 

Semester Ends. Latest Date for Graduating Students to 
Complete Degrees. 
Holiday: Ascension Day 
University Convocation and Honors Day. 
Commencement . 
Holiday: Memorial Day. 
SHAVUOT: Pentecost* 
SHAVUOT: Pentecost* 
Holiday: Independence Day 
Holiday: Assumption 



*Some Jewish students may be absent; holyday begins at sunset of preceding evening. 



All Degrees and Programs Offered in the University 

SCHOOL BACHELOR'S DEGREE MASTER'S DEGREE DOCTORATE 







Art History Media Arts 
Biochemistry Philosoph\- 
Biology Physics 
Chemistry Political 
Classics Science 
Classical Psychology 

Civilization Social 
Computer Communication 

Science Social Ser\'ices/ 
Criminal justice Human 
Economics Ser\'ices 
English Sociology 
Erench Spanish 
German Speech 
Gerontology Speech 
History Pathology 
International Audiology 

Relations Theatre Media 
journalism Theology 
Liberal ArtS' World 

Engineering Literature 
Mathematics 


College ot 
Liberal Arts 
and Sciences 











Graduate 
School of 
Liberal 
Arts and 

Sciences 



School of 
Business and 
Administration 



School of 
Education 



School of 
Music 



School of 
Pharmacy 



Accounting Management 

Economic Management 

Science Information 

Finance Systems 

Human Resource Marketing 

Management Pre-Legal Studies 
International Quantitative and 

Business Information 

Law Systems 

Administration 



Early Childhood Education 
Elementary Education 
Secondary Education 
Special Education 

(Mentally and/or 

Physically 

Handicapped) 



Bachelor of 

Music in 
Performance: 

Classical 

Jazz 

Sacred 

Music 



Bachelor of 

Science in Musii 

Education 
Bachelor of 

Science in Music 

Education with 

a concentration 

in Music 

Therapy 







Bachelor of Science 
in Nursing 


School of 
Nursing 











Medical Technology 
Pharmacy 
Radiological Health 



Biochemistry 

Biology 

Chemistry 

Communications 

English 

Formative 
Spirituality 

German 

History 
Archival, 
Museum and 
Editing Studies 

Liberal Studies 

Mathematics 

Medicinal 
Chemistry 



Pharmaceutical 
Chemistry 

Pharmaceutics 

Pharmacognosy 

Pharmacology 

Toxicology 

Philosophy 

Political Science 

Psychology 

Sociology 

Spanish 

Theology 
Pastoral 
Ministry 



Master of 
Business 
Administration 
(M.B.A.) 



Counselor Ed. 
(College 
Personnel, 
Community, 
Elementary, 
Pastoral, 
Secondary, 
Supervisory) 



School Admin. 

(Elem, and 

Secondary) 
School Psychology 
School Supervision 
Special Education 
Post-Master's for 

Certification 



Chemistry 

English 

Formative 

Spirituality 
Medicinal 

Chemistry 
Philosophy 
Psychology 
Pharmaceutical 

Chemistry 
Theology 



Music Education 
Theory 
Composition 
Performance 
Sacred Music 



Hospital 
Pharmacy 



Part I: General 
Information 

HISTORY 

Duquesne University first opened its doors as the 
Pittsburgh Catholic College of the Holy Ghost in 
October, 1878 with an enrollment of 40 students 
and a faculty of seven. The school grew rapidly in 
its first years until it moved from its original loca- 
tion on Wylie Avenue in the city's Uptown section 
to its present site, a scenic 39-acre hilltop called 
"The Bluff", which overlooks downtown Pitts- 
burgh. 

By 1911, the school had achieved university sta- 
tus, at which time the name Duquesne University 
of the Holy Ghost was adopted in honor of the 
18th century governor general of French Canada, 
the Marquis de Duquesne, who first brought 
Catholic services to Pittsburgh while it was under 
French dominion. 

Duquesne's great period of student growth after 
World War II, along with the necessity of refurbish- 
ing a makeshift physical plant led the University to 
begin an ambitious program of planned physical 
expansion and modernization in 1950. 

Now in the enviable position of having com- 
pleted most of its physical development needs for 
the foreseeable future, the University is a modern, 
attractive, highly functional educational facility 
which has more than tripled from its early 12.5 
acres to its present, self-enclosed 39-acre campus 
site. 

Today, Duquesne University is not only one of 
the leading private institutions in Pennsylvania, 
but also is one of several major private, Catholic, 
urban universities in the United States. 

The University has over 6,000 students enrolled 
in its eight schools: College of Liberal Arts and Sci- 
ences (1878), Graduate School of Liberal Arts and 
Sciences (1911), and the Schools of Law (1911), 
Business and Administration (1913), Pharmacy 
(1925), Music (1926), Education (1929), and Nurs- 
ing (1937). Duquesne's eight schools offer degree 
programs on the baccalaureate, professional, mas- 
ter's, and doctoral levels. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

While Duquesne University can look with pride at 
the remarkable transformation of the campus ef- 
fected by its physical development and expansion 
program, it has never lost sight of its primary role 
as an educational institution and its responsibili- 
ties to the students who form the Duquesne fam- 
ily. 

A Catholic institution operated by the Congrega- 
tion of the Holy Ghost, Duquesne is open to stu- 
dents of all religions and creeds. A community 
committed to the ideal of producing young men 
and women whose minds seek intellectual free- 
dom and truth, the University seeks to impart to 



its students the ability to judge and make deci- 
sions independently, to interrelate disciplines and 
experience, and to balance memory, reason and 
imagination. 

In essence, the Duquesne student is ideally an 
individual with a fully integrated personality and a 
sensitivity and responsiveness to his humanity 
and that of his fellow man. 

The educational objectives of the University in- 
clude the development of a sound philosophy of 
life through an integration of spiritual, physical, 
intellectual, moral, social and aesthetic goals and 
values; the fostering of a spirit of inquiry and 
scholarship necessary for continuing intellectual 
and professional growth; the formation of a well- 
balanced, self-assured personality; and the im- 
parting of an attitude of continuing self-evaluation 
and self-improvement both as an individual and a 
contributing member of the community of man. 

Duquesne offers a wide variety of programs and 
curricula from which students may select freely in 
accordance with their interests, capabilities and 
goals in life. 

Complemented by a broad spectrum of nonaca- 
demic activities and programs, the curriculum at 
Duquesne University is designed to prepare 
young men and women who, upon entering their 
chosen careers, will possess a broad, well- 
balanced and fully integrated education and per- 
spective of themselves and the world. 



POLICY STATEMENTS ON 
INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 

The mission of Duquesne University's founders, 
the Holy Ghost Congregation, has always in- 
cluded service to peoples outside of the United 
States. Duquesne University also is committed to 
providing an educational environment which rec- 
ognizes cultural and national pluralism. 

Duquesne welcomes qualified students from 
throughout the world and encourages its students 
and faculty to take advantage of opportunities to 
study and teach abroad. 

The University believes that the sharing of the 
multiple traditions and mores of societies is an in- 
valuable element in the educational process. 

In a world that is growing ever smaller, it is im- 
perative that Duquesne reach out to peoples of dif- 
ferent cultures to afford them the opportunity to 
acquire educational experiences not otherwise 
available to them. Interaction among international 
and American faculty and students will enrich all 
and enhance their ability to be better citizens of 
our shared world. 

Duquesne University asserts its commitment to 
develop and maintain programs, services and 
practices which promote and express respect for 
persons of diverse cultures and backgrounds and 
which provide educational bridges linking the 
peoples of the world. 



10 



THE UNIVERSITY SETTING 

Located adjacent to downtown Pittsburgh, Du- 
quesne University's modern hilltop campus is 
readily accessible to the business, entertainment 
and shopping centers of the city, while still offer- 
ing students the privacy and peace of its own self- 
enclosed 39-acre site. 

Long noted as one of the world's greatest steel- 
producing centers, Pittsburgh combines the fea- 
tures of urban living with many of the charms and 
personal characteristics of a much smaller town. 
The third largest corporate headquarters center in 
the U.S. behind New York and Chicago, Pitts- 
burgh was also shown, in a recent survey of urban 
life, to be the fourth most desirable metropolitan 
area for overall quality of life in the U.S. 

Although most visitors and new residents who 
come to the city are conditioned by the old 
"Smoky City" image, they soon learn that the 
Pittsburgh which emerged from its nationally ac- 
claimed "Renaissance" redevelopment program is 
not only a city of clean air and streets, safe neigh- 
borhoods, and a bustling economy, but that Pitts- 
burgh, more than any other American city, has 
developed a strong civic identity and sense of 
pride in its rebirth as a modern urban community. 

Students from Duquesne and the other colleges 
and universities in the city can choose from a wide 
range of cultural events and institutions. 

The world-renowned Pittsburgh Symphony Or- 
chestra, Pittsburgh Opera, and Pittsburgh Ballet 
Theatre all perform regularly in the elegant Heinz 
Hall for the Performing Arts. The theatregoer can 
choose from productions of the Pittsburgh Public 
Theatre, local college drama departments and pro- 
grams, and a wide variety of summer and after- 
dinner club theatres. 

In the summer, the American Wind Symphony 
offers open-air concerts on Pittsburgh's riversides. 
Other seasonal events include the Three Rivers 
and Shadyside arts festivals, and the International 
Folk Festival, three prestigious events which draw 
national attention. 

Duquesne students can visit such points of inter- 
est as The Pittsburgh Zoo, Carnegie Museum of 
Art and History, Scaife Gallery, the Conservatory- 
Aviary, Buhl Science Center, Pittsburgh History 
and Landmarks Museum, Duquesne Incline and 
Phipps Conservatory. 

Directly across the river from campus is Mount 
Washington, Pittsburgh s highest point, which of- 
fers a spectacular view of the city and its surround- 
ings, particularly at night. 

Market Square, a redeveloped area in the heart 
of downtown Pittsburgh, and the Oakland- 
Shadyside area in the eastern end of the city are 
two of the major entertainment and nightlife cen- 
ters. 

The success of the various professional and ma- 
jor college sports teams has won for Pittsburgh the 
title of "City of Champions." The 1971 and 1979 
World Champion Pirates and four-time Super 



Bowl Champion Steelers play at Three Rivers Sta- 
dium. The Penguins (National Hockey League), 
and Duquesne Dukes basketball team, perform in 
the nearby Civic Arena, one of the largest indoor 
sports arenas in the United States and the only one 
in the world with a retractable dome. Facilities for 
such participatory sports as tennis, golf, running, 
hiking, skiing, skating, and many others are avail- 
able throughout the Pittsburgh area. 

PHYSICAL FACILITIES 

The Administration Building, "Old Main," was 
the first building constructed on the Duquesne 
campus, dedicated in 1885. Recently renovated, it 
houses the Executive Offices of the University, Of- 
fice of Admissions, Campus Ministry, Business 
Offices, Counseling and Testing Center, Career 
Planning and Placement Office, Learning and 
Counseling Center, Financial Aid Office, and the 
Division of University Relations. Adjoining the 
building is the University Chapel, which offers 
daily Mass, and the Campus Theatre. 

Assumption Hall, the oldest residence hall on 
campus, was dedicated in 1956. A four-story struc- 
ture with a 280-student capacity, the facility has its 
own recreation area, and offers both single and 
double occupancy rooms. 

Canevin Hall, the oldest classroom building on 
campus, was built in 1922 and completely reno- 
vated in 1968. A four-story building, it houses the 
School of Education, Curriculum Library, Reading 
Clinic and Guidance and Counseling Clinic. 

College Hall, a six-story classroom and office 
building dedicated in 1970, is the seat of the Col- 
lege of Liberal Arts and Sciences and the Graduate 
School of Liberal Arts and Sciences, housing 10 of 
their individual departments and faculties. The 
School of Nursing is located on the sixth floor. 
Special instructional facilities include psychology, 
numerical analysis, nursing, and practice skills 
laboratories, along with two lecture halls. 

The Counseling Center houses the University's 
Center for Training and Research in Phenomeno- 
logical Psychology, a facility operated by Du- 
quesne's renowned Department of Psychology. 

The Des Places Communications Center, dedi- 
cated in 1982, houses the department of speech 
communications and theatre; department of jour- 
nalism; the new medical media communications 
program cosponsored by the University and 
Mercy Hospital; and the production and broad- 
casting studios of WDUQ television and radio, an 
affiliate of the national Public Broadcasting System 
(PBS). Named in honor of the founder of the Holy 
Ghost Congregation, the center also features a 
journalism laboratory, simulation laboratory, in- 
structional photo laboratory, seminar rooms, 
graphic arts classroom, and a little theatre per- 
formance room. The women's recreation center. 



11 



including a gym and slimnastics area, is located on 
the ground floor. 

The Duquesne Towers, a 17-story, air-conditioned 
double-tower residence for 1,200 men and women 
featuring separate housing wings, was dedicated 
in 1970. The facility features a full-size indoor 
swimming pool with a sundeck, offices of the Resi- 
dence Life Division, the Campus Health Services 
area, a main student lounge and smaller lounges 
on each floor, telephones in each room, and a resi- 
dent dining hall with a 2,500 student capacity. 

The Duquesne Union, a modern architectural fa- 
cility with an innovative concrete and glass design, 
is the center of campus activities and student life. 
Dedicated in 1967, it houses the offices of the Stu- 
dent Life, the Athletic Department, and various 
student organizations and interest groups. Facili- 
ties include three separate dining areas, a ballroom 
and student lounge, the campus bookstore, the 
campus information center, and a recreation center 
which features eight bowling lanes, pocket bil- 
liards, table tennis, table soccer, a music listening 
room, pinball, electronic games, a rathskeller, an 
art gallery, and an emporium. 

The G & G Building, in addition to housing vari- 
ous administrative offices of the University, also 
houses the University's Vocations Office. 

The Gymnasium is used as a practice facility by 
various intercollegiate athletic teams of the Uni- 
versity and as the center for indoor sports of the 
University's intramural sports program. The gym 
features a modern, fully equipped weight training 
facility, the Dukes Court Weight Room, which is 
open to the student body as well as the Univer- 
sity's varsity teams. 

McCloskey Field, dedicated in the mid-1970s, is 
the center for outdoor intramural activity. Other 
athletic facilities include three self-enclosed tennis 
courts and two outdoor basketball courts, one of 
which is converted for street hockey in the winter 
months. 

The Edward J. Hanley Hall, dedicated in 1982, re- 
sulted from the renovation and expansion of the 
old University Library building. The new facility 
houses School of Law faculty and administrative 
offices, research and study rooms, two large am- 
phitheatre lecture halls, interview rooms, seminar 
and classroom areas, and a moot courtroom. The 
greatly expanded law library is the most accessible 
one of its kind in the city, with its central location 
and convenient hours (7 a.m. to midnight, Mon- 
day through Thursday; 10 a.m. to midnight, Sun- 
day). The law library is open to members of the 
local bench and bar, as well as law students. 

The Library Resource Center, dedicated in 1978, is 
a modern, attractive five-story structure that sig- 
naled the crowning achievement of the Univer- 
sity's expansion and redevelopment program. 
Housed in over 100,000 square feet of space is a 



collection of over 455,000 volumes, more than 
3,900 periodicals, and an extensive microprint and 
audiovisual collection. 

The facility also contains a number of special col- 
lections, including the African Collection on Afri- 
can culture, society and politics; the Rabbi 
Herman Hailperin Collection on Medieval Chris- 
tian and Jewish intellectual and religious thought; 
the Silverman Center collection of world literature 
in phenomenology; and the Justice Michael A. 
Musmanno Collection. 

With seating capacity for approximately 1,000 
patrons, including graduate study carrels and con- 
ference facilities, the new Library constitutes a 
highly functional facility that should remain re- 
sponsive to the needs of the Duquesne community 
for many years to come. Architects for the Library 
Resource Center, Gerard Associates, were cited by 
the Pittsburgh Chapter of the American Institute 
of Architects for creative design in their renovation 
and expansion of the original structure, an old ga- 
rage and warehouse constructed in the 1920s into 
the present facility. The Music School, the Edward 
Hanley Hall and College Hall also resulted from 
conversions of older structures. 

The Public Safety Building is headquarters for the 
University's Public Safety Office. 

Richard King Mellon Hall of Science, an attrac- 
tive, four-story structure dedicated in 1968, houses 
the departments of biological sciences, chemistry, 
physics, and the School of Pharmacy. Designed by 
one of the world's most renowned architects, Mies 
van der Rohe, the building won the "Laboratory of 
the Year" award in 1969. Instructional facilities in- 
clude two large amphitheatre-style lecture halls 
with seating capacities of 248 each. 

The Music School, dedicated in 1967, has 73 pi- 
anos, including 56 Steinways, five organs, and 
over 300 orchestral and band instruments available 
for student use. The school offers training and de- 
grees in conservatory and music education, jazz 
and sacred music, as well as an innovative pro- 
gram in music therapy. Individual and group prac- 
tice areas are available in the building, along with 
acoustically equipped classrooms. Performances 
are given throughout the school year, in the recital 
hall, and the school hosts the annual Mid-East In- 
strumental Music Conference. 

Rockwell Hall, dedicated in 1958, is a 10-story 
structure which houses the School of Business and 
Administration. Its Business Simulation Labora- 
tory contains 12 conference rooms equipped with 
television cameras and microphones for observa- 
tion and recording of activity in the individual 
rooms. Rockwell Hall also houses a snack bar, the 
Business School's student lounge, the University's 
Systems Center, the Institute for World Concerns, 
the Division of Continuing Education, Registrar's 
Office, Student I.D. Center, Office Services De- 
partment, Peter Mills Auditorium, Institute of For- 
mative Spirituality, and the University Archives. 



12 



St. Ann's Hall, dedicated in 1964, is a two- wing, 
three-story women's dormitory with its own laun- 
dry area, several lounges and television rooms, a 
recreation area, snack area, and attractive 
grounds. Double and single rooms are available. 

St. Martin's Hall, A 14-story residence, prcwides 
housing tor graduate and law students, as well as 
non-Duquesne students from other Pittsburgh ac- 
ademic and vocational institutions. 

Trinity Hall, dedicated in 1952, serves as the resi- 
dence of the Holy Ghost Fathers who serve the 
University as administrators and teachers. The 
grounds of the hall include an attractive mall and 
grotto. 

ACCREDITATION AND AFFILIATION 

Universit}- 

Accreditation 

Commission on Higher Education 

Middle States Association of Colleges and 

Schools 
State Board of Education of the Pennsylvania 

Department of Education 
Membership 
American Association of Collegiate Registrars and 

Admissions Officers 
American Council on Education 
Association of Catholic Colleges and Universities 
Association of College Admissions Counselors 
Catholic Educational Association of Pennsylvania 
College Entrance Examination Board 
Council for Advancement and Support of 

Education 
International Federation of Catholic Universities 
National Association for Independent Colleges 

and Universities 
National Association of College and University 

Business Officers 
National Association of Foreign Student 

Administrators 
National Association of Student Personnel 

Administrators 
National Association of Student Financial Aid 

Administrators 
National Catholic Educational Association 
National Commission on Accrediting 
Pennsylvania Association of Colleges and 

Universities 
Pittsburgh Council of Higher Education 
Southwestern Pennsylvania Council on Higher 

Education 

College of Liberal Arts and Sciences 

Accreditation 



American Chemical Society 

Membership 

American Conference of Academic Deans 

American Society of Journalism School 

Administrators 
Association of American Colleges 
Eastern Association of College Deans and 

Advisors 

School of Business and Administration 

Accreditation 

American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of 

Business 
Accreditation Council 
Membership 
Association for University Business and 

Economic Research 
Middle Atlantic Association of Colleges of 

Business Administration 

School of Education 

Accreditation 

Middle States Association of Colleges and 

Schools 
Pennsylvania Department of Education 
Membership 
American Association of Colleges for Teacher 

Education 
Association of Independent Liberal Arts Colleges 

for Teacher Education 
International Council on Education for Teaching 
The Pennsylvania Association of Colleges and 

Teacher Educators 

School of Music 

Accreditation 

National Association of Schools of Music 

National Association for Music Therapy 

Membership 

American Symphony Orchestra League 

National Catholic Music Educators Association 

School of Nursing 

Accreditation 

National League for Nursing 

Approval 

Pennsylvania State Board of Nurse Examiners 

Membership 

American Association of Colleges of Nursing 

National League for Nursing (Council of 

Baccalaureate and Higher Degree Programs) 
Pennsylvania Higher Education Nursing Schools, 

Inc. 



13 



School of Pharmacy 

Accreditation 

American Council on Pharmaceutical Education 

Pennsylvania State Board of Pharmacy 

Membership 

American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy 

EVENING STUDY 

The School of Business and Administration and 
the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences offer eve- 
ning classes for full-time and part-time students 
each semester and during the Summer Session. 
These are for persons whose employment does 
not permit them to attend as regular day students. 

Through careful planning and consultation with 
academic advisors, the bachelor's degree program 
may be completed by evening study in some ma- 
jor areas offered by these two schools. Other un- 
dergraduate schools also schedule occasional 
evening courses but it is not possible to complete 
their degree requirements through evening at- 
tendance alone. 

Prospective evening undergraduate students 
should consult with the office of the Dean of the 
school in which they are interested or the aca- 
demic advisement office in the School of Business 
and Administration, for information about the op- 
portunity for evening study on a continuing basis. 

SUMMER SESSIONS 

Many undergraduate and graduate courses are 
offered each summer in most areas. They are open 
to qualified Duquesne students and to those from 
other colleges and universities. 

The sessions, of varying length, begin in May 
and run through mid-August. Short term offer- 
ings on one and two week duration , usually at the 
graduate level, are scheduled before and after the 
regular session. 



CENTER FOR COMPUTING AND 
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION 
SERVICES 

The Center for Computing and Management In- 
formation Services provides computing facilities 
and guidance in the use of computing equipment 
for the University's instruction, research, and ad- 
ministrative programs. The Center reports admin- 
istratively to the Vice President for Management 
and Business. 

The University has recently invested over $1.7 
million in additional computer equipment and 
software. The present facilities include a Sperry 
1100/72 mainframe computer with 8 million bytes 
of memory, 9.6 billion bytes of disk storage, and 
state-of-the-art education and administrative ap- 
plications. The system supports the BASIC, FOR- 
TRAN, COBOL, C, LISP and F77 programming 
languages, Sperry Executive and UNIX operating 
systems, and statistical packages such as the Sta- 
tistical Package for the Social Sciences, Interactive 
Financial Planning System, and MINITAB. Five 
Center-supported labs provide students with ac- 
cess to more than 38 terminals, 6 printers, 36 Sper- 
rylink Office Automation Workstations and 
various microcomputers. Additional microcompu- 
ters are anticipated to be added to the labs during 
86/87. In addition to this equipment, an IBM Sys- 
tem 36 computer, Sperrylink work stations and a 
number of terminals and microcomputers are used 
for Administrative functions such as registration, 
grade reporting, admissions, and financial record- 
keeping. 

The Center provides a professional staff to serve 
Duquesne faculty, staff and students. Included in 
these services are state-of-the-art seminars, con- 
sulting, and data entry. Student aides in the com- 
puter laboratories are available for consultation 
regarding use of the facilities. The Center also an- 
ticipates the opening of a software library during 
1986/87 to further serve university needs. 




14 



Part II: 

Programs and 
Courses 



CORE CURRICULUM 

Consistent with its philosophy and objectives as 
an educational institution, Duquesne University 
has formulated a core curriculum designed to as- 
sist students in developing general skills, rather 
than vocational skills; provide a breadth of per- 
spective, rather than specialization; and explore 
questions of human significance, rather than ca- 
reer relevance. 

An innovative program that emerged after two 
years of study, the core curriculum will be intro- 
duced on a pilot basis for the Fall 1986 semester. 
The core curriculum will be required of all students 
entering the University in the Fall of 1987. 

The new core curriculum is a cluster of courses 
within the general curriculum focusing upon 
those values central to liberal education and to the 
mission of Duquesne University. The core courses 
are viewed as a foundation, not merely for the un- 
dergraduate major -whether professional, pre- 
professional or in the traditional disciplines of 
liberal arts and sciences— but also for lifelong 
learning. 

Among the competencies that students will have 
the opportunity to develop in the core curriculum 
are: 

(1) The ability to think critically. 

(2) Understanding of written and oral lan- 
guages as complementary modes of learning and 
expression, and development of the ability to 
write and speak clearly, intelligently, and persua- 
sively. 

(3) The ability to acquire, organize and use 
large amounts of knowledge, and to recognize 
different paths of knowledge found in the natural 
sciences, the humanities, the social sciences, and 
the arts. 

(4) Appreciation of mathematics as an intellec- 
tual discipline in itself and also as a problem- 
solving tool. 

(5) An informed acquaintance with modern 
sciences, and a critical appreciation of the ways in 
which scientific knowledge is gained; an under- 
standing of the relation of science to technology. 

(6) Appreciation of the role of human experi- 
ence in the genesis of the work of art, the influ- 
ence of the work of art on subsequent human 
experience, and the unique aesthetic properties of 
the various artistic media. 

(7) An informed acquaintance with the work- 
ing and development of social, political, and eco- 
nomic structures and with the various 
perspectives from which they are studied. 

(8) The development of a sense of history link- 



ing the present with the past and the future. 

(9) A sense of the variety and validity of cul- 
tures other than our own. 

(10) An awareness of values derived from think- 
ing, speaking, and writing about ethical and 
moral problems, and from the study of the ways 
in which others have addressed those problems. 

(11) An understanding of the importance of the 
spiritual dimension of human experience as it is 
approached through the study of theology, reli- 
gion, art, culture, and cultural institutions. 

The curriculum will consist of nine courses (27 
credits). One segment of the courses will be de- 
v^oted to the development of writing and speaking 
skills and the understanding of basic mathematical 
concepts. The remainder of the courses will ad- 
dress the traditional concerns of liberal learning. 
As defined in the curriculum, these include: the 
self in perspective, the natural world, human soci- 
ety, faith and religion, and the aesthetic experi- 
ence. 

Courses in the core curriculum are the follow- 
ing: 

Mathematics 3 cr. 

The course 'Introduction to Mathematical Rea- 
soning (121)" was designed for the core. Students 
will study and construct solutions to problems 
leading them to discover mathematical formulas 
and guidelines. Students may also satisfy the 
mathematics requirement by successfully complet- 
ing one of the basic calculus courses (111 or 115), or 
the Introduction to Modern Mathematics 107 or 
Fundamentals of Statistics 225. 

Science 3 cr. 

Each department in the natural sciences will de- 
velop a new course for this requirement. The stu- 
dent may choose from one of these new courses. 
This requirement may also be satisfied by one of 
the following courses: Biology 111 or 112; General 
Chemistry 121 or 122; General Physics 201 or 202. 

Theology 3 cr. 

This requirement may be fulfilled by any one of 
the following new courses: The Judeo-Christian 
Religious Tradition; The Sacred Book of Jews and 
Christians; The Roman Catholic Heritage; The 
Protestant Tradition; and Religion: East and West. 

College Writing I 3 cr. 

Designed to promote the process of good com- 
munication, the course concentrates on the effec- 
tive sentence, paragraph and essay, emphasizing 
the modes of discourse and reasoning (e.g. exposi- 
tion, description, definition, argumentation). The 
process of communication is augmented by model 
readings consonant with the humanistic tradition. 

College Writing II 3 cr. 

Designed to continue and develop the process of 
communication, the course puts further emphasis 
on the modes of discourse. The discipline of litera- 
ture and the critical method are introduced 



15 



through readings in which humanistic themes and 
genres are explored, this literary exploration form- 
ing the subject matter of the student essays. 

Bases of Human Thought and Action 3 cr. 

This course is an introduction to major theories 
about the way humans think, feel, and behave, in- 
cluding the study of interpersonal relations and 
various claims about values examined from the 
points of view of psychology and philosophy. 

The Arts and the Human Experience 3 cr. 

The visual and musical arts are explored in light 
of the major themes, monuments, and styles of 
Western culture. Emphasis in this chronological 
overview is placed on the points of convergence 
and divergence between these arts. The course 
draws upon the rich cultural resources of the Pitts- 
burgh community, such as the Carnegie Institute, 
the Pittsburgh Symphony, the Pittsburgh Ballet, 
and the Pittsburgh Opera. 

Social, Political and Economic Systems 3 cr. 

This course introduces the student to the work- 
ing and development of social, political, and eco- 
nomic structures and to the various perspectives 
from which they are studied. 

The Shaping of the Modern World 3 cr. 

This course considers three or four major issues 
that have dominated western society in the last 
two hundred years, emphasizing the mutual in- 
volvements of the United States and Europe. 



College of 

Liberal Arts and Sciences 

HISTORY 

In 1878 the Fathers of the Congregation of the Holy 
Ghost and the Immaculate Heart of Mary estab- 
lished a College of Arts and Letters which was in- 
corporated in 1882 as Pittsburgh Catholic College 
of the Holy Ghost with authority to grant degrees 
in the arts and sciences. In 1911 the College and 
University Council of the Commonwealth of Penn- 
sylvania extended the charter to university status 
and approved the amendment in favor of the cor- 
porate title, Duquesne University. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

Duquesne University believes that education is 
concerned with the human person as a whole — 
mind, body and soul. It believes that each individ- 
ual has the obligation to self, society, and God to 
develop potential to the fullest. In this commit- 
ment, the College of Liberal Arts and Sciences sets 
its objectives and forms its curricula. 
The objectives of the College are: 

1. To provide a solid foundation for lifelong 
learning. 

2. To develop an awareness of the methodolo- 



gies and epistemologies of the major areas of 
knowledge so that evaluations and judgments 
may be valid. 

3. To assist in both the growth of self-knowledge 
and the development of a philosophy of life. 

4. To assist the individual to understand his rela- 
tion to God, to society, and to nature. 

5. To perfect that skill in the use of standard Eng- 
lish necessary to clear, coherent expression of 
one's thoughts, hopes, and ideals. 

6. To cultivate a background for the learned pro- 
fessions and for scholarly pursuits. 

CURRICULAR REQUIREMENTS 

The University's core curriculum will be in effect 
as of fall, 1987. In view of this new core curricu- 
lum, there may be some change in the curricular 
requirements of the College of Arts and Sciences 
effective September, 1987. 

English Composition Proficiency at the 

102 level 

Modern or Classical Language Proficiency at 

the 202 or 212 level 
Natural Sciences (Biology, Chemistry, 
Earth Sciences, Computer Science, 

Physics, Mathematics) Nine Credits. 

One two-semester sequential 
course must be completed 
Social Sciences (Political Science, 

Psychology, Sociology) Nine credits. 

At least two disciplines 
must be represented 

History, Literature Nine credits. Both 

disciplines must be represented. 

Philosophy, Theology Nine credits. Both 

disciplines must be represented. 
Communications 
(Journalism, Linguistics, Speech, 

Media Arts) Three credits 

Completion of Major Program . . . .As determined 
by department (Minimum of 24 credits) 
Completion of Minor Program . . . .As determined 
by department offering the minor 
(Minimum of 12 credits above the 
introductory courses) 
Students who major or minor in a basic area auto- 
matically satisfy the area requirements for that dis- 
cipline. Courses taken in an interdisciplinary 
minor do not satisfy area requirements 

A maximum of 12 credits in the non-arts-and- 
sciences courses may be applied to the B.A. or B.S. 
degree. However, if the student chooses an inter- 
school minor, the maximum for the minor (Busi- 
ness, 15; Education, 15; Music, 15) will be applied 
to the degree, but all other courses must be se- 
lected from the arts and sciences offerings. 

A student's major and minor programs may not 
be chosen from the same department. (Modern 
Language majors may minor in another lan- 
guage.) 



16 



ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS 

Completion of 120 credits 

A minimum cumulative equality point average of 
2.00 in both the major and the minor. 
Removal of I and F grades in major and required 
courses 

Completion of sequential courses in proper se- 
quence 

Completion of the residence requirement. The last 
30 credits must be taken at the University. 
Submission of application for the degree. No stu- 
dent is considered a degree candidate until he files 
an application for the degree on a form provided 
by the Registrar. 

Any course taken as a Temporary Transfer at an- 
other institution must be approved before the 
classes are taken. 

DEGREES 

The College confers two undergraduate degrees: 
Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Arts, Students 
who complete the major in biology, chemistry, 
computer science and physics receive the B.S. de- 
gree. Students who complete the major in art his- 
tory, classics, economics, English, history, 
journalism, media arts, modern languages, phi- 
losophy, political science, psychology, sociology, 
speech, and theology receive the B.A. degree. Stu- 
dents majoring in mathematics can follow a curric- 
ulum leading to either a B.A. or B.S. degree. 

The Associate of Arts Degree is awarded in In- 
ternational Communications for Industry, Com- 
munications for Industry, Criminal Justice and 
Applied Technology. 



Special Programs 



CONCENTRATED STUDIES PROGRAM 

Concentrated studies is a special developmental 
education program designed to help students im- 
prove their basic skills and realize their full poten- 
tial for college work. Students in the program take 
a prescribed block of college level courses during 
their freshman year and thereafter complete their 
education at Duquesne in the traditional manner. 

Courses offered in the program: 

001,002. BASIC LANGUAGE SKILLS 

3 cr. each semester 

003. BASIC CONCEPTS OF PSYCHOLOGY 

3cr. 
005,006. FOUNDATIONS OF LANGUAGE, 
LATIN 

4 cr. each semester 
008. STUDY SKILLS 

Icr. 
010. ETHICS 
3cr. 



012. GREAT BOOKS SEMINAR 

2cr. 
016. ARGUMENT ANALYSIS 

3cr. 
121. GENERAL ETYMOLOGY 

3cr. 



THE INTEGRATED HONORS PROGRAM 

Constance Ramirez, Ph.D., Director 
For the highly-qualified, motivated and committed 
student who is searching for challenge, enrich- 
ment and enlightenment in a college education, 
Duquesne University offers a new Integrated Hon- 
ors Program (IHP). 

The IHP provides a unique opportunity, through 
great books from both Western and Eastern civili- 
zations, to examine our essential human heritage 
and investigate and debate the major ideas and is- 
sues forming the background, direction and focus 
of modern life. Student participation and individ- 
ual initiative in the Duquesne community of 
scholars are encouraged through daily contact 
with talented and committed fellow students and 
faculty from diverse fields, interests, and back- 
grounds. 

The IHP, supported in part by a grant from the 
National Endowment for the Humanities, consists 
of 12 accelerated freshman and sophomore courses 
and 4 upper level seminars. Students enrolled in 
the IHP may matriculate in the College of Arts and 
Sciences or one of the professional schools. Stu- 
dents will select majors and minors according to 
the policies of the College or of the School in 
which they are registered. The IHP credits, how- 
ever, replace many of the required general educa- 
tion credits (for example, English, History, 
Sociology). 

The Integrated Honors Program curriculum is 
concentrated in the freshman and sophomore 
years. Studies are continued in the junior and sen- 
ior years through Capstone Seminars. (Some rear- 
rangement of the following schedule may be 
necessary for students in certain professional 
schools and science programs) 

FRESHMAN I (First Semester) 

101. Logic and Rhetoric. 3 cr. 

Clear and disciplined thinking, reading, speak- 
ing and writing. 

105. Approaches to Culture: The West. 4 cr. 

An intensive analysis of the key ideas and the 
significant people, events and civilizations of the 
Western world — ancient, medieval, and contem- 
porary. 

113. Mathematics. 3 cr. 

Quantitative literacy as a major mode of infor- 
mation gathering and thinking in the modern 
world. (Required of non-math, non-science ma- 
jors) 



17 



FRESHMAN II (Second Semester) 

104. Information Resources. 3 cr. 

The rapidly-changing revolution in information 
and data-gathering, including traditional library 
resources and electronic media. 

106. Approaches to Culture: The East. 3 cr. 

The great, historic and often unknown civiliza- 
tions of India, China, and Japan. 

115. The Rational Self. 3 cr. 

Human nature, human intelligence and the ethi- 
cal sense. 

SOPHOMORE I (First Semester) 

203. Societal Structures I. 3 cr. 

The economic and social framework within 
which the individual functions. 

205. Approaches to Culture: The American 
Experience. 3 cr. 

The rise and significance of the U.S. as a demo- 
cratic, industrial, affluent, and open society. 

207. Science I: Chemistry and Physics. 4 cr. 

Contemporary developments and issues in the 
physical sciences. Laboratory included. (Required 
of non-science majors) 

SOPHOMORE II (Second Semester) 

204. Societal Structures II. 3 cr. 

The development of political and legal systems. 

208. Science II: Biology and Biochemistry. 4 cr. 

Traditional and new directions in the life sci- 
ences. Laboratory included. (Required of non- 
science majors) 

210. The Aesthetic Experience. 3 cr. 

The visual arts and music as universal and dis- 
tinctive human experiences and cultural expres- 



CAPSTONE SEMINARS 

Capstone seminars during the junior and senior 
years provide an in-depth study of some of the sig- 
nificant issues and themes which have emerged 
from the student's earlier IHP experience. These 
will be addressed within the context of the stu- 
dent's vocational and career interests. 

COOPERATIVE EDUCATION PROGRAM 

The Cooperative Education Program is a service to 
students seeking expanded education through 
work experience and to employers seeking tempo- 
rary pre-professional staff with the ultimate objec- 
tive of early identification of the best available 
college-educated talent for permanent assign- 
ment. 

Under this plan, students may be employed in 
business, government and other institutional set- 
tings. The program design provides for short-term 
work assignments, and it requires the regular rota- 
tion of students in each job and competitive refer- 



rals for each work period. Employment may be 
either full- or part-time for one academic term or 
its equivalent. 

It is expected that the cooperative student will be 
paid a salary commensurate with the work as- 
signed. The actual job must be pre-professional, 
well-defined and fully supervised. 

Sixty (60) or more earned credits and a cumula- 
tive quality point average of 2.5 or better are basic 
requirements for student qualification for the Pro- 
gram. Clearance from academic advisors is re- 
quired of those studying in departments with 
other internship options. 

When employed, and before starting work, a co- 
operative student must enroll in the course, "Co- 
operative Education," which carries a 
minimum-maximum of three to nine credits de- 
pending on the number of hours of work. 

For further information about the Cooperative 
Education Program, interested parties should con- 
tact: Director, Career Planning and Placement. 

PROGRAM IN WORLD LITERATURE 

The Departments of Classic, English, and Modern 
Languages jointly offer a World Literature 
program— with both major and minor sequence. 
The program is designed to give the student an 
awareness of the historical and cultural framework 
in which Classical, British, American, Continen- 
tal, Asian and African Literatures have evolved, 
their influence upon each other, and an in-depth 
study of selected major literary works in these ar- 



COURSE OFFERINGS 

Major: 24 credits (6 in the core and the remaining 
18 credits distributed equally among Classics, Eng- 
lish, and Modern Languages) 
Minor: 15 credits (6 in the core and the remaining 9 
credits distributed equally among Classics, Eng- 
lish, and Modern Languages) 
Core Course: Readings in World Literature 1 and II 
(English) 

DEPARTMENTAL COURSE OFFERINGS 

Classics: Any of the current offerings in Classical 
Literature, either in translation or in the original 
language, at the 200 level or above. 
English: Any of the current course offerings in Lit- 
erature at the 333-400 level, as approved by the de- 
partment chairman. 

Modern Languages: Any of the current offerings 
in Modern Languages, either in translation or in 
the original language, above the 302 level. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS-LIBERAL ARTS 
AND GENERAL SCIENCES 

This program is designed for those students who 
prefer not to choose a formal major or minor of- 
fered in a traditional discipline. All requirements 
other than the major and minor must be com- 



18 



pleted. Students must select one area of concen- 
tration: Humanities, Social Sciences, Natural 
Sciences. A concentration requires a minimum of 
30 credit hours and a maximum of 39 hours. 
Courses must be chosen from courses 200 and 
above. 

PRE-LAW 

Students who intend to prepare for a career in law 
may select any subject area for the undergraduate 
major. They will be expected to meet degree re- 
quirements in the major department, as well as ad- 
mission requirements of the law school of their 
choice. 

PRE-PROFESSIONAL HEALTH 
EDUCATION 

Students who intend to prepare for a career in 
medicine, dentistry, veterinary medicine, or re- 
lated fields may major in the subject area of their 
choice and should select a major as soon as possi- 
ble. They must meet degree requirements of the 
major department, as well as admission require- 
ments of the professional school of their choice. A 
faculty committee on Pre-Medical Education as- 
sists the medically-oriented student. 

INTER-SCHOOL MINORS 

Inter-school minors are available in Business and 
Administration, Education and Music. For com- 
plete details students should consult the Director 
of Academic Advisement. If a student has an inter- 
school minor, all elective credits must be chosen 
from the Liberal Arts and Science courses. 

BACHELOR-MASTER'S 

A student who has completed all requirements 
and a total of 90 credits with a 3.5 average may ap- 
ply for the bachelor/master's program. After suc- 
cessful completion of the master's program, the 
student will receive the bachelor's degree. 

BACHELOR/PROFESSIONAL SCHOOL 

A student who has completed 90 credits with a 
3.50 overall average and satisfied all undergradu- 
ate curricular requirements may apply for the 
bachelor's degree after the successful completion 
of the first year of professional work in an accred- 
ited medical or law school. 

LIBERAL ARTS ENGINEERING 

Students who intend to prepare for a career in en- 
gineering may enter a 3-2 binary program that Du- 
quesne University maintains with Case Western 
Reserve University in Cleveland, Ohio and Florida 
Institute of Technology. Students are expected to 
meet the curricular requirements of the College of 
Liberal Arts and Sciences except for the comple- 
tion of a major program. Under the guidance of a 
liaison officer, they will normally complete the pro- 
gram at Duquesne University in three years then 



enter an engineering program at Case or Florida 
Institute of Technology. 

Upon completion of the program at CWRU or 
FIT students will be awarded the B.A. Degree from 
Duquesne and B.S. Degree from the School of En- 
gineering. 

For complete details consult with the Liaison Of- 
ficer for the Binary Program in Engineering in the 
Physics Department. 

SECOND BACHELOR'S DEGREE 

A student who has received a bachelor's degree 
from another school may become eligible for a sec- 
ond bachelor's degree by earning an additional 30 
semester hours in residence in the College of Lib- 
eral Arts and Sciences and by meeting all depart- 
mental and College requirements if not already 
satisfied. The additional 30 credits must be com- 
pleted at the University and may not be taken 
through cross-registration. 

THREE-YEAR BACHELOR'S 

For more information contact the Office of Admis- 
sions or the Dean of the College. 

ASSOCIATE DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The College of Arts and Sciences offers the follow- 
ing Associate Degree Programs: 

• International Communications for Industry 

• Communications for Industry 

• Criminal Justice 

• Applied Technology 

A minimum of 60 credits is required. For details, 
consult the College Advisement Office at 434-6394 
or the Assistant Dean at 434-6393. 

CLEP AND ADVANCED PLACEMENT 

See page 136. 

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS 

Electives 

A maximum of 12 non A & S credits may be ap- 
plied to the BA/BS degree with the exception of 
certain approved inter-school minors which may 
extend this number to 15 credits. 

ACADEMIC LOAD 

Students may normally carry five courses in one 
semester. A schedule of more than five courses or 
17 credits must be approved by the Dean. In the 
summer sessions, students normally carry one 
credit a week; i.e., six credits in the six- week ses- 
sion. A 12-credit schedule in a regular semester is 
considered full-time study. Students on academic 
probation may not take more than 15 credits. 



19 



EFFECTIVE CATALOG 

Degree requirements are those stipulated in the 
catalog of the year in which a student matriculates. 
The student is responsible for knowing the re- 
quirements for the degree. Requirements may be 
changed without notice or obligation. This catalog 
has been prepared on the best information availa- 
ble as of Fall 1985. 

Major requirements are those stipulated in the 
catalog of the year in which a student declares the 
major. 

UNIVERSITY-LEVEL COURSES TAKEN 
WHILE IN HIGH SCHOOL 

University-level courses taken by entering fresh- 
men students while in their senior year of high 
school will be evaluated for credit if the following 
criteria have been met. 

• the courses are recorded on an official tran- 
script from an accredited institution of higher 
learning. The grades must be C or better. 

• the student has completed one semester at 
Duquesne with a C -I- average, or better. 



MAJORS 

The College of Arts and 

ing majors: 

Art History 

Biochemistry 

Biology 

Chemistry 

Classics 

Classical 

Civilization 
Computer Science 
Criminal Justice 
Economics 
English 
French 
German 
Gerontology 
Greek 
History 
International 

Relations 
Journalism 
Latin 



Sciences offers the follow- 

Liberal Arts/ 

Engineering 
Mathematics 
Media Arts 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Social 

Communication 
Social Services/ 

Human Services 
Sociology 
Spanish 
Speech 
Speech Pathology/ 

Audiology 
Theatre/Media 
Theology 
World Literature 



MINORS 

American 

Government 
American Literature 
Art History 
Biochemistry 
Biology 
Business and 

Administration 
Chemistry 
Classical 

Civilization 
Comparative 

Government 
Computer Science 
Criminal Justice 
Earth Science 
Economics 
Education 
English Literature 
French 
General Speech 

Communication 

and Theatre 
German 
Gerontology 
Greek 



History 
International 

Relations 
Italian 
Journalism 
Latin 

Mathematics 
Media Production 
Music 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Priestly Formation 
Psychology 
Russian 
Social 

Communication 
Social Services/ 

Human Services 
Sociology 
Spanish 
Speech Pathology/ 

Audiology 
Theatre/Media 
Theology 
World Literature 
Writing 



Course Descriptions 

ART HISTORY DIVISION 

Director: Mrs. Patricia S. Ingram 

Survey and period courses in the history of west- 
ern art are offered by the Art History Division of 
the Special Studies Department to introduce the 
concepts of art history to those who wish to extend 
their visual perimeter and to understand the role 
of the visual arts in Western culture. Qualified stu- 
dents are advised to take collateral courses in clas- 
sics, history, philosophy, and psychology, and 
additional upper division art history courses of- 
fered at member colleges of the Pittsburgh Council 
on Higher Education. In addition to personal en- 
richment and heightened awareness of man's will 
to create visual forms, the study of art history can 
lead to careers in teaching, publishing, museology, 
historic preservation, and urban redevelopment. 




REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

The major consists of 111, 112 History of Art plus 18 
credits in upper division art courses and two up- 
per division collateral courses selected from 250 
Classical Tradition in America (Classics), 419 Ren- 
aissance Literature and the Arts (English), 406 
Aesthetics (Philosophy) and 313 Archaeology and 
the Bible (Theology). Recommended electives: 123 
Classical Mythology, 219 Computer Use in the Hu- 
manities. 



20 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

The minor consists of 12 credits of upper division 
courses. The prerequisites are six credits of intro- 
ductory and survey courses at the 100 level or their 
adjudged equivalent. 

101. Understanding Art. 3 cr. 

A study of the techniques and styles of architec- 
ture, sculpture, painting, and the graphic arts in 
Western society, with an emphasis upon increas- 
ing the student's comprehension of our visually 
oriented culture. Suggested preliminary for all up- 
per division art history courses. 

102. Introduction to Modern Art. 3 cr. 

An attempt to render accessible to the spectator 
the realities formulated by the artists of the last 
two decades. Formal analysis of the art object and 
examination of the motivational forces which 
shaped its creation lead to an overall view of the 
structural framework of twentieth century paint- 
ing and sculpture. 

HI. History of Art: Ancient to 

Medieval World. 3 cr. 

A chronologically oriented, detailed presentation 
of the history of Western art. This survey deals 
with Near Eastern, Greek, Roman, Early Christian 
and Medieval art. Can be elected to fulfill the 
history /literature requirement. 

112. History of Art: Renaissance to 

Modern World. 3 cr. 

A continuation of 111. Surveys Renaissance, Ba- 
roque and Modern art in Western Europe. Can be 
elected to fulfill the history /literature requirement. 

123. Classical Mythology. 3 cr. 

A presentation of the major myths of Greece and 
Rome with special attention to contemporary in- 
terpretations of myth and the influence of myth on 
art and literature. (Offered by the Classics Depart- 
ment) 

206. Greek Art. 3 cr. 

A study of the architecture, sculpture, vase paint- 
ing, and minor arts of the Greek world from Mi- 
noan to Hellenistic times. The student is 
introduced to the extensive vocabulary of Greek 
art which has been a continuing formative force in 
Western art. (Offered in alternate years) 

207. Roman Art. 3 cr. 

An introduction to Roman innovations in architec- 
ture, sculpture, and painting. The background of 
Roman art in Etruscan, Greek, and Egyptian civili- 
zations is investigated, and the impact of Roman 
art in formulating Christian Art, Renaissance Art 
and Neo-Classicism is analyzed. (Offered in alter- 
nate years) 

208. French Art. 3 cr. 

A survey which discusses ideas, schools, and 
styles in the history of French art from the Roman 
occupation to the present. Highlights are Medie- 
val, Renaissance, Rococo, and Modern art. (Of- 
fered in alternate years) 



210. American Art. 3 cr. 

An overview of American architecture, painting, 
sculpture and decorative arts intended to acquaint 
the student with the major trends and contribu- 
tions of American art from colonial to modern 
times. 

220. History of Photography. 3 cr. 

A survey of photographic developments from the 
early 19th C. to the present. Emphasis is upon the 
United States and upon the interaction of and con- 
frontation between artists and photographers. 

260. The Classical Tradition in 

America. 3 cr. 

A study of the influences of Graeco-Roman civili- 
zation on American cultural life. (Offered by the 
Classics Department) 

312. Late Medieval Art. 3 cr. 

Western European Art from the 11th to the 14th 
century. Focus is upon the development of stone 
vaulting systems, monumental architectural 
sculpture, stained glass, fresco and panel paint- 
ing, and illuminated manuscripts in England, 
France, Italy, and Germany. (Offered in alternate 
years) 

321. 15th Century Renaissance Art. 3 cr. 

An investigation of the Renaissance spirit of the 
15th century. Concentration is upon comparisons 
of Northern and Southern attitudes of man, nat- 
ure, and social structure, and to materials, tech- 
niques, pictorial representation, and iconography. 
(Offered in alternate years) 

331. Art of the 19th Century. 3 cr. 

A survey of the visual arts in the 19th century. The 
visual arts not only reflect the dramatic changes in 
the artists use of form, color, line, texture and 
light, but also emphasize the changing political, 
religious, and social values in society. (Offered in 
alternate years) 

332. Art of the 20th Century. 3 cr. 

A chronological study of 20th century painting 
and sculpture which "looks beyond visual percep- 
tion" and tries to find the essence and meaning of 
reality. From cubism to conceptual art, from Pi- 
casso to Pollock and Pop, this course offers a thor- 
ough exploration of the visual arts of the 20th 
Century. (Offered in alternate years) 

370, 371, 372, 373, 374, 375, 376, 377 

Special Studies in Art History. 3 cr. 

An occasional course in this series is offered when 
speical interests of students and faculty can be 
served. Courses offered include The Image of 
Women in Art , Picasso, Impressionism, Egyptian 
Art, Michelangelo, Post Impressionism, Contem- 
porary Art, Christian Literature and Art. 

431. Directed Readings. 1-3 cr. 

Art History majors only. Permission of Depart- 
ment. 

441. American Painting and Sculpture. 3 cr. 

An examination of the forms created by American 
painters and sculptors from the early 17th through 



21 



the late 20th century. A special class intent in- 
volves arriving at a clear understanding of Ameri- 
ca's concept of reality during these years, 
particularly in the 20th century. (Offered in alter- 
nate years) 

442. American Architecture. 3 cr. 

Construction, style, building types, and concepts 
of city planning in American architecture from the 
17th century to the present. Field trips to impor- 
tant monuments in the Pittsburgh area are sched- 
uled. (Offered in alternate years) 

443. American Decorative Arts. 3 cr. 

Decorative arts from the Pilgrims to the Bauhaus 
are examined in context: historical, formal, techno- 
logical, and cultural. Field trips to Carnegie Insti- 
tute and other area collections are scheduled. 
(Offered in alternate years) 

477. Introduction to Museum Studies. 3 cr. 

An overview of the various functions of museums 
in American society. Prerequisite: Permission of 
Department. (Offered in alternate years) 

478. Internship. 3 cr. 

Practical experience in art related areas introduces 
the student to the many opportunities in the art 
field. Prerequisite: Permission of Department. In- 
tended for Art majors in the senior year. 

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL 
SCIENCES 

Chairman: Howard G. Ehrlich, Ph.D. 

Biology is the scientific exploration of life in its 
many forms and details. It is a fundamental ele- 
ment in a balanced liberal education and offers 
both intellectual insight and knowledge vital to so- 
cieties facing serious problems having biological 
implications. The biology program is a part of that 
search by mankind to understand its world in an 
effort to more effectively deal with the realities of 
that world and pursue its great promises. 

The undergraduate program is basic and flexi- 
ble, providing a core of experience around which 
continuous future personal development may be 
centered. The program offers opportunity to de- 
velop professional attitudes and technical compe- 
tence which aid in opening avenues for advanced 
study and career fulfillment as well as personal en- 
richment. The course of study pursued can aid in 
preparation for professional careers in teaching, 
research, medicine, dentistry, veterinary medi- 
cine, and allied health fields as well as for ad- 
vanced study in various graduate school 
specialities. While many students choose to pur- 
sue the benefits of advanced study in graduate 
and professional schools, others prefer to pursue 
opportunities in biological technologies in pure 
and applied research and service in hospitals, uni- 
versities, private industry, and governmental serv- 



ice. Diverse opportunities are available in specialty 
sales; pharmaceutical laboratories, medical labora- 
tories, atomic energy research laboratories and 
chemical laboratories; food technology and proc- 
essing; fisheries; oceanography; conservation; 
health services; space biology; agricultural tech- 
nology; food and drug administration; environ- 
mental services; as well as in other industries and 
agencies. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

A minimum of 31 semester hours is needed. Ma- 
jors are required to take General Biology 111, 112 
and to select other courses so that a balance is 
achieved with experience in biology of inheri- 
tance, structure, and function at the molecular, cel- 
lular, and organismal levels. Within that context, 
students may follow their preferred interest in 
subject matter selection and concentration. The 
specific program selected is individually formu- 
lated with the student through consultation with 
an advisor. Courses 107, 108, 109, 201, 202, 206, 
207, 208, 220 and 230 will not be counted toward a 
major in biology. Qualified majors may take two 
500 introductory level graduate courses during 
their senior year and apply them toward their un- 
dergraduate degrees. 

Extradepartmental requirements: Calculus 115; 
General Chemistry 121, 122; Organic Chemistry 
205, 206 or 221, 222; General (or Analytical) Phys- 
ics 201, 202, or 211, 212. Students also should con- 
sider extradepartmental electives in chemistry, 
mathematics, and computer science. A minimum 
of 15 credits in Biology must be taken at Duquesne 
University for the major. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

The department offers two minor programs: 

1. Professional Minor which consists of 111, 112 
and a minimum of 12 credits selected from the 
department's major courses numbered 200 or 
above. Individual course prerequisites must 
be met. 

2. Academic Minor which consists of 107, 108 or 
111, 112 and a minimum of 12 credits selected 
from the department's courses numbered 200- 
395. Courses which are open to either majors 
or non-majors may be selected. Individual 
course prerequisites must be met. 

If a student takes 107, 108 -Principles of Biology 
and 111, 112 -General Biology, the credits for the 
107, 108 will not apply to the total number required 
for the degree. These courses are not interchange- 
able. 

NON-MAJOR COURSES 

107, 108. Principles of Biology. 3 cr. each 

Study of the living world of which man is an inte- 
gral part. It includes considerations of organiza- 
tion, activity, growth, reproduction, inheritance. 



22 



environmental influences and other interrelation- 
ships. This course is ciesigned to provide the non- 
scientist with the biological information and 
principles necessary to assume an enlightened 
role in our increasingly complex society. Not for Bi- 
ology Major credit; 107 is prerequisite to 108. Lec- 
ture. 

109. Principles of Biology Laboratory. 1 cr. 

Laboratory work illustrating selected biological 
principles and factual details. Not for Biology Ma- 
jor credit. Prerequisite: Biology 107 (or concurrent 
registration). Laboratory. 

201. Biology of Microbes. 3 cr. 

Examination of microbes as to what they are, how 
they grow, how they may be controlled, what their 
relationships to other living things are, why and 
how some of them cause disease. Not for Biology 
Major credit. Lecture. 

202. Biology of Microbes Laboratory. 1 cr. 

Illustrates methods of observation, growth, and 
identification of microbes as well as methods of 
controlling these organisms using sterilization 
techniques, disinfectants and antibiotics. Not for 
Biology Major credit. Prerequisites: Biology 201 (or 
concurrent registration). Laboratory. 

206. Environmental Biology. 3 cr. 

This course deals with the biological background 
for understanding environmental problems and 
considers population, energy, land use and pollu- 
tion, as well as legal aspects of the amelioration of 
environmental abuses. Not for Biology Major 
credit. Lecture. 

207. Anatomy and Physiology. 3 cr. 

Studies designed to provide students with a back- 
ground in the areas of human body structure and 
the mechanisms underlying normal body func- 
tions. Prerequisites: some previous exposure to in- 
troductory biology and chemistry is desirable. Not 
for Biology Major credit. Lecture. 

208. Anatomy and Physiology 

Laboratory. 1 cr. 

Laboratory includes examination of the micro and 
gross anatomy of the body, physiological experi- 
ments, and exposure to certain basic clinically im- 
portant measurements and techniques. 
Prerequisites: 207 Anatomy and Physiology (or 
concurrent registration). Not for Biology Major 
credit. Laboratory. 

220. Sex and Sexuality. 3 cr. 

Consideration of sex and reproduction as univer- 
sal biological functions and special emphasis on 
physiological and psychological basis of human 
sexuality. The course also aims to examine sexual 
functioning, sexual behavior and sex therapy. Not 
for Biology Major credit. Lecture. 

226. Genetics. 4 cr. 

See description under Major Courses. 

230. Stress and Adaptation. 3 cr. 

A study of the biological effects of acute and 
chronic stress stimuli of various origins, and the 



neuro and hormonal regulations associated with 
adaptation to stress. Not for Biology Major credit. 
Lecture. 



MAJOR COURSES 

Except for 398 and 399, all courses for majors also 
are open to non-majors, providing that individual 
course prerequisites are satisfied. 

111, 112. General Biology. 4 cr. each 

Introduction to the scientific study of life at the 
molecular, cellular and organismal level. It in- 
volves consideration of relevant structure, func- 
tion, development, reproduction, inheritance, 
evolution and ecology. This course provides the 
basic information and concept necessary for un- 
derstanding living systems, their activity and in- 
terrelationships. Ill is prerequisite to 112. Lecture 
and laboratory. 

203. Microbiology. 4 cr. 

Introduction to microorganisms, their morphol- 
ogy, metabolism, ecology, and cultural characteris- 
tics, with emphasis on their interaction with other 
organisms, including man. Principles of medical 
and health related aspects of microbiology, chemo- 
therapy, industrial, agricultural and marine micro- 
biology are presented. Prerequisites: Biology 111, 

112, and organic chemistry (or concurrent registra- 
tion). Lecture and laboratory. 

226. Genetics. 4 cr. 

A study of the mechanisms of the inheritance and 
their resulting effects on individuals and popula- 
tions, including their implications in the life of 
man. Principles and details, methods and applica- 
tions are illustrated with specific examples drawn 
from a wide range of species, from microorga- 
nisms to man. Prerequisites: 107, 108, or 111, 112. 
Lecture and laboratory. 

232. Vertebrate Macrostructure. 4 cr. 

A comparative study of the gross structure of ver- 
tebrates and relationship of that structure to func- 
tion and evolution. Prerequisites: 111, 112. Lecture 
and laboratory. 

238. Vertebrate Microstructure. 4 cr. 

A study of tissue and organ structure and the rela- 
tionship of that structure to function. Prerequi- 
sites: 111, 112 and 232 or permission of the 
instructor. Lecture and laboratory. 

244. Animal Development. 4 cr. 

A comparative study of the morphological and 
physiological aspects of animal development em- 
phasizing current experimental approaches. Pre- 
requisites: 111, 112. Lecture and laboratory. 

250. Plant Development. 4 cr. 

Examines the unique features of representative 
types of plants, as revealed by interrelationships of 
form, function and morphogenesis. Prerequisites: 
111, 112. Lecture and laboratory. 



I 



23 



306. Plant Physiology. 4 cr. 

Varied studies of the growth requirements and reg- 
ulatory mechanisms of important plant types, 
with emphasis upon environmental control. Pre- 
requisites: 111, 112 and 250. Lecture and laboratory. 

312. Animal Physiology. 4 cr. 

Examination of the physiological mechanisms of 
body function in animals, including consideration 
of the basic components of biological control sys- 
tems and the manner in which various organ sys- 
tems contribute to the maintenance of 
physiological homeostasis. Prerequisites: 111, 112. 
Lecture and laboratory. 

318. Physiology of Reproduction. 4 cr. 

The course includes the anatomy, histology, physi- 
ology, biochemistry and endocrinology of verte- 
brate reproduction. The main emphasis is on the 
physiology of puberty, estrous and menstrual cy- 
cle, conception, pregnancy and parturition. The 
physiological basis of fertility and infertility also 
are included. Prerequisites: HI, 112, and 232 or 
244. Lecture and laboratory. 

324. Regulatory Physiology. 4 cr. 

A treatment of physiological and environmental 
regulations with emphasis on neuroendocrine in- 
tegration and adaptation. Prerequisites: 111, 112. 
Lecture and laboratory. 

332. Immunology and Virology. 4 cr. 

Introduction to viruses and immunology, with em- 
phasis on host-parasite interactions and patterns 
of infectious diseases in populations. Prerequi- 
sites: Biology 111, 112, and organic chemistry (or 
concurrent registration). Lecture and laboratory. 

334. Diagnostic Microbiology. 3 cr. 

A course to acquaint the student with the methods 
employed on clinical samples by clinical laborato- 
ries in the isolation and identification of microbial 
agents which cause human disease. Cultural as 
well as serological techniques are included. Em- 
phasis is on the interpretation and significance of 
laboratory findings in the diagnosis of microbial 
disease, specially useful in medical technology, 
nursing and allied fields. Prerequisites: 111, 112, 
and 203 or equivalent or permission of the instruc- 
tor. Lecture and laboratory. 

348. Evolution. 3 cr. 

The history, development, concepts, and evi- 
dences of evolution with emphasis on modern 
studies in evolutionary biology, including an intro- 
duction to population genetics. Prerequisites: 111, 
112 and 226. Lecture. 

395. Special Topics. 1-3 cr. 

Treatment of topics of current or special interest in 
biology. Lecture, laboratory or combinations. 

398, 399. Undergraduate Research. 2 cr. each 

Opportunity for selected students to work in the 
laboratory on research problems under the direc- 



tion of a faculty member. 398 is not prerequisite to 
399. Maximum of four credits. Registration by per- 
mission of instructor. Laboratory. 

411. Ecology. 4 cr. 

The goal is to provide an overall grasp of the prin- 
ciples and procedures underlying ecological 
thought. Past, present and future aspects of envi- 
ronmental studies are considered from the ecosys- 
tem viewpoint. Interrelationships of living things 
with each other as well as the non-living compo- 
nents emphasize the need for inter-disciplinary 
studies and quantitative data. Both terrestrial and 
aquatic habitats are used to illustrate concepts 
such as growth, niche, succession and completion. 
Applicability to current human problems is dis- 
cussed: such as waste disposal, pollution, food, 
fuel, agriculture and urbanization. Prerequisites: 
HI, 112. Lecture and laboratory. 

430. Animal Behavior. 3 cr. 

Introductory survey of the behavior of animals 
from an evolutionary perspective. Selected topics 
include natural selection and behavioral genetics, 
instinct and learning, behavioral ontogeny, orien- 
tation and navigation, behavior adaptations for 
survival and reproduction, animal communica- 
tion, social organization, and the evolution of so- 
cial behavior. Lecture. 

431. Animal Behavior Laboratory. 1 cr. 

Emphasis is on experimental design, methodol- 
ogy, statistical techniques, and the writing of sci- 
entific papers. Prerequisites: a course in animal 
behavior, behavioral ecology, or concurrent regis- 
tration in the same. Laboratory. 

444. Cell Physiology. 4 cr. 

A study of cells with regard to: means of obtaining 
energy including respiration, fermentation, and 
photosynthesis; work done by the cell including 
biosynthesis, active transport, and cell movement; 
cell growth and differentiation; relationships of 
cell structure to these processes. Prerequisites: 111, 
112 and organic chemistry. Lecture and laboratory. 

Descriptions of the Following Courses are Pro- 
vided in the Graduate School Catalog. 

500. Biotechnology: Lab Techniques. 3 cr. 

501. Biotechnology: Research Skills. 3 cr. 
503. Cell and Electron Microscopy. 3 cr. 
505. Molecular Genetics. 3 cr. 

511. Comparative Vertebrate Physiology. 3 cr. 

512. Mammalian Physiology. 3 cr. 

513. General Endocrinology 3 cr. 
520. Experimental Embryology. 3 cr. 
524. Immunology. 3 cr. 
526. Pathogenic Microbiology. 3 cr. 
528. Microbial Physiology. 3 cr. 
531. Biology of Fungi. 3 cr. 
535. Microbiology Seminar. 1 cr. 
573. Behavioral Ecology. 3 cr. 
577. Evolutionary Ecology. 3 cr. 
580. Urban Ecology. 3 cr. 



24 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY 

Oiainuan: Andrew J. Glaid, III, Ph.D. 

The Chemistry program is designed to provide the 
student with a fundamental background in chem- 
istry and an understanding of the relationship of 
chemistry to the other sciences and disciplines. 
Elective courses and the opportunity to do under- 
graduate research allow the chemistry major to de- 
velop interests in a specialized area of chemistry, 
such as analytical, inorganic, organic, physical 
chemistr)', and biochemistry. 

Because of the fundamental nature of chemistry 
as a science, numerous opportunities for ad- 
vanced study, as well as employment, are open to 
chemistry and biochemistry majors. A large per- 
centage of students elect to continue their study in 
graduate programs in chemistry and related fields. 
Chemists and biochemists provide a core of per- 
sonnel in pure and applied research, technical 
sales, technical libraries, management positions in 
the chemical and related industries, the space in- 
dustry, education, the environmental sciences and 
the health professions, such a medicine, dentistry 
and veterinary medicine. The major in biochemis- 
try centers around the core of basic chemistry 
courses while also providing advanced courses in 
biochemistry and electives in biology. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CHEMISTRY 
AND BIOCHEMISTRY MAJORS 

Thirty-two semester hours are required. All stu- 
dents must take 121,122, 221, 222, 321, 323, and 
421; Mathematics 115, 116; Physics 201, 202 or 211, 
212; Biology 111, 112; proficiency in German, Rus- 
sian or French at the 202 or 212 level is required. 

If a student takes 111, 112 and 121, 122 chemistry 
courses, the credits for the 111, 112 will not apply to 
the total required for the degree. Courses 101, 102 
will not be counted toward a major. 

Chemistry Major: All students must take 322, 324, 
422 and Mathematics 215. 

Biochemistry Major: All students must take 401, 
524. In addition. Chemistry 525 and 526 may be 
taken as electives. Students planning to enter a 
graduate chemistry department should take 322, 
324. 

Students who intend to work in industry after 
graduation are strongly advised to take 548 Indus- 
trial Organic Chemistry, and 549 Principles of 
Polymer Science. 

To meet the American Chemical Society's requirements 
for Professional Certification, the Chemistry Major must 
elect two additional courses from the following: 401, 
523, 524, 537, 538, 545, 546, 547, 548, 572; Mathemat- 
ics 216 or 308; Biology 505; Pharmacy Sciences 539 
and Physics 306; one of these must be a laboratory 
course. This laboratory requirement can also be 
fullfilled with 490. The Biochemistry Major must take 
322, 324, and 422 for certification. Course disciplines 
of the 500 level courses can be found in the Graduate 
School catalogue. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINORS 

A minor in Chemistry consists of 12 credit hours 
beyond 121, 122. A minor in Biochemistry consists 
of 12 credits, beyond 121, 122. Normally 205, 206 or 
221, 222 along with 401, will constitute the Bio- 
chemistry minor. 

101, 102. Chemistry and Society. 3 cr. each 

The impact of chemistry on society reaches every 
phase of life. The course attempts to provide a link 
between chemistry and the changes in our techno- 
logical society. In the first semester, the basic con- 
cepts of chemistry are developed for the 
non-science student and applied to current topics 
such as air and water pollution, energy, pesticides, 
etc. The second semester deals with the biochem- 
istry of living systems. Chemical principles are 
used to explain the normal life processes of photo- 
synthesis, respiration, etc. as well as abnormal 
conditions such as drug action, poisons, etc. on 
metabolic processes. Students with a good high 
school background do not require the first semes- 
ter as a prerequisite; others should see the instruc- 
tor before registering for the second semester. 
Lecture, three hours. 

Ill, 112. Principles of Chemistry. 4 cr. each 

The course is divided into three segments, physi- 
cal, organic, and biochemistry. In the section de- 
voted to physical chemistry the laws of chemical 
behavior are developed with particular reference 
to the simple molecules of inanimate nature. The 
organic section deals primarily with the structural 
features of organic compounds, the chemistry of 
functional groups and the practical applications of 
organic compounds in the synthesis of polymers, 
of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids, 
enzymes, vitamins, etc. Biochemistry is treated in 
terms of the digestion and metabolism of nutri- 
ents, the functions of enzymes in the metabolic 
process and the abnormal metabolic conditions 
that prevail in disease. Lecture, three hours; Reci- 
tation, one hour; Laboratory, two hours. 

121, 122. General Chemistry. 

The fundamental principles and concepts of chem- 
istry are presented from the standpoint of atomic 
and molecular structure with illustrative examples 
from descriptive chemistry. The basic concepts of 
thermodynamics, chemical kinetics and equilib- 
rium are introduced. The laboratory portion of the 
first semester illustrates physical and chemical 
properties in a quantitative manner, and the labo- 
ratory portion of the second semester illustrates 
the principle of ionic equilibria including qualita- 
tive inorganic analysis. 

121. Lecture, three hours; Recitation, 

one hour; Laboratory, three hours. 4 cr. 

122. Lecture, three hours; Recitation, 

one hour; Laboratory, six hours. 5 cr. 

205, 206; 221, 222. Organic 

Chemistry. 4 cr. each. 

The theoretical background is developed from the 



25 



standpoint of the electronic structure of molecules 
and the accompanying energy considerations. The 
preparation and the chemical and physical (in- 
cluding spectral) properties of representative or- 
ganic compounds are discussed in detail. 
Prerequisites: 121, 122. For 205, 206, Lecture, three 
hours; Recitation, one hour; Laboratory, four 
hours; and for 221, 222, Lecture, three hours; Reci- 
tation, one hour; Laboratory, eight hours. 

321, 322. Physical Chemistry. 3 cr. each 

A study of the structure and properties of the vari- 
ous states of matter, thermodynamics, thermo- 
chemistry, kinetics and an introduction to 
chemical physics. Prerequisites: Physics 202 or 
212, Chemistry 122, Mathematics 116. Lecture, 
four hours. 

323, 324. Physical Chemistry 

Laboratory. 1 cr. each 

Laboratory portion of Chemistry 321, 322, four 
hours. 

326. The Computer in Chemistry. 3 cr. 

The computer will be introduced as a tool in the 
solution of problems from the fields of analytical, 
biological, inorganic, organic, and physical chem- 
istry. The student w^ill progress from the use of the 
computer as a black box problem solver to the de- 
sign and coding of programs to solve problems in 
his field of interest. Experimental design and anal- 
ysis will be introduced by library programs which 
permit the computer to simulate laboratory equip- 
ment in the production of experimental data. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 321. Lecture, three hours. 

401. Biochemistry. 4 cr. 

An introduction to biochemistry at the cellular 
level. The structure and chemistry of cellular com- 
ponents (proteins, nucleic acids, etc.), of cellular 
reagents (enzymes, coenzymes, respiratory pig- 
ments, etc.) and metabolic reactions of carbohy- 
drates, lipids and amino acids are discussed. 
Prerequisite: 206 or 222. Lecture, three hours; Lab- 
oratory, four hours. 

421. Analytical Chemistry. 4 cr. 

Theoretical and practical training in modern meth- 
ods in chemical analysis with emphasis on instru- 
mental methods. Prerequisite: 322. Lecture, three 
hours; Laboratory, eight hours. 

422. Inorganic Chemistry. 4 cr. 

A survey of the basic principles required for under- 
standing inorganic chemistry including atomic 
and molecular structure, crystal structure, non- 
aqueous solvents and coordination compounds. 
Prerequisite: 322. Lecture, three hours; Labora- 
tory, four hours. 

490. Undergraduate Research. Maximum 2 cr. 

Selected students work on a research problem un- 
der the direction of a staff member. 

524. Molecular Basis of Biochemistry. 3 cr. 

A detailed discussion of a number of biochemical 
processes such as oxygen transport, immuno- 
chemistry, hormone action, blood coagulation. 



muscle contraction, etc., with emphasis on the 
structure of the protein(s) and/or enzyme(s) in- 
volved. 



DEPARTMENT OF CLASSICS 

Chairman: Lawrence E. Gaichas, Ph.D. 

The study of Classics is a unique discipline. It is 
not the study of a language or literature alone. It is 
rather the investigation of one of the world's in- 
spired civilzations, the Graeco-Roman world. As 
such, it offers the student insight into the broadest 
aspects of human existence set in a perspective 
distant enough from his own to expand signifi- 
cantly his understanding and appreciation of hu- 
manity's aspirations, failures, and occasional 
triumphs. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJORS 

The Department offers four major programs: Clas- 
sical Latin, Classical Greek, Classical Languages 
(knowledge of both Latin and Greek required), 
and Classical Civilization (no knowledge of Greek/ 
Latin required). Credits applied to any major must 
be at the 200 level or above . 

1) The Classical Latin major requires at least 
eighteen credits in Latin as well as six credits in 
ancient history or ancient literature courses in 
English. 

2) The Classical Greek major requires at least 
eighteen credits in Greek as well as six credits in 
ancient history or ancient literature courses in 
English. 

3) The Classical Languages major requires at 
least twenty-four credits in Latin and Greek (with 
a minimum of twelve credits in each) in addition to 
six credits of ancient history or ancient literature 
courses in English. The Survey of Sanskrit Litera- 
ture (211-212) may be substituted for the twelve 
credits of either Latin or Greek. 

4) The Classical Civilization major is an individ- 
ually designed program of twenty-four credits of 
ancient literature, history, art, and archeology. 
Students majoring in Classical Civilization create 
programs with the close advice and the approval 
of the Classics Department to fit their back- 
grounds, interests, and career objectives. Majors 
should formulate programs with balanced history 
and literature components. They are strongly en- 
couraged to fulfill the College language require- 
ment in either Latin or Greek. All courses in Greek 
or Latin at the 200 level or above apply to the Clas- 
sical Civilization Major. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

The Department offers a minor in Latin ( a mini- 
mum of 12 credits above the 100 level); a minor in 
Greek (a minimum of 12 credits above the 100 
level); and a minor in Classical Civilization with 
concentrations in Greek Civilization, Roman Civi- 



26 



lization, Ancient History, and Ancient Art and Lit- 
erature (12 credits above the 100 level) with 
approval of the Department and advisors. 

101, 102. Elementary Classical 

Latin. 4 cr. each 

Study of the fundamentals of Latin grammar and 
syntax combined with occasional exercises in 
translation from Roman authors. 

103, 104. Elementary Classical 

Greek. 4 cr. each 

Study of the fundamentals of Greek grammar and 
syntax combined with frequent exercises on trans- 
lation from Greek authors. 

Ill, 112. Basic Sanskrit. 3 cr. each 

A study of the fundamentals of Sanskrit grammar 
and syntax combined with exercises in translation. 
Some previous foreign language experience is de- 
sirable. 

113, 114. Elementary Ecclesiastical 

Latin. 3 cr. each 

Study of the fundamentals of Latin grammar and 
syntax as represented in Scripture and Church Fa- 
thers. 

201, 202. Intermediate Classical 

Latin. 3 cr. each 

Survey of major Latin authors. 

203, 204. Intermediate Classical 

Greek. 3 cr. each 

Survey of major classical Greek authors. 

207, 208. Biblical and Patristic 

Greek. 3 cr. each 

Selections from Biblical and Christian Greek litera- 
ture. 

211, 212. Survey of Sanskrit 

Literature. 3 cr. each 

Selected readings from major Sanskrit texts in- 
cluding the Mahabharata, Hitopadesa, Kathasaritsa- 
gara, Manavadharmasastra, Rigveda, and Meghaduta. 

213, 214. Intermediate Ecclesiastical 

Latin. 3 cr. each 

Selections from Biblical and Christian Latin litera- 
ture. 

The following will be taught as Latin or Greek 
courses or, for those students who are qualified, as 
combination Latin and Greek courses. 

Each course will cover an individual author or 
group of authors or a genre. Each course may be 
repeated as long as a different author or work is 
read. 



301. Pre-Fifth Century. 3 cr. 

The Iliad, the Odyssexj, the Homeric Hymns, Hesiod, 
Pindar, and Greek lyric poetry. 

302. Fifth Century. 3 cr. 

Herodotus, Thucydides, Aeschylus, Sophocles, 
Euripides and Aristophanes. 

303. Fourth Century. 3 cr. 

Greek orators, Plato, Aristotle, Xenophon, 
Menander. 

304. Alexandrian Period. 3 cr. 

Apollonius Rhodius, Theocritus, Callimachus and 
the lesser Alexandrian authors. 

305. Roman Republic. 3 cr. 

Plautus, Terence, Cicero, Lucretius, Catullus, Cae- 
sar, and Sallust. 

306. Augustan Literature. 3 cr. 

Livy, Vergil, Horace, Ovid, Propertius, and Tibul- 
lus. 

307. Imperial Literature. 3 cr. 

Seneca, Lucan, Petronius, Martial, Plutarch, Taci- 
tus, Juvenal, Pliny the Younger, Suetonius, Apu- 
leius, and Lucian. 

308. Post Classical Literature. 3 cr. 

Post classical, medieval, renaissance and neo-Latin 
authors. 

309. Studies in Genre. 3 cr. 

Selected genre of Greek and/or Latin literature. 

400. Independent Readings and 

Research. Var. cr. 

CLASSICS COURSES IN ENGLISH: 
(NO GREEK OR LATIN REQUIRED) 

121. General Etymology. 3 cr. 

A study of Greek and Latin words to facilitate the 
comprehension of modern English as it is written 
by our acknowledged modern masters. 

122. Etymology of Scientific Terms. 3 cr. 

Introduction to Greek and Latin elements of scien- 
tific terminology. 

123. Classical Mythology. 3 cr. 

A presentation of the major myths of Greece and 
Rome with special attention to contemporary in- 
terpretations of myth and the influence of myth on 
art and literature. 

124. World of Mythology. 3 cr. 

Investigation of the dominant themes of non- 
Classical mythologies with special reference to 
Near Eastern, Celtic, Teutonic, African, and Amer- 
ican Indian myths. 

219. Computer Use in the Humanities. 3 cr. 

A survey of non-scientific applications of com- 
puters in the humanities. 

230. Ancient Theatre. 3 cr. 

An examination of the origins and development of 
ancient tragedy and comedy. Readings from the 



27 



works of Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aris- 
tophanes, Menander, Plautus, Terence and Sen- 
eca. 

231. Ancient Epic. 3 cr. 

A study of ancient epic literature with particular 
attention to the techniques of oral and literary 
composition. Readings from the works of Homer, 
Apollonius of Rhodes, Vergil, and Lucan. 

232. Ancient Novel and Romance. 3 cr. 

Survey of Greek and Roman prose fiction with 
special emphasis on the nature and development 
of narrative techniques. Readings from Homer, 
Herodotus, Xenophon, Apollonius of Rhodes, the 
Greek Romances, Lucian, Petronius, and Apu- 
leius. 

233. Ancient Satire. 3 cr. 

Investigation of the satirical element in classical lit- 
erature with special reference to the writings of 
Lucian, Lucilius, Horace, Perius, Martial, and Ju- 
venal. 

240. Greek Religion. 3 cr. 

An examination of the continuity of Greek reli- 
gious experience from ancient times to the present 
and of the interconnection of ancient Greek reli- 
gious ritual, moral experience and religious 
thought. 

241. Roman Religion. 3 cr. 

A study of Roman religious beliefs and practices 
with attention to the development of hero cults, 
oriental mystery religions and philosophical sects 
as alternatives to traditional religion. 

242. Ancient Law 3 cr. 

An historical survey, including the contributions of 
the Babylonians and the Greeks, of Roman Law 
between c. 500 B.C. and A.D. 500. 

244. History of Ancient Medicine. 3 cr. 

Examination of the most significant medical theo- 
ries and practices in the period from the Egyptian 
temple physicians to the doctors of the Roman 
Empire. Special attention will be given to Hippo- 
crates and Galen. 

245. Greek History. 3 cr. 

An examination of the development of Greek his- 
tory and culture from earliest times up to the death 
of Alexander of Macedon. 

246. Hellenistic History. 3 cr. 

A survey of Mediterranean history from the death 
of Alexander until the accession of Octavian and 
the establishment of the Roman principate. 

247. History of the Roman Principate. 3 cr. 

Study of the consolidation of the Roman imperial 
structure from Augustus to the death of Commo- 
dus. 

248. History of the Late Roman 

Empire. 3 cr. 

Examination of Roman history from the ascension 
of Severus to the death of Justinian. 



249. Egyptian Civilization. 3 cr. 

A survey of Egyptian history and culture from the 
pre-dynastic period to the establishment of Roman 
rule in Egypt. Special attention will be given to the 
artistic, literary, and religious achievements of 
Egypt. 

250. Classical Archaeology. 3 cr. 

A study of the archaeological discovery of classical 
civilization from the Greek Bronze Age through 
the Roman Empire. An introduction to the tech- 
niques of archaeological investigation. 

260. The Classical Tradition in 

America. 3 cr. 

A study of the influences of Graeco-Roman civili- 
zation on American cultural life. 

261. Contemporary Literature and 

Classics. 3 cr. 

An investigation of the influence of ancient myth 
on 20th century French, German, Italian, English 
and American Literature. 

300. Seminar. 3 cr. 

Topics variable. 

301. Greek Art. 3 cr. 

A study of the architecture, sculpture, vase paint- 
ing, and minor arts of the Greek world from Mi- 
noan to Hellenistic times. The student is 
introduced to the extensive vocabulary of Greek 
art which has been a continuing formative force in 
Western art. (Offered in alternate years) 

302. Roman Art. 3 cr. 

An introduction to Roman innovations in architec- 
ture, sculpture, and painting. The background of 
Roman art in Etruscan, Greek, and Egyptian civili- 
zations in investigated, and the impact of Roman 
art in formulating Christian Art. Renaissance Art 
and Neo-Classicism is analyzed. (Offered in alter- 
nate years) 

305. History of Medicine. 3 cr. 

A survey exploring the development of medicine 
in the western world in terms of medicine as an art 
and as a science. The latter part of the course will 
focus on the social and institutional aspects in the 
development of American medicine. 



DEPARTMENT OF 
COMMUNICATIONS 

A new Communications Department has been 
formed from the Journalism, Speech Communica- 
tion, and Media Arts programs. Students inter- 
ested in majoring or minoring in the department 
should request current information on curriculum 
from the Department Chairman. 

JOURNALISM 

Journalism encourages the liberal education of a 
student by emphasizing how a professional educa- 
tion for a career in the mass media relies on the 



28 



liberal arts tradition. The journalism curriculum 
concentrates upon the development of communi- 
catixe skills for creative and responsible positions 
in such areas of mass communication as advertis- 
ing, broadcasting, newspapers, public relations, 
magazines and specialized publications. A trans- 
fer student must take at least 12 credits from the 
Journalism offerings at Duquesne. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

Twenty-seven semester hours are required for a 
major. Required courses are: 167, 267, 268, 330, 
367, 369, 372 or 376, and 466 or 468 or 470 or 476. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

Eighteen semester hours credit are required for a 
minor. Credits must include: 167, 267, 268, and 
nine other journalism credits approved by the 
head of the Department of Journalism. Minors do 
not qualify for the Department's Professional In- 
ternship program. 

167. Introduction to Mass 

Communications. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the role, principles, and re- 
sponsibilities of newspapers, broadcasting, maga- 
zines, advertising and public relations. A series of 
guest speakers from these fields is included. 
Course open to non-majors. (Offered both semes- 
ters.) 

199. Language for Journalists. 3 cr. 

Aimed at improving and polishing language skills 
of prospective or beginning majors. Emphasis on 
word usage, grammar, spelling. Introduction to 
style and copy symbols. Open to Freshmen and 
Sophomores. 

267. Basic Reporting and Writing I. 3 cr. 

Fundamentals of news reporting and writing. Ap- 
plied practice in laboratory sections, special events 
and beats covered outside of class. VDT used. Typ- 
ing ability required. 

268. Basic Reporting and Writing II. 3 cr. 

Advanced writing of the more complex types of 
news stories, such as business, government, 
courts. Applied practice in laboratory sections. 
VDT used. Typing ability required. Prerequisite: 
267. 

290. Field Study in Mass Communications. 3 cr. 

A field study is a practical experience in advertis- 
ing, broadcasting, public relations, print journal- 
ism or photography. Individual projects may be 
brochures, slides, feature articles, stringing or 
other professional experiences. (Offered both se- 
mesters) 

330. Public Relations Principles. 3 cr. 

Study of the principles, history and practices of 
public relations in business, education, govern- 
ment and non-profit institutions. Analysis of PR 
programs. Ethics and responsibilities. Open to 
Juniors, Seniors and non-majors. 



331. Public Relations Practices. 3 cr. 

Case studies of public relations programs in indus- 
try, education, social welfare and trade associa- 
tions. The application of techniques through the 
design and implementation of programs for cli- 
ents. Open to Junior and Senior majors. Prerequi- 
sites: 267, 268 and 330, or approval of Department. 

367. Radio-Television: Principles 

and Writing. 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in the study and appli- 
cation of news writing principles and practices for 
radio and television. Laboratory experience in ra- 
dio and closed-circuit TV studios. Open to non- 
majors. Prerequisites: 267, 268, or approval of 
Department. 

369. Advertising: Principles and Writing. 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in the study and appli- 
cation of writing principles and practices for ad- 
vertising. Study of various types of advertising. 
Open to non-majors. Prerequisites: 267, 268, or 
approval of Department. 

370. The Broadcast Program. 3 cr. 

A study of the programming strategies in commer- 
cial and public broadcasting. Factors impacting 
programming decisions, the organizing and de- 
sign of program services in a variety of work- 
settings, and the importance of scheduling in the 
operational design. Neither artistic nor creative 
functions are covered, but rather pragmatic mat- 
ters affecting programming executives. 

371. Mass Communications and 

Public Opinion. 3 cr. 

A study of the nature of public opinion and the 
mass communications process, effects of propa- 
ganda, and barriers to effective communication. 
Open to Juniors, Seniors and non-majors. 

372. Communications Law. 3 cr. 

A study of the legal rights, responsibilities and 
ethics of the mass media. Libel and broadcast reg- 
ulations. Open to Juniors and Seniors. 

375. Editing. 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in editing and present- 
ing the written word for the mass media. Style, 
headlines, typography covered. VDT used. Pre- 
requisite: 267 or approval of Department. 

376. History of the Mass Media. 3 cr. 

Concentrated lecture-discussion course in an his- 
torical context of major social influences affecting 
American journalism from the colonial press per- 
iod to contemporary society. Open to Juniors and 
Seniors. 

378. Photography for Journalism. 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in the preparation and 
use of photography for publication. Fundamentals 
of camera work, developing, printing, print evalu- 
ation and editorial uses of photography empha- 
sized. Student must provide an approved camera. 
Open to non-majors. 



29 



379. Graphic Communications. 3 cr. 

A laboratory-demonstration course to introduce 
students to all elements of the graphic design 
process related to preparing publications for print. 
Using a grid, transfer type and borders, greeking, 
paper, color overlays, line and clip art, preparing a 
key and photos. Open to Juniors and Seniors. Pre- 
requisites: 267, 268, 375 or approval of Depart- 
ment. (This course recommended prior to 380.) 

380. Specialized Publications. 3 cr. 

A study of association, business, industrial, pro- 
fessional and non-profit communications. Writ- 
ing, designing and editing brochures, newsletters, 
annual reports, magazines and other internal and 
external publications. Prerequisites: 167, 267, 268, 
375. 

381. Visual Productions I. 3 cr. 

Basic instruction in the planning, script writing 
and use of photography for the audiovisual pro- 
ductions, primarily slide programs. Emphasis on 
the production of title and caption slides, text 
slides and the integration of these elements into 
slide presentations. Open to non-majors. Prereq- 
uisite: 378 or approval of Department. 

391. Research: Advertising & 

Public Relations. 3 cr. 

In the world of communications, research has be- 
come an increasingly important tool. More and 
more communications professionals are using the 
results of research in their everyday work. The 
course content wiU show the student how research 
can be applied to specific problems in Advertising 
and Public Relations. The student will learn to un- 
derstand the techniques of research and how "to 
use research results. (Offered both semesters) 

405. Advanced Public Affairs Reporting. 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in gathering and inter- 
pretive news writing on urban affairs. Analysis of 
major political, economic, and social develop- 
ments that have local news interest and signifi- 
cance. Guests and field trips. Prerequisites: 267, 
268. 

409. Advanced Writing for Advertising 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in copy writing and de- 
sign for advertising. Major campaign compiled. 
Prerequisite: 369. 

411. Magazine Article Writing. 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in free-lance article 
writing for the general and specialized magazine. 
Queries, research and marketing. Open to Juniors, 
Seniors and non-majors with Department ap- 
proval. Prerequisite: 267. 

413. Advanced Writing for Radio 

and Television. 3 cr. 

A lecture-laboratory course in writing for radio 
and television. Scripting special types of pro- 
grams, such as documentaries, editorials, panel 
shows, PSA's, traffic continuity, promotion- 
publicity. Prerequisite: 367. 



420. International Communications. 3 cr. 

A study of world news systems and an analysis of 
their roles as instruments of world understanding. 
Comparison of U.S. -foreign systems, including 
newspapers, broadcasting, magazines and wire 
services. Open to Juniors, Seniors and non- 
majors. 

440, Writing Reviews/Criticism. 3 cr. 

Analysis, discussion and writing of reviews/ 
criticism of books, theater, films, television, music 
and the visual arts. Lab sessions stress the writing 
of reviews and accompanying interviews, as well 
as critiques of published reviews. Guest speakers 
include local critics and artists. Prerequisites: 267, 
268 or approval of Department. 

441. Secondary School Communications. 3 cr. 

Function of publications and broadcasting in the 
secondary school. Role and responsibilities of 
school press advisors. Teaching of journalism on 
the high school level. Course is directed at stu- 
dents seeking a Pennsylvania teacher's certificate 
in communication with emphasis in high school 
journalism. Open to Juniors and Seniors. Prereq- 
uisites: 167, 267. 

466. Professional Internship: 

Advertising. 3 cr. 

A supervised observation-experience program of 
study and assignment to an assigned advertising 
agency or industrial advertising department in 
conjunction with the Business/Professional Ad- 
vertising Association, Pittsburgh Chapter. Prereq- 
uisites: 167, 267, 268, 330, 367, 369, 372 or 376, 409 
or 485. (Offered both semesters.) 

468. Professional Internship: 

Broadcasting. 3 cr. 

A supervised observation-experience program of 
study and assignment to a commercial/ 
educational broadcasting station in the Pittsburgh 
area. Prerequisites: 167, 267, 268, 367, 369, 370, 372 
or 376, 413. (Offered both semesters.) 

470. Professional Internship: 

Newspapers. 3 cr. 

A supervised observation-experience program of 
study and assignment to a local newspaper includ- 
ing members of the Pennsylvania Newspaper Pub- 
lishers Association. Prerequisites: 167, 267, 268, 
367, 369, 375, 372 or 376, 405. (Offered both semes- 
ters.) 

476. Professional Internship: 

Public Relations. 3 cr. 

A supervised observation-experience program of 
study and assignment to a public relations agency, 
association, industrial, non-profit or educational 
group in the Pittsburgh area. Prerequisites: 167, 
267, 268, 330, 331, 367, 369, 372 or 376, 380. (Of- 
fered both semesters.) 

485. Industrial Advertising. 3 cr. 

Deals with the principles and practices of indus- 
trial marketing communications. Emphasis will be 
placed on trade-paper ads, direct-mail advertising. 



30 



descriptive product tblders, sales letters and pre- 
sentations. Examinations will be made of related 
crafts such as commercial art, typography, print- 
ing, plate-making and media selection. Prerecjui- 
sites: 167, 267, 268, 367, 369. 

490. Individual Projects in Mass 
Communications. 3 cr. 

Individual research projects in the mass media. 
Related to a media topic not covered in other 
courses. Written paper or other appropriate for- 
mats. Open to Junior and Senior majors only. Pre- 
requisite: Permission of instructor and department 
chairman. 



MEDIA ARTS 

It is the goal of the Media Arts program to develop 
professional attitudes and competencies in media 
technologies. Required studies in the humanities 
and science, combined with major courses, pro- 
vide the background necessary for success in a 
field which daily influences the opinions, attitudes 
and decisions that affect every aspect of contempo- 
rary human experience. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

A major consists of thirty-six credits in Media Arts 
courses. 101. Introduction to Media Arts; 103. 
Video Production I (Eng.); and 112. Photography I, 
are required for all majors. Medical Media Majors 
must take 407. Photography-Medical Photogra- 
phy. 

Media Arts majors may concentrate on either 
program development or production. In close con- 
sultation with their academic advisors, they may 
design programs which emphasize photography, 
videography, writing, or a combination of these ar- 
eas. A subspecialty in Medical Media Communica- 
tions is also available. (Prospective Medical Media 
Majors will be interviewed by the program director 
before being admitted to the major.) 

Two extra-departmental courses may be applied 
toward the Media Arts Major: Fine Arts 220 (His- 
tory of Photography) and Journalism 381 (Visual 
Production I). 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

Eighteen credits are required for a minor in Media 
Arts. These must include 101. Introduction to Me- 
dia Arts. 

Media Arts Minors may, in consultation with 
their advisors, design general programs to gain 
broad experience or concentrate in either of the fol- 
lowing areas: Video Production (103, 108, 208, 308, 
403); Photography (112, 212, 312, 401 and Fine Arts 
220). 

Basic Courses 

101. Introduction to Media Arts. 3 cr. 

Survey course to familarize students with equip- 



ment operations, technology, and theory of com- 
munications as well as the selection, use and 
evaluation of media. 

106. Creative Media. 3 cr. 

Implications of the theories of visual thinking and 
psychology of media. Application of these theo- 
ries in the development of media resources. Moti- 
vation, attention, organization, cueing, 
reinforcement and response are studied. 

206. Graphics for Media Production. 3 cr. 

Basic experience in planning and producing 
graphic material for television, display, classroom, 
and lectures. 

215. Production Design and Scripting. 3 cr. 

Study of the instructional design of media re- 
sources. The decision making process: purpose, 
content, method, audience, medium. Research 
techniques, script development and story- 
boarding. 

217. Aesthetics of Media Production. 3 cr. 

Investigation into the aesthetics of audio-visual 
communications. Technology vs creativity; per- 
sonal expression vs public need. 

Video Production 

103, Video Production I (ENG). 3 cr. 

Introductory course to video production. Use of 
the single camera for Electronic News Gathering 
or information documentation. Electronic editing 
of information into a coherent message. 

108. Video Production II (EFP). 3 cr. 

Introduction to Electronic Field Production (Loca- 
tion shooting). Use of script or story line to pro- 
duce a program, shot in segments and edited into 
final form. Extensive out-of-class production time. 
Prerequisite: 103. 

208. Video Production III (STUDIO). 3 cr. 

Exploration into the key elements of good studio 
production. Emphasis on lighting, program de- 
sign and development, and set. Live and recorded 
productions with supporting audio-visuals. Pre- 
requisite: 108. 

308. Video Production IV (ADVANCED) . 3 cr. 

Total video production. Combination of single 
camera and studio work. Extensive editing. Pre- 
requisites: 208, 206, and 215. 

403. Video Production V (PRACTICUM). 3 cr. 

Experience in the field working with approved or- 
ganization; producing a program to be used for 
that organization's communications needs. Senior 
only. Prerequisites: 308, 202. 

Photography 

112. Photography I (INTRODUCTION). 3 cr. 

Lecture-laboratory course in the use of photogra- 
phy as a communications medium. Fundamentals 
of camera work, film developing, printing, light 
and filters. 



31 



212. Photography II (INTERMEDIATE). 3 cr. 

Introduction to color, use of light variations, and 
color slide format. Extensive camera work. Prereq- 
uisite: 112. 

312. Photography III (ZONE). 3 cr. 

Extensive work in black and white photography. 
Zone system is explored. Prerequisite: 212. 

401. Photography IV (ADVANCED). 3 cr. 

Development of a communications tool using pho- 
tography as a medium. Emphasis on continuity of 
the visual image to deliver the message. Prerequi- 
sites: 212, 206. 

407. Photography V (MEDICAL 
PHOTOGRAPHY). 3 cr. 

Clinical approach to the documentation of pa- 
tients, specimens, and surgical procedures. Em- 
phasis on lighting and positioning of subject. 
Institutional decorum, safety, death and dying are 
discussed. Prerequisite: 401. 



Audio Production 

202. Audio Production I (BASIC). 



3cr. 



Investigation into the types of recording equip- 
ment, microphones, and sound systems needed 
for production. Experience in recording, mixing 
sound and editing. 

302. Audio Production II (ADVANCED). 3 cr. 

Extended experience in Audio Production. Prereq- 
uisite: 202. 

Advanced Courses 

311. Multi Media Production 3 cr. 

Development of a multi media production incor- 
porating the various media; print, photography, 
video, graphics, audio, into a single communica- 
tions device. Prerequisites: 112, 212, 206, 202, 103, 
108, and 215. 

402. Producer-Director. 3 cr. 

The role of the director as a catalyst in media pro- 
duction. The producer as coordinator. Examina- 
tion of directors and evaluation of their work. 

404. Management of a Media Facility. 3 cr. 

The problems of setting up, designing, and man- 
aging an integrated program. Budget, organiza- 
tion and standardization of services explored. 

409. Interactive Video. 3 cr. 

Investigation into the applicability of Interactive 
Video in the industrial and educational environ- 
ments. Methods of meeting needs not possible 
with linear media. Prerequisites: 108 and 215. 

412. Currrent Issues in the Media Arts. 3 cr. 

Discussion of professional problems in the field of 
Media Arts and Communications. This seminar is 
open to seniors only with permission of the in- 
structor. 

405. Directed Readings. Variable credits. 
408. Internship. Variable credits. 

Intensive application of experiences gained during 
course work in the field situation. Prerequisite: 



Appropriate major course work and approval of 
the Program Directors. Seniors only. 



SPEECH COMMUNICATION 

The program provides training essential to the sev- 
eral areas of speech communication. The depart- 
ment offers both its major/and interested students 
from other fields the opportunity to choose 
courses from a particular area of concentration or 
the whole range of the discipline. Internships are 
available to qualified students in all areas of con- 
centration. 

AREAS OF CONCENTRATION 

Human Communication Resources. This area of con- 
centration focuses on the theories and applies the 
techniques of human communication at the indi- 
vidual, small group, organizational and cultural 
levels. The student of human communication re- 
sources examines and applies the concepts and 
procedures that govern people's behaviors and in- 
teractions. 

This training is excellent preparation for careers 
as a: personnel director, management trainee, re- 
cruiting officer, public relations director, commu- 
nity relations officer, training director, 
communication director, public information direc- 
tor, counselor, sales coordinator, instructional spe- 
cialist, organizational development specialist, 
consultant, group process facilitator, human rela- 
tions director, human resources director, employee 
relations director, employee development special- 
ist, newsletter editor, survey specialist, student af- 
fairs director, assistant to. . . ., and internal 
communications director. 

Recommended Courses: 101, 104, 204, 206, 208, 
302, 404. 

Rhetoric and Public Address. The student of rhetoric 
and public address examines the concepts and 
procedures which govern men's interactions as in- 
dividuals and parts of the mass. He/she also learns 
the practical arts of critical analysis and persuasive 
communication. This area focuses on both theory 
and practical application of theory. 
Recommended Courses: 101, 102, 190, 202, 290, 
306, 311, 402, 411, 490. 

Media Performance. This concentration combines 
aesthetic communication skills with those of 
theatre/media performance. The student is pre- 
pared for a career in radio and TV performance: 
Classroom theory and practice are stressed and 
students will have an opportunity to participate in 
on-and off-the-air work at WDUQ, (90.5), Du- 
quesne's twenty-five thousand watt National Pub- 
lic radio affiliate. Red Masquer productions offer 
additional opportunity for performance. Courses 
in Radio and TV announcing are taught in a fully 
equipped TV studio. 



32 



Recommended Courses: 140, 141, 190, 251, 280, 
281, 290, 351, 352, 370, 451. 

Speech Pathology Audiologxf. The profession of 
Speech Pathology Audiology is concerned with 
impairments in the processes of communication — 
speech, language and hearing. Upon completion 
of graduate education, a speech pathologist or au- 
diologist mav provide clinical services or work in 
basic and applied research. He or she may be em- 
ployed in schools, hospitals, laboratories, commu- 
nity service centers, or colleges and universities. 
Speech pathology and audiology is a rapidly 
growing field, and the demand for trained person- 
nel far exceeds the supply. 

This area of concentration at Duquesne is a pre- 
professional program designed to prepare the stu- 
dent for graduate study in speech pathology and 
audiology. The student concentrating in Speech 
Pathologv Audiology may be eligible to register 
for Speech 322, 422 with a 3.00 QPA in his/her ma- 
jor, completion of all required courses and the per- 
mission of the department chairman. 
Required courses: 120, 140, 204, 220, 221, 320, 420, 
426. 

Co-requirements: Psychology 225, 352. 
Advised: Mathematics 225. 

Prospective Speech Pathology majors should de- 
clare the major before they begin their junior year. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR MAJOR 

A minium of 30 credits required for a Speech Com- 
munication Major. Speech pathology/audiology 
majors wdll be required to enroll in 120, 140, 204 
and 220. A maximum of 12 transfer credits in 
speech communication can be applied to the major 
requirements. A maximum of 6 credits can be 
taken in Speech/Media internship or Independent 
study. Students considering graduate study in 
communication should consider taking courses in 
both Human Communication Resources and 
Rhetoric and Public Address. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

The minor consists of 18 credits: six credits in re- 
quired introductory courses and 12 additional 
credits. There are 5 emphases that the student 
may follow: 

1. Human Communication Resources. 101, 104 and 
12 credits in any of the following: 206, 208, 302, 
404. 

2. Media Performance. 141, 190 and 12 credits in 
any of the following: 140, 251, 280, 281, 290, 351, 
352, 370, 451. 

3. Rhetoric and Public Address. 101, 102 and 12 
credits in any of the following: 190, 202, 290, 306, 
311, 402, 411, 490. 

4. Speech Pathology/ Audiology: 120, 220, plus 12 
additional credits. Courses 320, 426 are required; 
the remaining six credits may be taken in any of 
the following: 221, 420, 425. 



5. General Speech Communication. 190 and either 
101-102 with 12 credits apportioned in the follow- 
ing manner: six credits in anv of the following: 
104, 202, 204, 206, 208, 302, 306, 311, 402, 404, plus 
six credits in any of the following 140, 141, 251, 
280, 290, 351, 370, 451, 490. 

Suggested activities for majors and minors in 
Speech Communication include the Red Masquer 
Dramatic Organization. WDUQ Radio and Televi- 
sion, The Debate Team, the Duke (student newspa- 
per), and United Nations Organization. 
Suggested courses for fulfilling Communication 
Area requirements for non-Speech majors: 101, 
102, 140, 190. 

101. Process of Communication. 3 cr. 

Examines how man, a being who must believe, 
communicates his beliefs and how he utilizes cer- 
tain kinds of beliefs which have proven fundamen- 
tal through the ages to assist or exploit his fellow 
man. 

102. Techniques of Oral Communication. 3 cr. 

Develops those communicative skills necessary to 
critically analyze verbal discourse and to perform 
effectively in public speaking situations which 
confront the educated person. 

104. Communication and Relationships. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the study of interpersonal, 
nonverbal, small group, and organizational com- 
munication. In this course the student learns the 
interdependence and intertwining of the different 
areas of human communication. The student par- 
ticipates in and, at the same time, observes his/her 
behavior in the human communication environ- 
ment. 

120. Development of Language. 3 cr. 

Focus will be on the acquisition of sound, meaning 
and grammar systems from infancy through child- 
hood with emphasis on the comparative analysis 
of theories of communication development. Phys- 
ical, neurological, psychological, and social bases 
of language will be discussed. Socio-linguistic dif- 
ferences will be discussed with reference to Black 
language and regional variations. 

121. Sign Language 

(Manual Communication). 3 cr. 

Sign language systems used by and with the deaf 
and hearing impaired will be presented in an over- 
all introductory methods course. Participants will 
be able to demonstrate ability to fingerspell and 
use basic sign in simple phases and sentences. As- 
pects of current trends in Deaf Awareness will be 
included. 

140. Phonetics. 3 cr. 

An approach to the English language based upon 
the fundamentals of vocal and articulatory speech 
sounds as systematized by the International Pho- 
netic Association. 

141. Voice and Diction for the Media. 3 cr. 

Designed to meet the needs of those who will be 
required to use voice and diction as professional 



33 



tools in the training and pursuit of media careers, 
i.e., Radio/Television, Theatre and Media. Not 
limited to Media Majors. 

190. Introduction to Theatre Arts. 3 cr. 

A survey of theatre as an art form, involving the 
selective integration of a number of skills and dis- 
ciplines to bring about the aesthetic of the theatri- 
cal moment. Beginning with lectures on the roles 
of the director, actor, designer, and various crafts- 
men, the course will work up to a sampling of the 
various modes and forms of drama in terms of exi- 
gencies of production. 

202. Persuasion. 3 cr. 

A study and application of principles and practices 
that influence people's beliefs and actions. Prereq- 
uisite: Either 101 or 102 or permission of the in- 
structor. 

204. Interpersonal Communication. 3 cr. 

Develops verbal human communication skills and 
abilities in face-to-face relationships. The empha- 
sis is on establishing: (1) a positive attitude toward 
yourself, (2) a positive attitude toward others, and 
(3) a positive attitude toward communication situ- 
ations. While theory is presented, the classroom 
becomes a workshop where caring and sharing 
with others in effective communication is devel- 
oped. 

206. The Small Group 3 cr. 

Develops human communication skills and abili- 
ties in the decision making and problem solving 
group. In this course the student discusses theo- 
ries that deal with leadership and membership in 
the small group, and develops positive social and 
task behaviors by means of class activities. It 
would be helpful to have had Interpersonal Com- 
munication or Nonverbal Communication before 
taking this course. Class limit-25. Recommended: 
204 or 208. 

208. Nonverbal Communication 3 cr. 

Develops nonverbal human communication skills 
and abilities in people relationships. The emphasis 
is on learning "another language" in order to be- 
come a more effective communicator by establish- 
ing a positive relationship between our verbal 
language and our nonverbal language. The stu- 
dent will study his/her nonverbal language by 
making comparisons with other cultures and the 
animal world. A workshop atmosphere is chosen 
as the teaching methodology. Recommended: 204. 

220. Introduction to Problems in Speech. 3 cr. 

A survey of various speech disorders, their causes, 
recognition, and possible therapy. 

221. Anatomy and Physiology. 3 cr. 

This course will study the basic neurological, skel- 
etal, and muscular structures involved in the 
speech and hearing process. Prerequisite: 220 or 
permission of the instructor. 



251. Radio Announcing I. 3 cr. 

Application of the principles of good speech to the 
announcing of news, sports, weather and com- 
mercials, and to the art of interviewing. 

280. Acting I. 3 cr. 

A study of the basic principles, theories, and tech- 
niques of acting, including various problems con- 
fronted by the actor in the creation and 
interpretation of a role on television or film. Pre- 
requisite: 190 or permission of instructor. 

290. History of the Theatre. 3 cr. 

The development of theatre as an art form in West- 
ern civilization and in the Orient; styles and meth- 
ods of production, artistic conventions, growth of 
formal theatres, etc., as manifestations of how 
man has seen his world through the ages. 

302. Organizational Communication 3 cr. 

Develops human communication skills and abili- 
ties for use in organizations and especially in your 
career field. This course helps the student develop 
and present himself/herself before meetings in 
business, industry, government agencies, and the 
professional setting. Required: 204 and 206 or 208. 

306. Advanced Public Speaking. 3 cr. 

Students will be directed in the design and pro- 
duction of the problem-solving presentation on a 
major world problem. Presentations will be given 
before live audiences from local high schools or 
civic organizations. If possible, presentations will 
be videotaped. Prerequisite: 102. 

311. Communication, Science and 

Revolution. 3 cr. 

Examines how beliefs built upon assumptions 
common to science and revolution have influenced 
our understanding of communication. Required: 
101. 

320. Clinical Techniques in 

Speech Pathology. 3 cr. 

This course will focus upon the clinical manage- 
ment of speech and hearing problems. Past and 
current therapeutic approaches and techniques 
will be presented in relation to disorders of speech 
and hearing. Different organizational procedures 
and practices will also be included. Prerequisite: 
120, 220 or permission of the instructor. 

322. Speech Pathology/ Audiology 

Externship. 3 cr. 

Provides opportunities for observation of various 
aspects of clinical work. Directed readings and 
field trips are included. For Speech Pathology/ 
Audiology concentration majors only. Written per- 
mission of department chairman required. Open 
to juniors and/or seniors. 

351. Television Announcing. 3 cr. 

Continuation of Radio Announcing but with the 
added skills necessary to T.V. Prerequisite: 251. 



34 



352. Radio Announcing II. 3 cr. 

Continuation of Radio Announcing I with empha- 
sis on interviewing and location reporting. Addi- 
tional foreign pronunciation exercises. 
Prerequisite: 251. 

370. Oral Interpretation of Literature 3 cr. 

An approach to literature in terms of its oral tradi- 
tions with special emphasis on techniques prepar- 
atory to the act of oral presentation. 

400. Independent Study. 

(All areas of concentration). 1-3 cr. 

The student will work on a selected project under 
the supervision and guidance of a faculty member. 
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and De- 
partment Chairperson. May be taken twice. 

404. Intercultural Communication. 3 cr. 

An investigation into the similar and different per- 
ceptions of reality held by individuals and cultural 
groups and how such perceptions affect the com- 
munications process. Prerequisite: 101, 208. 

411. Communication and Imagination. 3 cr. 

Examines how the triumph of beliefs dominated 
by imagination over beliefs dominated by science 
has changed our understanding of communica- 
tion. Continues the analysis begun in 311 "Com- 
munication, Science and Revolution." Required 
311. 

412. Speech/Media Internship. 1-3 cr. 

An internship in communication industry or ap- 
propriate organizational setting. Prerequisite: Per- 
mission of department chairman required. May be 
taken twice. 

420. Speech Problems of the 

Exceptional Child. 3 cr. 

This course will investigate the speech and lan- 
guage development, speech problems, and speech 
remediation of the mentally retarded, brain in- 
jured, aphasic, learning disabled, and cerebral pal- 
sied child. The role of other professionals, in 
addition to that of the speech pathologist in 
speech remediation, will be explored. Prerequi- 
site: 120, 140, 220, 221, 320 or permission of the in- 
structor. 

422. Speech Pathology /Audiology 

Clinical Practicum. 3 cr. 

Provides an opportunity for active participation 
with professionals in their work in varied settings. 
For Speech Pathology/Audiology concentration 
majors only. Written permission of department 
chairman required. 

425. Aural Rehabilitation. 3 cr. 

The human communication systems are presented 
included acoustic and visual components. Com- 
munication problems of the hearing impaired are 
discussed with regard to amplification, residual 
hearing, visual perception and manual communi- 
cation. Programs of rehabilitation for individuals 
with mild to profound hearing impairments are re- 
viewed. Prerequisite: 220, 221 or permission of the 
instructor. 



426. Hearing and Audiology. 3 cr. 

This course will consider the nature of sound, the 
process of hearing, and hearing impairment. The 
different types, causes, and the measurement of 
hearing impairment will be discussed. Exposure to 
audiometric testing will also be available. Prereq- 
uisite: 220, 221 or permission of the instructor. 

451. T.V. Practicum. 3 cr. 

The essentials of developing dramatic productions 
for television: scripted commercials, serious and 
comic performances, acted and taped. Prerequi- 
site: permission of the instructor. 

490. American Theatre and Drama. 3 cr. 

Survey of the major American theatrical move- 
ments and dramatic literature from the Colonial 
period to the present with emphasis on the twenti- 
eth century. Playwrights, designers, and theatrical 
companies are studied as reflections of American 
culture. 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS 

Chairman: Geza Grosschmid, J.U.D. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

Twenty-four semester hours are required for a ma- 
jor. These credits must include 221, 222, 321, and 
322. Extradepartmental requirements: Mathematics 
225 in the Mathematics Department of the Col- 
lege. Students planning to do graduate work in Ec- 
onomics are advised to take calculus. It is strongly 
recommended that students having economics as 
a major consult with the Economics Department 
for advisement. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

Eighteen semester hours are required for a minor 
in Economics. These credits must include 221, and 
222. It is strongly recommended that studens hav- 
ing economics as a minor consult with the Eco- 
nomics Department for advisement. 

Course Descriptions are provided in the School of 
Business and Administration Section of this Cata- 
log on Pages 74-76. 

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 

Chairman: Joseph J. Keenan, Ph.D. 

The chief purpose of the English program is to de- 
velop the student's powers to think critically about 
his life. To this end the Department's curriculum 
unites intensive and critical reading in a broad 
range of our literary heritage with close attention 
to the presentation of ideas in writing. Attention is 
also given to oral expression of ideas by means of 
dialogue between professor and student. Not only 
is the degree in English an excellent preparation 
for law school and for graduate work in English, 
education, and library science, but it also provides 



35 



the liberal preparation which is sought by the busi- 
ness world for such areas as personnel, advertis- 
ing, and management. 

Prerequisites— English Composition 101 (or its 
equivalent) is a prerequisite for admission to Eng- 
lish Composition 102; English Composition 102 (or 
its equivalent) is a prerequisite for admission to all 
other courses offered by the department. 

The English Department further advises that 
two 200 level courses should be taken before the 
student attempts any 300 or 400 level course (ex- 
cept for 308 and 407). 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

The major is an individually-designed program of 
24 hours of English Department courses above the 
100 level. Each English major, with the close advice 
and approval of a member of the English faculty, 
designs a program to fit his background, interest, 
and career objectives. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

A minimum of 12 credit hours beyond the fresh- 
man level of which no more than six hours may be 
taken at the 200 level. 

There are five separate emphases from which 
the student must choose one. 

1. English Literature: 201, 202, and six hours in 
upper division English Literature, courses 409 
through 469. 

2. American Literature: 205, 206, and six hours in 
upper division American Literature, courses 471 
through 489. 

3. Literature and Film: 'Introduction to Film" (3 
hours) and nine hours in courses in literature and 
film. Examples are "Shakespeare on Film" and 
"American Short Story into Film." 

4. Writing: 203 and nine hours in 300 level Writ- 
ing Workshops. 

5. English Honors: Students who, by invitation of 
the Department Honors Committee, complete 
English 212, 213, and two 300 Honors Seminars, 
may count that program as an English Minor. 

HONORS PROGRAM 

Students who give evidence of outstanding ability 
in English through their performance in English 
Composition 101 or by virtue of superior national 
test scores will be invited to participate in the Eng- 
lish Honors program at the discretion of the De- 
partment Honors Committee. 

These students may apply Honors course credits 
to either an English major or minor, or may use 
these credits as electives. Further details concern- 
ing the Honors program are available through the 
department office and will be distributed to all 
nominees at the time of their recommendation for 
admission to the program. 



101, 102. English Composition. 3 cr. each 

Practice in effective writing. Review of principles 
of grammar and rhetoric; introduction to literary 
types and forms. 101 is prerequisite to 102. 

103. English Composition Honors. 3 cr. 

An honors counterpart to 102. Composition and 
introduction to literary types and forms. Participa- 
tion by invitation only. 

201, 202. English Literature Survey. 3 cr. each 

Representative masterpieces of English literature 
in their literary and historical contexts. 

203. Advanced Writing. 3 cr. 

Designed to build upon writing sills learned in 
freshman composition centered chiefly on devel- 
opment of style and accuracy. 

205. American Literature Survey I — 
Beginning to Civil War. 3 cr. 

Representative selections from major American 
authors treated in both their literary and their his- 
torical contexts. 

206. American Literature Survey II— 

After Civil War. 3 cr. 

Representative selections from major American 
authors treated in both their literary and their his- 
torical contexts. 

207. The Novel. 3 cr. 

Introduction both to various types of novels and to 
critical analysis of fiction. 

208. Poetry. 3 cr. 

Appreciation of British and American poetry: criti- 
cal analysis of traditional and experimental poetic 
form; consideration of philosophical and social 
concerns of poetry. 

209. Drama. 3 cr. 

An historical survey of major dramatic forms 
through a selection of representative works by ma- 
jor playwrights from the classical tradition of 
Greece and Rome to the Theatre of the Absurd. 

210. 211. Readings in World 

Literature I, II. 3 cr. each 

A survey of major literary works of the Western 
world from Homer to Cervantes (210) and from 
Moliere to Camus (211) with emphasis on conti- 
nental traditions. The course explores both the 
thematic preoccupations of Western writers and 
the development and evolution of literary forms. 

212, 213. English Literature 

Honors. 3 cr. each 

Honors counterparts to 201, 202. Major British 
writers from Chaucer to Eliot. Participation by in- 
vitation only. 

300. Honors Seminar. 3 cr. 

Special areas treated in these seminars will vary 
and will be designated in the schedule of courses 
each semester. Enrollment in the Honors Seminar 
is by invitation of the Honors Committee of the 
Department of English. 



36 



308. Applied Linguistics. 3 cr. 

Practical uses of structural linguistics in the teach- 
ing of composition and literature. 

370, 371, 372, 373, 374, 375, 376, 
377, 378, 379. Special Studies in 
English or World Literature. 3 cr. each 

Two or three courses in this sequence are offered 
every semester by the English Department to meet 
the current interests of both the students and the 
faculty. Examples of courses regularly offered are 
Science Fiction; The EnglisJi Bible and Literature; Com- 
parative Literature; Modern Comparative Drama; Mod- 
ern Short Story; Far Eastern Literature; Forms of 
Fantasy; Introduction to Film; The Literature of Mys- 
tery and Detection, Christian Literature and Art. 

380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 385, 386, 

387, 388, 389. Writing Workshops. 3 cr. each 

Courses in this sequence are offered each semester 
in a workshop format designed to develop stu- 
dents' creative and or technical writing skills. Ex- 
amples of courses regularly offered are 
Playwrighting, Poetry Workshop, Fiction Workshop, 
Writing for Business and Industry, Professional and 
Technical Writing. Admission by instructor's per- 
mission only. 

407. The English Language. 3 cr. 

An introduction to linguistic analysis with primary 
emphasis on the history of the structure of English 
from old to modern English. 



The remainder of the English courses are di- 
vided into areas of emphasis. During a four- 
semester period, each course from each area will 
be offered at least once. 

Medieval Studies 

409. Chaucer. 3 cr. 

A study of The Canterbury Tales and minor poems. 

410. Medieval Special Topics. 3 cr. 

Studies in the ideas and attitudes of the medieval 
period approached through one of its dominant 
genres such as the romance, the drama, the lyric, 
etc. or through some of its major writers other 
than Chaucer or through international readings in 
Old and Middle English, Old Icelandic, Medieval 
French and German (all read in English transla- 
tion). 



Renaissance Studies 

413. Sixteenth Century English 

Literature. 3 cr. 

Survey including non-Shakespearean drama. Sid- 
ney, Spenser, Shakespeare. Marlowe and minor 
figures. 

414. Seventeenth Century English 

Literature. 3 cr. 

Survey of drama, prose, and poetry to 1660. 



415. Milton. 3 cr. 

A surv^ey of Milton and his times. A close scrutiny 
of the minor poems, and Paradise Lost and Samson 
Agonistes. 

419. Renaissance Special Topics. 3 cr. 

Studies in Renaissance thought and aesthetic in 
the works of one or more of its great writers: Spen- 
ser, Sidney, Donne, Jonson, etc. or through the 
ideas and attitudes conveyed in one of the domi- 
nant genres of the Renaissance: the lyric, the epic, 
the drama, etc. 



Shakespeare Studies 

433. Shakespeare I. 

Comedies and romances. 



3cr. 



3cr. 



434. Shakespeare IL 

Tragedies and histories. 

439. Shakespeare Special Topics. 3 cr. 

Studies in Shakespeare relating his works to those 
of his contemporaries or concentrating on the 
problems of Shakespeare: biographical, aesthetic, 
and critical. Specific works and approaches to be 
selected by the instructor. 

Eighteenth Century Studies 

441. English Classicism. 3 cr. 

Developments of neo-classical literature from the 
Restoration to the death of Pope. Primary atten- 
tion given to Dryden, Swift and Pope. 

442. Late Eighteenth Century 

English Literature. 3 cr. 

Johnson and his circle, the development of the 
novel, the aesthetic movement. 

449. Eighteenth Century Special 

Topics. 3 cr. 

Studies in Eighteenth Century thought and aes- 
thetic in the works of one or more of its great writ- 
ers: Dryden, Swift, Pope, Johnson, Blake, etc. or 
through the ideas and attitudes conveyed in one of 
the dominant genres of the Eighteenth Century: 
the drama, the novel, the essay, etc. 

Nineteenth Century Studies 

451. English Romantic Literature. 3 cr. 

A study of the aesthetic, moral, political, and liter- 
ary aspects of English romanticism approached 
through the writings of Wordsworth, Coleridge, 
Byron, Shelley, Keats. 

452. Victorian Literature. 3 cr. 

A study of the poetry of Tennyson, Browning, 
Arnold and the prose of Arnold, Carlyle and Rus- 
kin. Attention also given to the poetry of Morris, 
Rossetti and Fitzgerald. 

459. Nineteenth Century Special 

Topics. 3 cr. 

Studies in Nineteenth Century thought and aes- 
thetic in the works of one or more of its great writ- 



37 



ers such as Wordsworth, Tennyson, Browning, 
Dickens, Hardy; or through the ideas and atti- 
tudes conveyed in one of the dominant genres of 
the Nineteenth Century. 

Twentieth Century Studies 

461. Early Twentieth Century 

Literature. 3 cr. 

Selective study of authors representing the major 
literary types and trends from about 1890 to 1930; 
Hardy, Moore, Butler, Conrad, Yeats, Hopkins, 
and Joyce. 

463. Contemporary Literature. 3 cr. 

Major modern types and trends: Eliot, Woolf, 
Waugh, Greene, Auden, Spender, Thomas, Gold- 
ing, and others. 

469. Twentieth Century Special 

Topics. 3 cr. 

Studies in Twentieth Century thought and aes- 
thetic in the works of one or more of its major writ- 
ers such as Yeats, Joyce, Eliot; or through the ideas 
and attitudes conveyed in one of the dominant 
genres of the Twentieth Century. 

American Studies 

471. Early American Literature. 3 cr. 

A study of the literature of America's Colonial and 
Federalist periods, emphasizing the political and 
belletristic writings of an emerging nation. 

472. American Romanticism. 3 cr. 

A study of the Romantic movement in America 
with emphasis on Emerson, Thoreau, and Poe. 

473. American Realism. 3 cr. 

The rise of realistic fiction subsequent to the Civil 
War through the end of the century with emphasis 
on Twain, James and Howells. 

474. Modern American Literature. 3 cr. 

A study of American prose and poetry from the 
end of World War I to the present, including Frost, 
Fitzgerald, Hemingway, Faulkner, Bellow, etc. 

480-489. American Literature 

Special Topics. 3 cr. 

Studies designed to reflect particular current inter- 
ests of faculty and students alike. Topics can be 
drawn from a wide range of areas such as histori- 
cal background, aesthetics, theme and motif; from 
specific studies of major authors or from tracing 
the development of dominant literary genres. 

499. Directed Studies. 3 cr. 



DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 

Chairman: Steven B. Vardy, Ph.D. 

The Department of History offers a program de- 
voted to the study of mankind in diverse cultural 
settings through time. A large number of courses 
are taught by a faculty reflecting a variety of philo- 
sophical and methodological outlooks. Apart from 



the fact that the program fully meets the needs of 
students intending to pursue graduate work in 
historical studies, the history major will be well 
prepared for careers in law, business, or govern- 
ment services. Most importantly, the discipline of 
history provides an excellent synthesis of the 
liberal-arts education since it effectively joins to- 
gether the humanities and the social sciences. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

A minimum of 30 credits must be taken including 
History of the U.S. (103, 104) and either Western 
Civilization (213, 214) or World History and the 
Historian (311, 312). Fifteen credits must be taken 
from 200 and 300 level courses. The Senior-Honors 
Seminar is mandatory for majors and by invitation 
only for non-majors. 

A maximum of 12 transfer credits in history can 
be applied to the major requirements. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

Students who wish to minor in history may con- 
sult with the department's undergraduate advisor. 
The student is required to take 15 hours including 
103, 104. 

Introductory Surveys 

103. History of the United States 

to 1877. 3 cr. 

The historical development of American institu- 
tions, ideals, and society from earliest times to 
1877. 

104. History of the United States 

since 1877. 3 cr. 

The historical development of American institu- 
tions, ideals, and society since 1877. 

Area Courses 

212. Europe in the Feudal Age. 3 cr. 

The world of the Middle Ages — a survey of medie- 
val man's political, social, and cultural activities. 

213, 214. Western Civilization. 3 cr. 

An introductory survey of the origins and charac- 
teristics of European Civilization, emphasizing the 
personalities and events and institutions that have 
made the West the dominant global power today. 

244. History of Ancient Medicine. 3 cr. 

Examination of the most significant medical theo- 
ries and practices in the period from the Egyptian 
temple physicians to the doctors of the Roman 
Empire. Special attention will be given to Hippo- 
crates and Galen. 

245. Greek History. 3 cr. 

An examination of the development of Greek his- 
tory and culture from earliest times up to the death 
of Alexander of Macedon. 



38 



246. Hellenistic History. 3 cr. 

A suney of Mediterranean history from the death 
of Alexander until the accession of Octavian and 
the establishment of the Roman principate. 

247. History of the Roman Principate. 3 cr. 

Study of the consolidation of the Roman imperial 
structure from Augustus to the death of Commo- 
dus. 

248. History of the Late Roman Empire. 3 cr. 

Examination of Roman History from the accession 
of Severus to the death of Justinian. 

249. Egyptian Civilization. 3 cr. 

A survey of Egyptian history and culture from the 
pre-dynastic period to the establishment of Roman 
rule in Egypt. Special attention will be given to the 
artistic, literary, and religious achievements of 

Egypt- 

254. The History of the Modern 

Middle East 3 cr. 

A study of the modern Near East with concentra- 
tion upon the conflict between imperialism and 
nationalism, traditionalism and western influ- 
ences, in the area. 

255, 256. History of Asia I and 11. 3 cr. each 

A survey of Asian civilization from ancient times 
to the present day; western colonialism; the rise of 
the nationalist movement; and the establishment 
of modern states. 

257, 258. Russian History. 3 cr. each 

Development of society and state in Russia from 
their origins to the twentieth century. 

259, 260. East-Central Europe. 3 cr. each 

The medieval and modern history of the small na- 
tions situated between Russia and Germany on 
the east and west, and the Baltic and Mediterra- 
nean Seas on the north and the south. 

266. Modern Britain. 3 cr. 

A study of the first industrial nation, with special 
attention to the achievement of constitutional 
monarchy, the social and economic problems of in- 
dustrialization, the nature of British imperialism, 
and the problems faced in the 20th century. 

267. Canada. 3 cr. 

An introduction to Canadian history, with particu- 
lar attention to the years from 1763 to the present, 
and to Canadian-American relations and contem- 
porary Canada. 

269, 270. China. 3 cr. 

A survey of social, economic, political, and cul- 
tural changes before and after the establishment of 
the People's Republic of China. 

271. Japan. 3 cr. 

An analysis of Japan's current cultural and eco- 
nomic development in light of its historical past, 
the Meiji era, and twentieth century expansion. 

Topical Surveys 

305. History of Medicine. 3 cr. 

A survey exploring the development of medicine 



in the Western World in terms of medicine as an art 
and as a science. The latter part of the course will 
focus on the social and institutional aspects in the 
development of American medicine. 

307, 308. History of Science. 3 cr. each 

A survey exploring the significance of scientific de- 
velopments within the historical and social context 
of Western culture. 

309. American Science and Technology. 3 cr. 

The development of science and technology in 
America from colonial times to the twentieth cen- 
tury. 

311, 312. World History and the 

Historian. 3 cr. each 

The course traces the main events of world history 
in relation to the most important theories of world 
history and in the context of an inquiry into the 
nature of historical understanding. The first se- 
mester treats prehistory, the emergence of civiliza- 
tion, and the world views of the major classical 
civilizations. The second semester is an inquiry 
into the nature of modernity. 

320. Colonial America. 3 cr. 

The exploration and settlement of the British 
North American Colonies to 1763. 

321. American Revolution. 3 cr. 

A survey of the major events, persons and move- 
ments in American history from 1763 to 1790. 

322. Contemporary Central America. 3 cr. 

An examination of the causes of revolution, as well 
as the major social, economic, and political crises 
confronting the Central American region. 

340. History of Western Law. 3 cr. 

Primary emphasis will be placed on the rise of cus- 
tomary law, especially its development in England 
into Common Law. 

341. History of American Law L 3 cr. 

This course deals with the development of law, le- 
gal philosophy, and legal institutions in America 
from the colonial period to the Civil War. 

342. History of American Law IL 3 cr. 

This course deals with the development of law, le- 
gal philosophy, and legal institutions from the 
Civil War to the present. 

343. Church History L 3 cr. 

A religious and historical exploration of the 
growth of Christianity from the first century up to 
the Reformation; discussion of those issues within 
the Church and the external forces which brought 
about major conflict and development. 

344. Church History IL 3 cr. 

Selected topics in Catholic and Protestant develop- 
ment from 1500 to the present day; special empha- 
sis on the crises, revolutions, and reforms that 
were central to this development. 

345. American Church History. 3 cr. 

Emphasizes the historical development of major 
religious traditions in America, both Catholic and 
Protestant. Special attention will be given to "the 



39 



life of the mind" of Christianity in America, the 
frontier expansion of religion, the often- 
controversial interaction between the Church and 
American culture, the place of religion in the crea- 
tion of the American character, and the unique 
separation of church and state. 

347. War in Modern Society. 3 cr. 

A study and analysis of the phenomenon of war in 
the Western World from the Age of Napoleon to 
the present, with special emphasis upon the inter- 
relationship between international conflict and so- 
cial, political, and technological change. 

352. Diplomatic History of United States. 3 cr. 

Emphasis is upon involvement of the United 
States in both World Wars and its role as an impe- 
rial power. 

357. History of the American 

Presidency. 3 cr. 

Primarily an investigation and evaluation- 
personal, political, contemporary, and historical— 
of each president with some attention to the 
growth of the office. 

360. Constitutional History of the 

United States. 3 cr. 

An analysis of the Supreme Court and constitu- 
tional development, stressing the major controver- 
sies in the field. 

362. History of the United States' 

Political Parties Since 1868. 3 cr. 

A detailed examination and analysis of the origins, 
leadership, and operation of the major political 
parties since 1868. 

364. The American Mind. 3 cr. 

The origins, development and contemporary 
modes of American thought, including major "cli- 
mates of opinion," diverse movements, and se- 
lected scientific, political, religious, social, and 
artistic topics. 

366. The Modern Mind. 3 cr. 

The major ideological tendencies of modern Euro- 
pean thought and their connection to society and 
politics, and to the major philosophic and scien- 
tific currents of the nineteenth and twentieth cen- 
turies. 

370. Current History. 3 cr. 

What are the major forces affecting our lives to- 
day? Where do they come from? Where wUl they 
lead to? Resources will be current media such as 
newspapers, TV, etc. 

372. Asian Influences on America. 3 cr. 

From the quest for Asia by Columbus to the eco- 
nomic impact of twentieth century Japan, the Ori- 
ent has affected America, its social, cultural, 
economic, and technological development. 

373, 374. Diplomatic History of the 

Far East. 3 cr. each 

Western imperialism in Asia; rise of Asian nation- 
alism, analysis of international problems in cur- 
rent tension areas. 



375. History of Inner Asia. 3 cr. 

The history of Inner Asia from Genghis Khan's 
Mongol Empire to Mikhail Gorbachev's Soviet Em- 
pire. 

378. Europe and International 

Politics, 1870-1970. 3 cr. 

A study of global international relations since 
1870, with emphasis upon the evolution from a Eu- 
ropean centered world to global politics. 

382. Psychohistory. 3 cr. 

Examines the inter-relationships between 
psychology — especially psychoanalysis -and his- 
tory. Psychology leadership of group behavior, or 
war, etc. 

385. Women in History. 3 cr. 

A survey of the historical experience of women, 
from ancient times, with emphasis on the forces 
that have led to the modern changes in women's 
status. 

386. Historical Geography. 3 cr. 

A survey of the physical world which is the basis 
for a human civilization, past, present, and future. 
What are the possibilities and limitations of differ- 
ent places for human development? How success- 
ful or unsuccessful were human settlements? 
Emphasis also on geography as an intellectual dis- 
cipline and cultural phenomenon. 

389. Europe: Industrialism and 

the Masses. 3 cr. 

A historical analysis of Europe in the last two cen- 
turies with particular attention to the relationship 
between technological and social change and its 
impact on politics and culture. 

394. History of U.S. Labor 

Management Relations. 3 cr. 

Concentrates chiefly on the relations between 
worker and employer from the early craftsmen to 
the industrial union member. 

395. Pittsburgh and the American City. 3 cr. 

The rise of Urban America, using Pittsburgh as a 
case study of city growth and change, industrial- 
ization, immigration, and renewal in the twentieth 
century. 

396. History of U.S. Immigration. 3 cr. 

An examination of the dynamics of immigration to 
the United States with emphasis on the new immi- 
gration at the turn of the century. 

397. Reform in Modern America. 3 cr. 

The study of the progressive reform movements in 
the United States since the Civil War. 

398. Economic History of the 

United States. 3 cr. 

Investigates the economic development of the 
United States, emphasizing its impact on social 
and political issues as background for current eco- 
nomic problems. 



40 



Specialized Areas and Topics 

358. Civil War and Reconstruction. 3 cr. 

An intensive study of the American experience be- 
fore and after the War for the Union. 

367. Science and Society in the 

Twentieth Century. 3 cr. 

The economic, social and cultural consequences of 
the rise of modern science. 

379. Revolution in the Modern World. 3 cr. 

An analysis of the major political and social revolu- 
tions in Europe since 1789, the nature of the revo- 
lutionary phenomenon, and the inevitable 
counter-revolutionary trend. 

380. European Fascism. 3 cr. 

An intensive study of the major fascist movements 
and regimes of the twentieth century in light of the 
political, economic, social, intellectual, and psy- 
chological tensions which produced them. 

387. The American Frontier. 3 cr. 

An historical view of man's attempts to create new 
societies, concentrating upon ecological issues, 
frontier experiences, and Utopian ventures. 

388. United States: 1945 to the 

Present 3 cr. 

A discussion of selected contemporary issues, for- 
eign and domestic, which illustrate the identity 
crisis in the U.S. 

420. Special Studies in 

European History. 3 cr. 

Topic will be announced by the instructor. The 
course may be taken more than once. 

421. Special Studies in 

American History. 3 cr. 

Topic will be announced by the instructor. The 
course may be taken more than once. 

422. Special Studies in 

Third World History. 3 cr. 

Topic will be announced by the instructor. The 
course may be taken more than once. 

481. The Modern Historian. 3 cr. 

The development of modern historical thinking 
and scholarship as it is related to the major intel- 
lectual and social currents of modern times. 

490. Senior Honors Seminar I. 3 cr. 

491. Senior Honors Seminar II. 3 cr. 

499. Directed Reading, Selected 

Historical Topics. 3 cr. 

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 

Chairman: Charles A. Loch, M.A. 

MATHEMATICS PROGRAM 

The Department of Mathematics offers a sequence 
of modern courses which will 1) aid students in 
developing their ability to think scientifically and 
form independent judgments; 2) provide students 
with a breadth and depth of knowledge concern- 



ing not only manipulative skills but also funda- 
mental and essential theory; 3) enable students to 
use their knowledge in the formulation and solu- 
tion of problems; and 4) give students the neces- 
sary basis of foundation for the pursuit of graduate 
study or productive effort at the bachelor level. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

Bachelor of Arts Degree. A minimum of 32 semes- 
ter hours is required. These must include 115, 116, 
215, 216, 303, 415, 416; the remainder must be se- 
lected from courses numbered above 300. Extrade- 
partmental Requirements: Computer Science 101 
Basic or HI Fortran or 112 Pascal. 

Bachelor of Science Degree. A minimum of 32 se- 
mester hours is required. These must include 115, 
116, 215, 216, 303, 415, 416; the remainder must be 
selected from courses numbered above 300. 

Extradepartmental Requirements: 20 hours in 
science, 211, 212 General Analytical Physics and 
Computer Science 101 Basic 111 Fortran or 112 Pas- 
cal must be taken. The remaining courses may be 
selected from Biology 111, 112 and 226 and above. 
Chemistry 121 and above. Physics above 212, and 
additional Computer Science courses. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

A minor must include 116 and 10 additional credits 
selected from courses numbered above 116. 

For science majors, 215, 216, 315 are recom- 
mended. 

For economics and social science majors, 308, 
225 or 301, 306 are recommended. 

101. Elementary Mathematics. 3 cr. 

A remedial course in the fundamentals of algebra, 
including the solution of equations and inequali- 
ties. Not to be counted toward a major, minor or 
the mathematics/science area requirements. 

103. Finite Mathematics, I. 3 cr. 

A course meeting the needs of non-science stu- 
dents in the College for an introduction to matrices 
and their applications, linear programming. 

105. College Algebra and Trigonometry. 4 cr. 

A modern course in college algebra and analytic 
trigonometry for those students who do not pos- 
sess the prerequisites for 115. Not counted toward 
a major or minor. 

107. Introduction to Modern 

Mathematics I. 3 cr. 

This course is designed for elementary education 
students in the School of Education. Not to be 
counted toward a major, minor, or the 
mathematics/science area requirement. 

109. College Algebra. 3 cr. 

A traditional course in college algebra for students 
who are not prepared for 111. Not counted toward 
a major or minor. Credit will not be allowed for 
both this course and 105. 



41 



HI. Calculus for Non-Science Students. 3 cr. 

Differentiation and integration of algebraic, loga- 
rithmic, and exponential functions, maxima and 
minima, area, exponential growth. Not counted 
toward a major. Credit will not be allowed for both 
this course and 115. 

115, 116, 215. Calculus, I, II, III. 4 cr. each 

A unified course in analytic geometry and calcu- 
lus. Considers theory of limits, functions differen- 
tiation, integration, series, geometry of space, 
functions of several variables, and multiple inte- 
gration. Prerequisites for 115; Two years of algebra, 
one year of plane geometry, and one-half year of 
trigonometry. 

216. Ordinary Differential Equations. 3 cr. 

The course includes solutions, existence of solu- 
tions, and applications of differential equations. 
Prerequisite; 215. 

221. History of Mathematics. 3 cr. 

This is a survey of the historical development of 
mathematics. Prerequisite: One year of College 
Mathematics, preferably including one semester of 
calculus. Not counted toward a major. 

225. Fundamentals of Statistics. 3 cr. 

A basic course in probability theory and descrip- 
tive and inferential statistics for non-majors. Pre- 
requisite: High school algebra. Not counted 
toward a major. 

301, 302. Introduction to Probability 

and Statistics I, II. 3 cr. each 

A mathematical treatment of probability theory 
and mathematical statistics including probability 
distributions, random variables and their transfor- 
mations, expectation, point and interval estima- 
tion, sampling distributions. Prerequisite: 116 or 
equivalent. 

303. Principles of Modern Algebra. 3 cr. 

A study of basic properties of groups, rings, bool- 
ean algebra, and fields. Prerequisities: 115, 116. 

306, 307. Linear Algebra I, II. 3 cr. each 

A study of linear transformations and matrices, 
and models, 307 is identical to Computer Science 
307 in which knowledge of a computer language 
(BASIC, FORTRAN, Pascal) is required. 307 may 
be used to satisfy a mathematics or a Computer 
Science requirement but not both. Prerequisite: 
116 or consent of the department. 

308. Numerical Methods of 

Classical Analysis. 3 cr. 

A computer oriented course in numerical analysis 
introducing elementary techniques for numerical 
solution of problems. A knowledge of Fortran or 
equivalent language is assumed. This course is 
identical to Computer Science 308. It may be used 
to satisfy a Math requirement or a Computer Sci- 
ence requirement but not both. Prerequisite: 215, 
Fortran 111. 



311. Introduction to Number Theory. 3 cr. 

A discussion of divisibility, congruences, qua- 
dratic residues, diophantine equations and 
arithmetical functions. Prerequisite: Proficiency at 
105 level. 

315. Advanced Differential Equations. 3 cr. 

Principally theoretical, this course considers the 
methods of solutions as well as existence and 
uniqueness of solutions, applications, and partial 
differential equations. Prerequisite: 216. 

321. Mathematical Concepts for Physics. 3 cr. 

A survey of the mathematical concepts used in un- 
dergraduate physics, especially quantum mechan- 
ics. Topics covered include vector analysis, matrix 
theory, complex function theory. Fourier series 
and calculus of variations. Prerequisite: 216. 

325. Applications in Statistics. 3 cr. 

This course is intended for students interested in 
statistics and who wish to examine methods in ap- 
plying statistics. Topics include: Aspects of linear 
modeling in regression analysis, experimental de- 
sign and analysis of categorical data. Emphasis is 
placed on applications. Prerequisite: one semester 
of calculus and one semester of statistics. 

335. Discrete Mathematics. 3 cr. 

Designed for students in mathematics, computer 
science and the natural sciences. Topics include 
symbolic logic, techniques of proof, sets, al- 
gorithms, counting, graph theory and grammars 
and languages. Identical to Computer Science 335. 
May be counted toward a major in either math or 
computer science but not both. Prerequisite: Math 
115. 

401. Fundamentals of Geometry. 3 cr. 

The course considers topics in Euclidean and Non- 
Euclidean geometry; also synthetic, projective, 
and affine geometries, and some topology. Prereq- 
uisite: 215. Not offered in regular sequence, but 
available on request. 

403. Introduction to Point Set Topology. 3 cr. 

A survey of elementary topics including topologi- 
cal spaces, compactness, connectedness, conver- 
gence and separation axioms. Prerequisite: 215. 
Not offered in regular sequence, but available on 
request. 

405. Introduction to Complex Variables. 3 cr. 

Topics include the plane of complex numbers, 
functions of a complex variable and integration in 
the complex plane. Prerequisite: 216. Not offered 
in regular sequence, but available on request. 

415, 416. Advanced Calculus I, II. 3 cr. each 

A rigorous study of the calculus and its founda- 
tion. Prerequisite: 216. 

431. Introduction to Biostatistics. 3 cr. 

Intended primarily for upper level pharmacy and 
biology students; acquaints the student with some 
of the common statistical techniques applied to re- 
search and data analysis in the life sciences. Not 
counted toward a major. 



42 



491 to 499. Selected Topics 

in Mathematics. 1-3 cr. each 

This is an honors course. Topics selected in consul- 
tation with staff. 



COMPUTER SCIENCE PROGRAM 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

A minimum of 30 semester hours is required for 
the major. These must include the core courses 
112, 201, and 202. Either 102 or 111 (but not both) 
may be included in the major and the remaining 
courses must be selected from those numbered 300 
and above. Extradepartmental requirements: Eng- 
lish 385 Professional and Technical Writing, Math 
115, 116. Contact the Computer Science Division 
for extradepartmental requirements in particular 
area of concentration. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

A minimum of 18 semester hours is required for 
the minor. These must include the core courses 
112, 201 and 202 and 9 hours of computer science 
selected from courses numbered 300 and above. 

Note: Many of the courses in the Computer Sci- 
ence Division may be taken as electives by those 
not enrolled in the major or minor programs. Any 
such selections, however, must be cleared by the 
advisor through a representative of the Computer 
Science Division. 

100. Elements of Computer Science. 3 cr. 

A computer appreciation course, covering a survey 
of computer organization, computer languages 
and the history of computers. Not counted toward 
computer science major or minor. 

101. Introduction to Computer 
Science/Basic. 3 cr. 

An introductory course for those who have had no 
prior computer science courses or those seeking a 
general introduction to computers. Emphasis is on 
structured programming. BASIC is used as the 
programming language. 

102. COBOL. 3 cr. 

Structured programming principles and tech- 
niques are introduced using the COBOL lan- 
guage. Topics discussed are top down techniques, 
program and project documentation, file structure 
and the organization of programming languages. 

HI. FORTRAN. 3 cr. 

Elements of FORTRAN skills to construct al- 
gorithms for efficient solution of computational 
problems are presented. Recommended for those 
in science and pre-engineering. 

112. Pascal. 3 cr. 

This course develops the student's skills in the use 
of procedure oriented languages, and emphasizes 
structured programming. 



201. Machine Language Programming. 3 cr. 

A survey of various machine configurations. Top- 
ics include number systems, machine language 
programming, assemblers and macro-assemblers. 
Prerequisite: 112 Pascal. 

202. Data Structures. 3 cr. 

Introduction to the theory of graphs and trees and 
their realization as computer programs. A thor- 
ough study of data structures and algorithms for 
their manipulation. Prerequisite: 112 Pascal. 

301. Computer Logic. 3 cr. 

Basic concepts used in the design and analysis of 
digital systems. Required course for 302. Prerequi- 
site: 112 Pascal. 

302. Computer Organization. 3 cr. 

An introduction to current system structures of 
control, communications, memories, processors 
and I/O devices. Prerequisite: 201 Machine Lan- 
guage Programming, 301 Computer Logic. 

305. Introduction to File Processing. 3 cr. 

This course is designed to introduce concepts and 
techniques of structuring data on bulk storage de- 
vices, to provide experience in the use of bulk stor- 
age devices and to provide the foundation for 
applications of data structures and file processing 
techniques. Prerequisite: 102 Cobol, 202 Data 
Structures. 

306. Introduction to Operating 

Systems. 3 cr. 

I/O Hardware, properties of magnetic tapes, discs, 
drums, associative memories, virtual address 
translation techniques, batch processing, time 
sharing, scheduling, resource allocation are 
among the topics covered. Prerequisite: 201 Ma- 
chine Language Programming, 202 Data Struc- 
tures. 

307. Numerical Methods of 

Linear Systems. 3 cr. 

This course deals with basic algorithms of numeri- 
cal computation of linear algebra. The use of math- 
ematical subroutine packages are included. This 
course is identical to Math 307. It may be used to 
satisfy either a Math or Computer Science require- 
ment but not both. Prerequisite: knowledge of BA- 
SIC, FORTRAN or Pascal is required. Math 116 
and Math 306. I 

308. Numerical Methods of ' 
Classical Analysis. 3 cr. 

Introduces the basic algorithms of numerical com- 
putation, their theoretical foundations, and practi- 
cal applications. Programming assignments are 
made to demonstrate the algorithm, the related 
theory, the benefits and the pitfalls associated with 
the method. Identical to Math 308. May be used to 
satisfy either a Math or Computer Science require- 
ment but not both. Prerequisite: 111 Fortran or 112 
Pascal and Math 116. 

309. Computers and Society. 3 cr. 

A course designed to keep the student abreast of 
the current state of the art of computer science and 



43 



technology and of the role that computers play in 
society. This seminar format course will discuss 
the uses and misuses of computers in society and 
will underline the basic assumptions, values and 
ethics which should govern the use of computer 
systems. 

311. Data Base Management 

Systems Designs 3 cr. 

Introduction of data base concepts and approaches 
to data base management. Topics include choice 
and design of data structures, design of user ori- 
ented languages for updating and retrieving infor- 
mation constraints and problems associated with 
the use of generalized data management systems. 
Prerequisite: 102 Cobol, 202 Data Structure, and 
305 Intro to File Processing. 

312. Artificial Intelligence. 3 cr. 

Introduction to the theory of abstract mathemati- 
cal machines. Structured and behavioral classifica- 
tion of automata, finite state automata, theory of 
regular sets, turning machines are among topics 
considered. Prerequisite: 202 Data Structure. 

335. Discrete Mathematics. 3 cr. 

Designed for students in computer science, math- 
ematics and the natural sciences. Topics include 
symbolic logic, techniques of proof, sets, al- 
gorithms, counting, graph theory and grammars 
and languages. Identical to Mathematics 335. May 
be counted toward a major in either math or com- 
puter science but not both. Prerequisite: Math 115. 

414. Software Design and Development. 

An overview of system software. Examination of 
design and development of macro assemblers, 
compilers and control program functions. Prereq- 
uisite: 302, 306. 

415. Theory of Programming 

Languages. 3 cr. 

Comparative study of properties and applications 
of several higher level programming languages. 
Prerequisite: 112 Pascal and 202 Data Structure. 

419. Introduction to Micro and 

Mini Computers. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the designs of micro and mini 
computers. Exploration of assembler and special- 
ized languages for small computers. Prerequisites: 
201 Machine Language Programming and 301 
Computer Logic. 

420. Computer Simulation. 3 cr. 

The fundamentals of simulation via digital and an- 
alog computers will be presented. Modern devel- 
opment and solution by numerical and analytical 
methods will be discussed in depth with emphasis 
on practical applications. Prerequisite: 112 Pascal, 
and a course in statistics. 

421. Applications in Data Processing. 3 cr. 

Data handling in terms of coding, preparation, ac- 
quisition, summarization, and tabulation and 
analysis using packaged programs. Prerequisite: 
112 Pascal. 



423. Information Systems. 3 cr. 

Application of information systems to various ar- 
eas as education, business, medicine, law and 
public administration. Any one of the areas will be 
studied in detail. Prerequisite: 202 Data Struc- 
tures. 

491-499. Selected Topics in 

Computer Science. 1-3 cr. 

Topics selected in consultation with the advisor 
and the department. 



DEPARTMENT OF MODERN 
LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES. 

The Department of Modern Languages offers 
courses in French, German, Italian, Russian, 
Spanish and Swahili. On the elementary and in- 
termediate level in French, German, and Spanish, 
the student may choose from two "tracks" of lan- 
guage courses, both of which satisfy College de- 
gree requirements. One of these emphasizes 
reading and other reading, writing, speaking, and 
aural comprehension. In conversation and compo- 
sition courses, the student's fluency in the active 
use of the language is strengthened. Subsequent 
courses stress primarily literary studies in which 
the student is systematically introduced to a sur- 
vey of the literature and is given a working ac- 
quaintance with the culture of the groups whose 
language he is studying. Choice of courses dealing 
with specific works, authors, and auxiliary sub- 
jects is also presented. 

The student possessing a knowledge of foreign 
languages will find career opportunities in a num- 
ber of fields such as: education, government em- 
ployment, foreign service, social work, industry, 
and tourism. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

The Department offers major programs in French, 
German, and Spanish. In addition, it offers minor 
programs in these languages, Italian and Russian, 
as well as non-major courses in Swahili. 

The major program in Modern Languages and 
Literatures consists of a minimum of 24 semester 
hours at the 300 level and above. Required courses 
are: 

French: 301, 302, 462, 463. Majors will discuss their 
courses with their advisors. 

German: 306, 460, 461. Majors will discuss their 
courses with their advisors. 

Spanish: 301, 302, 401, 402, 453, 454. Majors will 
discuss their courses with their advisors. 
Elementary and intermediate courses must be 
taken in sequence. It is recommended that stu- 
dents not take advanced courses out of progres- 
sion. Credit toward the major or minor will not be 
given for 201, 202, 211, 212, or 239, 240 which are 
intermediate level courses: 302 is the recom- 
mended prerequisite to all courses numbered 312 
and above. 



It is recommended that majors in the Depart- 
ment include a course in the art of the country in 
whose language they specialize as well as one 
course of literature in translation in the literature of 
a country other than that of their major. 

A maximum of 12 transfer credits will be ac- 
cepted toward the major. 

junior Year Abroad. Majors are strongly encour- 
aged but not obliged to participate in programs ap- 
proved in advance by the Department, Further 
information may be obtained at the Department 
office. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

The minor program consists of a minimum of 12 
semester hours at the 300 level and above. 

490. Independent Field Study. 

(All Languages) Var. cr. 

The student will participate, under the supervi- 
sion and guidance of the instructor, in selected 
tours to various foreign countries to undertake in- 
dependent study on selected and approved pro- 
jects involving the exploration and study of 
histor^^ life, work, arts and culture. Prerequisite: 
Prior permission of the instructor and Department 
Chairman. 

495. Professional Language Internship. 3 cr. 

An unpaid internship consisting of 100-120 hours 
of supervised work for which the student will re- 
ceive three credits. See Department for particu- 
lars. 



French 

101, 102. Elementary French. 3 cr. each 

Fundamentals of oral and written French. Three 
hours lecture and one hour laboratory each week. 

Ill, 112. Elementary French 

for Reading. 3 cr. each 

The course will stress basic grammar and structure 
for reading comprehension. 

115, 116. French for Musicians. 3 cr. each 

Specially designed for majors in music to provide 
them with those skills in French to meet their pro- 
fessional requisites. Registration limited to stu- 
dents in the School of Music. This course does not 
allow for continuation at the 200 level or higher. 

120. Intensive French. 6 cr. 

Fundamentals of oral and written French. Utilizes 
a different approach allowing the student to com- 
plete one year's work in one semester. Six lecture 
hours and one-hour laboratory each week. 

201, 202. Intermediate French. 3 cr. each 

An intensified review and continuation of 101, 102. 
Prerequisite: 102 or equivalent. 



211, 212. Intermediate French 
for Reading. 

Prerequisite: 102 or 112. 



3 cr. each 



220. Intensive French. 6 cr. 

Review and continuation of 120. Utilizes tech- 
niques allowing the student to complete one-year's 
work in one semester. Prerequisite: 120, 102 or 
equivalent. 

239, 240. Readings in Modern 

French Authors. 3 cr. each 

Selections from modern works of literature. Do 
not carry credit toward a major or minor. Prerequi- 
site: 202 or equivalent. 

301, 302. French Conversation and 
Composition. 3 cr. each 

302 or its equivalent is the recommended prerequi- 
site to all courses above 302. Prerequisite: 202 or 
equivalent. 

320-345. Pro-Seminar in French 

Literature and Culture. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 320 through 345 are pro- 
seminars in literature and culture. The following 
courses represent current pro-seminar offerings. 
They will be offered on a rotated basis and/or as 
circumstances warrant from semester to semester. 
All pro-seminars carry three credits a semester. 
Recommended prerequisite: French 302 or its 
equivalent. 

320. Stylistics. 3 cr. 

Comparative study of English /French style in spo- 
ken and written French. 

321. Phonetics. 3 cr. 

Mechanics of phonation with comparative 
English-French application to phonemic analysis 
of French. 

322. Theatre de L'Avant-Garde. 3 cr. 

The "avante-garde" theatre since 1950: lonesco, 
Beckett, Genet, Schehade, Vian, Pinget. 

323. Maupassant. 3 cr. 

Consideration of one of the most popular writers 
in France in the 1880's. Selected short stories and 

novels. 

324. Balzac. 3 cr. 

Study of Honore de Balzac (1799-1850), author of 
the vast Comedie humaine. Selected novels. 

325. Realism and Naturalism. 3 cr. 

Theories of the two movements in the latter part of 
the 19th Century. Their manifestations in prose 
works from Balzac to Zola. 

326. The Literature of the Existentialist 
Movement. 3 cr. 

Analysis and discussion of selected works of A. 
Camus, J. P. Sartre, and G. Marcel. 

327. The Symbolist Movement in 

French Poetry. 3 cr. 

A basic introduction to the Symbolist movement, 
with emphasis on hermetic poetry of Mallarme' 
and Rimbaud. 

328. French Poetry: Middle Ages to 19th 
Century. 3 cr. 

Study of mechanics of prosody, various genres, 
periods, movements in French poetry. 



45 



329. 17th Century French Literature. 3 cr. 

Emphasis on 17th Century French prose and po- 
etry. Will also include a play of Corneille, Racine, 
and Moliere. 

330. French Prose of the 19th Century. 3 cr. 

Consideration of the French prose of the first half 
of the century: Chateaubriand, Balzac, Stendhal. 

331. 18th Century French Literature. 3 cr. 

An overview of the Steele des lumieres, with empha- 
sis on the four major philosophers: Montesquieu, 
Voltaire, Diderot, and Rousseau. 

332. Voltaire and His Age. 3 cr. 

In-depth work on Voltaire, plus one other writer of 
the period, such as Prevost, Beaumarchais, 
Bernardin de Saint-Pierre, etc. 

360. French for Business. 3 cr. 

Spoken and written language of business French. 
Conventions of letter writing, import, export, and 
commercial transactions. 

460-475. Seminar in French 

Literature. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 460 through 475 are semi- 
nars in literature, designed to offer the advanced 
undergraduate student the opportunity to study 
various aspects of literature in greater depth. The 
following courses represent current seminar offer- 
ings: they will be offered on a rotated basis and/or 
as circumstances warrant from semester to semes- 
ter. All seminars carry three credits a semester. 
French 462 and 463 are recommended prerequi- 
sites for these courses. 

460. History and Culture of France 

since the Revolution. 3 cr. 

From the Revolution to today. 

462. Chanson de Roland through 

17th Century. 3 cr. 

Literary Survey I. Main authors and movements of 
the Middle Ages, 16th, and 17th Centuries. 

463. 18th Century to Modern Period. 3 cr. 

Literary Survey II. Main authors and movements 
of the 18th, 19th, and 20th Centuries. 

French 462 and 463 are recommended prerequi- 
sites for these courses. 

464. 17th Century French Theatre. 3 cr. 

An overview of the theatre of le grand siecle. Em- 
phasis on Corneille, Moliere, and Racine. 

465. 18th Centiuy French Theatre. 3 cr. 

An overview of the major dramatists of the cen- 
tury, including Marivaux, Voltaire, and Beaumar- 
chais. 

466. 19th Century French Poetry. 3 cr. 

The major poetic movements of the 19th Century: 
Romanticism, Parnassianism, Symbolism, with a 
special emphasis on Baudelaire. 

467. 19th Century French Novel. 3 cr. 

Selected novels from the 19th Century, from Ro- 
manticism to Naturalism. 



468. 19th Century French Theatre. 3 cr. 

Beginning with the influence of the Revolution on 
French literature, through the literary movements 
of the century. Emphasizes works written for the 
stage and currents in criticism and directing. 

469. 20th Century French Poetry. 3 cr. 

Ambivalence of modern French poetry after 
Baudelaire. Will consider Apollinaire, Valery, 
Breton, Aragon, Eluard, Cocteau, Supervielle, 
Saint-Jean Perse. 

470. 20th Century French Novel. 3 cr. 

From A. France to Robbe-Grillet and the "New 
Novel." 

471. 20th Century French Theatre. 3 cr. 

From Jules Romains to lonesco and the Theatre of 
the Absurd. 

472. Sartre and Camus. 3 cr. 

Contrastive study of Sartre and Camus and their 
works. 

480. Directed Readings. Var. cr. 

Readings of literary texts under close faculty su- 
pervision, for majors only and only with written 
permission of the Department. Variable credit. 

German 

101, 102. Elementary German. 3 cr. each 

Fundamentals of oral and written German. Three 
hours lecture and one hour laboratory each week. 

HI, 112. Elementary German for 

Reading. 3 cr. each 

The course will stress basic grammar and structure 
for reading comprehension. 

115, 116. German for Musicians. 3 cr. each 

Specially designed for majors in music to provide 
them with those skills in German to meet their 
professional requisites. Registration limited to stu- 
dents in the School of Music. This course does not 
allow for continuation at the 200 level or higher. 

201, 202. Intermediate German. 3 cr. 

An intensified review and continuation of 101, 102. 
Prerequisite: 102 or equivalent. 

211, 212. Intermediate German 

for Reading. 3 cr. each 

Prerequisite: 102 or 112. 

239, 240. Readings in Modern 

German Authors. 3 cr. each 

Selections from modern works of literature. Do 
not carry credit toward a major or minor Prerequi- 
site: 202 or equivalent. 

252. Readings in Scientific German. 3 cr. 

Prerequisite: 102 or equivalent. 

306. German Conversation and Composition. 3 cr. 

306 or its equivalent is the recommended prerequi- 
site to all courses above 306. Prerequisite: 202 or 
equivalent. 



46 



320-345. Pro-Seminar in German 

Literature and Culture. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 320 through 345 are pro- 
seminars in literature and culture. The following 
courses represent current pro-seminar offerings. 
They will be offered on a rotated basis and/or as 
circumstances warrant from semester to semester. 
All pro-seminars carry three credits a semester. 
Recommended Prerequisite: German 302 or equiv- 
alent. 

320. History of German Culture 

from the Franks to Hitler. 3 cr. 

The artistic, socio-historical, and literary expres- 
sions of German culture from the earliest periods 
to World War II. 

321. History of German Culture 

from Hitler to the Present. 3 cr. 

The artistic, socio-political, and literary manifesta- 
tions of German culture from Hitler to the present. 

324. Popular Tradition 

in German Literature. 3 cr. 

Emphasis on poetic verse, fairy tales, folk tales, 
legends, heroic tales, jocular tales. 

325. Popular Tradition 

in German Literature. 3 cr. 

Study of popular literature such as sagas, animal 
fables, chap books, as well as selected, more com- 
plex fairy tales and legends. 

329. Introduction to German Poetry. 3 cr. 

German verse from early modern times to contem- 
porary. Narrative, dramatic, and epic verse. Em- 
phasis on brief lyric verse. 

330. Modern German Prose. 3 cr. 

Individual's search for identity in the prose works 
of Thomas Mann, F. Kafka, H. Hesse, and H. Boll. 

331. Modern German Theatre. 3 cr. 

From the introduction of naturalism into German 
drama in the late 19th Century to the most recent 
movements since World War II. Will discuss 
Hauptmann, Brecht, Zuckmayer, Diirrenmatt and 
Frisch. 

460, 475. Seminar in German 

Literature. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 460 through 475 are semi- 
nars in literature, designed to offer the advanced 
undergraduate student the opportunity to study 
various aspects of literature in greater depth. 

The following courses represent current seminar 
offerings: they will be offered on a rotated basis 
and/or as circumstances warrant from semester to 
semester. All seminars carry three credits a semes- 
ter. Recommended prerequisite: German 302. 

460. German Literature to Lessing. 3 cr. 

German literature from the Middle Ages up to and 
including the early 18th Century. 

461. Lessing: His Life and Works. 3 cr. 

Lessing's major literary and critical works consid- 
ered in relation to his life. 



462. Advanced German Stylistics. 3 cr. 

Comparative study of German/English style in 
spoken and written German. 

464. German Romantic Literature. 3 cr. 

The German Romantic movement following the 
Napoleon era. The role of the individual in the 
works of Novalis, Tieck, etc. 

465. Modern German Narrative. 3 cr. 

The process of alienation in modern German nar- 
rative. Includes novels by H. Hesse and T Mann. 

467. Age of Goethe. 3 cr. 

Study of important works of Goethe and his near 
contemporaries. Emphasis on Lessing, Goethe, 
Schiller. Also "Sturm und Drang" authors. 

468. Goethe's Faust. 3 cr. 

Emphasis on the spirit of the 18th Century as per- 
sonified in Goethe's Faust. 

470. Literature of Enlightenment. 3 cr. 

Consideration of late "baroque" and early "classi- 
cists", including Gellert, Gottsched, Hamann, 
Lichtenberg, Klopstock, Seume, Giinther, 
Wieland. 

471. Sturm und Drang. 3 cr. 

Storm and Stress as Germany's literary revolution 
against the despotic tyrants of the 18th Century. 
Includes Goethe's The Sorrows of Young Werther and 
Schiller's The Robbers. 

480. Directed Readings. Var. cr. 

Reading of literary texts under close faculty super- 
vision; for majors only and only with written per- 
mission of the Department. Variable credit. 

Italian 

101, 102. Elementary Italian. 3 cr. each 

Fundamentals of oral and written Italian. Three 
lecture hours and one hour laboratory each week. 

115, 116. Italian for Musicians. 3 cr. each 

Specially designed for majors in music to provide 
them with those skills in Italian to meet their pro- 
fessional requisites. Registration limited to stu- 
dents in the School of Music. This course does not 
allow for continuation at the 200 level or higher. 

201, 202. Intermediate Italian. 3 cr. each 

An intensified review and continuation of 101, 102. 
Prerequisite: 102, or equivalent. 

306. Advanced Italian Conversation 

and Composition. 3 cr. 

Prerequisite 202 or equivalent. Recommended pre- 
requisite for all courses above 306. 

314, 315. Individual Study. Var. Cr. 

Prerequisite: 202 or equivalent. 

320-345. Pro-Seminar in Italian 

Literature and Culture. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 320 through 345 are pro- 
seminars in literature and culture. The following 
courses represent current pro-seminar offerings. 
They will be offered on a rotated basis and/or as 



47 



circumstances warrant from semester to semester. 
All pro-seminars carry three credits a semester. 

321. Modern Italian Novel 

(Levi, Buzzati, Cassola, Moravia). 3 cr. 

A study of the works of significant representatives 
of neorealism, analyzed within the framework of 
the social and political atmosphere of pre- and 
post- World War II Italy 

322. Commercial Italian. 3 cr. 

A review of the basic grammatical structures of 
Italian composition and commercial correspon- 
dence, with stress on the vocabulary and the 
phraseology required in business letter writing 
and other commercial transactions. 

323. Pirandello, Svevo, Pavese. 3 cr. 

Analysis and stylistic comparison of these three 
writers representative of the literary evolvement 
after verismo to the psychological novel and drama, 
and to neorealism. 

324. Introduction to Italian Poetry. 3 cr. 

A study of the works of the most important mod- 
ern Italian poets, from Carducci to D'Annunzio. 

325. Introduction to Italian Poetry. 3 cr. 

A continuation of 324. Study of contemporary po- 
ets, with special emphasis on the works of two No- 
bel laureates, Quasimodo and Montale. 

326. History of Italian Civilization. 3 cr. 

The evolution of Italian Civilization with emphasis 
on Humanism and the Renaissance. 

Russian 

101, 102. Elementary Russian. 3 cr. each 

Fundamentals of oral and written Russian. Three 
hours lecture, one hour laboratory each week. 

201, 202. Intermediate Russian. 3 cr. each 

An intensified review and continuation of 101, 102. 
Prerequisite: 102 or equivalent. 

306. Advanced Russian Conversation 

and Composition. 3 cr. 

Prerequisite 202 or equivalent. Recommended pre- 
requisite for all courses above 306. 

314, 315. Individual Study. Var. Cr. 

Prerequisite: 202 or equivalent. 

320-345. Pro-Seminar in Russian 

Literature and Culture. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 320 through 345 are pro- 
seminars in literature and culture. The following 
courses represent current pro-seminar offerings. 
They will be offered on a rotated basis and/or as 
circumstances warrant from semester to semester. 
All pro-seminars carry three credits a semester. 

320. A. R Chekhov. 3 cr. 

Chekhov's stories studied against the social, politi- 
cal and philosophic background of his time. 
Course conducted essentially in Russian. 

321. 19th Centiuy Russian Short Story. 3 cr. 
The development of the short story from Pushkin 
to Chekhov. The aim of this course is to develop 



critical analysis of selected works, focusing on 
their philosophical content and political environ- 
ment. Course conducted essentially in Russian. 

322. Commercial Russian. 3 cr. 

Spoken and written language of business Russian, 
conventions of letter writing, import, export, and 
commercial transactions. 

323. Russian Folklore. 3 cr. 

Russian folklore as oral tradition. Particular atten- 
tion to traditions, festivals, rituals, epics, ballads 
and fairy tales. Course conducted in Russian. 

324. Contemporary Russian Literature. 3 cr. 

Study of short stories of Soviet writers. Represent- 
ing ideological positions and evolutional trends 
from the revolution to Solzenitsyn. Course con- 
ducted essentially in Russian. 

Spanish 

101, 102. Elementary Spanish. 3 cr. each 

Fundamentals of oral and written Spanish. Three 
hours lecture, one hour laboratory each week. 

HI, 112. Elementary Spanish for 

Reading. 3 cr. each 

The course will stress basic grammar and structure 
for reading comprehension. 

120. Intensive Spanish. 6 cr. 

Fundamentals of oral and written Spanish. Uti- 
lizes a different approach allowing the student to 
complete one year's work in one semester. Six lec- 
ture hours and one-hour laboratory each week. 

131, 132. Elementary Spanish 

for Industry. 3 cr. each 

Fundamentals of oral and written Spanish, with 
emphasis on basic business vocabulary and forms. 
Three hours lecture per week, (Restricted to eve- 
ning students). 

201, 202. Intermediate Spanish. 3 cr. each 

An intensified continuation of 101 and 102. Prereq- 
uisite: 102 or equivalent. 

211, 212. Intermediate Spanish 

for Reading. 3 cr. each 

Prerequisite: 102 or 112. 

220. Intensive Spanish. 6 cr. 

Review and continuation of 120. Utilizes tech- 
niques allowing the student to complete one-year's 
work in one semester. Prerequisite: 120, 102 or 
equivalent. 

231, 232. Intermediate Spanish 

for Industry. 3 cr. each 

An intensified continuation of 131, 132. Three 
hours lecture per week. (Restricted to evening stu- 
dents). Prerequisite: 132 or equivalent. 

239. Readings in Modern Spanish 

Authors. 3 cr. 

Selection from modern works of literature. Does 
not carry credit toward major or minor. Prerequi- 
site: 202 or equivalent. 



48 



240. Readings in Modern 

Spanish-American Authors. 3 cr. 

Selection from modern \vorks of literature. Does 
not carry credit toward major or minor. Prerequi- 
site: 202 or equivalent. 

301, 302. Spanish Conversation 

and Composition. 3 cr. each 

302 or equivalent is the recommended prerequisite 
to all courses above 302. Prerequisite: 202 or equiv- 
alent. 

320-345. Pro-Seminar in Spanish 

Literature and Culture. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 320 through 345 are pro- 
seminars in literature and culture. The following 
courses represent current pro-seminar offerings. 
They will be offered on a rotated basis and/or as 
circumstances warrant from semester to semester. 
All pro-seminars carry three credits a semester. 
The recommended prerequisite: Spanish 302 or 
equivalent. 

322. The Nineteenth Century Novel. 

(New Title) 3 cr. 

Examines the realist, naturalist, and regionalist 
novel in the works of Galdo's, Clarin, Pardo Bazan, 
Pereda, and Valera. 

323. Don Juan as a World Literary Figure. 3 cr. 

Principal plays and narrative poems dealing with 
the theme from its origins in Seventeenth Century 
Spain through modern times. Authors include 
Tirso de Molina, Moliere, Mozart, Byron, Zorilla, 
and G. B. Shaw. (In translation) 

324. The Generation of 98. 3 cr. 

Major works of Spain's turn of the century authors 
in their aesthetic and historical contents. Includes: 
Unamuno, Azorin, A. Machado, Pio Baroja, J.R. 
Jimenez and Vallee Incla'n. 

325. Contemporary Spanish Novel. 3 cr. 

The Spanish Novel since the Civil War. From Cela 
to the present. 

326. Contemporary Spanish- 
American Novel. 3 cr. 

Most recent developments in the novel in histori- 
cal perspective. From Asturias through Garcia 
Marquez and Sarduy. 

327. History of Spanish Culture. 3 cr. 

The literary, historical, social, political and artistic 
manifestations of Spanish culture from its origins 
to the post-Franco era. 

328. Modern Spanish Theatre. 3 cr. 

From Buero Vallejo to the present, including the 
"Underground Theatre". 

329. Revolt and Change: 

The Spanish American Novel. 3 cr. 

Nature and types of protest expressed in modern 
Spanish-American Literature. Major works of 
"protest Literature". 



330. Theatre of the Golden Age. 3 cr. 

Reading and discussion of works of the major 
dramatists of the period: selected plays by Lope de 
Vega, Calderdn and Tirso de Molina. 

360. Spanish for Business. 3 cr. 

Spoken and written language of business Spanish. 
Conventions of letter writing, import, and com- 
mercial transactions. 

401. Spanish Literature from the Cid 

through the Siglo de Oro. 3 cr. 

Survey of major works from the Medieval Period 
through the 17th Century. 

402. Spanish Literature from the 

18th Century to the Present. 3 cr. 

Survey of works representative of the major liter- 
ary movements of the 18th, 19th, and 20th Cen- 
tury. 

453. Trends in Latin American Literature. 3 cr. 

Major movements and representative works from 
Pre-Columbian period through Romanticism. 

454. Trends in Latin American Literature. 3 cr. 

Major movements and representative works from 
Modernismo to the present. 

460-475. Seminar in Spanish 

Literature. 3 cr. each 

All courses numbered 460 through 475 are semi- 
nars in literature, designed to offer the advanced 
undergraduate student the opportunity to study 
various aspects of literature in greater depth. The 
following courses represent current seminar offer- 
ings: they will be offered on a rotated basis and/or 
as circumstances warrant from semester to semes- 
ter. All seminars carry three credits a semester. 
Recommended prerequisite: Spanish 401-402 or 
equivalent. 

460. The Quixote. 3 cr. 

An in-depth study of Cervantes' masterpiece and 
of the symbolic meaning of the two main charac- 
ters. 

461. Spanish Literature since 

the Civil War. 3 cr. 

The Civil War as mirrored in this literature. Its rela- 
tionship to contemporaneous literary expression 
in other countries. From Hernandez through Goy- 
tisolo and Sastre. 

462. Avant-Garde 

Spanish-American Threatre. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the avant-garde theatre in 
Spanish America. Historical perspective. Influ- 
ence of European avant-garde. 

463. Lorca and the Generation of 1927. 3 cr. 

Major poets of the "Lorca-Guillen generation" 
who brought Spanish poetry to the new "Siglo de 
Oro". 

464. The Literature of the Siglo de Oro. 3 cr. 

Spain's most glorious era through the poetry, 
prose, and drama of its major authors. 



49 



465. Literature of Spanish Romanticism. 3 cr. 

Study of the major poems, plays and historical 
novels of the period. Authors include Duque de 
Rivas, Espronceda, Larra, Becquer, Rosalia de Cas- 
tro and Zorilla. 

466. The Age of Enlightenment. 3 cr. 

From Fei joo to Cadalso to Larra, we see how the 
fundamental principles of the modern world have 
their seeds in this century. 

467. Readings in Medieval Literature. 3 cr. 

The development of Spanish literature from its 
oral tradition as well as the evolution of the Span- 
ish language, beginning with the "jarchas" 
through La Celestina. 

480. Directed Readings. 

Readings of literary texts under close faculty su- 
pervision: for majors only and only with written 
permission of the Department. Variable credit. 

Swahili 

101, 102. Elementary Swahili. 3 cr. each 

Fundamentals of oral and written Swahili. Three 
lecture hours and one hour laboratory each week. 

201, 202. Intermediate Swahili. 3 cr. each 

An intensified continuation of 101 and 102. Prereq- 
uisite: 102 or equivalent. 

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY 

Chairman: Charles D. Keyes, Ph.D. 

The program offered by the Department of Philos- 
ophy is designed to be a basic part of the student's 
liberal education. It is intended to introduce stu- 
dents to philosophical thinking, past and present, 
to provide a discipline for asking the basic ques- 
tions of life and to help students begin relating 
their other academic subjects to one another and 
to human experience. The Department, made up 
of professors who have different philosophical in- 
terests, attempts to develop the capacity for inde- 
pendent thinking on all issues. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

The Department requires majors to take nine phi- 
losophy courses above the 100 level: of these nine 
courses, three must be selected from the Historical 
Sequence, and two from the sequence of Ad- 
vanced Courses. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

Five courses are required for a minor: one from the 
Introductory Courses (104 to 107), two from the Ba- 
sic Courses (200 to 217), and two from the Histori- 
cal Sequence and Advanced Courses (300 and 400 
levels) . 

Introductory Courses 

104. Introduction to Philosophy. 3 cr. 

A first-hand study of selected philosophical texts 
from both traditional and existential perspectives 



with the aim of introducing students to the nature 
of philosophical thinking, and to the variety of 
philosophical issues, area, methods, and theories. 

105. Ethics. 3 cr. 

An introduction to ethical theories of past and 
present time. Contemporary moral issues will be 
considered in the light of these theories. 

106. Introductory Logic. 3 cr. 

Analysis of the requirements for valid reasoning, 
logical fallacies, types of definitions, and impor- 
tant informal aspects of arguments in ordinary dis- 
course will be studied in addition to the formal 
logic of inferences involving simple and com- 
pound statements. 

107. Medical Ethics. 3 cr. 

Ethical questions that arise in medical care and re- 
search will be examined. Topics might include: ex- 
perimentation on animals and man, allocation of 
scarce medical resources, euthanasia, the privi- 
leged relationship of doctor and patient, etc. 

108. Business Ethics. 3 cr. 

This course, designed primarily for business ma- 
jors, begins with a discussion of some general ethi- 
cal issues and, in particular, the problem of a just 
distribution of wealth. These discussions are ap- 
plied to concrete current business problems. 

Basic Courses 

200. Introduction to Phenomenology. 3 cr. 

The basic approach to philosophical issues devel- 
oped by Huserl, the founder of Phenomenology, 
will be explored; the types of signs, meaning, the 
possibility of philosophy as rigorous science, etc. 
are considered. 

203. Philosophy of Religion. 3 cr. 

Introduction to the nature of religious experience. 
Topics such as: religious symbolism; belief and un- 
belief, the existence of evil, and free will, will be 
considered. Assigned readings include both tradi- 
tional and contemporary writers. 

204. Literature and Philosophy. 3 cr. 

Explores philosophical themes as they emerge 
within great works of literature. Works will be se- 
lected from such authors as: Sophocles, Dante, 
Shakespeare, Goethe, and Dostoyevski. 

205. Existential Phenomenology. 3 cr. 

Examination of the methods and style of thought 
which characterizes existential phenomenology. 
Lectures and discussion on texts by major think- 
ers, such as: Being and Time by Heidegger, Phenom- 
enology of Perception by Merleau-Ponty, and Being 
and Nothingness by Sartre. 

211. Marxism. 3 cr. 

A study of the political philosophy of Karl Marx as 
one of the major directions in social thought: 
Engels, Lenin, and contemporary Marxism. 

212. Political Philosophy. 3 cr. 

Fundamental political questions will be explored. 
For example: Utopian state, freedom, justice, the 



50 



origins of political society, war and empire and rev- 
olution may be considered. Possible authors read: 
Plato, Aristotle, Aquinas, Machiavelli, Hobbes, 
Locke, Rousseau and Hegel. 

214. Philosophy of Sex. 3 cr. 

The course provides an introduction to some of the 
basic themes and texts, both traditional and con- 
temporary, related to the philosophical study of 
sex. It uses histc^rical, analytical and phenomeno- 
logical methods and gives attention to the sexual 
origin of our consciousness of values. 

215. Psychoanalysis and Philosophy. 3 cr. 

Psychoanalysis has had an impact upon and been 
affected by modern philosophy. This course will 
study the presuppositions and implications of 
Freud's thought and that of some other thinkers, 
such as Sartre, Marcuse, Ricoeur. 

216. Communication and Philosophy. 3 cr. 

Speech is man's most important means of com- 
munication. The course will examine the struc- 
ture, purpose, and function of speech in everyday 
usage and in the spheres of politics, science, and 
art. 

217. Elementary Symbolic Logic. 3 cr. 

Introduction to the methods of symbolic logic as 
applied to the logic of arguments involving com- 
pound statements, prepositional functions and 
quantifiers, and relations. 

218. Special Topics. 1-3 cr. 

220. Philosophy of Death and Living. 3 cr. 

The course provides an introduction to some of the 
basic themes and texts, both traditional and con- 
temporary, related to the philosophical study of 
death. Its main purpose is to ask how human be- 
ings can be happy in view of death's certainty; 
therefore it emphasizes the act of living. 

224. Philosophy of Sport. 3 cr. 

A philosophical examination of the nature of 
sport. Particular focus will be upon the ontologi- 
cal, ethical and aesthetic status of the phenome- 
non of sport. 

225. Elements of Thomistic Thought. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the basic concepts and princi- 
pal ideas of Christian philosophy with an empha- 
sis on the thought system of St. Thomas Aquinas. 
The course will cover an introduction to metaphy- 
sics, metaphysical thinking, definition of knowl- 
edge, analogy of being, the principles, structure 
and causes of being, the concept of the transcen- 
dent and the problem of evil. 

255. Philosophy of Technology. 3 cr, 

A philosophical examination of how our lives are 
shaped by technology and the relation of technol- 
ogy with science, religion, ethics, and metaphy- 
sics. 

258. Computerized Formal Logic. 3 cr. 

An introduction to formal logic with computer as- 
sisted tutorials. The course will also deal with 
translating arguments from ordinary language 



into formal symbols and will apply these princi- 
ples to "real world" situations. 

260. Philosophy of Law. 3 cr. 

A study of the major legal traditions. The follow- 
ing topics will be examined: legal reasoning, jus- 
tice and law, ethics and law, legal relations and 
social institutions, philosophical issues involved in 
evidence and procedure, legal and political theo- 
ries, and theories of law. 



Historical Sequence 

300. Ancient Philosophy. 3 cr. 

A study of the beginning of Philosophy in Greece, 
from the Presocratics to Plotinus with readings 
principally taken from Plato and Aristotle. 

301. Medieval Philosophy. 3 cr. 

A philosophical study of medieval texts in English 
translation selected as representatives of the broad 
range of issues, approaches, and theories which 
characterize the major Christian, Jewish, and Is- 
lamic Philosophical thinking of the period. 

302. Early Modern Philosophy. 3 cr. 

Explores the beginning of modern thinking in the 
16th century and proceeds to the time of the 
French Revolution. Course work consists in analy- 
sis of several important texts chosen from such 
philosophers as: Montaigne, Descartes, Pascal, 
Hobbes, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Hume, Kant. 

304. Later Modern Philosophy. 3 cr. 

This course examines the period of modern philos- 
ophy initiated by Kant. It deals primarily with the 
crucial thinkers of the 19th century including: He- 
gel, Feuerbach, Kierkegaard, Marx, Mill, and 
Nietzsche. 

305. Contemporary Philosophy. 3 cr. 

A study of contemporary philosophy from 1900 to 
the present, covering the methods and history of 
selected 20th century movements. 

322. American Philosophy. 3 cr. 

Puritanism, Enlightenment, Transcendentalism, 
Pragmatism, with emphasis on key figures in 
American Philosophy: Peirce, Dewey, James, 
Royce, Santayana, Whitehead, etc. 

323. Oriental Philosophy. 3 cr. 

Introduction to Oriental thought through study of 
its major structures in their historical setting, aim- 
ing at understanding its characteristic vision. Ex- 
amination of perspectives presented by traditions 
such as Confucianism, Taoism, Buddhism, Hindu- 
ism and others. 

325. Concentrated Philosophical 

Readings. 3 cr. 

This course is an in-depth study of one or several 
philosophers such as Plato, Aristotle, Aquinas, 
Occam, Descartes, Kant, Wittgenstein, Strawson, 
Heidegger, etc., varying in subject matter from 
time to time. 



51 



Advanced Courses 

313. Philosophy of the Human Sciences. 3 cr. 

The relations of the human sciences with other sci- 
ences, with philosophy, and with practical life, the 
use of the mathematics and interpretation, and 
other issues will be discussed in relation to past 
and contemporary philosophical and scientific 
thought. 

401, 402. Thomism. 3 cr. each 

Courses dealing with the texts of St. Thomas 
Aquinas. The first semester (401) covers his me- 
taphysics and the second semester (402) deals with 
his philosophy of man. Neo-scholastic interpreta- 
tions of the texts of Aquinas (Maritain, Gilson and 
the school of Marechal and Rahner). 

403. Philosophy of God. 3 cr. 

This course introduces students to selected texts 
and basic themes in types of religious experience 
such as: Babylonian, Greek, and Judeo-Christian. 
It emphasizes such questions as: What is the 
Holy? What is the relation between scientific 
knowledge and religious knowledge? What are the 
various arguments about the existence of God and 
the immortality of the soul? Why is there human 
suffering if God is good and all-powerful? What do 
the symbols of the end of the world mean? Atten- 
tion is given both to traditional and to contempo- 
rary philosophical texts. 

406. Aesthetics. 3 cr. 

An examination of theories of art which explore 
such questions as: the beautiful, creativity, imagi- 
nation, and the role of art in life. Authors such as: 
Aristotle, Lessing, Kant, Hegel, Nietzsche, 
Heidegger, and Camus will be read. 

415, 416. Ancient Philosopher. 3 cr. each 

A course devoted to detailed study of a single an- 
cient thinker, such as Plato or Aristotle. 

420, 421. Medieval Philosopher. 3 cr. each 

A leading Medieval thinker or thinkers, such as: 
Augustine, Avicenna, Maimonides, Bonaventure, 
will be studied. 

425, 426. Modern Philosopher. 3 cr. each 

In-depth examination of the work of a single or a 
group of historically modern authors: e.g., ratio- 
nalism (Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz), empiricism 
(Locke, Berkeley, Hume), Kant, Hegel, Nietzsche. 

430, 431. Contemporary Philosopher. 3 cr. each 

Concentration upon a single contemporary philos- 
opher: e.g., Husserl, Heidegger, Sartre, Merleau- 
Ponty, Whitehead, Wittgenstein. 

435. Senior Seminar. 3 cr. 

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 

Acting Chairman: Reginald A. Ney, M.S. 

The program in the Department of Physics is pri- 
marily aimed at providing today's students with a 
fundamental background in traditional Physics as 
well as the interrelationships with other sciences 



and disciplines. The Department is also aware that 
in today's changing world, there must be a suit- 
ably flexible program which will best fit the gradu- 
ate for the challenges faced in the many 
professions which are based on the science of 
Physics. There is always the hope that the student 
will continue professional growth in Physics but it 
is also realized that there are many expanding 
paths to professional growth. The Department 
program, therefore is structured to provide the es- 
sential background for success in graduate studies 
in the many current fields which seek Physics 
graduates, as well as equipping the student to suc- 
cessfully compete for the available positions in re- 
search institutions, government agencies or 
private corporations. Department policy calls for 
individual attention to student needs. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

A minimum of 32 semester hours is required for a 
major. These credits must include: 211, 212, 301, 
329, 330, 361, 372, 402, 430, 473, 474, (483, 484, or 
485 may be substituted for 474 with departmental 
approval) . 

Extradepartmental Requirements: Chemistry' 121, 
122 or Biology HI, 112; Mathematics 115, 116, 215, 
216, 308, Computer Science HI, and two years of 
modem language. 

If a student takes 207, 208-Physics and the Mod- 
ern World and either 201, 202-General Physics or 
211, 212-General Analytical Physics, the credits for 
the 207, 208 will not apply to the total number re- 
quired for the degree. Credit will not be given for 
both 201, 202 and 211, 212. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PHYSICS 
MINOR 

The minor consists of eight hours in the General 
Analytical Physics (211, 212) and 12 credits of up- 
per division physics on the 300 and above level. 
The department will structure the minor program 
from the course offerings to fit, as nearly as possi- 
ble, the needs and desires of the individual stu- 
dent. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE EARTH 
SCIENCE MINOR 

The minor consists of a prerequisite sequence of 
101 and 102, which must be taken as the first 
courses, and 12 credits chosen from 203, 204, 205, 
206, 303, 304, 305, as available to the curriculum. 
Not all courses are taught each semester and some 
are on alternate years. Earth Science 101 is prerequi- 
site to all courses unless waived by the instructor. 

201, 202. General Physics. 4 cr. each 

Designed to give the student a basic knowledge 
and understanding of mechanics, properties of 
matter, heat, wave motion, sound, magnetism, 
electricity, light, and modern physics through the 
use of modern day examples and applications. At 
the completion of this course, the student should 
have attained a working knowledge of physics, its 



52 



techniques and reasoning such that the knowl- 
edge of physics gained may be applied to future 
work in the sciences or other fields of endeavor. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 103, 104 or the equiva- 
lent. Students who have completed Mathematics 
116 and pre-engineering students should take 211, 
212. Lecture, four hours; Laboratory, two hours. 

207, 208. Physics and the 

Modern World. 3 cr, each 

A course especially for the nonscientist. Designed 
to give the student some basis for understanding 
the physics of the twentieth century and the phys- 
icist's approach to the study of nature. The physics 
of everyday life is used as a basis, and classroom 
demonstrations are generously employed to help 
the student grasp concepts by showing concrete 
examples. Prerequisite: High-school mathematics. 

211, 212. General Analytical Physics. 4 cr. each 

An introduction to the fundamental theories and 
applications of classical physics designed for stu- 
dents of science and engineering. A good algebra 
and trigonometry background is presumed and 
methods of using the calculus are presented. 

The approach is strongly quantitative and empha- 
sizes the solving of problems. Mechanics and elec- 
tromagnetism are treated in detail in 211 and 212, 
respectively. Brief treatment of optics and modern 
physics is usually included. Co-requisite for 211: 
Mathematics 116. Lecture, three hours; Labora- 
tory, two hours. 

301. Thermodynamics. 3 cr. 

This is an intermediate level course covering the 
fundamental principles of thermodynamics, ki- 
netic theory and statistical mechanics. The follow- 
ing is a partial list of items generally included: 
temperature, thermodynamic systems, work, 
heat, the first and second laws of thermodynam- 
ics, ideal gases, entropy. Maxwell's equation, the 
kinetic theory of ideal gas, and the basic concept of 
statistical mechanics. Prerequisites: 212, Mathe- 
matics 215. 

306. Applied Electronics Laboratory. 2-3 cr. 

This course seeks to combine a treatment of the 
principles of modern electronic instrumentation 
with practical laboratory experience. Topics which 
will be included are: passive and active electronic 
components, electronic measuring instruments, 
power supplies, amplification, feedback and con- 
trol, linear and digital devices. Emphasis will be on 
understanding instrumentation rather than on ad- 
vanced principles of design. Prerequisite: Permis- 
sion of instructor. 

329. Advanced Laboratory L 1 cr. 

This course is designed to acquaint the students 
with the basics of modern electronics to the extent 
that the student will have a sufficient background 
to design and use simple electronic circuits in fu- 
ture research. A set of experiments is performed 
and analyzed by the students. Subjects covered 
are: the use of research grade electronic instru- 
ments, transducers, diode and transistor circuits. 



transistor design parameters, printed circuit de- 
sign, layout and construction. Prerequisite: 212 or 
202 and consent of instructor. 

330. Advanced Laboratory IL 1 cr. 

A continuation of Advanced Laboratory I which 
includes the following: basic and advanced opera- 
tional amplifier circuitry, digital integrated circuits. 
Gates, Boolean Algebra, I.C. timer circuitry, digital 
flip-flops and counter circuitry, AID & D/A conver- 
sion circuitry, digital meter design and construc- 
tion. Prerequisite: 329 or consent of instructor. 

361. Mechanics. 4 cr. 

An intermediate level theoretical classical mechan- 
ics involving concepts and problems that cannot 
be understood except by using the mathematical 
language of vectors, calculus, matrices, etc. Many 
of the mathematical tools will be reintroduced in 
the course. A good calculus background is indis- 
pensible. The topics normally covered are motion 
of a particle in 3-dimensions, non-inertial systems, 
central force systems, dynamics of many particles 
and rigid bodies and Lagrangian mechanics. Pre- 
requisites: 212, Mathematics 215. 

372. Electromagnetism. 4 cr. 

An intermediate course for the science and engi- 
neering students. The following topics will usually 
be discussed: electrostatics, energy relations in 
electrostatic fields, dielectrics, currents and their 
interaction, magnetic properties of matter, AC cir- 
cuits. Maxwell's equations, and electronic radia- 
tions. Prerequisites: 212; Mathematics 215. 

402. Optics. 3 cr. 

This course introduces the student to the princi- 
ples of geometrical and physical optics. Topics 
may include: reflection, refraction, diffraction, po- 
larization, matrix techniques in lens system de- 
sign, basic quantum optics and the laser. 
Prerequisite: 212 or 202 and the consent of the in- 
structor. 

405. Acoustics. 3 cr. 

A course which presents the physical principles 
underlying the production, propagation, and per- 
ception of sound. No mathematical preparation 
beyond high school algebra is necessary. 

419. Introduction to Micro 

and Mini Computers. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the designs of micro and mini 
computers. Exploration of assembler and special- 
ized languages for small computers. Prerequisites: 
201 Machine Language Programming and 301 
Computer Logic. 

425. Microcomputer Laboratory. 3 cr. 

A "hands-on", laboratory course in the use of sin- 
gle board microcomputers for interfacing and con- 
trol. This course introduces the student to those 
concepts of discrete and digital electronics that re- 
late to the use of these concepts for interfacing the 
microcomputer with the "real", analog world. 
Some of the topics covered are: assembly language 
programming for an 8085 microprocessor, use of 



53 



parallel and serial HO ports, analog to digital and 
digital to analog conversion techniques, motor 
speed control, and process control. Prerequisites: 
Physics 419, or consent of the instructor. 

426. Problems in Microcomputers. 1-4 cr. 

Special topics and problems in microcomputers, 
microcomputer interfacing circuitry and related 
subjects suitable for independent work. Prerequi- 
sites: Physics 419, or consent of the instructor. 

430. Advanced Research. 2 cr. 

This is a one year course in which the student se- 
lects a research project, develops it, and prepares a 
report on the results. The student is also required 
to present results of his work at a department sem- 
inar or an appropriate scientific meeting if deemed 
advisable. A research topic is selected from those 
suggested by members of the Physics Department 
or other science faculty members. Work is carried 
out in close coordination with the selected advisor, 
although all work must be the student's own. No 
grade is given at the end of the first semester but a 
final grade is assigned at the completion of the 
project in the Spring Semester. 

473. Atomic Physics. 3 cr. 

This course provides an introduction to special rel- 
ativity and quantum theory with applications 
drawn mainly from modern theories of the atom. 
Topics usually included are quantum theory of 
heat radiation, the uncertainty principle, quantum 
theory of the hydrogen atom, many-electron at- 
oms, atomic spectroscopy. Prerequisites: 212 and 
consent of instructor. 

474. Quantum Mechanics. 3 cr. 

A basic introduction to the dynamics of quantum 
phenomena. Some of the topics covered are Sch- 
roedinger Equation, oscillators, hydrogen atom, 
linear operators, Hermitian Matrices, observables, 
conservation theorem, spin, angular momentum 
and perturbation theory. The course will empha- 
size application to simple systems. Prerequisites: 
212; Mathematics 215. 

483, 484, 485, 486. Special Topics. 1-3 cr. each 

Designed to allow the Physics major flexibility in 
scheduHng, this course may include the following: 

483. Nuclear Physics. 3 cr. 

Experimental and theoretical aspects of the atomic 
nucleus are discussed. The topics presented may 
include: two-nuclear systems, radioactivity and 
modes of decay, radiometric dating, interaction of 
radiation with matter, nuclear structures and reac- 
tions, and nuclear fission. Prerequisite: 212 or 202 
and consent of the instructor. 

484. Introductory Solid State Physics. 3 cr. 

Bulk properties of materials are discussed with 
both the phenomenological and microscopic ap- 
proaches. Typical topics are the geometric struc- 
ture of solids, waves and diffractions, thermal 
properties, the free electron model, bank theory. 



superconductivity, magnetic properties and mag- 
netic resonance. Prerequisites: 212 and consent of 
instructor. 

485. Relativistic Mechanics. 3 cr. 

This course is an introduction to the Special and 
General Theories of Relativity. A list of topics 
which may be discussed are absolute space, Ein- 
steinian Kinematics, Einsteinian Optics, space- 
time and fourvectors, relativistic particle 
mechanics. Prerequisites: 212, Mathematics 215. 

486. Shop Techniques. 1 cr, 

A basic introduction to machine shop practices 
necessary to experimentalists in all fields. Some of 
the areas covered are: shop equipment and its use, 
materials, soldering and welding techniques, me- 
chanical drawing and schematics, electronics con- 
struction techniques and practical application. 

487. Problems in Physics. 1-4 cr. 

Special topics and problems in physics and related 
subjects suitable for independent work. 

488. Advanced Problems in Physics. 1-4 cr. 

Problems of a more sophisticated nature. 

489. Problems in Health Physics. 1-4 cr. 

Special topics and problems in health physics and 
related subjects suitable for independent work. 

Earth Science 

101. Physical Geology. 3 cr. 

(Prerequisite to all Earth Science courses.) This in- 
troduction to the geological processes and materi- 
als will concentrate on the makeup of our planet 
and the materials involved. Study will also include 
physical features and the processes of the earth, as 
presently understood, which have created those 
features. Geological relation to environment is 
also examined. 

102. Historical Geology. 3 cr. 

A study of the earth's history which related tec- 
tonic movements of the crust. Mountain building 
processes and life history with their interrelations 
will be discussed. Evolution of local features will 
be discussed also with the relationship to plate tec- 
tonics. 

103. Physical Geology Laboratory. 1 cr. 

An introduction to the identification of rocks and 
minerals by composition and appearance and the 
interpretation of topographic maps. The use of 
maps to identify the cause of drainage and some 
effects of water and erosion will be experienced. 
Mapping tools will be introduced, as will some 
field equipment. 

104. Historical Geology Laboratory. 1 cr. 

An accompaniment for ES 102, providing an intro- 
duction to sedimentation and the use of fossil 
identification. Columnar sections. Aerial Geologic 
maps, and Aerial Photos will be used. 

203. Astronomy. 3 cr. 

Introduction to the study of astronomy and the ba- 
sics of observation. Study will include telescopic 



54 



types and the known universe as identified from 
present study. Course will, if p^ossible, include ar- 
rangement with Buhl Science Center and Alle- 
gheny Observatory'. Star types and distances will 
also be examined. 

204. Meteorology, 3 cr. 

Elementary study of meteorology and weather 
systems in the local area as well as the world pat- 
terns. Observation and prediction will be practiced 
when practical. Local and U.S. Weather Bureau 
services will be used and analyzed when possible. 

205. Planetary Geology. 3 cr. 

A systematic study of the geology of other planets 
and satellites in the solar system. Methods of 
study used to obtain information on these bodies 
will be examined along with the latest available in- 
formation from scientific probes. 

206. Geophysics. 3 cr. 

An introduction to geophysics and its methods 
and uses. Study will include the use of geophysics 
to determine the nature of the earth's interior and 
various crustal processes such as structure, moun- 
tain building and the plate tectonics. Prerequisite: 
Physical Geology or major in Physics. 

303. Oceanography. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the marine environment in- 
cluding the geology and ecology. Attention is paid 
to the importance of dangers to the ecosystem. 
Characteristics of oceanic waters and circulation 
patterns will be discussed. 

304. Environmental Earth Science. 3 cr. 

A course based on an examination of some of the 
more common natural hazards in the geologic 
sense and Land Use Planning. Resources and their 
recovery, use and abuse in past and present and 
possible cures will be discussed. Local and na- 
tional problems will be examined and evaluated 
from the standpoints of origin and control. 

305. Physiography of the United States. 3 cr. 

Introduces the student to the various topographic 
and physiographic differences in the contiguous 
states as well as Alaska and Hawaii. This course is 
designed to allow the student to become familiar 
with the terrain, resources, economics, and indi- 
vidual problems of the various regions of our 
country. An approach to demonstrate the fact that 
no generalization may be made to fit all areas at 
once, but different problems are associated with 
each resource and each region. 

DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL 
SCIENCE 

Chairman: Kent F. Moors, Ph.D. 

Political science studies the political ideas, institu- 
tions, behavior, values, and goals of human collec- 
tive life. The department stresses an 
understanding of political life as a necessary com- 
plement to the study of human existence. Through 
an awareness of, and appreciation for, the similari- 



ties and differences among political structures and 
political tasks, political actors, systems of law, po- 
litical ideals and thought, and the ways by which 
political activity relates to the dimensions of life as 
a whole, the student becomes familiar with the po- 
litical as an expression of deeper and more funda- 
mental considerations. Students in the 
Department of Political Science are introduced to 
both the normative and empirical methods of ana- 
lyzing political life. 

Political science majors are prepared for careers 
in government and administration, teaching, pri- 
vate enterprise, and for further study in graduate 
and law school programs. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR IN 
POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Twenty-four semester hours are required for a ma- 
jor in political science in addition to 101; these 
credits must include 208, 233, 309 and 405 or 406. 

A student transferring to Duquesne from an- 
other College or University may receive a maxi- 
mum of 12 transfer credits applied to their major 
requirement. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR IN 
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 

Twenty-four semester hours in International Rela- 
tions are required for a major in International Rela- 
tions in addition to 101; these credits must include 
309, 312, 318 and 320 or 402. The remaining 
courses may be selected from either 320 or 402 (the 
one not taken for the required core), 208, 315, 321, 
331, 404, 406, 409, 412, 413, 450. Majors in Interna- 
tional Relations are advised to take certain courses 
for their college requirements and electives, espe- 
cially in language and history. Majors are advised 
to carefully plan their courses with their advisors. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

General Minor. This minor is designed to provide 
the students with a comprehensive view of the en- 
tire discipline and is recommended for those stu- 
dents who may later contemplate graduate study 
or think that they might eventually like to change 
from a minor to a major in Political Science. It con- 
sists of a minimum of 12 credits beyond the fresh- 
man course, 101; the 12 credits encompass the 
following required courses; 208, 233, 309, and 405 
or 406. 

Concentrated Minor. The following minors, con- 
centrated in a particular area, are also available. 

1. American Government; 233 and a minimum of 
nine credits from among; 235, 237, 240, 276, 305, 
323, 324, 325, 401, 407, and 414. 

2. Comparative Government; 208 and a minimum 
of nine credits from among; 315, 318, 321, 408, 412, 
413, and 450. 

3. International Relations; 309 and a minimum of 
nine credits from among; 312, 318, 320, 402, 404, 
409, and 450. 



55 



Selective Minor. The Department of Political Sci- 
ence will also devise a minor from its course offer- 
ings to fulfill the particular needs and desires of a 
student in any major area of concentration. Such a 
minor must be structured in consultation with an 
assigned Political Science Department faculty ad- 
visor and the Department Chairman. 

A maximum of 6 transfer credits can be applied 
to the minor requirement. 

101. Introduction to Political Science is pre- 
requisite to all courses. 

101. Introduction to Political Science. 3 cr. 

An investigation of the most fundamental con- 
cepts involved in the study of political society. 

208. Comparative Political Systems. 3 cr. 

A systematic, multifocused analysis of selected po- 
litical systems. 

233. American National Government. 3 cr. 

The institutional structure and policy-making 
processes of national government are examined as 
reflections of the assumptions of liberal democracy 
and of the American social and economic systems. 
In addition to the three branches of government, 
political parties, interest groups and elections are 
considered. 

235. The Mass Media and Politics. 3 cr. 

A study of the mass media and its nature, role and 
impact on U.S. politics. The emphasis will be on 
the mass media as instruments of political com- 
munication and opinion leadership. 

237. State and Local Government. 3 cr. 

A study of the position of the state and local gov- 
ernments in the Federal Union. 

240. American Political Parties. 3 cr. 

An intensive study of the roles of interest groups 
and political parties in the decision-making proc- 
esses of the American system of government with 
attention devoted to the internal dynamics of these 
institutions. 

243. Politics and Society. 3 cr. 

A study of political culture, political socialization, 
political participation, political elites, and social 
structure. 

276. Voting and Election Behavior 3 cr 

An examination of the determinants of opinions 
and political beliefs, political participation and vot- 
ing behavior; the significance for democratic gov- 
ernment of findings in these areas. 

305. The American Presidency. 3 cr 

A study of the role of the President at the center of 
the decision-making process in the American po- 
litical system. 

309. International Relations. 3 cr. 

A study of the major factors involved in interna- 
tional relations including such concepts as sover- 
eignty, nationalism, balance of power, and 
international law and organization. 



312. International Law and 

Organization. 3 cr 

A survey of the historical development and 
present role played by international law in the 
world community and the formation and opera- 
tion of such organizations as the United Nations 
and its specialized agencies. 

315. Politics of Third World Countries. 3 cr 

A topical study of the politics of the emerging na- 
tions including nationalism, political integration, 
political parties, and the role of the military and 
elite. 

318. Nationalism. 3 cr 

A study of the dynamics of nationalism with em- 
phasis on the role of nationalism in current world 
political problems. Includes the development of 
nationalism in Europe. 

320. United States Foreign Policy. 3 cr 

A study of American foreign policy since the Sec- 
ond World War, with emphasis on the central 
present issues and the domestic sources of foreign 
policy. 

321. Government and Politics of 

Eastern Europe. 3 cr 

an analysis of political developments in the com- 
munist regimes of Eastern Europe with special em- 
phasis on relations between the USSR and Eastern 
Europe in the post-Stanlinist era. 

323. Constitutional Law: Federalism. 3 cr 

A detailed examination of Supreme Court cases 
concerning the nature of American federalism - 
Congressional and Presidential power, commerce 
clause, state powers, judicial review, due process 
clauses, and apportionment. Students are intro- 
duced to court and appeals procedures, the read- 
ing and briefing of court decisions, and the nature 
of the court review process. 

324. Constitutional Law: 

Civil Liberties. 3 cr 

A detailed analysis of Supreme Court decisions 
bearing upon Bill of Rights guarantees, with spe- 
cific reference to the freedoms of speech, press, as- 
sembly, the dimensions of search and seizure, 
right of legal counsel, equal protection and due 
process rights, voting rights, and the adjudication 
of the fourteenth amendment application of rights 
to state action. 

325. Constitutional Law: 

Criminal Law. 3 cr 

This course will consider appellate cases in crimi- 
nal rights, and major aspects to criminal proce- 
dure. As with the Constitutional Law courses, it is 
a case approach. Students will read court deci- 
sions and will develop familiarity with briefing 
cases. 

327. Research Methods in 

Political Science. 3 cr 

A study of the techniques of scientific inquiry into 
political phenomena including research methods, 
data collection, analysis and interpretation. 



56 



331. Peace and the Arms Race. 3 cr. 

An analysis of the grave threat to world peace 
posed by nuclear weapons and the arms race. Spe- 
cial attention will be given to the political, ideolog- 
ical, and moral dimensions of the arms race. 

401. The American Congress. 3 cr. 

An investigation of the operation of the Congress 
of the United States within the American system 
of gONernment. 

402. Soviet Foreign Policy. 3 cr. 

An analytical study of the development of Soviet 
foreign relations with special emphasis on the 
post-Stalinist era. 

405, 406. Western Political Thought. 3 cr. each 

A study of political ideas as distinct from and yet 
related to political institutions which constitute 
our perennial western political heritage. 405 con- 
siders theorists from the classical period to the 
early 16th Century. 406 considers theorists from 
the later 16th Century to the late 19th Century. 

407. American Political Thought. 3 cr. 

An analysis of the issues which have played a fun- 
damental role in American Politics, from colonial 
church-state problems, to modern liberalism and 
conservatism. 

408. Theory of Comparative 

Government. 3 cr. 

An examination of the basic theories and concepts 
in contemporary approaches to comparative politi- 
cal systems. 

409. Theory of International Relations. 3 cr. 

A study of various theoretical approaches to an 
understanding of international relations including 
political realism, systems analysis, decision- 
making, and equilibrium analysis. 

412. Government and Politics 

of Germany. 3 cr. 

A comparative analysis of the contemporary politi- 
cal systems of West and East Germany. 

413. Government and Politics 

of the USSR. 3 cr. 

An intensive analysis of the origin and evolution of 
the Soviet political system. 

414. Public Policy. 3 cr. 

A study of the elements, operations, and investi- 
gation of the way governmental units decide upon 
programs and policy objectives. 

420. Contemporary Political Theory. 3 cr. 

A study of central topics in political thought from 
Marx to the present time. 

430. Internship in Practical Politics. 3 cr. 

A work and observation experience in government 
and political offices at the city, county, state, and 
national levels in the Pittsburgh area. Permission 
of department required. 

436. Advanced Seminar. 3 cr. 

A detailed analysis of a selected topic. 



450. Workshop-International Studies. 3 cr. 

An intensive one-week interdisciplinary summer 
school course. This course presents politics, for- 
eign policy, culture, religion, and social problems 
of Third World Countries. Several outside speak- 
ers augment Duquesne faculty. 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 

Chairman: Richard T. Knowles, Ph.D. 
The undergraduate program of the Department of 
Psychology is designed 1) to introduce and famil- 
iarize students with the fundamental content, is- 
sues, and interests of various areas of psychology 
and critically evaluate and reformulate these in the 
context of psychology as a human science; 2) to 
foster intellectual and personal freedom and criti- 
cal thinking as essential to the humanizing proc- 
ess; 3) to prepare the professionally oriented 
student for advanced study; 4) to provide a foun- 
dation for careers involving human services. To 
these ends, the department offers a wide variety of 
courses covering psychology conceived as a hu- 
man science, a natural science, and within a his- 
torical perspective. Further study in graduate 
school prepares students for careers in mental hos- 
pitals, schools, mental health and social welfare 
agencies, business and industry. In our rapidly 
changing society the demand for professionally 
trained psychologists is increasing. 

While the department believes that human sci- 
entific psychology is the most viable and encom- 
passing approach to the study of man, it also 
realizes its responsibility to expose its students to 
other psychological approaches. Hence, every ma- 
jor who plans to enter graduate school in psychol- 
ogy is strongly encouraged to take advantage of 
the offerings in sister universities through the pro- 
cedure of cross-registration. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

The major program consists of 103-Introduction to 
Psychology plus a minimum of 24 semester hours. 
These credits must include 220 and 223. Majors de- 
siring to pursue graduate study in psychology are 
strongly advised to take six additional credits 
through cross-registration at other universities 
(Learning Theory, Experimental, Perception, 
Memory, etc.), and Statistics (225 Fundamentals of 
Statistics offered by the Mathematics department 
may be considered part of the mathematics/ 
science requirement). Finally, it is recommended 
that majors enroll in a hospital or community prac- 
ticum for credit, and/or do volunteer work in a 
neighborhood clinic. Three credits earned in prac- 
ticum. count toward the 24 required credits; an ad- 
ditional three credits in practicum may be earned 
above and beyond the required minimum of 24. In- 
formation about such opportunities can be ob- 
tained from the department academic advisor. 

The psychology department has set up a dual 
advisement system: departmental academic advi- 



57 



sor and the faculty academic advisor. Prospective 
majors should consult the departmental academic 
advisor concerning the special procedure followed 
for the declaration of the major. 

A minimum of 15 credits in psychology exclusive 
of practicum must be taken at Duquesne Univer- 
sity for the major. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

Requirements for a minor are 103 and 223 and any 
three of the following: 225 or 226, 280, 328, 340, 
352, 361, 390; 400 level courses may be taken for 
the minor with permission of the department 
head. A minimum of nine credits in psychology 
must be taken at Duquesne University for the mi- 
nor. 

COUNSELING SERVICES 

Personal counseling services are available to all 
students at the Psychology Counseling Center lo- 
cated at the Chapel end of Centennial Walk. 

103. Introduction to Psychology. 3 cr. 

(Prerequisite to all courses) 

Introduction to fundamental concepts and meth- 
ods of psychology, examined from both traditional 
and phenomenological perspectives. Prerequisite 
for all other departmental courses. 

220. Systematic Psychology. 3 cr. 

For majors only. Traditional approaches (behavior- 
istic, physiological, psychoanalytic) to sensation, 
perception, learning, and motivation. Required 
for majors. 

223. Introduction to Existential 
Phenomenological Psychology. 3 cr. 

Introduction to a human-science alternative to 
psychology as a natural science. Prerequisite for 
356 and 410; required for majors and minors. 

225. Developmental Psychology I 

(Infancy and Childhood). 3 cr. 

Growth and development of the child, with em- 
phasis on personality development. 

226. Developmental Psychology II 
(Adolescence and Maturity). 3 cr. 

Development from adolescence, through adult 
stages, to coping with death. 

230. Psychology of Community 

Experience. 3 cr. 

Experience of community phenomena, e.g., indi- 
viduals versus group priorities, intimacy vs. pri- 
vacy. 

280. History of Psychology I. 3 cr. 

Overview of figures and issues in the history of 
psychology, from precursors to present. 

328. Psychology of Personality. 3 cr. 

Critical examination of major theories of personal- 
ity. 



340. Social Psychology. 3 cr. 

Foundations of social processes, attitudes, values 
and roles, public opinion, propaganda and com- 
munication, personal participation in society. 

352. Abnormal Psychology. 3 cr. 

Examination of theories and data on disordered 
human existence. 

356. Research Psychology: Theory 

and Practice. 3 cr. 

Review of theory and practice of traditional and 
human-science research. Includes student pro- 
jects. Prerequisite: 220, 223; permission of depart- 
ment head for non-majors. 

361. Psychology of Identity 

and Fulfillment. 3 cr. 

The ways in which identity is lived individually 
and collectively. Designed to be personally rele- 
vant to the life of the student. Open to juniors and 
seniors only. 

370. Psychology of Aesthetic Experience. 3 cr. 

Theoretical and empirical explorations of aesthetic 
experience. 

390. History of Psychology II. 3 cr. 

Intensive study of selected historical figures, in di- 
alogue with contemporary themes. Reading of pri- 
mary sources. Prerequisite: 280. 

391. Applied Psychology Practicum. 3 cr. 

An applied psychology setting provides opportu- 
nity for working directly with professionals. Set- 
tings have included psychiatric hospitals and 
community centers. Majors only; permission of 
Department head. Repeatable once. 

392. The Individual and His/Her World. 3 cr. 

Examination of individual's relation to society, 
from a developmental and cross-cultural perspec- 
tive. 

393. Principles of Psychoanalytic 

Thought. 3 cr. 

Examination of the times and contributions of 
Freud and selected other major psychoanalytic 
theorists. Permission of department head for non- 
majors. 

394. Psychology of Language and 
Expression. 3 cr. 

Communication as a life embodied relation of per- 
son to world and others. Emphasis is on phenom- 
enological theorists. Permission of department 
head for non-majors. 

410. Advanced Existential- 

Phenomenological Psychology. 3 cr. 

Detailed investigation of selected works in 
existential-phenomenological philosophy and 
psychology. Prerequisite: 223. Permission of de- 
partment head for non-majors. 

432. Gestalt Psychology. 3 cr. 

Contributions of Gestalt psychology (especially 
the works of Kofka, Kohler, and Goldstein) to tra- 
ditional and human-science psychology. Permis- 
sion of department head for non-majors. 



58 



450. Contemporary Issues in 

Clinical Psychology. 3 cr. 

A human-science examination of the approach, 
methods, data, and current issues of clinical psy- 
chology. Permission of department head for non- 
majors. 

457. Independent Studies. 3 cr. 

A tutorial course for an exceptional student who 
wishes to pursue a particular study with a faculty 
member. For majors only; usually those intending 
graduate study; advanced coursework completed. 
Permission c^f faculty member and department 
head required. 

490. Special Topic. 1-4 cr. 

A visiting professor presents his/her specialty, or a 
regular faculty member presents highly special- 
ized studies or an experimental course. Repeat- 
able. Prerequisites vary with the instructor. 
Permission of department head for non-majors. 

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY 

Chairman: Eleanor V. Fails, Ph.D. 

Undergraduate instruction in sociology contrib- 
utes to the liberal education of students regardless 
of majors and to the preprofessional training to 
graduate work in sociology and social work, urban 
affairs, urban planning, and criminology. Helping 
students in practical ways to live effectively and to 
become effective in practical attacks on social prob- 
lems is another objective qf the department. 

Sociology studies all of this formally in courses 
designed to give students a sense of direction, a 
selective taste of materials and methods, and moti- 
vation so that they can devote some of their ener- 
gies to independent observation and 
experimentation, and develop their own concepts 
about how society functions. 

AREAS OF CONCENTRATION 

Sociology. The orientation of sociology is indepen- 
dent in the sense that it is concerned with what 
men in groups try to achieve and how successful 
they are. Sociology is oriented around the problem 
of what men in groups actually do, how they inter- 
act to meet needs where they are. 

Recommended courses: 101, 104, 201, 202, 205, 
214, 215, 304, 307, 308, 309, 315, 325, 341, 492. 
Criminal Justice. Founded in a broad-based liberal 
arts curriculum, this program is designed to pro- 
vide the student with the opportunity to develop 
his potential as a professional in many areas of the 
criminal justice field, including probation, parole, 
investigation, corrections, and research. 

Recommended courses: 101, 103, 190, 245, 246, 
250, 264, 266, 270, 290, 302, 310, 313, 335, 467. 
Gerontology. As the size and characteristics of the 
"elderly" segment of the population have 
changed, there has been increased interest in the 
study of the aging process, its effects on the indi- 
vidual and society, and its meaning for the future. 



The Gerontology program is designed to develop 
the knowledge and skills required for a student's 
preparation as a professional in this specialty area. 
Recommended courses: 101, 210, 317, 324, 327, 
328, 405, 411. 

Social Services. The principle that is the basis for 
this program is that classroom learning provides 
the foundation out of which effective social/ 
human services may be built. Preparation for pro- 
fessional training and skill development is the 
emphasis. 

Recommended courses: 101, 103, 212, 213, 314, 
450, 451. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

A minimum of 24 semester hours, not including 
101 is required for a major in Sociology; these 
credits must include 201 and 304. In consultation 
with the undergraduate academic advisor, the ma- 
jor may select a concentration in general Sociol- 
ogy, Criminal Justice, Gerontology, or Social 
Services/Fiuman Services. The suggested course 
numbers for these concentrated areas are listed 
above with the corresponding titles and descrip- 
tions in the following section. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

A minimum of 12 semester hours, not including 
101, is required for a minor; 450, 451 and 492 are 
reserved for majors only. Minors may select a con- 
centration in one of four areas above in consulta- 
tion with the department advisor. 

Sociology 101 is a prerequisite to all courses ex- 
cept 103 Criminal Justice and 103 Social Work. All 
300 and 400 courses are for juniors and seniors 
only. 

Sociology 

101. Survey of Sociology. 3 cr. 

A broad survey of the social and cultural aspects of 
environment. 

104. Social Anthropology. 3 cr. 

Study of the cultural aspects of human existence in 
early man and modern society. 

201. Sociological Theories. 3 cr. 

A study of selected European and American theo- 
rists. For sociology majors and minors only. 

202. Sociology of Social Problems. 3 cr. 

Study of person-structure-change framework ap- 
plicable to contemporary social issues. 

205. Person and Society. 3 cr. 

Exploration of socialization, the person's interac- 
tion with structure and culture, small groups and 
collective behavior. 

214. Sociology of the Child and 

Adolescent. 3 cr. 

Discussion of the child and adolescent socializa- 
tion process in American society. 



59 



215. Computer Uses in the 

Social Sciences. 3 cr. 

An introduction into computer related skills, with 
a focus on data management, use of "canned" pro- 
grams and the univac computer system. 

304. Methods in Sociology. 3 cr. 

Discussion and application of techniques and re- 
search procedures used in sociological research. 

307. Leisure and Popular Culture. 3 cr. 

Study of relationship between work, leisure and 
popular culture; leisure as a social problem will be 
considered. 

308. Ethnic Groups. 3 cr. 

Comprehensive survey of roles performed and 
problems faced by ethnic groups. 

309. Women in Society. 3 cr. 

The role of women in culture and the study of 
women's movements for liberation. 

315. Social Development— Infancy 

to Death. 3 cr. 

Study of the socializing process from the infant 
state to the dying state. 

325. Family Systems. 3 cr. 

Comparative study of the family; the interaction of 
the family with other community institutions. 

341. Sociological Measurement. 3 cr. 

Discussion of techniques and problems in socio- 
logical measurement. 

492. Selected Readings. 1-3 cr. 

For sociology majors only. 

Criminal Justice 

103. Introduction to Criminal Justice. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the criminal justice process, in- 
cluding police, courts, correctional facilities and 
community based corrections. 

190. Police Organization 

and Administration. 3 cr. 

An indepth study of organizational structure, ad- 
ministrative practices and operational procedures 
of police agencies with special emphasis on super- 
vision and leadership. 

245. Treatment of Juvenile Offenders. 3 cr. 

Study of the movement of juvenile offenders 
through the criminal justice system— police, pros- 
ecution, courts, and corrections. 

246. Treatment of Adult Offenders. 3 cr. 

Study of the movement of adult offenders through 
the criminal justice system. 

250. Investigation, Evidence 

and Procedures. 3 cr. 

Study of case preparation, questioning of wit- 
nesses, collection and preservation of evidence 
and processing of criminal evidence. 



264. Police Community Relations. 3 cr. 

Discussion of the context of police -community re- 
lations; their interaction, improvement and 
change strategies. 

265. Critical Issues in Law 

Enforcement (Police). 3 cr. 

Analysis of police in a free society; ethnic tension, 
police discretion, civil disobedience, police con- 
duct and integrity. 

266. Crime Prevention. 3 cr. 

Study of contemporary crime prevention pro- 
grams involving criminal justice agencies, citizens 
and community politics. 

270. Introduction to Law 

and Deviance. 3 cr. 

This course offers the view that social deviation is 
a central part of society and culture. Sociologists, 
contrary to the popular view, claim that deviance is 
a part of normal, healthy societies rather than a 
symptom of a societal breakdown or manifestation 
of warped individuals. 

290. Criminalistics. 3 cr. 

Collection of evidence, fingerprints, microscopic 
and laboratory study of firearms, hair, fibers, 
blood, paints, poisons, and other clues. 

302. Evaluative Research in 

Criminal Justice. 3 cr. 

Study of techniques for research and evaluation of 
criminal justice programs. 

310. Juvenile Law. 3 cr. 

A survey of those aspects of the legal system that 
relate to the identification, processing and rehabil- 
itation of the juvenile offender. 

313. Delinquency and Society. 3 cr. 

A study of the phenomenon, theories and causa- 
tion of juvenile delinquency. 

335. Criminology. 3 cr. 

A study of sociological explanations of criminality; 
correlates, causation, and crimogenic conditions. 

467. Correctional Casework and 

Counseling. 3 cr. 

Study of the counseling styles and individualized 
models for offender classification, and group and 
process models of counseling. 

Gerontology 

210, Sociology of Aging. 3 cr. 

The study and analysis of the socialization, role, 
subcultural, and problem aspects of aging. 

317, Aged and Social Service. 3 cr. 

Study of problems associated with the elderly and 
the social services developed to assist them. 

324. Social Aspects of Death 

and Dying. 3 cr. 

A study of American values, behavior, custom, 
and other institutional practices related to dying 
and death with special attention to the older 
Americans. 



60 



327. Counseling of the Older Adult. 3 cr, 

A study of helping techniques in relation to retire- 
ment problems and physical, social, psychological 
losses ot the elderly. 

328. Long Term Care: 

Myths Realities. 3 cr. 

An examination of health care in the home, shel- 
tered living options, total institutions and the im- 
pact of diagnosis related groups in the care of the 
elderly. 

411. Aging and Health. 3 cr. 

Discussion of medical aspects of aging, diseases of 
aging, and health maintenance. 

Social Services/Human Services 

103. Introduction to Social Work. 3 cr. 

Survey of the history and areas of social work- 
casework, group work and community organiza- 
tion, public and private programs. 

212. The Helping Process. 3 cr. 

Discussion of the social process of helping others, 
ranging from the consideration of the professional, 
the population a person serves and the dynamics 
of the interaction. The perspective is person- 
social. 

213. Intervention Skills. 3 cr. 

Discussion of social work skills; practice in field 
evaluated. 

405. Social Gerontology. 3 cr. 

The study of dying and the aged. Stress on the so- 
cial factors impacting the status roles and self- 
images of the more aged populations. 
Considerable research and theoretical attention on 
cross-cultural perspectives on the aged and the ag- 
ing process. 

450. Field Work I. 3-12 cr. 

Internship in a social work agency, criminal justice 
or gerontology setting. Majors only. 

451. Field Work II. 3-12 cr. 

Internship in a social work agency, criminal justice 
or gerontology setting. Majors only. 



DEPARTMENT OF THEOLOGY 

Duquesne's Department of Theology affirms that 
the academic study of religious experience is es- 
sential to a complete education. The Department 
fulfills its role in theological studies by the pursuit 
of the following aims: 1) it emphasizes Catholic 
Theology, in dialogue with other Christian tradi- 
tions, non-Christian traditions and Judaism, as the 
key element in Duquesne's commitment to Catho- 
lic education on the university level; 2) it acknowl- 
edges the fact of the universal search for religious 
meaning and experience, and seeks not only to of- 
fer the possibility of a study of the varying ap- 
proaches to religious witnesses in history, but also 
to place Catholic Theology in communion with 
that quest; 3) it aspires to a fruitful encounter with 



other university disciplines, since the department 
is convinced that theology's concerns are related to 
all vital human issues. 

Accordingly, the Department has organized its 
courses into four divisions: Biblical Studies, Chris- 
tian Studies, Roman Catholic Theology, and Se- 
lected Religious Studies. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR 

The major program consists of a minimum of 27 
credits. These must include 106, 213, 214, 220, 250, 
498; the remaining credits will be chosen in con- 
sultation with the student's advisor. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MINOR 

A minor consists of four courses. 

The department has also prepared suggested se- 
quences which may be helpful to a student wish- 
ing to concentrate in a certain area of theology; 
e.g.. Biblical Studies, Roman Catholic Theology, 
World Religions, Religion and Culture, Christian- 
ity in History, etc. 

COURSE INFORMATION 

The numbering of the course indicates the level of 

approach. 

100 These courses are of the basic, survey 

type, wherein emphasis is on breadth 
rather than on depth, and serve as back- 
ground for other courses. 

200-300 These courses treat of subject matter in a 
specific area of theology and in greater 
depth than in the 100 category. 

400 Selected topics are dealt with at a more 

advanced level; independent research is 
required. 

Biblical Studies 

114. Interpreting the Bible. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the principles involved in inter- 
preting the Bible in relation to its different man- 
ners of expression; a study of key sections of the 
Bible to determine what these materials meant to 
those who wrote them and what their relevance is 
today. 

213. Introduction to the Old Testament. 3 cr. 

A presentation of the Old Testament writings in 
their dynamic context of culture, politics, and ge- 
ography, as well as an introduction to their literary 
modes, theologies, and themes. 

214. Introduction to the New Testament. 3 cr. 

A presentation of the books of the New Testament, 
including their literary makeup, historical origins 
and testimony, and theological content; practical 
approaches in interpreting key passages of the 
New Testament. 

313. Archaeology and the Bible. 3 cr. 

An illumination through archaeology of the histor- 
ical setting, the cultural background, and the 
events described in the Bible; a general introduc- 



61 



tion to the techniques of archaeological investiga- 
tion and a study of the principal archaeological 
sites in Palestine. 

316. The Apostle Paul. 3 cr. 

An exposition of Pauline Literature, emphasizing 
the person of Paul and his impact on the early 
Church. 

321. Jesus in the Gospels. 3 cr. 

A portrait of the person of Jesus Christ, based on a 
study of the 4 gospels, with ample usage of recent 
scholarship. 

413. Theology of the Old Testament. 3 cr. 

Examination of the Theology of the various books 
or blocks of writing in the Old Testament; an at- 
tempt to draw together and present the major 
themes, motifs, and concepts of the Old Testa- 
ment; a study of the relationship between the Old 
Testament and the New Testament. Prerequisite: 
114 or 213. 

414. Theology of the New Testament. 3 cr. 

A study of specific themes or books of the New 
Testament focusing on particular questions of con- 
temporary Christianity. Syllabus will be available 
in the Theology Office. 

490. Field Experience in Biblical 

Archaeology. 3 cr. 

Six weeks of supervised participation in an archae- 
ological excavation in the Ancient Near East; expe- 
rience in stratigraphic digging, pottery 
identification, scientific analysis of finds, and re- 
cording methods. Offered every two or three 
years; approval of participants by core staff re- 
quired. 

493. Individual Topics in Biblical Studies. 1-3 cr. 

The topics will change regularly and will be pub- 
lished within the department. 

Christian Studies In General 

140. Christian Understanding of the 

Human Person. 3 cr. 

An investigation into the question of "What does it 
mean to be human?", according to Judaeo- 
Christian teaching; a discussion of the relationship 
of the human person to self, others, the world, 
and the Divine as the basis for humanness; a study 
of the issues involved in these four relationships, 
e.g., freedom, grace, contemplation. 

235. Christian Worship. 3 cr. 

The meaning of ritual and worship in Christianity 
with special emphasis given to the history of wor- 
ship and the developments in both Roman Catho- 
lic and Protestant worship since the Vatican 
Council. 

243. Religion and Social Issues. 3 cr. 

A study of the influence of religious convictions in 
confronting major social issues of today's world, 
e.g., population growth, famine, ecology, libera- 
tion and revolution, truth as a social issue, wealth, 
taxation, and stewardship. 



260. Protestantism. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the thought of the principal re- 
formers: Luther, Calvin, Zwingli, Wesley; a study 
of speculative and practical forces operative in the 
fifteenth-sixteenth centuries which gave rise to the 
reforming movement; the formulation of Protes- 
tant Orthodoxy. 

271. Eastern Christianity. 3 cr. 

A study of the main theological developments in 
the Eastern Church from the Patristic age on 
through the medieval times until the modern days 
as they shape its distinctive spirit and mentality 
and as they are interpreted in the Eastern 
Churches. 

274. Church History I. 3 cr. 

A religious and historical exploration of the 
growth of Christianity from the first century up to 
the Reformation; discussion of those issues within 
the Church and the external forces which brought 
about major conflict and development. 

275. Church History II. 3 cr. 

Selected topics in Catholic and Protestant develop- 
ment from 1500 to the present day; special empha- 
sis on the crises, revolutions, and reforms that 
were central to this development. 

345. Women and Christianity. 3 cr. 

Survey of the Old and New Testament views of 
women and a history of the status of women in the 
Roman Catholic and major Protestant traditions 
with emphasis on the contemporary role and spiri- 
tuality of women in Christianity. 

351. Sexuality, Sex, and Morality. 3 cr. 

An analysis of the nature of sex and sexuality, ac- 
cording to the sources and developments of Chris- 
tian thought; the integration of these concepts into 
a contemporary moral and ethical system. 

352. Human Life and Mortality. 3 cr. 

A discussion of the fundamental moral principles 
involved in making any of the "life decisions," the 
problem of the definition of life; a survey of the 
varied moral approaches to the issues of war and 
peace, capital punishment, abortion, birth control, 
euthanasia, genetic engineering, and the new em- 
bryology. 

353. Health Care Ethics. 3 cr. 

A study of practical and theoretical issues in the 
ethics of health care. The course is cross-listed in 
the nursing school and is team-taught by a mem- 
ber of the theology faculty and a member of the 
nursing faculty. Issues include life and death ques- 
tions, professional-patient relationships, and 
moral aspects of the health care professions. 

451. War and Peace in Christian 

Perspective. 3 cr. 

An analysis of Christian teaching of the moral per- 
missibility of using violence and participation in 
war from biblical times to the present, including an 
evaluation of the varieties of pacifism, of non- 
violent resistance, and of just war theories. 



62 



470. Christian Mysticism. 3 cr. 

A study of the manifold Christian experience of 
mysticism, i.e., experiental contact with God, as 
seen in famous exemplars of mystical experience, 
e.g., Jesus Christ, Paul, Ignatius of Antioch, 
Augustine, John Ruysbroeck, Catherine of Siena, 
Theresa of Avila, John of the Cross, Venerable Li- 
berman. 

494. Individual Topics in 

Christian Studies. 1-3 cr. 

The topics will change regularly and will be pub- 
lished within the department. 

Roman Catholic Theology 

106. Faith and Experience. 3 cr. 

An examination of various forms of atheism and 
an exploration of Christian responses to their chal- 
lenge; a study of the meaning of faith and revela- 
tion in its history and contemporary expression; 
an attempt to answer the question of faith's rea- 
sonableness. 

108. Catholicism. 3 cr. 

An explanation of the spirit, beliefs and practices 
of Roman Catholicism including its understanding 
of sacramentality, mediation and communion; a 
study of the Roman Catholic classics and issues 
confronting Roman Catholicism. 

220. The Mystery of Christ. 3 cr. 

A study of the person and meaning of Christ in 
historical and contemporary perspective; a dis- 
scussion of the new bond between God and hu- 
manity and the new era in the spirituality of 
humanity inaugurated by the Incarnation and the 
Passion-Death-Resurrection event . 

230. The Church. 3 cr. 

A study of the Christian community of believers in 
its origins, some of its major historical and dog- 
matic emphases, and its contemporary under- 
standing of itself; the Church as a mystery, as 
Mystical Body, as People of God, as sacrament. 

242. Contemporary Theological Issues. 3 cr. 

An examination of theological developments in an 
era of renewal, reevaluation, and cooperation; 
e.g., belief and unbelief; Christian and secular hu- 
manism; the future with reference to hope, 
heaven, hell, afterlife, and resurrection; sin in a 
secular age; suffering and evil. 

250. Conscience and Morality. 3 cr. 

A catholic perspective of the basic issues involved 
in the formulation of moral values with the devel- 
oping person, and of the sources upon which 
moral systems are based; a discussion of the abso- 
lute vs. the relative, traditional morality vs. "the 
new morality", and application of these principles 
to modern problems. 

256. God and His Meaning. 3 cr. 

A theological understanding of the problems of 
God; a consideration of the responses of various 
religions and philosophies to this problem; the ori- 



gins and development of the theology of God in 
the Judaeo-Christian tradition with special focus 
on Catholic development. 

301. Marriage. 3 cr. 

A personally-oriented and practical treatment of 
the marital union as seen in its Christian theologi- 
cal, psychological, and sexual aspects; a discus- 
sion of Christian marriage as a bond of love, as a 
sacrament, and as a way of human fulfillment. 

331. The Church in the Modern World. 3 cr. 

An analysis of the Church's role in human devel- 
opment today and in offering solutions to present 
problems of humanity in light of Vatican IPs "Pas- 
toral Constitution on the Church in the Modern 
World" and other related documents. 

335. Theology of the Sacraments. 3 cr. 

A practical treatment of the seven sacraments in 
relation to their significance for the Christian's 
daily spiritual growth and fulfillment; consider- 
ation of human needs for ritual and symbol; dis- 
cussion of recent revisions and developments in 
sacramental theology. 

475. Theology and Catechesis. 3 cr. 

An examination of the principal theological and 
pedagogical themes of modern religious educa- 
tion, and of the place of catechesis in the ministry 
of the Church; a presentation of the historical 
background of the contemporary catechetical re- 
newal. 

491. Experience in the Teaching 

of Religion. 6 cr. 

One semester of supervised experience in teaching 
religion in a high school environment in conjunc- 
tion with a cooperating high school teacher and 
University Department coordinator. This course is 
open only to majors in Theology upon approval of 
the Chairperson of the Department. 

495. Individual Topics in 

Roman Catholic Study. 1-3 cr. 

The topics will change regularly and will be pub- 
lished within the department. 

498. Seminar in Theology. 3 cr. 

A critical analysis of selected topics in theology or 
of selected works by outstanding theologians; 
open only to juniors and seniors with a major or 
minor in theology. 

Selected Religious Studies 

180. Religious Experience. 3 cr. 

An examination of the dimensions of mankind's 
religious experience, e.g., mystical, ritual, mythi- 
cal, ethical, and scriptural; an analysis of the like- 
ness and differences of how the Divine is sensed 
and responded to in varied geographical, cultural, 
and chronological contexts. 

240. Studies in Black Theology. 3 cr. 

An examination of the dimensions of the religious 
experience of Black Americans, e.g., its history, its 
relationship to African origins, to slavery, to rac- 



63 



ism, to Christian denominations; an analysis of 
special elements in that experience; e.g.. Black 
Churches, preaching, music and the "American 
Way of Life." 

280. World Religions. 3 cr. 

A survey of the history, beliefs, practices, and con- 
temporary influence of the major religions of the 
world: Hinduism, Buddhism, Confucianism, Tao- 
ism, Maoism, Shintoism, African traditions, Juda- 
ism, Christianity, and Islam; a discussion of a basic 
methodology for understanding religions. 

283, 284. Judaism: People & Faith. 3 cr. each 

A survey of modern Jewish history to discover 
roots and traditions of the Jewish people in Ameri- 
can, Israel and the Soviet Union . . . view of the 



Holocaust and its effects on the world Jewry. The 
faith, beliefs and practices of Jewish life today. 
(This course is sponsored by the Chautauqua Soci- 
ety.) 

372. Religious Themes in Literature 

and Film. 3 cr. 

An exploration of religious experience and reli- 
gious concepts as expressed in significant worlds 
in film and literature, including themes concern- 
ing human person's relationship to self, others, 
and to God. 

496. Individual Topics in 

Religious Studies. 1-3 cr. 

The topics will change regularly and will be pub- 
lished within the department. 




64 



School of Business and 
Administration 



HISTORY 

The School of Business and Administration was 
established in 1913 as the School of Accounts and 
Finance. The rapid growth of the School necessi- 
tated a constant broadening of the curriculum un- 
til it covered all business subjects of fundamental 
importance. 

In 1931 it was designated the School of Business 
Administration and, with this change, definitely 
became a professional schtxil of business adminis- 
tration. 

In 1971 the name was changed to the present 
designation to indicate broader preparation for ac- 
tivity in organizaticins of all types. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

In accord with the educational philosophy and ob- 
jectives of the University, the School of Business 
and Administration aims to assist students in their 
development of the natural and supernatural vir- 
tues. The general aim is to provide through the 
media of instruction and related collegiate activity 
the facilitation of purposeful character, intellectual 
accomplishment, emotional and social maturity, 
and professional efficiency. 

The School of Business and Administration has 
the professional responsibility of developing in 
students such knowledge of business principles, 
procedures and problems as will enable therii to 
become self-sustaining members of the commu- 
nity, aware of their social and public responsibili- 
ties and dedicated to the enrichment of the 
resources for worthy living. 

It seeks to produce graduates who, upon enter- 
ing their chosen careers, will be effectively pre- 
pared to discharge their obligations to God, their 
community, and themselves as intellectual and 
moral beings. 

The School attains this objective by guiding stu- 
dents through a cultural core program, a business 
core program, an elective area of advanced busi- 
ness subjects chosen on the basis of professional 
interests, co-curricular and extra-curricular activi- 
ties, and established personnel services. 

As a division of the University, the School of 
Business and Administration is obviously dedi- 
cated to promoting those University aims and ob- 
jectives contained in the general statement. 

The professional objective of the School of Busi- 
ness and Administration is to produce graduates 
who have acquired and developed: 

1. An appreciation of the importance of initiative 
and who consequently are willing to assume re- 
sponsibility, work efficiently and harmoniously 
with others, and adjust to changing circum- 
stances. 



2. A respect for logical thinking and who strive 
energetically, therefore, to develop the capacities 
for analytical reasoning through the vigorous and 
orderly application of ethical and technical princi- 
ples to problem solving. 

3. An understanding of the personal and profes- 
sional value of effective communications and a cul- 
tivation of their capacities for speaking and 
writing clearly and concisely. 

4. An awareness of the important role of quanti- 
tative measurements in today's business and who 
have become skilled in the interpretation of mathe- 
matical, accounting and statistical data with com- 
puter usage. 

5. Sufficient knowledge in a professional area so 
that they can assume positions of responsibility 
with a background of learning-method and 
learning-impulse that will enable them to progress 
rapidly. 

DEGREE 

The School of Business and Administration grants 
the degree of Bachelor of Science in Business Ad- 
ministration. This degree may be awarded to those 
who satisfy the entrance requirements and com- 
plete successfully the School's degree program. 

SECOND BACHELOR'S DEGREE 

Persons who have received a Bachelor's degree 
from an approved college or university may be eli- 
gible to enter the program for a second Bachelor's 
degree in Business Administration. A second de- 
gree candidate must meet all requirements of the 
School's degree program. A minimum of 30 credits 
must be completed in residency. 

THREE-YEAR BACHELOR'S/J.D. 

A student who has completed 90 credits at Du- 
quesne University with a 3.5 or better overall aver- 
age and who has satisfied all undergraduate 
curricular requirements may apply for the Bache- 
lor's degree after successful completion of the first 
year of academic work at Duquesne University 
School of Law. Students interested in this program 
should consult the advisement office in the sopho- 
more year. 

BUREAU OF RESEARCH AND 
COMMUNITY SERVICES 

Activity complementing direct instruction takes 
place in four ancillary units grouped under the Bu- 
reau of Research and Community Services. All 
function to provide students and faculty with an 
opportunity for professional development as well 
as to provide services to the University and the 
community at large. 

Bureau of Research 

The Research Bureau carries out an independent 
research program, and cooperates with divisions 
of the School in facilitating the research of individ- 



65 



ual faculty members. 

From time to time contract research is under- 
taken for business, community, and governmental 
agencies, insofar as this may fall within its aca- 
demic aims of discovery and dissemination of 
knowledge. 

The Bureau is a member of the Association for 
University Business and Economic Research, and 
maintains an interchange of publications with sim- 
ilar organizations in other universities throughout 
the country. 

Center for Administration of Legal Systems 

The Center serves as the focal point for research 
activity in the administration of law. It engages in 
cooperative projects with other centers, such as 
the center for Small Business Administration, 
where legal issues arise. 

Center for Economic Education 

The Center is charged with the responsibility of 
initiating and promoting economic education in 
the society at large. More specifically it develops 
and coordinates economic education within the 
Western Pennsylvania and Tri-State area primarily 
to upgrade economic literacy and teaching compe- 
tency in the school system. The Center also con- 
ducts economic education programs for clergy, 
media professionals, and other opinion leaders. 

Center for International Management 

The objective of the Center is to develop a better 
understanding of the American involvement in in- 
ternational affairs and business and in manage- 
ment abroad through teaching and research; it is 
achieved by an interdisciplinary approach. 
The areas of current research focus are: 

1. Trade expansion between the USA and East- 
ern Europe. 

2. Management in foreign nations. 

3. Problems in international business. 

4. International economic development with a 
stress on interaction among developed countries, 
and on the relationship of developed and less de- 
veloped countries. 

5. International political and legal issues. 

The Center has no teaching program of its own; 
most of its staff are faculty members from various 
schools and departments of the University or visit- 
ing foreign professors. 

STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS 

These organizations, limited to students in the 
School of Business and Administration, exist for 
the promotion of the scholarly and professional in- 
terests of members: 

The Zeta Chapter of Beta Gamma Sigma, national 
honorary fraternity for accredited schools of the 
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Busi- 
ness, is established at Duquesne University. Mem- 



bership in this honorary fraternity is limited to 
juniors in the highest five per cent of their class 
and to seniors in the highest 10 per cent of their 
class. 

The Beta Alpha Phi Fraternity is the honorary 
scholarship society of the school. 

Phi Chi Theta is a national professional com- 
merce sorority. 

American Marketing Association, the student chap- 
ter, affords membership to students whose major 
interests include salesmanship, marketing, adver- 
tising, transportation, or foreign trade. A selected 
group of seniors is permitted, under faculty super- 
vision, to participate in the meetings of the Sales 
Executives Club of Pittsburgh and the senior chap- 
ter of the A.M. A. 

Delta Sigma Pi, a national professional business 
fraternity, is represented by Theta Rho chapter. 

The Association for Personnel Administration is the 
student group sponsored by and affiliated with the 
American Society for Personnel Administration. 

DIVISIONS AND ACADEMIC 
PROGRAMS 

The School of Business and Administration is 
comprised of three Divisions: Quantitative Sci- 
ence; Behavioral Science; and Economic Science. 

Students entering the School of Business and 
Administration are expected to inform their advi- 
sors about their career objectives and their aca- 
demic areas of concentration, and to consult with 
them when choosing junior and senior courses in- 
dicated in any of the three Divisions. Their pro- 
posed curriculum choices must, of course, include 
the University requirements and Business and Ad- 
ministration Core requirements as indicated in the 
illustrations set forth in this catalog. Consistent 
with their stated career objectives and with the 
concurrence of their advisors, students, except 
those whose area of concentration is Accounting, 
are free to select any junior and senior courses 
from the School of Business and Administration 
curriculum to complete the required hours for 
graduation. Regulations for certification in Ac- 
counting make the program very rigid; this is dealt 
with in the paragraphs following the Accounting 
Curriculum, pp. 16-17. 

Students' concentrations should be based upon 
career objectives and constitute as broad and flexi- 
ble an educational process at the undergraduate 
level as is possible. Career advice should be sought 
from many and varied sources in the University, 
including faculty and Career Planning and Place- 
ment staff. 

Students registering for 300-400 level courses 
are presumed to have passed freshman and soph- 
omore required business courses and have junior 
standing. 



66 



FOUR YEAR SAMPLE PROGRAM 



Freshman Year 



Fall Semester 
Courses Credits 

101 English Comp 3 

109 College Algebra 3 

141 Economic Geo 3 

Non-Business elective 3 

Non-Business elective 3 

15 



Spring Semester 
Courses Credits 

102 English Comp 3 

111 Calculus 3 

142 Economic Devel 3 

181 Intro, to Computers .... 3 
Non-Business elective 3 



15 



Sophomore Year 



Fall Semester 
Courses Credits 

211 Intro. Accounting I 3 

221 Prin. of Economics I 

3 

281 Probability & Stat. I 

' 3 

251 Legal Process 3 

Theology or Non-Business 
elective 3 

15 



Spring Semester 
Courses Credits 

212 Intro. Accounting II .... 3 

222 Prin. of Economics II 

3 

282 Probability & Stat. II 

3 

Non-Business elective 3 

Non-Business elective 3 



15 



Spring Semester 
Courses Credits 
332 Money & Banking 3 



Junior Year 

Fall Semester 
Courses Credits 
361 Prin. of Management 

3 

371 Prin. of Marketing 3 321 or 322 Adv. Econ 3 

331 Business Finance 3 *Business elective 3 

311 Inter. Accounting or 'Business elective 3 

313 Managerial Acc't 3 Non-Business elective 3 

381 Decision Making 3 



15 



15 



Senior Year 

Fall Semester Spring Semester 

Courses Credits Courses Credits 

'Business elective 3 'Business elective 3 

'Business elective 3 'Business elective 3 

'Business elective 3 'Business elective 3 

Non-Business elective 3 Non-Business elective 3 

Non-Business elective 3 "Capstone course 3 



15 
'Area of Concentration 
"Executive Action Simulation or Executive Policy. 



15 



Three credits in Theology are required for Catho- 
lic students. Others may take theology or may 
substitute three credits in the Departments of His- 
tory, Philosophy, Political Science, Psychology, or 
Sociology. 

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS 



ACADEMIC LOAD 

Students may normally carry five courses in one 
semester. A schedule of more than five courses or 
15 credits must be approved by the Dean. In the 
summer sessions, students normally carry one 
credit a week; i.e., six credits in the six- week ses- 



sion. A 12-credit schedule in a regular semester is 
considered full-time study. Students on academic 
probation may not take more than 12 credits. 

EFFECTIVE CATALOG 

Degree requirements are those stipulated in the 
catalog of the year in which a student matriculates. 
The student is responsible for knowing the re- 
quirements for the degree. Requirements may be 
changed without notice or obligation. This catalog 
has been prepared on the best information availa- 
ble as of December 1985. 

CLASS ATTENDANCE 

Regular class attendance in the School of Business 
and Administration is normally required for maxi- 
mum educational advantage. The responsibility 
for all course material rests wholly with the stu- 
dent. It is the prerogative of each instructor to es- 
tablish specific policies for attendance at tests, 
examinations, class lectures, deadlines for reports, 
and other specific school or course requirements. 

A student who is unable to attend class because 
of serious illness, hospitalization, a serious acci- 
dent or other extenuating circumstances is respon- 
sible for notifying the office of Academic 
Advisement. The student should supply a written 
verification as soon as possible. A student who is 
absent for cause is expected to complete all of the 
work in all courses. It is the student's responsibil- 
ity to make up all assignments in all courses and to 
be familiar with any instructions which may have 
been given during the absence. 

HANDICAPPED STUDENTS 

Handicapped students requiring special assistance 
are urged to notify the class instructor or the Aca- 
demic Advisement Office before the first class. 



DIVISION OF QUANTITATIVE 
SCIENCE 

ACCOUNTING CURRICULUM 

The accounting faculty recommends that students 
concentrating in accounting take Accounting 211, 
212, 311, 312, 314, 315, 411, 413 and 251-Legal Proc- 
ess, as well as at least one of the following: Law 
353, 354, 355. It is recommended that the student 
achieve an overall B average in Accounting 211, 212 
before attempting Accounting 311 and a minimum 
grade of C in both 311 and 312 before attempting 
the remaining 300 and 400 level courses. 

Computer and management information sys- 
tems courses recommended for accounting stu- 
dents are: 481, 485. 

CPA Requirements 

Students who desire to become certified public ac- 
countants in Pennsylvania and who have been 
graduated from a four-year program in a college 
approved by the State Board of Education may sit 



67 



for the CPA examinations. The degree program of 
the University is so approved. 

Graduates may sit for the CPA examination in 
other states, among which are New Jersey and 
New York. 

211, 212. Introductory Accounting. 3 cr. each 

An introduction to the language of accounting, ba- 
sic accounting concepts and brief exposure to re- 
cording financial information. An extensive study 
is made of accounting information for manage- 
ment decisions. Offered every semester. 

311, 312. Intermediate Accounting. 3 cr. each 

This course is primarily concerned with an investi- 
gation and analysis of the accounting problems 
and practices of the corporation, with detailed 
study of the component elements of the balance 
sheet and income statement. Basic topics are: ac- 
cepted and alternative methods in the accounting 
cycle; financial statements, their form, content and 
use; accounting problems of the corporation; de- 
tailed analysis of the balance sheet accounts; de- 
termination of net income; statement of source 
and uses of working capital. Prerequisites: 211, 

212. Offered every semester. 

313. Managerial Accounting. 3 cr. 

A study of the technique involved in the gather- 
ing, recording and interpretation of accounting 
and statistical data used in the solution of internal 
problems of management. Some of the topics cov- 
ered are: construction, analysis and interpretation 
of reports; establishment of production, operating 
and financial standards; measurement of manage- 
rial performance; use of budgets in managerial 
control; use of cost data and interpretation of cost 
reports; use of quantitative data in the formulation 
of policies; consideration of various aspects of Fed- 
eral, State and local taxes and their effect on mana- 
gerial decisions. Recommended for 
non-accounting students. Prerequisites: 211, 212. 
Offered every semester. 

314. Advanced Accounting. 3 cr. 

This course applies fundamental theory to a num- 
ber of important activities in business. Activities 
studied are: partnerships, special sales proce- 
dures, consolidations and fiduciaries. Prerequi- 
site: 311. Offered every semester. 

315. Cost Accounting. 3 cr. 

Basic cost accounting procedures are discussed 
from the following view points: cost principles; 
cost determination; cost control; cost analysis. 
Topics treated include cost terminology, planning 
and control techniques, and development and ap- 
plication of overhead rates. Cost behavior patterns 
are studied in conjunction with development and 
application of overhead rates. Standard costing, 
job order costing, process costing, joint products 
and by-product costing are treated in detail. Meth- 
ods of judging managerial efficiency, inventory 
control and management control systems are also 
stressed. Prerequisites: 211, 212. Offered every se- 
mester. 



411. Auditing. 3 cr. 

Standards and procedures employed by auditors 
in the examination of financial statements for the 
purpose or rendering an opinion are studied and 
evaluated. Emphasis is placed on theory and phi- 
losophy of auditing; however, case problems are 
used to demonstrate the application of the princi- 
ples studied. Prerequisite: 312. Offered every se- 
mester. 

412. Introductory Income 

Tax Accounting. 3 cr. 

This course is a study of basic tax regulations and 
procedure affecting individuals and to a lesser ex- 
tent partnerships and corporations. Principal top- 
ics: returns, rates, exemptions, income, 
deductions, sales and exchange of assets, and 
credits. Emphasis is placed on problems to dem- 
onstrate the application of the principles studied 
and use is made of official forms for demonstration 
purposes. Prerequisites: either 311 or 313. Offered 
every semester. 

413. Business Information Systems. 3 cr. 

A course designed to introduce students to man- 
agement information processing systems and the 
transformation of information systems to meet 
specific types of informational requirements. Top- 
ics include data base concepts, file storage consid- 
erations, development methodology, design, 
implementation and management considerations 
of business data systems. The course presumes a 
familarity with basic computer programming and 
accounting 211, 212. Offered every semester. 

414. Corporate and Partnership 

Taxation 3 cr. 

This course will acquaint the student with the 
principles of tax law as they apply to corporations 
and their shareholders and to partnerships and 
their partners. Rather than emphasizing tax return 
preparation, the course's concentration is upon 
preparing students to make reasoned and sound 
judgments regarding the tax consequences of busi- 
ness transactions. Prerequisite: 412. Offered every 
spring. 

419. Seminar in Accounting. 3 cr. 

This course is designed to develop a student's abil- 
ity in technical expression, deepen his under- 
standing of accounting theory, and acquaint him 
with contemporary accounting problems and liter- 
ature. Students are made acquainted with the phi- 
losophy and methodology of research, and 
required to prepare a research paper. Prerequisite: 
314. Offered as needed. 



FINANCE CURRICULUM 

Students who desire to function in finance, either 
in the world of private business, government 
bodies, or in the area of securities are encouraged 
to select from the several groups of courses that 
place emphasis on specific material leading to that 
end. The professional designation of Chartered Pi- 



68 



nancial Analyst (CFA) is used by those in the secu- 
rities industry. Suggested courses for students 
interested in this area are: 336, 337, 433. The desig- 
nation in the life insurance area for professional 
personnel is (CLU) or Chartered Life Underwriter, 
and CPCU for property and liability insurance. For 
students interested in careers in insurance, 
courses 334, 434, and 435 are recommended. 

331. Business Finance. 3 cr. 

The aim of this course is to combine the study of 
internal and external sources of funds with the 
tools of financial management in order to maxi- 
mize the wealth of the business entity. Primary at- 
tention is giyen to priyate business entities. While 
many of the tools and instruments used in the 
demonstrations are those of large business con- 
cerns, entities of all sizes are coyered. Special at- 
tention is giyen to the decision-making process as 
applied to the finance function of business. Sec- 
ondary emphasis is given to the securities mar- 
kets, financial projections, organizational form, 
mergers and consolidation, and reorganization. 
Prerequisites: 211, 212, 281, 282. Offered every se- 
mester. 

332. Money and Banking. 3 cr. 

To develop knowledge about the role of financial 
institutions in our society as they perform their 
function of either the creation of the medium of 
exchange or of taking existing funds from sources 
of excess to sources of supply. Further, to develop 
an understanding of the construction of the port- 
folios of the institutions in order to understand 
why they employ available funds as they do; 
knowledge about interest rate movements . and 
their effects on business and the development of 
financial instruments used within the business so- 
ciety. Through a research paper, the student has 
the opportunity to develop a major area in detail. 
Emphasis is primarily on the role money and 
banking take in relationship to business entities. 
Prerequisites: 221, 222. Offered every semester. 

333. Financial Management 3 cr. 

The course is designed to provide a theoretical or 
conceptual framework that a financial manager 
can use to reach decisions. Material is presented 
with the purpose of involving the student in the 
fundamental decisions and compromises of the fi- 
nancial manager as he faces choices between risk 
and return. Reading material, case material, com- 
puter analysis of financial problems and a research 
project are tools to be used. Prerequisite: 331. Of- 
fered every year. 

334. Risk Management. 3 cr. 

A study of the broad spectrum of risk exposures in 
business enterprise, with special attention to the 
need for identifying these in terms of nature and 
magnitude. Emphasis is on techniques available to 
aid the decision-maker in making decisions under 
constraints of uncertainty. Methods of alleviation, 
avoidance, and insurance are studied. Attention is 
given not only to the traditional forms of insurable 



hazards, but also to implicit risks such as those of 
loss in market value of assets, capital budgeting 
decisions, new product financing techniques, mer- 
gers, and other areas where risk is present in the 
decision. Prerequisite: 331. Offered every third se- 
mester. 

335. Business Financial Problems. 3 cr. 

The aim of this course is to provide a vehicle in 
which the student can take material from previous 
courses both of a financial nature and that from 
other disciplines and through its utilization solve 
problems primarily of a financial nature. It also 
provides the student with an opportunity to learn 
to write and deliver professional opinions on how 
to solve business problems. While the course is 
taught primarily through the case technique, other 
methods are also used. The student is expected to 
be able to identify problems, reach conclusions, 
recommend solutions, and identify techniques on 
how they might be implemented. Prerequisite: 
331. Offered every third semester. 

336. Security Analysis. 3 cr. 

An intensive study of the analytic techniques ap- 
plicable to the selection of the various securities of 
private as well as public entities. Consideration is 
given to the markets in which these securities are 
traded and the types of information necessary to 
the decision-making process of the investor as the 
attempt is made to measure the value of a particu- 
lar security. Several models are examined in seek- 
ing appropriateness in establishing the relative 
worth of a security. Prerequisite: 331. Offered 
every year. 

337. Investment Analysis. 3 cr. 

This course develops an understanding of the vari- 
ous types of investments available for a portfolio. 
Discussion of the various risks to which a portfolio 
may be subject and the importance of these risks 
to the various types of portfolio builders is under- 
taken. Basic elements of portfolio development, 
various quantitative and descriptive approaches 
used in portfolio development are considered. 
Techniques for measuring the effectiveness of the 
portfolio are illustrated. Prerequisites: 331, 336, or 
special permission of the instructor without 336. 
Offered every year. 

432. Credit Management. 3 cr. 

This course gives the student an understanding of 
the function of credit management. Cases, prob- 
lems, and field experience may be assigned. The 
student will have the opportunity to integrate 
knowledge gained from text material and other fi- 
nancial sources with that of other disciplines to ar- 
rive at a logical, sound credit decision. 
Prerequisite: 331. Offered every third semester. 

433. Financial Markets 3 cr. 

An extensive and intensive study of the market in 
which the financing of needs takes place. Study is 
made of the markets for borrowing and lending of 
capital, both short-term and long-term. Financial 
institutional structures are given emphasis as they 



69 



act and interact when serving as sources or inter- 
mediaries and users of funds. Research by the stu- 
dent is required to afford the student the 
opportunity to concentrate on an intensive effort 
upon an individual topic. Prerequisite: 331. Of- 
fered every third semester. 

434. Life Insurance. 3 cr. 

A study is made of the risks of death and longevity 
as they occur in personal and business situations. 
Analyses are made of various forms of life- 
insurance and annuity contracts and their uses, 
with emphasis upon their functions as instru- 
ments of estate creation and administration. Uses 
of insurance in connection with partners and key 
men, and in connection with bank loans, are ex- 
plored. Attention also is given to accident and 
health coverages, group plans, pensions, and reg- 
ulation of the industry. Prerequisite: 331. Offered 
every third semester. 

435. Property and Liability Insurance. 3 cr. 

A study of business and personal applications of 
casualty, fire, and liability coverages in the form of 
both insurance and bonding, including the fields 
of workmen's compensation; landlords' and ten- 
ants' liabilities; burglary; robbery, and theft; auto- 
mobile; credit and title insurance; fire and related 
lines; fidelity and surety bonding; and relevant as- 
pects of inland and ocean marine. Prerequisite: 
331. Offered every third semester. 

437. Fundamentals of Real Estate. 3 cr. 

A study of the problems involved in financing resi- 
dential, commercial, and industrial real estate 
from the points of view of both owner and lender. 
Methods of financing covered include use of indi- 
vidual and business equity; loans secured by 
mortgages; land contracts; sale-and-lease-back ar- 
rangements; and cooperatives, syndicates, and 
real estate trusts. Attention is given to procedures 
for originating, servicing, and foreclosing loans 
and mortgage arrangements by principals, agents, 
and mortgage bankers. Case problems either in 
class or the field type are used to illustrate the 
techniques employed in determining the feasibil- 
ity of a location. Special attention is given to an 
intensive research project in some area of interest 
to the student as related to real estate. Attention is 
also given to the requirements necessary to sit for 
the Pennsylvania Real Estate Sales License. Pre- 
requisite: 331. Offered every third semester. 

439. Seminar in Finance. 3 cr. 

Concentration upon selected contemporary topics 
presented by distinguished visiting professors of 
finance or resident faculty. Open only to senior 
students. Offered as needed. 



QUANTITATIVE METHODS 
CURRICULUM 

Students in the undergraduate School of Business 
and Administration complete a basic sequence in 
Quantitative Methods. This sequence is concerned 



with the application of mathematics, statistics, 
and electronic data processing to the analysis of 
business and economic problems. The objective of 
the program is to increase the student's knowledge 
and understanding of the uses of mathematics, 
statistics, and computers as aids in decision- 
making. The basic sequence is comprised of these 
courses: 181, 281, 282, and 381. Prior to entry into 
the sequence. Mathematics 109 and/or 111 in the 
College or the equivalent are required. 

In addition to the basic sequence, a number of 
electives are offered for students wishing to in- 
clude quantitative management science tech- 
niques in their areas of concentration. 

181. Introduction to Computers. 3 cr. 

An introduction to computer concepts, computer 
applications and computer programming. The 
course presents the computer as a tool used in the 
business environment. The algorithmic approach 
to problem-solving is introduced through flow- 
charts, decision tables, and pseudocode, and in 
turn related to the programming process. Funda- 
mental concepts of word processing, spread- 
sheets, and data base management systems are 
also presented. Students will use both mainframe 
and micro computers to complete course assign- 
ments. Prerequisite: Mathematics 109. Offered 
every semester. 

281, 282. Probability and Statistics. 3 cr. each 

This sequence includes the basic ideas of descrip- 
tive statistics, inductive statistics, and probability. 
Among the topics covered are: frequency distribu- 
tions; measures of central tendency; measures of 
dispersion; sets and set operations; elementary 
probability theory; probability distributions; sam- 
pling distributions; statistical estimation; testing 
of hypotheses; time series analysis; simple linear 
regression and correlation. Prerequisites: 181 and 
Mathematics 111. Offered every semester. 

381. Introduction to Decision-Sciences. 3 cr. 

The application of the scientific method of prob- 
lem solving to business problems. The course in- 
cludes various models and the methods of 
applying them to business situations. The models 
covered include linear programming, simulation, 
queuing, and inventory optimization. The use of 
library computer programs will be emphasized. 
Prerequisites: 281, 282. Offered every semester. 



MANAGEMENT INFORMATION 
SYSTEMS CURRICULUM 

The Quantitative Science Division offers an area of 
concentration in Management Information Sys- 
tems to prepare students for career opportunities 
in business application programming, systems 
analysis and design in data processing manage- 
ment positions. The course work is designed to 
prepare students to solve complex problems 
within organizations using computers and com- 
puter software. For the area of concentration, com- 



pletion of 382, 383, 481, 482, and 483 is required. In 
addition, three elective courses must be taken 
trom the following: 384, 385, 386, 484, and 485. 385 
is strongly recommended. 

382. Data Processing with COBOL. 3 cr. 

Presents structured programming techniques and 
COBOL applications. The scope of the course 
ranges from an introduction to basic COBOL con- 
cepts, data comparison, multiple level control 
break reports, and table handling methods to the 
introduction of file creation and file processing 
techniques. Prerequisite: 181. Offered as needed. 

383. File Processing with COBOL. 3 cr. 

Presents file maintenance techniques as they relate 
to sequential, indexed sequential and relative file 
organization. Methods for creating, accessing, and 
updating files are discussed. Theoretical founda- 
tions of structured programming are stressed 
throughout. Additional topics include an in-depth 
discussion of table processing, the COBOL SORT 
feature, ISAM, VSAM, subprograms, utility pro- 
grams and the COBOL report writer. Prerequisite: 
382. Offered as needed. 

384. Microcomputers and Structured 
Techniques. 3 cr. 

Provides in-depth coverage of the personal com- 
puter and its applications in the business environ- 
ment. The operating system and file-handling 
capabilities including up-loading and down- 
loading of files are presented. The PASCAL lan- 
guage, particularly those features which lend 
themselves to business-oriented applications and 
program structure are presented. File-handling 
techniques using PASCAL are stressed. Prerequi- 
site: 181. Offered as needed. 

385. Computer Systems. 3 cr. 

Presents the various hardware components of a 
computer system as well as the components and 
functional characteristics of common types of op- 
erating systems. A fundamental understanding 
and appreciation of the internal operation of the 
computer system will be developed through an in- 
troduction to an assembler language. Prerequisite: 
181. Offered as needed. 

386. Computer Simulation. 3 cr. 

Provides an orientation to the design and imple- 
mentation of simulation models as a means of 
studying the behavior of a system. The student is 
required to validate models and their results for 
the purpose of management decision making. 
Popular simulation languages are used to con- 
struct general purpose simulation models as well 
as financial system models. Other topics such as 
computer graphics applications using personal 
computers will also be presented. Prerequisite: 
382. Offered as needed. 

481. Systems Analysis and Design. 3 cr. 

An overview of all phases of the systems life cycle 
with emphasis on structured analysis and design 
techniques. Case studies are used to generate de- 



tailed data flow diagrams and a complete feasibil- 
ity study. The student is required to analyze needs 
and organize and design files and a data base with 
corresponding inputs and outputs. The issues in- 
volved with conversion, testing, training, docu- 
menting, maintaining and managing the system 
are also addressed. Prerequisite: 382. Offered 
every semester. 

482. Data Base Management Systems. 3 cr. 

Focuses on data base planning, organization, and 
design and the link to information systems analy- 
sis and design. Data structures and data models 
are discussed. Characteristics such as integrity, se- 
curity, privacy, recovery, and query are analyzed. 
Hierarchical, network and CCPASYL models, as 
well as relational models are reviewed. The stu- 
dents will apply sound principles of data base ad- 
ministration and interact with a commercial data 
base management system to fulfill course require- 
ments. Prerequisite: 383. Offered as needed. 

483. MIS in Organizations. 3 cr. 

Establishes the role of information systems and 
decision support systems in organizations and 
their relationship to organizational objectives and 
structure. The importance of accurately defining 
information requirements for all levels of manage- 
ment in a manner which fully utilizes the capacity 
of a data system is stressed throughout the course. 
Decision support software is integrated into the 
course content. Prerequisite: 481. Offered as 
needed. 

484. Distributed Data Processing. 3 cr. 

Develops an understanding of the terminology, 
devices and security features of centralized, de- 
centralized, and distributed data communication 
systems. Emphasis is on the impact of communi- 
cations technology on information systems. Data 
communication errors, their detection and correc- 
tion are discussed. Available software, common 
carriers, and prevailing costs for services are pre- 
sented. Case studies are used as the student is ex- 
pected to design an information system in a data 
communications environment. Prerequisite: 481. 
Offered as needed. 

485. EDP Audit and Control. 3 cr. 

Presents EDP auditing standards with a blend of 
systems concepts and applications. The impor- 
tance of incorporating controls in system design is 
stressed throughout. Techniques for testing com- 
puter programs, files, and processing systems are 
presented. Special attention is devoted to the par- 
ticulars of auditing real-time systems, time- 
sharing systems, and computer service agencies. 
Case studies are used to create a simulated audit 
environment. Prerequisite: 481. Offered as 
needed. 



71 



DIVISION OF BEHAVIORAL 
SCIENCE 

PROGRAM GUIDE 

Programs of study offered through the Division of 
Behavioral Science include, but are not limited to, 
the following: 

General Business Administration 

Human Resource Management 

International Business 

Law Administration 

Management 

Marketing 

Marketing Management 

These can be modified and other concentrations 
can be structured according to the objectives of the 
student, in consultation with the Academic Advi- 



GENERAL BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION CURRICULUM 

This concentration is intended for those students 
who desire a broad overall background in business 
rather than specialization in any one specific field. 
Course work beyond the require core may be se- 
lected from junior or senior level elective courses 
in the various fields of study in business. Students 
in this concentration should plan their programs 
in consultation with the Academic Advisors. 



INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS 
CURRICULUM 

International Business Certificate Program 

An interdisciplinary certificate program in interna- 
tional business is offered by the School of Business 
and Administration in conjunction with the Mod- 
ern Languages Department in the College of Lib- 
eral Arts and Sciences. Participants in the program 
combine study of a foreign language with their 
business studies. Requirements for the certificate 
include foreign language competency at the 360 
level, and completion of 349 International Business 
Perspectives Strategies and Practices as well as 441 
International Business. Students interested in this 
program should plan their program of studies in 
consultation with the Academic Advisors. 

141. Physical and Economic Geography. 3 cr. 

This course examines the present and potential 
products of the world's major geographic regions. 
The course concerns itself essentially with man's 
utilization of natural resources in earning a living. 
Attention is given to the geographical foundations 
and operations of major industries including agri- 
culture, manufacturing, extractive activities, and 
transportation. Principal domestic and world trade 
movements are analyzed. Offered every semester. 



142. Economic Development of Europe 

and American. 3 cr. 

A survey of the evolution of Western economic in- 
stitutions and business practices. The origin of 
capitalism, the Commercial and Industrial Revolu- 
tions, the rise of the bourgeoisie, and the spread of 
capitalism are examined. A study is also made of 
the institutional development and productive 
growth of the United States economy. Emphasis is 
placed on analyzing economic issues, particularly 
the evolution of business institutions, within a his- 
torical context. Offered every semester. 

349. International Business Perspectives 
Strategies and Practices 3 cr. 

An understanding of the cultural, political, social 
and philosophical differences involved in interna- 
tional practices and procedures. This course is 
team taught by business and modern langauge 
faculty in three one-credit courses: 

International Perspectives: 

Concepts and Issues 1 cr. 

International Perspectives: Dynamics 1 cr. 

International Perspectives: 

Cultural Differences 1 cr. 

Offered every second year. 

441. International Business. 3 cr. 

A study of the techniques of international trade. 
Emphasis is given to the contract, overseas equip- 
ment, customs procedure in this country and 
abroad, marine insurance, packing for overseas 
trade, financing exports and import shipments, 
foreign exchange, and carriage of goods by air. 
Prerequisites: 371, 221, 222. Offered every year. 

442. International Economics. 3 cr. 

This course is an introduction to international 
trade theory and the principles of international 
monetary economics as well as foreign trade poli- 
cies. Topics to be discussed include: the classical 
and neo-classical, theory of comparative advan- 
tage, foreign exchange markets and balance of 
payments, adjustment mechanisms, analysis of 
the consequences of trade regulation and interna- 
tional liquidity problems. Prerequisites: 221, 222. 
Offered every second year. 

454. The Law of International 

Commercial Transactions 3 cr. 

This course provides the student with an overall 
perspective of the basic legal problems involved in 
doing business with and in other countries. Topics 
covered include an introduction to foreign legal 
systems; study of various forms of business orga- 
nization a business person must consider before 
doing business with persons in another country; 
study of the basic legal issues surrounding a con- 
trol for the sale of goods; legal problems involved 
in letters of credit, insurance, risk of loss; antitrust 
aspects of the sale of goods; forms of dispute set- 
tlement; and the problems of enforcing judgments 
in and against foreign countries. Prerequisite: 251. 
Offered every second year. 



72 



LAW ADMINISTRATION CURRICULUM 

This curriculum is designed to prepare profession- 
als to aid in the solutions of one of society's most 
critical problems, that of the administration of le- 
gal systems. Future executives in court manage- 
ment, correctional institutions, and control 
systems (law enforcement) receive a broad inter- 
disciplinary educational experience with the basic 
core coursework in the School of Business and Ad- 
ministration. 

PRE-LEGAL CURRICULUM 

The curriculum of the School of Business and Ad- 
ministration meets the requirements for registra- 
tion for general purposes of the State Board of Law 
Examiners in Pennsylvania, and of the State Edu- 
cation Department of New York. 

Coursework in the various areas of the School of 
Business and Administration provides good prep- 
aration for the professional study of law. See three- 
year Bachelor's/J. D., p. 14. 

251. Legal Process. 3 cr. 

An introductory course exploring the nature of 
law, its sources, its relation to society and govern- 
ment; relation of the judicial to the executive legis- 
lative functions; law as an instrument of social 
change and control; understanding of the legal 
rights and duties of persons. Acquaintance with 
areas of legal concern to the administrator such as 
labor, environmental controls, products liability, 
anti-trust concerns such as pricing and mergers. 
Offered every semester. 

353. Contracts. 3 cr. 

Study of the law pertaining to the formation of 
contracts, the legal requisites of an enforceable 
agreement, the transfer of contractual rights and 
duties, the discharge of contracts; the relationship 
between principal and agent. Prerequisite: 251. 
Offered every semester. 

354. Commercial Transactions. 3 cr. 

Study of the provisions of the Uniform Commer- 
cial Code with reference to the nature and legality 
of sales of goods, the formality of sale contract, 
transfer of title to goods, warranties; nature and 
kinds of commercial paper, requisites and mean- 
ing of negotiability, methods of transfer. Prerequi- 
site: 251. Offered every semester. 

355. Law and Business Organizations. 3 cr. 

Consideration of the nature, creation and dissolu- 
tion of the proprietorship, various types of part- 
nerships, other unincorporated organizations, 
and the corporation. Duties, rights, remedies, and 
liabilities of owners and managers are studied. 
Prerequisite: 251. Offered every semester. 

356. Legal Aspects of Human Resource 
Management. 3 cr. 

Survey of state and federal laws that impact on hu- 
man resource management including fair employ- 



ment laws. Title VII of the 1964 Civil Rights Act, 
Equal Pay Act, Fair Labor Standards Act. The 
course also provides students with an understand- 
ing of ERISA, workmen's compensation laws, 
OSHA, EEOC guidelines, and office of contracts 
compliance requirements. Prerequisite: 251. Of- 
fered every year. 

453. Administration of Legal Systems. 3 cr. 

Study of the legal system and the procedures by 
which legal rights and duties are effectuated and 
enforced; current problems and issues related to 
the system in the attainment of its objectives; ad- 
ministrative problems in the legal system. Prereq- 
uisite: 251. Offered as need. 

454. The Law of International 

Commercial Transactions. 3 cr. 

See International Business Curriculum. 



MANAGEMENT CURRICULUM 

In accord with the objectives of the University and 
of the School, the Management Curriculum aims 
are: 

1. To acquaint students with managerial con- 
cepts and practices in both profit and non-profit 
organizations. 

2. To offer the opportunity for a concentration in 
human resource management. Courses required 
in this concentration are: 356, 364, 365, 461, 467 
plus three of the following: 362, 420, 421, 463, 464, 
466, 468, 494. Non-business electives recom- 
mended in this concentration are English 203, 383, 
or 385, History 394, Speech 102, 204, Philosophy 
108 plus four of the following: Philosophy 103, 106, 
Speech 206, 302, 304, Sociology 205, Special Stud- 
ies 401. 

3. To offer a program of studies for those inter- 
ested in a concentration in general management. 
Students desiring this concentration are free to se- 
lect any junior or senior level elective courses in 
the management curriculum and may supplement 
them with other business electives. 

361. Principles of Management. 3 cr. 

This course represents an initial introduction to 
the essential principles of management centered 
around the concept of management being a basic 
process which is distinct and applicable to all en- 
terprises. Planning, organizing, actuating, and 
controlling comprise the fundamental functions of 
management, making up the management proc- 
ess. These functions constitute the framework 
around which this course is built. Emphasis is 
given to planning which is rapidly growing in 
managerial importance. Decision making, mana- 
gerial creativity and the art of management are 
thoroughly developed. Offered every semester. 

362. Behavioral Science. 3 cr. 

This course is an introdution to the scientific study 
of behavior. It incorporates concepts from the dis- 
ciplines of anthropology, psychology, sociology, 
economics, law, and political science, as well as 



73 



from the newer fields of organization theory, game 
theory, and decision theory. This interdisciplinary 
approach to behavior provides an intergrative 
framework for transfer to any organizational set- 
ting. Prerequisite: 361. Offered every year. 

363. Production Management. 3 cr. 

A follow up course to Principles of Management in 
which all important phases of management are de- 
veloped. Topics such as purchasing, inventory 
control, motion and time study, plant layout, pric- 
ing, etc. are covered. Other related organizational 
problems are considered. An intermediate course 
to be used as a basis for further specialized treat- 
ment of management areas in the advanced 
courses. Prerequisites: 361 and 281, 282. Offered 
every second year. 

364. Personnel Management. 3 cr. 

A course presenting techniques of manpower 
management. Involves study of recruiting and 
screening techniques, training programs, merit 
rating, wage payment plans, safety, disciplinary 
programming, etc. Current practice is presented in 
the form of case material. Prerequisite: 361. Of- 
fered every year. 

365. Industrial Relations. 3 cr. 

A course developed to present to the student his- 
torical knowledge of the labor movement, current 
status and importance in industry, and the legal 
status of labor governing the actions of manage- 
ment in a myriad of ways. Presents the role of la- 
bor, management and government in collective 
bargaining and current industrial relations policies 
and practices. Prerequisites: 361. Offered every 
year. 

461. Human Relations. 3 cr. 

An advanced course treating of the human aspect 
as it is encountered in the industrial organization. 
Involves an analysis of behavioristic patterns of in- 
dividuals as members of work groups. Deals with 
motivation, goals, needs, frustrations, etc. as they 
relate to the industrial situation. Prerequisite: 361. 
Offered every year. 

462. Public Administration. 3 cr. 

This course introduces the student to the content 
of public management and to the work of the pub- 
lic manager at federal, state and local government 
levels. It also compares and contrasts public and 
private management and links management the- 
ory and practice. Lecture-discussions and partici- 
pative methods are employed. Prerequisite: 361. 
Offered as needed. 

463. Collective Bargaining. 3 cr. 

Study of the relation of federal and state legislation 
issues and administrative aspects of collective 
agreements; specific provisions including adjust- 
ment of grievances; conciliation, mediation and ar- 
bitration; collective bargaining and public policy. 
Prerequisite: 361. Offered every second year. 



464. Administrative Organization. 3 cr. 

A course presenting organizational concepts as 
they relate to the operation of an enterprise. Line, 
staff, and functional relationships are thoroughly 
developed. Both formal and informal relationships 
are considered as they are developed and exist 
within a firm. Authority, responsibility, delega- 
tion, centralization and decentralization of control 
and other related organizational problems are con- 
sidered. Prerequisite: 361. Offered every year. 

465. Introduction to Entrepreneurial 

Small Business Management. 3 cr. 

This course deals with the overall management of 
the small business enterprise. Coverage includes 
entering the small business arena, organizing and 
financing a business, operation of the small firm, 
growth planning, and problems associated with 
being small. Prerequisite: 361. Offered as needed. 

466. Compensation Management. 3 cr. 

An advanced course involving treatment of major 
compensation issues. Coverage includes analysis 
of the contemporary concepts of wage and salary 
administration, such as cost of living and merit rat- 
ing; appraisal of various payment approaches, 
such as incentive programs and profit sharing; 
structuring a wage program; analysis of the final 
effects such technically oriented practices have on 
the functional areas of management. Prerequisite: 
361. Offered every second year. 

467. Human Resource Planning. 3 cr. 

This course provides the linkage between human 
resources and the strategic direction of an organi- 
zation. Topics covered include the environment 
and implementation of human resource planning, 
needs forecasting, performance and career man- 
agement, as well as the human resource audit. 
Prerequisite: 361, 364. Offered every year. 

468. Training in Business and Industry. 3 cr. 

This course explores the training and developmnet 
function in human resource management. There is 
coverage of the assessment of training needs, de- 
signing and conducting training programs, and 
evaluations of training effectiveness. Prerequisite: 
364 and permission of the instructor. Offered every 
second year. 

491. Executive Action Simulation. 3 cr. 

A course incorporating the Games Theory Ap- 
proach. The teaching techniques of Case Method 
and Role Playing are combined in a simulated 
business environment in which the students make 
the decisions affecting the conduct of a business. 
Participants are divided into teams with key corpo- 
rate duties being assigned and several teams com- 
pete against each other in an attempt to operate 
the "firm" on the optimum profitable basis. Pre- 
requisites: Senior standing and 361. Open only to 
students in the School of Business and Adminis- 
tration. Offered every semester. 

492. Executive Policy. 3 cr. 

Integrates concepts and skills from all functional 
areas of business and administration in decision 



74 



making under conditions of uncertainty. Makes 
use of case histories and other information to al- 
low students analysis and problem solving with 
the organization as a whole. Prerequisites: Senior 
standing and 361. Offered as needed. 

493. Independent Scholarly Study. 3 cr. 

Student must initiate an original research project 
in a field of business of his choice. The project is 
then scrutinized by a Committee of three Faculty 
members. If the project is approved, the Dean will 
choose a facultv member as director of the project. 
The project must be completed within an academic 
semester. Prerequisite: Student must qualify as a 
University Scholar. Offered every semester. 

494. Field Study. 3 cr. 

Organized group study under specific programs 
beyond the classroom. Participants will be re- 
quired to utilize analytical and decision making 
abilities in projects in an action setting under fac- 
ulty supervision. Prerequisite: Approval of the in- 
structor. Offered every semester. 



MARKETING CURRICULUM 

In accord with the objectives of the University and 
of the School, the Marketing Curriculum aims are: 

1. To develop an understanding and apprecia- 
tion of distribution in our economy. 

2. To explore the many basic activities involved 
in the marketing concept and in matching 
products to markets. 

3. To provide an area of specialized study for 
those students who wish to pursue the mar- 
keting phase of business and in Marketing 
Management. 

371. Principles of Marketing. 3 cr. 

The emphasis throughout this course is on prob- 
lem solving and decision-making in marketing. 
The basis for the course is a systematic analysis of 
customer behavior, and the development of mar- 
keting policies and programs. Marketing strategy 
and designing a market mix are stressed to give 
the student an insight into these areas, and the re- 
duction of risks is emphasized through the use of 
quantitative and qualitative market research tech- 
niques. Offered every semester. 

372. Marketing Problems. 3 cr. 

This course employs the case method illustrative 
of typical marketing problems such as merchan- 
dising, advertising, selection of channels of distri- 
bution, and development of new products. These 
problems are analyzed as they affect different mid- 
dlemen in the marketing structure including man- 
ufacturers, wholesalers, jobbers, brokers, agents, 
and similar functionaries. Theories of marketing 
are subject to the test of practical examples so that 
the student may develop a more realistic grasp of 
the principles involved and the value of the practi- 



tioner's judgements. Curent marketing develop- 
ments are studied. Prerequisite: 371. Offered every 
semester. 

373. Sales Administration. 3 cr. 

An introduction to the fundamentals of salesman- 
ship and the problems confronted by the sales 
manager. Topics include: production planning, 
pricing, packaging, qualitative and quantitative 
market analysis, and specific sales management 
functions of selection, training, equipping, com- 
pensating, supervising, and controlling salemen. 
Prerequisite: 371. Offered every spring. 

441. International Business. 3 cr. 

See International Business Curriculum. 

471. Marketing Research. 3 cr. 

This course examines the means and methods 
business management uses to get the necessary 
information for decision making involving what to 
produce, how much to produce, and how to dis- 
tribute goods that are produced. The various types 
of marketing research -consumer research, moti- 
vational research, market analysis, sales analysis 
and sales forecasting, product research, and ad- 
vertising research -are studied in some de- 
tail. Prerequisites: 281, 282, 371. Offered every year. 

472. Transportation. 3 cr. 

A comprehensive analysis of the historical evolu- 
tion, operation and economic development of the 
railroads, motor carriers and air carriers of the 
United States. The Interstate Commerce Act, with 
its amendments and the public regulation, stafe 
and federal, of the various carriers will be empha- 
sized. Prerequisites: 371, 221, 222. Offered every 
year. 

473. Traffic Management. 3 cr. 

This course deals with the physical distribution of 
goods. Topics treated are: location analysis, inven- 
tory control, the total distribution cost concept, 
government regulations and current legislation re- 
lated to physical distribution. There is also cover- 
age of the organization and functioning of traffic 
departments, shippers' relations with carriers, and 
related issues. Prerequisites: 371, 221, 222. Offered 
every year. 

474. Purchasing Management. 3 cr. 

Introduction to purchasing and materials manage- 
ment. Topics covered include purchasing effi- 
ciency, inventory problems, pricing and time 
issues, quality, and value analysis. Students will 
prepare written case analyses as well as a term pro- 
ject involving value analysis. Prerequisites: 361 
and 371. Offered every year. 



DIVISION OF ECONOMIC SCIENCE 
ECONOMIC SCIENCE CURRICULUM 

121. Elements of Economics. 3 cr. 

Economics 121 is an introductory course in eco- 
nomics intended to afford an understanding of 



75 



how our economic system works, of the forces 
which affect the level, composition, and distribu- 
tion of the output of the economy, and of the is- 
sues behind current economic problems. The 
course content will define concepts, provide back- 
ground materials, and develop economic ideas 
necessary to an understanding of the policy issues 
constantly before a complex dynamic economy. 
Not counted toward a degree in the School of Busi- 
ness and Administration. Offered every year. 

221. Principles of Economics I. 3 cr. 

The first course in economics for the student who 
plans to major or minor in economics. The course 
seeks to acquaint the student with concepts and 
the logical basis to economic reasoning. Emphasis 
is placed on understanding the behavior of house- 
holds and firms under competitive and imper- 
fectly competitive market conditions. Offered 
every semester. 

222. Principles of Economics II. 3 cr. 

This course is primarily concerned with aggrega- 
tive economic relationships. The theory of the de- 
termination of national income is developed and 
attention is given to the construction of national 
income accounts. Attention is given to monetary 
and fiscal policy and their implications. Prerequi- 
site: 221. Offered every semester. 

321. National Income Analysis. 3 cr. 

A conceptual analysis of national income theory, 
its tools, its basic principles and its social and eco- 
nomic significance. The course treats the macroec- 
onomic method of economic analysis. It is 
concerned with explaining the development and 
nature of national income aggregates. The basic 
principles of national income theory are developed 
and explained in order to place into focus the oper- 
ations of the American economy and the many 
problems relating to it. Prerequisites: 221, 222. Of- 
fered every semester. 

322. Price and Production Economics. 3 cr. 

An intensive study of the theory of demand, pro- 
duction and distribution. In addition, recent de- 
velopments in the theory of imperfect competition 
and oligopoly are carefully examined. Prerequi- 
sites: 221, 222. Offered every semester. 

323. Public Finance. 3 cr. 

A study of the organization and management of 
government revenues and expenditures with em- 
phasis on American practices and policies at the 
various levels of government. Benefit-cost and 
cost-effectiveness analysis with their implications 
for program and capital budgeting receive heavy 
consideration. The economic consequences of var- 
ious tax structures and alternative social choice 
mechanisms are studied. Prerequisite: 321 or 322. 
Offered every year. 

324. Comparative Economic Systems. 3 cr. 

A comparative study of capitalism, socialism, com- 
munism and other economic systems with empha- 



sis on analysis rather than mere description of the 
economics of various countries. Prerequisites: 221, 
222. Offered every year. 

420. Labor Economics. 3 cr. 

Analysis of the principles for wage and employ- 
ment determination in contemporary American 
economy under non-union conditions as well as 
under collective bargaining. The institutional de- 
velopment underlying labor supply and demand 
is studied with direct emphasis on its impact on 
employment and production, on the general 
wage-level and on wage differentials, on the distri- 
bution of national income and on general social 
welfare. The course also includes a comparative 
study of problems in labor economics in American 
and other democratic countries. Prerequisites: 221, 
222. Offered as needed. 

421. History of Economic Thought. 3 cr. 

Shows the development of economic thought from 
the Age of Mercantilism to 1890. Major emphasis is 
placed upon the writings of Mun, Petty, Quesnay, 
Smith, Ricardo, Malthus, Marx, Jevons, and the 
Austrian School. It offers a study of the funda- 
mental concepts of the writers and the influence of 
institutional conditions upon their philosophy. 
Major emphasis is placed upon value and distribu- 
tion theory as it developed. Prerequisites: 221, 222. 
Offered every year. 

423. Business Cycles and Forecasting. 3 cr. 

This course is designed to study the process of ec- 
onomic change. Analyses of Seasonal, Cyclical, 
and Secular movements will be undertaken. Theo- 
retical and empirical aspects will be covered. Fore- 
casting techniques will also be studied. 
Prerequisites: 221, 222. Offered every year. 

424. Business and Public Policy. 3 cr. 

A study of the regulatory techniques used by gov- 
ernment to influence and modify business behav- 
ior. This course also includes an analysis of market 
structure, conduct and performance consider- 
ations pertaining to the firm and the industry. Em- 
phasis is given the anti-trust laws and special 
regulatory problems. Prerequisites: 221, 222. Of- 
fered every year. 

425. Current Economic Issues. 3 cr. 

A seminar-like discussion of the state of the na- 
tion's economy and its current problems on the ba- 
sis of critical examination of professional journal 
articles and economic reports by official and pri- 
vate sources (such as the President's Council of Ec- 
onomic Advisers). The purpose of the course is to 
begin developing in the graduating senior the abil- 
ity to coordinate and apply the analytical knowl- 
edge he has acquired during his undergraduate 
study of economics and related fields of social sci- 
ence and business administration. Prerequisites: 
221, 222. Offered every year. 

426. Monetary Theory and Policy. 3 cr. 

This course presents the chief theoretical contribu- 
tions on money. The policy implications of these 
theories, past and present, wiU be emphasized. 



76 



Concentration will center upon policy proposals 
and controversy in the monetary- field since World 
War 11. The theories and contributions ot Hicks, 
Keynes, Friedman and Tobin, among others, are 
reviewed. The role of interest rate is reviewed 
along with wage-price controversies, international 
gold flows, and the relationships between fiscal 
and monetary policies. Prerequisites: 221, 222. Of- 
fered e\er\' year. 

427. Theory of Economic Development. 3 cr. 

The course is designed to acquaint students with 
the area of economic development. The subject 
matter of this course conveniently divides itself 
into five major categories: the nature of develop- 
ment and problems of measurement, theories of 
development; factors and forces affecting eco- 
nomic growth; different approaches to a higher 



standard of living; and problems of domestic and 
international stability. Approach to this course en- 
compasses detailed study as well as a strong em- 
phasis on theoretical and critical analysis. 
Prerequisites: 221, 222. Offered as needed. 

429. Seminar in Economics. 3 cr. 

The purpose of the seminar is to provide a vehicle 
for the advanced student to investigate separate 
subject areas in the field of Economic Theory. The 
intention is to provide a sound basis for further 
study at the graduate level. Seminar procedure 
will stress written and oral reports. Prerequisites: 
321, 322 and permission of the instructor. Offered 
as needed. 



442. International Economics. 

See International Business Curriculum. 



3cr. 




n 



School of Education 



HISTORY 

Prior to 1929, teacher preparation courses were of- 
fered through a department of the College of Lib- 
eral Arts and Sciences; in that year the 
newly-organized School of Education granted its 
first degrees in programs of secondary education. 
The following programs have since been approved 
for certification by the Department of Education of 
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania; music edu- 
cation in 1930; graduate education, 1936, elemen- 
tary education, 1937; guidance, 1952; school 
administration, 1952; special education, 1964; 
reading specialist and reading supervisor, 1969; 
school psychology, 1969; early childhood educa- 
tion, 1975; school supervision, 1976. 

SELECTION AND ADMISSION 

Candidates who express a desire to become teach- 
ers are admitted to the School of Education 
through the University Office of Admissions (ap- 
ply to Director of Admissions, Duquesne Univer- 
sity, Pittsburgh, Pa. 15282). The curriculum for the 
first two years is devoted to the broad learnings in 
general and basic professional education and be- 
ginning course work in a major discipline or area 
of concentration. 

The School of Education includes and maintains 
in its enrollment only those students who give def- 
inite indications of teacher potential. Students are, 
therefore, expected to demonstrate developing 
personal and professional characteristics, atti- 
tudes, and competencies which will recommend 
them as worthy candidates for the teaching profes- 
sion. Evaluation and approval by the faculty is 
based on the student's development of: 

1. A well-balanced personality as evidenced 
through personal appearance, health and vitality, 
emotional maturity, verbal fluency, self- 
confidence, cooperation, judgement and tact, 
adaptability and resourcefulness, cultural appreci- 
ation, and social relationships. 

2. Professional attitudes and competencies as ev- 
idenced through interest in teaching, preparation 
in subject matter and in teaching methods and 
techniques, participation in laboratory experi- 
ences, including observation and student teach- 
ing, and the demonstration of necessary abilities 
and skills. 

PROGRAMS 

The School of Education has program approval 
from the Pennsylvania Department of Education 
for the preparation of Elementary, Secondary, and 
Special (teaching the mentally and/or physically 
handicapped) Education teachers. Also, in consor- 
tium with Carlow College, students can become 
certified in Early Childhood Education. 



The programs, in accord with the philosophy 
and objectives of the School of Education, offer 
students opportunity to qualify for: 

1. The Instructional I (Provisional) Certificate to 
teach classes in the schools of Pennsylvania for six 
contract years. 

2. Admission to graduate programs in educa- 
tion. 

The last 30 credits for the degree must be earned 
at Duquesne University. The minimum number of 
credits for graduation is 120. 

DEGREE 

The School of Education offers programs leading 
to the Bachelor of Science in Education degree. All 
programs are approved by the Pennsylvania De- 
partment of Education for the Instructional I (Pro- 
visional) Certificate. 

CURRICULUM 

General Education. The School of Education re- 
quires completion of the established general edu- 
cation which includes courses in the humanities, 
social sciences, natural and behavioral sciences, 
and, for Catholic students, theology. 

Professional Education. The basic professional ed- 
ucation program introduces the student to the 
teaching profession through thorough study of the 
principles and practices of education and the 
learning process. Specialized courses provide 
preparation in teaching techniques and methods 
required for specific fields of concentration - 
elementary, secondary, special (mentally and/or 
physically handicapped), or early childhood edu- 
cation. 

Professional Laboratory Experiences. The School 
has developeci broad and diversified professional 
laboratory experiences designed to provide oppor- 
tunities for observing and working with children 
and youth; these include: 

1. Programs in neighborhood and community 
centers, hospitals, recreational and youth organi- 
zations, and summer camps. 

2. Planned observations in pdblic and private 
schools, agencies, institutions and educational 
settings. 

3. Teacher aide and tutorial experiences. 

4. Student teaching in an approved setting for an 
entire semester. 

All of these experiences are completed under 
professional supervision from the University and 
from the public or private school or off-campus 
agency. 



78 



GENERAL EDUCATION 

The following courses in the arts and sciences are 
an integral part of each program: 

Credits 

Required Courses 42 

English Area 12 

English Composition 6 

English Elective 3 

Communication Area (Speech, 

journalism, English) 3 

Any Combination of Mathematics/ 

Science/Foreign Language 12 

Social Science 12 

(Anthropology, Economics, Geography, 
History, Political Science, Sociology, and 
Psychology) 

Philosophy /Theology 6 

Catholics-minimum of 3 Theology credits. 

COMPETENCY CORE CURRICULUM 

The Competency Core Curriculum begins with In- 
troduction to Education I, II in the freshman year. 
Developmental Foundations I, II in the sophomore 
year and concludes with Curriculum and Instruc- 
tion I, II in the junior year. The Competency Core 
Curriculum focuses on the philosophical, psycho- 
logical and pedagogical foundations needed by 
entry-level teachers; extensive involvement in field 
experiences beginning with the freshman year; 
and an on-going process of individual advisement 
and counseling regarding teaching and career de- 
cisions. 

The Competency Core Curriculum is predicated 
on four domains; 1) Becoming a person, 2) Becom- 
ing a student of education, 3) Becoming an educa- 
tional theorist, and 4) Becoming a practitioner. The 
Competency Core Curriculum, as the title implies, 
is a competency based program that is develop- 
mentally designed to prepare education students 
to be entry-level teachers in elementary, secondary 
and special education. 
Courses (Required in all programs)* 

101, 102 Introduction to Education I, II 4 

215, 216 Developmental Foundations of 

Education I 4 

217, 218 Developmental Foundations of 

Education II 4 

311 Instructional Psychology/ 

Instructional Computing 3 

313 Human Development/Exceptional Child . 3 

*315, 316 Curriculum and Instruction I 5 

*317, 318 Curriculum and Instruction II 5 



*In Early Childhood Education, 315, 316 and 317, 
318 are not required. 

EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 

This is a cooperative program, approved by the 
Pennsylvania Department of Education, with 
Carlo w College. Some of the professional courses 
are offered only on the Carlow campus. 



These 47 credits (semester hours), in addition to 
42 specified under General Education, 12 credits 
in the Competency Core Curriculum, and 19 
credits in electives, are required for the degree: 

Credits 

Required Courses— Carlow College 32 

*201 Orientation to Early Childhood 

Education 3 

*203 Child Development 3 

307 Curriculum & Methods for Early Child- 
hood Education with Practicum 4 

308 Curriculum & Methods for Day 

Care with Practicum 3 

310 Specialized Programming For 

Young Children 3 

**320 ED Reading & Language Arts 3 

321 ED Reading & Language Arts 

Practicum 1 

404 EC Nursery School Student 

Teaching & Seminar 6 

406 EC Primary Student Teaching & 

Seminar 6 

*Prerequisites for 307, 308 and 310. 
**Prerequisite for 321. 

Required Courses— Duquesne University 15 

231 Teaching Physical Education for 
Classroom Teachers 1 

232 Teaching Art for Classroom Teachers .... 2 

233 Teaching Health for Classroom Teachers . 1 

234 Teaching Music for Classroom Teachers . . 2 

331 Teaching Elementary Social Studies 3 

332 Teaching Elementary Mathematics 3 

333 Teaching Elementary Science 3 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 

The following 39 credits (semester hours) in Pro- 
fessional Preparation and 12 in electives combined 
with the 42 credits specified in General Education 
and 27 in the Competency Core Curriculum com- 
prise this curriculum: 

Credits 
Professional Preparation 
(All Courses Required) 39 

231 Teaching Physical Education for Classroom 
Teachers 1 

232 Teaching Art for Classroom Teachers .... 2 

233 Teaching Health for Classroom Teachers . 1 

234 Teaching Music for Classroom Teachers . . 2 

325 Teaching Reading in the Primary School . 3 

326 Teaching Reading in Intermediate and 
Middle Schools 3 

330 Teaching Elementary Language Arts and 
Reading 3 

331 Teaching Elementary Social Studies 3 

332 Teaching Elementary Mathematics 3 



79 



333 Teaching Elementary Science 3 

484 Children's Literature 3 

*491 Student Teaching 12 



*No student may register for additional course 
work during the student teaching semester with- 
out permission. 

Electives 12 



MUSIC EDUCATION 

General and professional course work and profes- 
sional education courses required for this program 
are outlined in the School of Music section. 



SECONDARY EDUCATION 

In addition to the 42 credits (semester hours) in 
General Education and 27 in the Competency 
Core Curriculum, a student must complete the fol- 
lowing 51 credits, : 18 or 19 in Professional Prepa- 
ration, two or three in electives and a minimum of 
30 in an Arts or Sciences Area to satisfy require- 
ments for the degree and certification: 

Credits 
Professional Preparation 

(All Courses Required) 18 or 19 

497 Reading in the Secondary School 3 

Specific Methods Course 3 or 4 

215 Teaching Grammar and 
Composition AND 

216 Teaching Literature OR 

316 Teaching Secondary Mathematics 
and Science OR 

318 Teaching Secondary Foreign 
Languages OR 

319 Teaching Secondary Social Studies 

*491 Student Teaching 12 



*No student may register for additional course 
work during the student teaching semester with- 
out permission. 

Electives 2 or 3 

Arts or Sciences Area (Minimum for 
Certification 30 

Course 



Certification Area 


Concentration 


Supporting Courses 


Biology 


Biology 


Mathematics, 
chemistry, and 
physics 


Chemistry 


Chemistry 


Mathematics and 
physics 


Communication 






English Empha- 






sis 


English 


Journalism, Speech 


Journalism 






Emphasis 


Journalism 


Speech, English 


Speech Emphasis 


Speech 


English, journalism 


English 







General Science Minimum of eight 

credits in biology, 

chemistry, and 

physics, and 

additional courses 

to total a minimum 

of 18 semester 

hours in one field 

of science 
Latin Latin Greek, history 

Mathematics Mathematics Computer science 

general analytical 
physics 
Modem Lan- 
guages French, German, Philosophy, 

or Spanish linguistics 

Physics Physics Chemistry, 

mathematics, 
computer science, 
biology 
Social Studies Economics, Philosophy 

geography, history, 

polirical science, 

psychology, 

sociology, anthro- 
pology 

SPECIAL EDUCATION (MENTALLY AND/OR 
PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED) 

This program is designed to prepare students for 
teaching pupils with mental and/or physical dis- 
abilities, including brain injured, emotionally and 
socially disturbed, learning disabled, mentally re- 
tarded and physically disabled. 

These 48 credits (semester hours) in Professional 
Preparation and three in Electives in addition to 
the 42 credits in General Education and the 27 in 
the Competency Core Curriculum are required for 
the degree: 

Credits 
Professional Preparation 
(All Courses Required) 48 

209 Foundations of Special Education 3 

231 Teaching Physical Education for Classroom 
Teachers 1 

232 Teaching Art -for Classroom Teachers .... 2 

233 Teaching Health for Classroom Teachers . 1 

234 Teaching Music for Classroom Teachers . . 2 

276 Methods in Special Education 3 

325 Teaching Reading in the Primary School . 3 

330 Teaching Elementary Language Arts and 
Reading 3 

332 Teaching Elementary Mathematics 3 

333 Teaching Elementary Science 3 

386 Teaching the Mildly Handicapped 3 

387 Teaching the Severely Handicapped 3 

388 Vocational Education for the 
Handicapped 3 

477 Management of Behavior and Instruction in 
Special Education 3 



80 



*491 Student Teaching -Special Education. . . .12 



*\o student may register for additional course 
work during the student teaching semester with- 
out permission. 

TEACHER CERTIFICATION 

Through completion of degree and certification 
program requirements, a student will be eligible 
for the appropriate Pennsylvania Instructional I 
(Provisional) Certificate. This certificate is valid for 
six N'ears of teaching. During that time, to convert 
the certificate to the Instructional II (Permanent) 
form, the holder must complete 24 semester hours 
of post baccalaureate study and three years of suc- 
cessful teaching in public or private schools in 
Pennsylvania. All programs are approved by the 
Pennsylvania Department of Education. Certifica- 
tion in Pennsylvania enables a student to meet cer- 
tification requirements in various other states. 
Application for the certificate must be made dur- 
ing the semester in which the student expects to be 
graduated. 

DUAL CERTIFICATION 

Through advisement, a student may complete re- 
quirements in two certification areas, such as 
elementary/early childhood, elementary/ 
secondary, elementary/special education. Such 
programs require some additional coursework be- 
yond the 120 semester hours for a degree. After 
completing all other requirements, students may 
register, with appropriate advisement, for a nine- 
and a six-credit student-teaching course. Student 
teaching in both areas is offered during the stu- 
dent's final semester. 

CLASS ATTENDANCE 

The School of Education faculty has determined 
that the following policy will be in effect for the 
School of Education and will be adhered to by all 
professors who teach undergraduate courses: It is 
presumed that each student in a professional 
course will normally attend every session. The 
maximum number of cuts permitted is equated in 
hours, not in periods the class meets; in other 
words, a student may miss three hours of class 
time in a three-credit course. 

STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS 

The School of Education includes in its program 
opportunities for participation in student organi- 
zations related to professional education prepara- 
tion. Students are encouraged to take an active 
part in these professional organizations, for such 
interest is interpreted as reflecting social and edu- 
cational development. The organizations are: 
Duquesne University Chapter of the Council for Ex- 
ceptional Children, state and national student 
organizations in Special Education. 
Kappa Delta Epsilon, national education sorority. 



HONOR AWARDS 

These awards, presented at the annual Honors 
Days Convocation, are open to undergraduates in 
the School of Education: 

Faculty Award for General Excellence in Early Child- 
hood Education. 

Faculty Award for General Excellence in Elementary 
Education. 

Faculty Aivard for General Excellence in Secondary Ed- 
ucation. 

Faculty Award for General Excellence in Special Educa- 
tion. 

Kappa Delta Epsilon National Professional Education 
Sorority Award for outstanding member of Alpha 
Kappa Chapter. 

Kappa Delta Epsilon National Professional Education 
Sorority President's Award. 

Lawrence A. Roche Memorial Award to a junior stu- 
dent for general excellence in the School of Educa- 
tion. 

Philip C. Niehaus Memorial Award for outstanding 
achievement in the School of Education. 
Council for Exceptional Children Award for outstand- 
ing work in the organization. 

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 



EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATIONS AND 
PSYCHOLOGY 

101, 102. Introduction to Education I, 11. 

2 cr. each 

Provides insstruction and hands-on experience 
with audio-visual computer and V.C.R. materials. 
Includes field experience at selected and super- 
vised schools. Introduces students to professional 
standards and competencies. 102 emphasizes 
foundational knowledge, behavioral methodol- 
ogy, and current thrusts in the profession. In- 
cludes field experience at selected and supervised 
schools. Introduces students to professional self- 
assessment. 

202. Educational Psychology. 3 cr. 

Examines affective and cognitive development, 
planning and teaching techniques, measurement 
and evaluation, and related theories in an expe- 
riential learning environment. 

203, 204, 205, 206, 207. 

Field Experience. 1 cr. each 

Classroom and other school experience as an aide 
or observer; one credit each semester for a maxi- 
mum of five semesters. 

215, 216. Developmental Foundations 

of Education I. 4 cr. 

See description for 217, 218. 

217, 218. Developmental Foundations 

of Education II. 4 cr. 

Developmental Foundations I and II examine the 



81 



effects that values, classroom interactions, ap- 
proaches to various teaching and learning styles, 
recognition of individual differences, and various 
curriculum designs including I.E.P.'s and multi- 
cultural approaches, have on the physical, cogni- 
tive, affective and social development of all 
students and the teacher. Concurrent field place- 
ments include case studies, directed observations, 
data collection and teacher aide experience. 

301. Foundations of Education. 3 cr. 

Introduction to the study of the philosophical, so- 
cial, and historical foundations of education and 
the relationships between the school and other in- 
stitutions of society. 

311. Instructional Psychology/ 

Instructional Computing 3 cr. 

Instructional Psychology is largely concerned with 
human learning as it occurs in "educational" con- 
texts. The primary focus will be on student acqui- 
sition of knowledge and skill and how the 
competence is developed through the design of 
the conditions of learning. In Instructional Com- 
puting, students will review the components and 
functions of computer hardware and software, 
learn to evaluate software for integration into the 
standard curriculum, and develop skills in using 
computers for writing, planning, and evaluating. 

313. Human Development/Exceptional Child 3 cr. 

Cognitive, physical, psychological, and social de- 
velopment over the life span. Human Develop- 
ment focuses on age-level characteristics, 
developmental theories and principles, and learn- 
ing processes and implications pertaining to the 
child and adolescent in the school. Students will 
demonstrate an ability to successfully accommo- 
date exceptional children in the regular classroom 
by planning, developing and implementing effec- 
tive educational programs. 



315, 316. Curriculum and Instruction I. 
See description for 317, 318. 



5cr. 



317, 318. Curriculum and Instruction II. 5 cr. 

Curriculum and Instruction I and II focus on the 
presentation, analysis and demonstration of those 
generic competencies that directly apply to the de- 
sign and implementation of effective teaching- 
learning practices in the classroom. The 
components specifically address such topics and 
techniques as educational taxonomies, instruc- 
tional objectives, planning the lesson, classroom 
management, learning centers, materials utiliza- 
tion, evaluation of learning and grading. The field 
placement includes intensive teaching experience 
on site. 

340. Self-Development for the 

Classroom. 3 cr. 

Focuses on a philosophical-psychological ap- 
proach to self-development, using classroom ac- 
tivities to promote personal awareness in the 
teacher and student. 



351. Adolescent Development. 3 cr. 

Examines the developmental processes, psycho- 
logical, physical, and social, which affect student 
and student-teacher behavior and relationships in 
the classroom. 

410. Interpersonal Management Techniques 

for Educational and Organizational 

Leaders. 3 cr. 

Focuses on four major concerns for maximizing 
learning and minimizing conflict; they are the 
teacher's personal awareness of feelings and emo- 
tions; interpersonal, societal, and educational val- 
ues; understanding of group dynamics; and 
knowledge of managing classroom situations. 

480, 481. Independent Study. 1-3 cr. 

With permission of an instructor and approval of 
the Dean, seniors may pursue in-depth study of a 
subject area or engage in individual projects re- 
lated to their professional goals. 

485. Problems in Teaching Reading. 3 cr. 

Reading difficulties in elementary and secondary 
school levels; discussion of classroom and clinical 
procedures in solving reading problems; diagnos- 
tic and corrective techniques, and materials for the 
classroom teacher; reading improvement pro- 
grams; special unit on reading problems of the 
mentally retarded. 



EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 

201. Orientation to Early Childhood 

Education. 3 cr. 

Examination of the history of child development 
and practices of early education, culminating in an 
overview of theoretical issues influencing practice 
in the field today. Development of the student's 
observational skills, completion of on-site observa- 
tions in early educational settings, defining the 
role of the Early Childhood Educator, and develop- 
ing a personal philosophy. (Fall semester only) 

203. Child Development. 3 cr. 

In-depth examination of the development of the 
child from birth-eight years in physical, intellec- 
tual, social and emotional areas of growth. Meth- 
ods of recording and assessing growth of young 
children will be examined and utilized and a term 
project based on readings and observations will be 
required. (Spring semester only) . 

307. Curriculum and Methods for Early 
Childhood Education with Practicum. 4 cr. 

Study of curriculum methodology and implemen- 
tation in nursery, kindergarten and primary set- 
tings. Students will design environments and 
enact activities for language development and 
reading, art, music, play, social studies, science 
and math for children 3-8 years. A weekly practi- 
cum in an early education classroom is an integral 
part of this course. Prerequisite: EC 201 and 203. 
(Fall semester only) 



82 



308. Curriculum and Methods for 

Day Care With Practicum. 3 cr. 

Examination of social needs, program designs and 
curriculum implementation of day care services for 
children birth-8 years. Topics covered include re- 
search on working families, program design, envi- 
ronmental design and assessment, comprehensive 
curriculum planning, staffing strategies, parent 
communication, and research on impact of day 
care on young children and their families. Weekly 
practicum required in a child care classroom. Pre- 
requisite: EC 201 and 203. (Spring semester only) 

310. Specialized Programming for 

Young Children. 3 cr. 

Examination of history and current status of pro- 
grams which provide compensatory, remedial, 
therapeutic or early interventive experience to 
young children. Curriculum design and imple- 
mentation will be examined along with specific re- 
sponsibilities of the early educator for 
mainstreaming, teaming and working in liaison 
with other professionals. Weekly practicum re- 
quired in specialized setting. Prerequisite: EC 201 
and 203. (Fall semester only) 

320. Reading and Language Arts. 3 cr. 

The nature of reading, the pertinent research in 
the field, the selection of materials, methodologies 
and teaching strategies are emphasized. (Fall se- 
mester only) 

321. Reading and Language 

Arts Practicum. 1 cr. 

Diagnosis of needs, planning and teaching of age 
and need appropriate lessons to small groups of 
children in a supervised situation. Prerequisite ED 
320. (Spring semester only) 

404. Nursery School Student 

Teaching and Seminar. 6 cr. 

406. Primary Student Teaching 

and Seminar. 6 cr. 

The student teaching experience involves the pro- 
spective teacher in a Nursery School setting and in 
a primary classroom for eight weeks each; she as- 
sumes teaching responsibilities, applies theory/ 
practice and develops her own teaching style 
under the direct supervision of the cooperating 
teacher and college supervisor. Verification of stu- 
dent competency will be determined jointly by 
both the cooperating teacher and the college su- 
pervisor. Student teachers return to campus one 
afternoon a week for seminar with the college in- 
structor. This seminar provides classroom discus- 
sion of various student teaching experiences as 
well as analysis of the goals, program designs and 
curricula of the various early childhood programs 
in which students teaching is completed. Pertinent 
topics related to ongoing professional develop- 
ment will be included. No other credits may be 
taken while the student is involved in 404 and 406 
without special permission of the Director of Early 
Childhood Education. 



ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 

231. Teaching Physical Education 
for Classroom Teachers. 

232. Teaching Art for 
Classroom Teachers. 

233. Teaching Health for 
Classroom Teachers. 



Icr. 



2cr. 



Icr. 



234. Teaching Music for 

Classroom Teachers. 2 cr. 

An introduction to the basic principles and con- 
cepts of teaching physical education, visual arts, 
health, and music to children of elementary school 
age, including exceptional children. 

325. Teaching Reading in the 

Primary School. 3 cr. 

Major emphasis is on the pre-school, readiness, 
and primary grades. Content deals with language, 
experiential, cognitive, and perceptual develop- 
ment in young children and their relationship to 
the beginning reading program. In addition, con- 
sideration will be given to the basic reading skills 
which comprise the first three years of a develop- 
mental reading program; techniques of individual- 
izing instructions, evaluating and reporting pupil 
progress. 

326. Teaching Reading in Intermediate 

and Middle Schools. 3 cr. 

Focuses on the transitional period in a develop- 
mental reading program in which reading be- 
comes a tool to be used in each content area. In 
addition to continuing reading skills in the devel- 
opmental reading program, specialized reading 
and study skills, necessary for students to func- 
tion in social studies, science, language arts, math- 
ematics, and other content areas, will be 
presented. Techniques of determining readability 
of materials, individualizing instruction, evaluat- 
ing and reporting pupil progress are also studied. 

330. Teaching Elementary Language 

Arts and Reading. 3 cr. 

Presents psychological principles and historical 
perspective in the language arts, the foundation 
on which a good language arts, program should be 
built. Four skills -listening, speaking, reading, 
writing -as acquired by the child, combined with 
knowledge of the evaluative process, teaching 
methods, and materials, provide a realistic ap- 
proach to teaching language arts and reading ex- 
perience. 

331. Teaching Elementary Social 

Studies. 3 cr. 

Provides a combination of theoretical and practical 
models which furnish multi-level approaches to 
problem-solving, materials, activities, and re- 
sources inherent in a good social studies program. 

332. Teaching Elementary Mathematics. 3 cr. 

Theories, techniques, practices, and content per- 
taining to mathematics are presented. Emphasis is 
on exploratory and systematic instructional styles; 
games as an instructional strategy. 



83 



333. Teaching Elementary Science. 3 cr. 

Study of theories, techniques, practices, and con- 
tent of the science area. Accent is on discovery and 
inquiry instructional styles; organizing for learn- 
ing. 

484. Children's Literature. 3 cr. 

A general survey of books and other printed mate- 
rials for children; criteria for the evaluation and 
analysis of the children's books; types of books 
available, considered in terms of interest, needs, 
and abilities of children. 

490, 491. Student Teaching- 
Elementary. 9-12 cr. 

Student teaching in an approved elementary 
school under the direct supervision of a cooperat- 
ing teacher. Prerequisites: Senior status, good aca- 
demic standing, completion of required 
professional courses, and recommendation of fac- 
ulty. 

493. Student Teaching— Elementary. 6 cr. 

Student teaching in elementary education for stu- 
dents in the secondary or special education pro- 
grams who wish to complete requirements in two 
certification areas. Registration is concurrent with 
Ed. 490-Secondary or Ed. 490-Special Education. 

SECONDARY EDUCATION 

215. Teaching Grammar and 

Composition. 3 cr. 

Examines various ways to teach grammar, lan- 
guage, and composition; provides opportunity for 
students to review the basics of grammar and com- 
position and to develop lessons for teaching those 
grammar areas at the elementary, secondary levels 
and in special education. 

216. Teaching Literature— 

Prose, Poetry, and Drama. 1 cr. 

Focuses on planning and teaching techniques to 
prepare and present literature utilizing a genre, a 
chronological or thematic approach; the four ses- 
sions involve an approach to literature experience, 
teaching prose, teaching poetry, and teaching 
drama. 

316. Teaching Secondary Mathematics 

and Science. 3 cr. 

Designed to acquaint the student with methods 
and materials for teaching specific models; re- 
search and field-based activities are expected. 

318. Teaching Secondary Foreign 

Languages. 3 cr. 

Explores a variety of approaches for teaching for- 
eign languages; grammar, structure, verbal exer- 
cises, and literature germane to the specific 
language to be taught will be discussed. 

319. Teaching Secondary Social 

Studies. 3 cr. 

This is a competency-based experience for social 
studies/history majors that develops evaluation 
skills, knowledge of curriculums, media and tech- 



nological experiences, and methods; expands 
planning and questioning skills. 

490, 491. Student Teaching - 

Secondary. 9-12 cr. 

Student teaching in an approved public secondary 
school under the direct supervision of a cooperat- 
ing teacher. Prerequisites: Senior status, good aca- 
demic standing, completion of required 
professional courses, and recommendation of fac- 
ulty 

493. Student Teaching - 

Secondary. 6 cr. 

Student teaching in secondary education for stu- 
dents in the elementary or special education pro- 
gram who wish to complete requirements in two 
certification areas. Registration is concurrent with 
Ed. 490-Elementary or Ed. 490-Special Education. 

497. Reading in Secondary Schools. 3 cr. 

A survey course in the teaching of reading; appro- 
priate for secondary education majors. Major em- 
phasis is on methods of teaching reading, the 
materials for evaluating pupil growth in reading, 
and reading in the content subjects. 

SPECIAL EDUCATION 

These courses are designed to prepare students for 
teaching pupils with mental and/or physical dis- 
abilities, including brain injured, emotionally and 
socially disturbed, learning disabled, mentally re- 
tarded, and physically disabled. 

209. Foundations of Special 

Education. 3 cr. 

A survey of the educational, physical, psychologi- 
cal, and social characteristics of exceptional per- 
sons; an overview of special education methods 
and programs; introduction of legislative and legal 
aspects. 

211, 212, 213, 214. Field 

Experience. 2 cr. each 

Classroom and other experiences in educational, 
social welfare, and- vocational settings as an ob- 
server and participant. Enrollment with consent of 
Director of Student Teaching and School of Educa- 
tion faculty advisor. Students may choose 211 (Ele- 
mentary) or 212 (Secondary) which involve the 
mildly handicapped, 213 which is with the se- 
verely handicapped, or 214 which is with pre- 
vocational/ vocational pupils. 

231. Teaching Physical Education 

for Classroom Teachers. 1 cr. 

232. Teaching Art for 

Classroom Teachers. 2 cr. 

233. Teaching Health for 

Classroom Teachers. 1 cr. 

234. Teaching Music for 

Classroom Teachers. 2 cr. 

An introduction to the basic principles and con- 
cepts of teaching physical education, visual arts, 



84 



health, and music to children of elementary school 
age, including exceptional children. 

276. Methods of Special 

Education. 3 cr. 

An introduction to management techniques uti- 
lized in programs tor exceptional persons; infor- 
mation covering educational assessment 
procedures; design and implementation c^f indi- 
vidual educational programs and methods for in- 
dividualizing instruction; examination of 
legislative and legal aspects. Prerequisite: 209 or 
equivalent. 

386. Teaching the Mildly 

Handicapped. 3 cr. 

Evaluation, integration, and implementation of 
theoreticallv based methodologies, curricula, in- 
structional techniques, and evaluation procedures 
for students who have been labeled brain injured, 
learning disabled, mentally retarded, physically 
handicapped, socially and emotionally disturbed. 
Prerequisites: 209, 276. 

387. Teaching the Severely 

Handicapped. 3 cr. 

Evaluation and integration of the various theories, 
methodologies, curricula, instructional tech- 
niques, and evaluation procedures for severely 
handicapped persons labeled brain injured, learn- 
ing disabled, mentally retarded, physically handi- 
capped, socially and emotionally disturbed. 
Prerequisites: 209, 276. 



388. Vocational Education for the 

Handicapped. 3 cr. 

Overview of pre-vocational, career, and occupa- 
tional education programs to be used for excep- 
tional persons. Students will be given information 
and experiences enabling them to design and im- 
plement instructional programs appropriate to the 
vocational needs of mentally and physically handi- 
capped pupils. Prerequisites: 209, 276. 

477. Management of Behavior and 

Instruction in Special Education. 3 cr. 

Development and implementation of an individu- 
alized student teaching readiness plan. Course- 
emphasis is on the management of problem 
behaviors and instructional environments; in- 
cludes supervised field experience, independent 
study, modularized instruction, and individual 
learning conferences. Prerequisites: 209, 276, 386. 

490, 491. Student Teaching - 

Special Education. 9-12 cr. 

A full semester of supervised classroom experi- 
ence in a carefully selected school for mentally 
and/or physically handicapped pupils. Prerequi- 
sites: senior status, good academic standing, com- 
peltion of required professional courses, and 
recommendation of faculty. 

493. Student Teaching- 
Special Education. 6 cr. 

Student teaching in special education for students 
in the elementary or secondary education program 
who wish to complete requirements in two certifi- 
cation areas. Registration is concurrent with Ed. 
490-Elementary or Ed. 490-Secondary Education. 




85 



School of Music 



HISTORY 

Duquesne University, recognizing that it was most 
fortunately situated to offer outstanding opportu- 
nities for professional preparation in music, in 
1926 established a School of Music with a four-year 
course of study leading to the Bachelor of Music 
degree. 

The music education program was approved by 
the Pennsylvania Department of Education in 
1930. In 1959 the School became an associate mem- 
ber of the National Association of Schools of Music 
and in 1966 was elected to full membership. 

On April 29, 1967 a new air-conditioned music 
building was dedicated. Van Cliburn was awarded 
an honorary Doctor of Music degree on this occa- 
sion. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

The administration and faculty of the School of 
Music believe that the development of the artistic 
personality is entirely compatible with the objec- 
tives of scholars in all fields. It is felt that the best 
place to educate music students to take their place 
in society is in a situation where they have an op- 
portunity to share their academic courses in 
classes with students from other schools of the 
University. 

The faculty of musical scholars and artists with 
whom Duquesne students work believes that fine 
talents are best encouraged and developed in an 
atmosphere that is friendly while at the same time 
committed to the development of excellence. 

The objectives of the School of Music are to edu- 
cate individuals w^ho possess a sensitive and intel- 
ligent musicianship, and who will be equipped, by 
reason of their general and professional education, 
to accept positions in fields of performance, edu- 
cation, and church music. In addition, the School 
offers courses of interest and value to non-music 
majors, believing in the integral place of music in a 
liberal education. 

ADMISSION 

Students who wish to major in music should ap- 
ply through the Office of Admissions. Following 
this an interview and audition should be sched- 
uled through the Administrator of Music Enroll- 
ment. Specific audition requirements are mailed to 
auditionees. The audition consists of solo per- 
formance before a committee, a written theory 
exam, and an individual aural test. Students re- 
questing scholarship assistance should apply 
through Financial Aid, and complete the music tal- 
ent award application at the time of the audition. 
Taped performances can be evaluated, but the au- 
dition process is not completed entirely until the 
testing has been done. Students receive written 
confirmation of their status from the Office of Ad- 



missions. 

It would be helpful for prospective music majors 
to have a background in theory, piano and certain 
aural skills prior to entrance. If deficiencies exist in 
any of these areas, prerequisite courses may be re- 
quired at the discretion of the audition committee. 

Visits to classes and personal interviews with the 
applied music staff are encouraged strongly and 
may be arranged by calling (412) 434-6085. 

ADVISEMENT 

At initial enrollment, every student is assigned a 
faculty advisor who provides assistance with aca- 
demic matters, especially during pre-registration 
periods. 

SPECIAL FEES 

Student Teaching $ 25 

Instruction in voice or instrument as 

a minor, each semester 110 

Instruction in voice or instrument as 

a major, each semester 220 

Instrumental rental each semester Variable 

Lab Fee 35 

Music School Fee 75 

DEGREES 

The School offers programs leading to two under- 
graduate degrees: Bachelor of Music and Bachelor 
of Science in Music Education. The Bachelor of 
Music degree may be earned with a major in pi- 
ano, organ, voice, orchestral instruments, and gui- 
tar. Additionally, students may choose an area of 
emphasis in jazz, classical, or sacred music. The 
programs are intended for students interested pri- 
marily in performance careers in concert, televi- 
sion, radio, symphony orchestra, opera or 
teaching in colleges and private studios, and for 
those interested in pursuing careers as church mu- 
sicians. 

Two other degrees are offered: one in music edu- 
cation and the other in music therapy; the former 
is designed to meet certification requirements for 
teaching in elementary and secondary schools 
while the latter leads to certification as a registered 
music therapist. In order to receive the Music 
Therapy Degree or its equivalency for certification, 
all Music Therapy students are required to take a 
prescribed number and sequence of courses in 
Music Therapy, and give evidence of competency 
in the field, as determined by the Music Therapy 
Department. This includes a six month internship. 

EQUIPMENT 

The School of Music has 73 pianos including 56 
Stein ways. There are two Moeller and one Fischer 
practice organs, an electronic organ, a three man- 
ual Moeller organ and one Furher tracker pipe or- 
gan. In addition there are two pipe organs by 
Kilgen and Tellers and one Rodgers electronic the- 
atre organ on campus for recitals and practice. 
More than 300 orchestral and band instruments 



86 



are available for instrument classes. Listening and 
recording equipment are of professional quality. 

STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS 

Chapters of the national music organizations Phi 
Mil Alpha Sinfonia and Mu Plii Epsilon contribute 
substantially to the students' professional and so- 
cial development. The Music Educators National 
Conference has an active student chapter which 
sponsors professional programs and attends and 
participates in the state, regional, and national ac- 
tivities of the association. There are active student 
chapters of the American Guild of Organists, the Na- 
tional Association for Music Therapi/, and the Ameri- 
can Choral Directors Association. 

HONOR AWARDS 

The Seibert Medal is presented to a senior for excel- 
lence in violin or piano upon recommendation of 
departmental committee. 

Andre Marchal Award is presented to the graduat- 
ing organ student with the highest academic 
standing in performance. 
Jean Langlais Award is presented to the graduating 



organ student with the highest Academic standing 
in Sacred Music. 

/. Cometti Tucci Piano Performance Award. Competi- 
tive award provided annually to outstanding pi- 
ano student. 

MUSIC EDUCATION 

Students completing the course work in music ed- 
ucation receive the B.S. in M.Ed, and may be rec- 
ommended for certification to the PA Department 
of Education. Upon successful completion of a 
state level standardized test, graduates may re- 
ceive the Instructional Level I - Music, K-12 certifi- 
cate. 

Selection of students for this program depends 
upon completion of Admissions and audition pro- 
cedures and an interview with a department mem- 
ber. Candidates are expected to demonstrate 
leadership qualities, excellent communication 
skills, critical thinking and analysis ability and a 
genuine interest in a service oriented profession. 

Post-graduate certification course work in music 
education is available to those with B.M. degrees 
or B.S. in Education degrees. Audition and/or 
course requirements are available upon request. 




87 



MAJOR IN GUITAR 



Courses 



Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


121,121 


Mus. 


131,132 


Mus. 


133,134 


Mus. 


121,122 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 




Gen. 




Mus. 


141,141 


Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


121,121 


Mus. 


231 


Mus. 


232 


Mus. 


233,234 


Mus. 


251,252 


Mus. 


119,119 


Gen. 




Mus. 




Mus. 


141,141 


Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


121,121 


Mus. 


335,336 


Mus. 


379,380 


Mus. 




Gen. 





Mus. 



Mus. 



141,141 



Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


121,121 


Mus. 


340 


Mus. 


341 


Mus. 




Mus. 


400 


Gen. 




Gen. 





141,141 



Credits 

Fall Spring 
Freshman Year 

Seminar 

Guitar 3 3 

Theory 2 2 

Solfege 2 2 

Eurhythmies 2 2 

Piano 1 1 

Ensemble 2 2 

Core 3 3 

Chamber Music 2 2 

17 17 

Sophomore Year 

Seminar 

Guitar 3 3 

Theory 2 

20th Century Techniques 2 

Solfege 2 2 

History & Literature of Music 3 3 

Piano 1 1 

Core 3 3 

Ensemble 2 2 

Chamber Music 2 2 

18 18 

Junior Year 

Seminar 

Guitar 3 3 

Counterpoint 2 2 

Conducting 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Core 3 3 

Electives 2 2 

Chamber Music 2 2 

16 16 

Senior Year 

Seminar 

Guitar 3 3 

Orchestration 2 

Analysis 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Recital 1 

Core 3 3 

Core 3 

Electives 2 

Chamber Music 2 2 

15 15 

Total Credits: 132 



88 

MAJOR IN ORGAN 

Credits 

Courses Fall Spring 

Freshman Year 

Seminar 

Organ 3 3 

Piano 1 1 

Theory 2 2 

Solfege 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Eurhythmies 2 2 

Core 3 3 

Core _3 _3 

18 18 

Sophomore Year 

Seminar 

Organ 3 3 

Piano 1 1 

Theory 2 

20th Century Techniques 2 

Solfege 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

History & Literature of Music 3 3 

Core 3 3 

Electives 2 

16 18 

Junior Year 

Seminar 

Organ 3 3 

Ensemble 2 2 

Counterpoint 2 2 

Conducting 2 2 

Core 3 3 

Electives 4 4 

16 16 

Senior Year 

Seminar 

Organ 3 3 

Organ Literature 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Recital 1 

Electives 4 

Organ Improvisation 2 2 

Core 3 

Orchestration 2 

Analysis _2 

15 15 
Total Credits: 132 



Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


118,118 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


131,132 


Mus. 


133,134 


Mus. 




Mus. 


121,122 


Gen. 




Gen. 




Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


118,118 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


231 


Mus. 


232 


Mus. 


233,234 


Mus. 




Mus. 


251,252 


Gen. 





Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


118,118 


Mus. 




Mus. 


335,336 


Mus. 


379,380 


Gen. 





Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


118,118 


Mus. 


451,452 


Mus. 




Mus. 


400 


Mus. 


431,432 


Gen. 




Mus. 


340 


Mus. 


341 



MAJOR IN PIANO 

Credits 

Courses Fall Spring 

Freshman Year 

Seminar 

Piano 3 3 

Theory 2 2 

Solfege 2 2 

Eurhythmies 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Chamber Music 2 2 

Core _3 _3 

16 16 

Sophomore Year 

Seminar 

Piano 3 3 

Theory 2 

20th Century Techniques 2 

Solfege 2 2 

History & Literature of Music 3 3 

Chamber Music 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Core _3 _3 

17 17 

Junior Year 

Seminar 

Piano 3 3 

Counterpoint 2 2 

Conducting 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Chamber Music 2 2 

Core 3 3 

Electives 3 3 

17 17 

Senior Year 

Seminar 

Piano 3 3 

Orchestration 2 

Analysis 2 

Recital 1 

Core 3 3 

Ensemble 2 2 

Core 3 

Chamber Music 2 2 

Electives 4 

15 17 
Total Credits: 132 



Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


131,132 


Mus. 


133,134 


Mus. 


121,122 


Mus. 




Mus. 


141,141 


Gen. 




Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


231 


Mus. 


232 


Mus. 


233,234 


Mus. 


251,252 


Mus. 


141,141 


Mus. 




Gen. 




Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


335,336 


Mus. 


379,380 


Mus. 




Mus. 


141,141 


Gen. 





Mus. 


105,105 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


340 


Mus. 


341 


Mus. 


400 


Gen. 




Mus. 




Gen. 




Mus. 


141,141 



90 

MAJOR IN VOICE 

Credits 

Courses Fall Spring 

Freshman Year 

Voice 3 3 

Piano 1 1 

Theory 2 2 

Solfege 2 2 

Eurhythmies 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Seminar 

Italian for Singers 2 

Italian Diction and Repertory 2 

Core 3 3 

17 17 

Sophomore Year 

Voice 3 3 

Piano 1 1 

Theory 2 

20th Century Techniques 2 

Solfege 2 2 

History and Literature of Music 3 3 

Ensemble 2 2 

Seminar 

French for Singers 2 

French Diction and Repertory 2 

Core ^ _ 

18 15 

Junior Year 

Voice 3 3 

Counterpoint 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Electives 2 2 

Seminar 

German for Singers 2 

German Diction and Repertory 2 

Core 3 3 

Core 3 3 

17 17 

Senior Year 

Voice 3 3 

Conducting 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Recital 1 

Seminar 

Core 3 3 

English Diction and Repertory 2 

Electives 2 2 

Orchestration 2 

Analysis _2 

15 16 
Total Credits: 132 



Mus. 


120,120 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


131,132 


Mus. 


133,134 


Mus. 


121,122 


Mus. 




Mus. 


105,105 


Gen. 


115 


Mus. 


116 


Gen. 




Mus. 


120,120 


Mus. 


119,119 


Mus. 


231 


Mus. 


232 


Mus. 


233,234 


Mus. 


252,253 


Mus. 




Mus. 


105,105 


Gen. 


114 


Mus. 


118 


Gen. 




Mus. 


120,120 


Mus. 


335,336 


Mus. 




Mus. 


105,105 


Gen. 


115 


Mus. 


117 


Gen. 




Gen. 




Mus. 


120,120 


Mus. 


379,380 


Mus. 




Mus. 


400 


Mus. 


105,105 


Gen. 




Mus. 


119 


Mus. 


340 


Mus. 


341 



91 

MAJOR IN ORCHESTRAL INSTRUMENTS 

Credits 

Courses Fall Spring 

Freshman Year 

105,105 Seminar 

Applied Music Major 3 3 

119,119 Piano 1 1 

131,132 Theory 2 2 

133,134 Solfege 2 2 

Ensen^ble 2 2 

121,122 Eurhythmies 2 2 

Core 3 3 

141,141 Chamber Music _2 ^ 

17 17 

Sophomore Year 

105,105 Seminar 

Applied Music Major 3 3 

141,141 Chamber Music 2 2 

231 Theory 2 

232 20th Century Techniques 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Core 3 3 

251,252 History & Literature of Music 3 3 

233,234 Solfege 2 2 

119,119 Piano J. J. 

18 18 

Junior Year 

105,105 Seminar 

Applied Music Major 3 3 

335,336 Counterpoint 2 2 

141,141 Chamber Music 2 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Core 3 3 

Core ^ ^ 

15 15 

Senior Year 

105,105 Seminar 

Applied Music Major 3 3 

341 Analysis 2 

Ensemble 2 2 

Core 3 

379,380 Conducting 2 2 

340 Orchestration 2 

141,141 Chamber Music 2 2 

400 Recital 1 

Electives 3 3 

17 15 
Total Credits: 132 



92 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MUSIC EDUCATION CHORAL TRACK 

Credits 

Courses Fall Spring 

Freshman Year 

Mus. 121,122 Eurhythmies 2 2 

Mus. 131,132 Theory 2 2 

Mus. 133,134 Solfege 2 2 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. Piano Class (Mus. Ed.) 2 2 

Mus. Introduction to Mus. Ed 1 1 

Mus. 185,186 Voice Class (Mus. Ed.) 2 2 

Gen. Core 3 3 

17 17 

Sophomore Year 

Mus. 231 Theory 2 

Mus. 336 Counterpoint 2 

Mus. 233,234 Solfege 2 2 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. Music Education Methods 2 2 

Mus. 251,252 History and Literature of Music 3 3 

Mus. Clarinet Class Methods & Lab 1 

Mus. Cornet Class Methods & Lab 1 

Mus. Percussion Class Methods & Lab 2 

Mus. String Class Methods 2 

Mus. Piano Class 1 1 

16 16 

Junior Year 

Mus. 379 Conducting 2 

Mus. Choral Conducting & Lab 2 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. 340 Orchestration 2 

Mus. Teaching Vocal Music 2 

Mus. Teaching Instrumental Music 2 

Gen. Core 3 3 

Ed. 202 Foundations of Education 3 

Ed. 301 Educational Psychology 3 

Elective 2 

Gen. Core 3 3 

18 18 

Senior Year 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 

Mus. Seminar 1 

Mus. 491 Student Teaching 12 

Gen. Core 9 

Elective _2 

15 12 

Total Credits: 129 



93 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MUSIC EDUCATION INSTRUMENTAL TRACK 

Credits 

Courses Fall Spring 

Freshman Year 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. 121,122 Eurhythmies 2 2 

Mus. 131,132 Theory 2 2 

Mus. 133,134 Solfege 2 2 

Mus. Piano Class (Mus. Ed.) 2 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. Introduction to Music Education 1 1 

Mus. Voice Class (Mus. Ed.) 2 

Mus. 481 Percussion Class Methods & Lab 2 

Gen. Core _3 _3 

17 17 

Sophomore Year 

Mus. 231 Theory 2 

Mus. 236 Counterpoint 2 

Mus. 233,234 Solfege 2 2 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. 251,252 History & Literature of Music 3 3 

Mus. 382 String Class Methods 2 

Mus. String Class Lab 2 

Mus. Music Education Methods 2 2 

Gen. Core 3 6 

17 18 

Junior Year 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. 340 Orchestration 2 

Mus. FLOBS and Lab 2 

Mus. Clarinet Class Methods & Lab 2 

Mus. Low Brass Class Methods & Lab 2 

Mus. 379 Conducting 2 

Mus. Inst. Conducting 2 

Mus. Teaching Instrumental Music 2 

Mus. Teaching Vocal Music 2 

Mus. Researching Band Methods 1 

Mus. Cornet Methods & Lab 2 

Gen. Core 

Elective 3 

Ed. 202 Foundations of Education 3 

Ed. 301 Education Psychology 3 

17 17 

Senior Year 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 

Mus. Seminar 1 

Mus. 491 Student Teaching 12 

Gen. Core 12 

16 12 

Total Credits: 131 



94 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MUSIC EDUCATION MUSIC THERAPY 

Credits 

Courses Fall Spring 

Freshman Year 

Mus. 105,105 Seminar 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. Piano Class 2 2 

Mus. 131,132 Theory 2 2 

Mus. 133,134 Solfege 2 2 

Mus. 121,122 Eurhythmies 2 2 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. 107 Music Therapy Orientation 3 

Mus. 124 Music Therapy Practicum 2 

Gen. Core 3 3 

17 16 

Sophomore Year 

Mus. 105,105 Seminar 

Mus. Applied Music Major 2 2 

Mus. 231 Theory 2 

Mus. 232 20th Century Techniques 2 

Mus. 233,234 Solfege 2 2 

Mus. 351,252 History & Literature of Music 3 3 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. 124,124 Music Therapy Practicum 2 2 

Mus. 108 Music in Therapy 3 

Gen. Core 6 

Ed. 305 Foundations of Special Education 3 

18 18 

Junior Year 

Mus. 105,105 Seminar 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. 308 Influence of Music on Behavior 3 

Mus. 374 Music & Move, for the Exceptional Person 3 

Mus. Voice 2 

Mus. 315 Piano Improvisation for Therapy or Music Methods Elec- 
tive 2 

Mus. Guitar Class 2 

Mus. 124,124 Music Therapy Practicum 2 2 

Gen. Core 3 6 

Elective 3 

Psy. Psychology Elective _3 

16 17 

Senior Year 

Mus. 105,105 Seminar 

Mus. Ensemble 1 1 

Mus. 379 Conducting 2 

Mus. 340 Orchestration 2 

Mus. 124,124 Music Therapy Practicum 2 2 

Mus. 309 Directed Study 2 

Mus. 307 Psychology of Music Teaching and Learning 3 

Mus. 310 Recreational Music 1 

Gen. Core 3 3 

101 Anatomy and Psysiology 3 

Electives 3 

Psy. 352 Abnormal Psychology 3 

Mus. 493 Clinical Experience . ; _1 

15 17 
Total Credits: 134 



95 



COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 



PERFORMANCE 

Applied Music. 1-3 cr. 

Private study of voice, piano, harpsichord, organ, 
guitar or orchestral instruments. 

115. Vocal Coaching. 

Individual work with pianist as a supplement to 
Opera Workshop and/or Applied Music. 

116, 117, 118, 119. 
Diction and Repertory. 

Italian, German, French and English offered on a 
rotating basis each Spring Semester. All except 
English preceded by an introductory course in the 
fall, in the appropriate language. 

313. Piano Pedagogy I. 2 cr. each 

Students will become acquainted with the tech- 
niques and materials for teaching piano at the ele- 
mentary level. For piano majors; junior standing is 
required. 

314. Piano Pedagogy II. 2 cr. each 

A continuation of 313 concentrating on the tech- 
niques and materials for teaching piano at the in- 
termediate and advanced levels. 

Piano Accompanying. 1 cr. 

This course is designed for the undergraduate 
with the purpose of affording the student instruc- 
tion in the art of piano accompanying. 

400. Recital. 1 cr. 

The candidate for the Bachelor of Music degree 
must give a recital during the senior year. The re- 
cital will be presented to a faculty committee for 
approval at least one month prior to the date of the 
performance. 



ENSEMBLE/CHAMBER MUSIC 

Required for all students as laboratory work dur- 
ing most semesters of full-time enrollment. Non- 
music majors are invited to register for ensemble 
with permission of instructor. 

Large Ensembles. 0-2 cr. each 

Including Symphony Band, Orchestra, University 
Singers, and Concert Chorale. 

Small Ensembles. 0-2 cr. each 

The Small Ensembles include Trombone Choir, 
French Horn Ensemble, Brass Ensemble, Guitar 
Ensemble, Jazz Band, Percussion Ensemble, Mad- 
rigals, and various Woodwind Ensembles. 

116. Opera Workshop. 0-2 cr. 

A performing class in which students learn stand- 
ard and other opera repertory in English and the 
original languages. 

141. Chamber Music. 2 cr. 

Study and performance of all types of chamber 
music for various instrumental combinations. 



MUSIC EDUCATION 

Voice Methods I. 2 cr. 

For all vocal and instrumental track majors. Funda- 
mentals techniques of singing, including posture, 
breath support, tone, diction, interpretation. All 
students will sing in a vocal lab ensemble. 

Voice Methods II. 2 cr. 

For vocal track majors. More advanced vocal tech- 
niques including an emphasis on style, memoriza- 
tion, accompanied performance, varied repertoire, 
and classification of voices. Instructional methods 
materials for the elementary music classroom are 
explored. Students will perform in a vocal lab. 

Class Voice I. 1 cr. 

For non- voice majors in the music education pro- 
gram and performance voice minors. Special at- 
tention is paid to developing individual vocal 
competencies and knowledge of style and reper- 
toire for the non- vocal major. 

Class Voice II. 1 cr. 

For non-voice majors in the vocal track and per- 
formance minors. Continuation of Class Voice I 
with emphasis on solo vocal performance skills 
and repertoire. 

Introduction to Music Education I. 1 cr. 

For beginning music education majors. An over- 
view of contemporary music education, including 
philosophy, curriculum, methodologies and field 
observations. 

Introduction to Music Education II. 1 cr. 

Continuation of Introduction to Music Education 
I. Concepts of mainstreaming, understanding 
socio-economic, racial, religious and cultural dif- 
ferences. Field observations included. 

Music Education Methods I. 2 cr. 

A multifaceted course leading to competencies in 
guitar, recorder and classroom instruments. Clini- 
cal experience included. 

Music Education Methods II. 2 cr. 

A continuation of Music Education Methods I with 
an addition of computer assisted instruction tech- 
niques and materials plus an overview of contem- 
porary methodologies including Kodaly, Dalcroze, 
Orff and Suzuki. Clinical experience included. 

Teaching Vocal Music. 2 cr. 

For the advanced music education student in both 
tracks. Methodologies and materials to develop 
competencies for teaching in the vocal area, grades 
K-12. Clinical experience included. All 100 and 200 
level courses are prerequisites. 

Seminar. 1 cr. 

For the advanced music education student. Intro- 
duction to Music Education research, stressing 
contemporary issues. A seminar project is re- 
quired. 



96 



Student Teaching. 12 cr. 

R)r the senior music education student who has 
completed all required music and professional ed- 
ucation classes satisfactorily and has been recom- 
mended by the faculty for student teaching. 
Practice teaching with approved cooperating 
teachers in instrumental and vocal classes, K-12 
under the guidance of a university supervisor for a 
14 week period. Students also attend on-campus 
seminars during this period. Additional course- 
work should not be scheduled concurrent with 
student teaching. 

Teaching Instrumental Music. 2 cr. 

A sur\'ey of methodology necessary for the devel- 
opment of, and the administration of, the band 
and orchestra program on the elementary, inter- 
mediate, and secondary levels. Practical applica- 
tion will be provided through field experience. 

Researching Band Methods. 1 cr. 

A sur\'ey of all aspects of administering and direct- 
ing the marching band program of the 1980's. 

Instrumental Methods/Lab. 2 cr. 

The development of technique on various instru- 
ments with emphasis on the enhancement of 
teaching skills. A laboratory experience will pro- 
vide ensemble performance experience. 



MUSICIANSHIP 

010. Fundamentals of Music. 3 cr. 

An introductory course designed for prospective 
music majors and non-majors. Students will learn 
scales, key signatures, triads, intervals, clefs, and 
develop skills in sight singing and musical dicta- 
tion. Students enrolled in Fundamentals of Music 
must successfully complete this course or pass the 
Entrance Exams in Theory and Musicianship be- 
fore enrolling in Eurhythmies, Theory I and Musi- 
cianship I. 

121, 122. Dalcroze Eurhythmies. 2 cr. each 

Experiencing, analyzing, and creatively manipu- 
lating the metric/structural and the expressive/ 
interpretive components of music through 
rhythmic movement, ear-training and improvisa- 
tion. 

131, 132. Theory I and II. 2 cr. each 

These sequential courses are designated to ac- 
quaint the student with the harmonic materials of 
art music of the Western Civilization. For basic 
knowledge the Baroque-Classical idiom in ex- 
plored. Harmony is examined in full, but formal 
and textural aspects are also discussed. Class con- 
tents include part writing, analysis, keyboard- 
mode, dictation, harmonic and intervallic ear 
training, and drills with computers. The classes 
meet twice a week for lectures, and once a week 
for an in-depth laboratory session. The scope of 
the first two semesters includes diatonic harmony, 
secondary dominants and simple modulation. 



Prerequisite: Fundamentals of tonic, or passing 
the entrance examination on rudiments of music. 

231. Theory III. 2 cr. 

This semester completes the study of materials of 
the Baroque and Classical style with chromatic 
harmony and advanced modulation, then 
presents some of the most important elements of 
the Romantic and 20th Century idioms. Class 
meetings and the elements of teaching are the 
same as in 131 and 132. Prerequisites: 131 and 132. 

133, 134. Solfege. 2 cr. each 

These sequential courses are designed to develop 
students' competencies in the areas of intervals, 
melodic and rhythmic dictation as well as sight 
singing in traditional meters and tonalities. Pre- 
requisite for Musicianship 133 is successful com- 
pletion of Entrance Exam to the School of Music or 
successful completion of Fundamentals of Music. 

233, 234. Solfege. 2 cr. each 

A continuation of 134, these sequential courses are 
designed to develop students' competencies in the 
areas of intervallic relationships, melodic and 
rhythmic dictation as well as clef reading and sight 
singing in nontraditional tonalities and meters. 
Prerequisite for Solfege 233 is successful comple- 
tion of Solfege 134. 

251, 252. History and 

Literature of Music. 3 cr. each 

An historical survey of the ideas and cultural 
achievements of Western man in the context of the 
political and sociological developments to which 
the art of music is bound. The survey embraces 
four semesters which are arranged chronologi- 
cally. These courses seek to provide a broad histor- 
ical frame of reference within which the 
relationship of music to the development of man's 
thought can be clearly seen, along with a survey 
and analysis of representative literature. 

335. 16th Century Counterpoint. 2 cr. 

The course is devoted to a study of the polyphonic 
technique of the 16th Century. The class meets 
twice a week for lectures, analysis, written assign- 
ments, and listening. The so-called species ap- 
proach is employed. Prerequisite: At least 2 
semesters of Theory. 

336. 18th Century Counterpoint. 2 cr. 

A course study concerned with the contrapuntal 
technique of the period of J.S. Bach. Contents in- 
clude lectures, written assignments, listening, and 
analysis. Prerequisites: Theory I, II, III. 

340. Orchestration. 2 cr. 

A study of the basic problems of scoring for indi- 
vidual instruments, particularly orchestral choirs, 
the entire orchestra, and unique instrumental 
combinations. Analysis of the techniques of or- 
chestration of selected composers of the 18th, 19th, 
and 20th centuries. 

341. Analysis. 2 cr. 

A course designed to get the student acquainted 
with the formal structure of tonal music, from the 



97 



smallest components to the most complex full 
compositions through analysis, performing and 
listening. 

379. Basic Conducting. 2 cr. 

Introduction to the mechanics of conducting with 
emphasis on basic patterns using the baton, and 
cueing and expression using the left hand. 

380. Instrumental Conducting/ Lab. 2 cr. 

Continuation of basic conducting with stress on 
the practical application of conducting technique 
to excerpts of major orchestral and wind works. 
Score study and philosophical and psychological 
aspects of conducting will be addressed. Labora- 
tory experience will provide conducting opportu- 
nities. 

Choral Conducting/ Lab. 2 cr. 

Continuation of basic conducting with stress on 
choral styles of various periods. Conducting expe- 
rience will be augmented through laboratory expe- 
rience. Philosophical and psychological 
foundations will also be included. 



426. Jazz Improvisation III. 2 cr. 

A continuation of 227 with an emphasis on chro- 
matically altered scales, chords, and extended 
forms. 

427. Jazz Improvisation IV. 2 cr. 

Extension and continuation of 426 with an empha- 
sis on the practical application of advanced tech- 
niques to standard and jazz literature. 

430. Jazz Arranging. 2 cr. 

A study of the basic techniques of scoring for indi- 
vidual instruments and jazz ensembles of various 
sizes, from small groups to studio orchestras. 
Analysis of scores by contemporary big band ar- 
rangers. 

440. Jazz Theory. 

Student learns in five and six part harmony, chro- 
matically altered chords, chord spacing and voice 
leadings appropriate to jazz writing. 



MUSIC THERAPY 



JAZZ STUDIES 

141. Chamber Music Jazz. 2 cr. 

The purpose of this course is to develop the skills 
and techniques necessary for small jazz ensemble 
performance. Emphasis is on rhythm section tech- 
niques, interaction among the members of the 
group, and development of repertoire. 

151. Evolution of Jazz Styles I. 2 cr. 

A study of the origin, development and styles of 
jazz music and its ramifications with an emphasis 
on recorded music as well as scores. 

152. Evolution of Jazz Styles II. 2 cr. 

A study and analysis of recorded improvised solos 
by major jazz artists from 1940 to the present. 

180. Audio Recording Techniques, 1 cr. 

Classes of a non-technical nature designed to give 
musicians a basic understanding of the recording 
process, including: equipment mechanics and ap- 
plication of critical listening. 

226. Jazz Improvisation I. 2 cr. 

Beginning study and practice of melodic improvi- 
sation; conventional forms and chord progres- 
sions, employing idiomatic jazz and articulations, 
major-minor and modal scales. 

227. Jazz Improvisation II. 2 cr, 

A continuation of 226 with an introduction to al- 
tered scales and chords. 

333. Ear Training for Jazz Musicians. cr. 

The course is designed to train the student to rec- 
ognize aurally the melodic, rhythmic and har- 
monic elements of contemporary jazz. The devices 
used are sight-singing, keyboard work and exten- 
sive dictation. Emphasis is placed on four, five and 
six-note chords, chromatically altered chords and 
polychords. 



107, Music Therapy Orientation, 3 cr. 

An introduction to Music Therapy .as practiced in a 
variety of rehabilitation settings. Observations fol- 
lowed by informal group discussions. Basic theory 
about the validity of music as therapy; the rela- 
tionship of theory to practice. Intensive class par- 
ticipation will be required to prove qualification for 
further, in-depth study of the profession. 

Introduction to Clinical 

Experience, 1 cr. 

An introduction to the clinical setting with empha- 
sis placed on communication and observation 
skills needed in order to facilitate entrance into the 
clinical setting. 

108, Music In Therapy. 2 cr. 

An introduction to music methods utilized in ther- 
apy settings. Assessment, planning, implementa- 
tion and evaluation of sessions which will be 
designed for a variety of populations will be em- 
phasized. 

124, Practicum, 2 cr. 

Field placement in a clinical setting for a minimum 
of 15 hours per semester. Certified music thera- 
pists and other specially trained staff who work 
within the settings assist in the development and 
growth of the prospective music therapist. 

307. Psychology of Music Teaching 

and Learning, 3 cr, 

A study of physiological, psychological, and socio- 
logical aspects of music teaching and learning. 
Emphasis on current research. 

308, Influence of Music on Behavior, 2 cr. 

Reviews different treatment theories and their re- 
lationship to music therapy. Emphasizes the ef- 
fects of music on behavior and total health. 
Develops a philosophy of music therapy with a 
background in holistic health. 



96 



309. Directed Study in Music Therapy. 2 cr. 

Study topics from areas of music therapy, psychol- 
ogy of music, brain research and other expressive 
therapies are reviewed and discussed. 

310. Recreational Music in Therapy. 1 cr. 

Planning, demonstrating, and ex'aluating music 
activities for patient populations served by music 
therapists. Skills in leading group music activities, 
circle and square dances. Music Therapy Majors 
only. Competencv in accompanying with guitar 
and'or piano is emphasized. 

315. Piano Improvisation for 

Music Therapy. 2 cr. 

Development of functional keyboard skills in im- 
provisation on rhythm and dissonant chords as an 
aid in non-verbal communication with the handi- 
capped client. 

374. Music and Movement for the 

Exceptional Person. 3 cr. 

A course of study and experience to train the stu- 
dent to use music and movement as a tool to pro- 
mote therapeutic and educational growth. Focus 
on developmental needs correlated with appropri- 
ate materials and methods. 

425. Clinical Internship. 1 cr. 

Field placement in an NAMT approved clinical set- 
ting for a period of 6 months. Consultation with 
advisor working in conjunction with the approved 
supervisors from multiple settings across the US 
and Canada. 



SACRED MUSIC 

322. Sacred Choral and Solo Literature. 2 cr. 

A survey of choral and vocal literature for the 
church with emphasis on practical materials for 
church choirs, soloists and congregations. 

403-408. Service Playing. 1 cr. each 

The objective of this course is to develop the serv- 
ice playing skills necessary to play for church serv- 
ices of all denominations through a study of 
applied harmony, counterpoint, hymnody, an- 
them accompaniments and conducting from the 
console. Students unable to enroll for this course 
will study this material in their applied music les- 
son. 

410. Church Music Practicum. 3 cr. 

Seminar in practical aspects of church music; es- 
tablishing the music program in a church; graded 
choir systems; children's choirs; instruments in 
workshop; contracts; cantor systems; worship 
commissions, etc. 

421. Gregorian Chant. 2 cr. 

The history, notation and modal system of Grego- 
rian chant. Class participation in the singing of 
chant. Chant as prayer and current liturgical appli- 
cation. 



420. Hymnody. 2 cr. 

A study of the church's heritage of song; the 
psalms; the great hymns of the Medieval Church; 
the heritage of Luther, Calvin and their followers; 
English hymnody; American contributions; 
twentieth-century hymnody with special empha- 
sis on the theological framework for each major 
development in the history of hymns. 

431, 432. Improvisation. 2 cr. each 

A practical application of the basic tools of im- 
provisation including harmonization of melodies 
at the organ, two and three part counterpoint, 
short ABA forms and chorale preludes with em- 
phasis on their liturgical application. 

451, 452. Organ Literature. 2 cr. each 

A survey of organ literature and organ buildings as 
it relates to organ registration. The first semester 
treats organ music from the Renaissance through 
J. S. Bach. The second semester deals with the lit- 
erature from 1750 to the present. Outside listening 
and readings will be required. 

476. Organ Design and Maintenance. 2 cr. 

A study of the basic concepts or organ construc- 
tion with emphasis on the historical development 
of the organ and the mechanical operation of the 
pipes and console. Tuning, voicing, and esthetics 
of organ design will be discussed. 



NON-MUSIC MAJORS 

147. Tamburitza Ensemble. 1 cr. 

The Tamburitza Ensemble involves the study and 
performance of music specifically composed and 
arranged for both small and large Tamburitza 
string ensembles. It encompasses the fundamental 
principles and techniques for both playing and 
teaching the Tamburitza and includes appropriate 
literature. 

149. Ballet. 2 cr. 

Fundamentals of ballet technique and practice, in- 
cluding barre and center floor work. 

151. Jazz Dance. 1 cr. 

Fundamentals of jazz dance styles and technique 
and practice. 

154. Studies in Folklore. 2 cr. 

This is an introductory examination of the defini- 
tions and scope of folklore studies, and the role of 
folklore in people's lives. Definitions, characteris- 
tics and research techniques of the following forms 
will be considered: Proverbs, riddles, ballads, ep- 
ics, myth, legend, song, music, dance, and cus- 
toms. 

160. World Music Traditions. 2 cr. 

This is a general survey primarily of the world's 
primitive, folk and traditional music, their various 
musical styles, forms and characteristics in terms 
of their geographical setting and historical back- 
ground, along with their general structure and 
aesthetics. Some of the different theories of musi- 



99 



cal construction around the world are considered. 
Reference is made to the cultural context of such 
music, its origins, diffusion, relationship to litera- 
ture and function within a countrv^'s own culture. 
Some consideration is given at times to the devel- 
opment of art, or cultivated music as it has flowed 
from its folk music origins. 

161, 162. Introduction to 

Folk Dance. 2 cr. each 

The course introduces folk dance as a genre of 
movement, examining the types and styles of folk 
dance found among different nations and cultures 



of the world. In addition, it will familiarize the stu- 
dent with the varying types of music and rhvthms 
used as dance accompaniment in different nations 
and cultures; and it will touch upon the related ar- 
eas of folk instruments, folk singing styles, lan- 
guage, customs and folk costuming. 

256. Introduction to Balkan Dance. 2 cr. 

A survey of folk dances of the Balkan highlighting 
their development, form, indigenous characteris- 
tics, differences and similarities from one ethno- 
graphic region to another. 




100 



School of Nursing 



HISTORY 

Since it is the policy of the University to establish 
its schools under control ot an already established 
school, the School of Nursing was originally orga- 
nized in 1933 as a unit in the College of Liberal Arts 
and Sciences. On March 15, 1937, the Department 
of Nursing Education was given the status of a 
separate school with a Dean in charge. 

On December 3, 1937, the State Board of Educa- 
tion of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania ap- 
proved the school and authorized Duquesne 
University to confer the degree of Bachelor of Sci- 
ence in Nursing and the degree of Bachelor of Sci- 
ence in Nursing Education upon graduates 
according to the appropriate curriculum. The pro- 
gram leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science 
in Nursing Education was designed to meet the 
specific needs of the registered nurse while the ba- 
sic program leading to the degree of Bachelor of 
Science in Nursing, the first in Pennsylvania, was 
designed for the high school graduate. The School 
of Nursing continued to offer two separate pro- 
grams leading to two separate degrees until 1964. 
In September of that year, a single revised profes- 
sional nursing program was implemented for ad- 
mission of both basic and registered nurse 
students leading to the degree of Bachelor of Sci- 
ence in Nursing. 

In the Fall of 1982, a new baccalaureate nursing 
program, also leading to the degree of Bachelor of 
Science in Nursing, was instituted and was specifi- 
cally designed to meet the educational and profes- 
sional needs of the registered nurse. 

To date, more than 3000 students have gradu- 
ated from Duquesne's School of Nursing. 

SCHOOL OF IvnjRSING PHILOSOPHY 
AND DEFINITION OF NURSING 

The philosophy of the School of Nursing evolves 
from that of Duquesne University. As such, it 
guides the development of a personal philosophy 
of life based on a Judeo-Christian frame of refer- 
ence and supports a commitment to the values 
which give meaning to life. 

The faculty believes that the academic discipline 
of nursing is a human science profession primarily 
concerned with the health care of man with family, 
evolving from conception through death. Nursing 
focuses on helping individuals and families to en- 
hance the quality of living through the promotion 
of health. 

The nurse initiates interrelationships with fami- 
lies to help them describe their health, evaluate al- 
ternatives and mobilize their resources for 
planning change. Central to nursing practice is the 
Nurse/Client/Family process which is deliberate, 
systematic, and individually designed. This is a 
shared process where decision-making is focused 
on freedom to choose within the limitations of sit- 



uation while considering the safety of all con- 
cerned. 

The nurse uses theories, concepts and research 
findings to substantiate nursing practice. The pro- 
fessional nurse is a creative innovator who finds 
satisfaction in giving service to others, regularly 
evaluates self and plans for continuing self- 
growth. Through systematic inquiry, the profes- 
sional nurse promotes the discipline of nursing 
and provides direction for the future of nursing. 

The educational process is a co-constituted one 
in which teacher and learner plan experiences and 
share knowledge. The emergence of new knowl- 
edge is encouraged through the ongoing interro- 
gation of present knowledge and new experience. 
This enhances the nurse's preparation for future 
and evolving responsibilities within professional 
nursing based on changes and characteristics of 
the population for whom health care will be deliv- 
ered. 

In making explicit the philosophy that under- 
pins the theoretical framework of nursing, the con- 
cepts of man and health are studied in relation to 
nursing as a human science. Man is a sentient liv- 
ing unity, a creative act of God. Man and environ- 
ment is their openness evolve unidirectionally. 

Existence with others in the world, co-existence, 
is recognized through patterns of expression. This 
existence is co-constituted: that is, man's relation- 
ship with the environment is participative. Within 
limitations of the situation, man has the freedom 
to choose a way of being with the world, and in 
that choosing, gives meaning to a situation. 

Health is a process of being and becoming which 
is experienced by man. It is a personal process that 
affords each individual the potential for produc- 
tive and meaningful life that is congruent with in- 
dividual belief systems and values which arise 
from a multicultural society. Every person has the 
freedom to choose changing dimensions of health 
and health values which emerge from ethnic and 
cultural customs and characteristics. Health is as- 
sessed by citizens and promoters of health care 
through a participative process which involves 
joint planning and decision-making. 

The faculty of the School of Nursing has defined 
nursing as an academic discipline that seeks to un- 
derstand man as living health through the pro- 
cesses of life, caring, change, inquiry, and valuing. 
The practice of nursing applies knowledge and 
theories from this discipline and from the humani- 
ties and natural sciences in the promotion of 
health. Health promotion occurs through the utili- 
zation of the Nurse/Client/Family process as the 
nurse participates in care giving, health education 
and leadership. 

The uniqueness of the Duquesne University 
graduate is based on an appreciation and under- 
standing of the philosophy and the beliefs about 
man and health. These beliefs are reflected in 
nursing practice through an approach that em- 
braces man in his wholeness as one who contin- 
ually moves forward, increasing in complexity 



101 



through individual patterns of expression. The 
nursing practice of this graduate is also based on 
the recognition that the responsibility for the 
health situation is a shared process in which the 
nurse, client, and family participate. 

The Duquesne University School of Nursing 
baccalaureate program graduates a generalist who 
has the flexibility to practice in a variety of set- 
tings. The program emphasizes nursing as a hu- 
man science and provides a foundation for 
graduate study. 

PROGRAM PURPOSES, GOAL AND 
INDICATORS 

The purposes of the program are: 

1. To prepare the graduate for beginning levels of 
professional nursing in a variety of settings. 

2. To provide the foundation for graduate educa- 
tion in nursing. 

The program goal is to practice nursing as a hu- 
man science in a variety of settings. 

Within the philosophy and purposes of the 
School of Nursing, the faculty has formulated a 
curriculum that provides learning experiences to 
assist students to acquire specific knowledge and 
skills. The indicators of this program state that 
upon completion of the program, the graduate: 

1. Promotes the rights and dignity of man in 
health care. 

2. Initiates health care from the perspective of 
client's and family's belief about health. 

3. Engages client and family in a health care 
decision-making process relative to the man — 
environment interrelationship. 

4. Evaluates nursing as a human science in pro- 
viding health care to clients and families and 
groups. 

5. Promotes professional standards of responsi- 
bility and accountability in nursing practice. 

6. Uses current research findings in providing a 
basis for change in nursing practice. 

7. Participates in studies/projects which en- 
hance nursing research. 

8. Enhances own effectiveness in nursing based 
on continued self-evaluation. 

9. Synthesizes knowledge from related sciences 
and the humanities in the utilization of the nurs- 
ing process. 

10. Evaluates the values and goals of the nursing 
profession in light of the continued development 
of nursing. 

DEGREE 

The School of Nursing undergraduate program 
leads to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Nurs- 
ing. 



PROGRAM OF STUDY 

The School of Nursing offers a program with a ma- 
jor in nursing leading to a bachelor's degree to 
qualified high school graduates, registered nurses, 
non-nursing baccalaureate graduates, and quali- 
fied transfer students. The program includes four 
years of study, and is designed to provide the stu- 
dent with the knowledge and the skills needed to 
practice as a professional nurse generalist upon 
graduation. The general and professional educa- 
tion acquired in this program provides a basis for 
the graduate to progress to positions of increasing 
responsibility and to undertake graduate study. 

The curriculum design has three components: 
complementary courses, supplementary courses, 
and core nursing courses. The course offerings in 
the natural, biological and human sciences sup- 
port the philosophy that provides the basis for the 
conceptual framework of the professional nursing 
program. Professional nursing courses, which 
constitute the nursing major, include theory and 
practice in the nursing care of individuals and fam- 
ilies. Learning opportunities are provided in hos- 
pitals, in homes, and in the community. 

The faculty of the School of Nursing conducts all 
professional nursing courses and also guides and 
directs the practicum learning experiences. A vari- 
ety of hospitals and agencies cooperate with the 
School of Nursing to provide a wide selection of 
excellent practice settings. 

Upon the successful completion of this program, 
graduates will be eligible to write the examination 
for licensure in the state in which they wish to 
practice. 

The faculty reserves the right to make changes in 
the curriculum and program requirements which 
are believed to be in keeping with the changing 
health needs of society and/or the best interest of 
the students and the School to maintain quality 
professional nursing education. 

A University core curriculum is currently be- 
ing planned and is intended to be fully imple- 
mented by the 1987-88 academic year. School of 
Nursing students will be informed in advance 
about any changes affecting their program of 
study. Refer to page 14 of this catalog for prelimi- 
nary information about the University core curric- 
ulum. 

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

ADMISSION OF HIGH SCHOOL 
GRADUATES 

Students who are interested in applying for ad- 
mission to the School of Nursing should request 
an application from the Office of Admissions, Du- 
quesne University, Pittsburgh, Pa. 15282. The spe- 
cific entrance requirements for admission are: 

1. The applicant's high school curriculum must 
include a minimum of 16 units distributed as fol- 
lows: 

English 4 units required 



102 



Social Studies 3-4 units recommended 

Language 2 units recommended 

Math & Science 6 units recommended 

(1 unit Chemistry and 

1 unit Algebra 

required ) 

2. A candidate must have been graduated from 
an approved secondary school in the upper two- 
fifths of the class, and must have demonstrated ex- 
emplary personal conduct in the institution. 

3. The primary consideration for admission is 
the secondary school academic record. This is con- 
sidered to be the most important criterion of suc- 
cess at Duquesne University. It is the desire of the 
Admissions Committee to admit those candidates 
who possess qualities of character and intellect 
and who show promise of development into useful 
and contributing citizens. 

4. A candidate must present satisfactory scores 
on the required College Entrance Examination 
Board Scholastic Aptitude Test in accordance with 
the standards to which the University adheres. 

In specific instances, and at the discretion of the 
Committee on Admissions, the equivalent of these 
requirements may be accepted in lieu of the fore- 
going precise requirements. See the section on 
Admissions for other University requirements. 

REGISTERED NURSE STUDENTS 

Duquesne University School of Nursing also offers 
the registered nurse an opportunity to obtain the 
baccalaureate in nursing degree. Part-time and 
full-time enrollment are available to allow the reg- 
istered nurse to continue to be employed while un- 
dertaking the course of study. Through the 
acceptance of transfer credits, CLEP testing, and 
challenge examinations, the School of Nursing 
strives to apply the registered nurse's previous 
learning experience towards the requirements of 
the B.S.N, degree. 

Specific information concerning the acceptance 
of transfer credits, eligibility for CLEP testing and 
challenge examinations can be obtained by con- 
tacting the R.N. Program Coordinator within the 
School of Nursing. 

Admission Requirements — 
R.N.-B.S.N. Program 

Students who are interested in applying for ad- 
mission to the R.N.-B.S.N. program should re- 
quest an application from the Office of 
Admissions, Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, Pa. 
15282. 

• High school diploma or equivalent 

• Graduation from an accredited associate de- 
gree (2.5 Q.P.A. minimum) or diploma nursing 
program 

• Verification of current licensure as a registered 
nurse in Pennsylvania 



• Present or past experience in nursing 

• Verification of active malpractice insurance 

• Fulfillment of prescribed science and math re- 
quirements of the School of Nursing 

• Personal interview with the R.N. Program Co- 
ordinator in the School of Nursing 

TRANSFER STUDENT ADMISSION 

See the section on Admissions for further Univer- 
sity requirements 
Admission criteria for transfer students 

1. A cumulative QPA of 2.5 from the transferring 
institution. 

2. 1 unit of chemistry and 1 unit of algebra, 
which can be from either a secondary school or 
postsecondary institution. 

3. Personal interview with a representative of the 
School of Nursing. 

Provisions affecting placement 

1. No transfer student can be accepted into nurs- 
ing practicum courses during the first semester of 
attendance at Duquesne University. 

2. Only courses taken within the past ten years 
will be evaluated for transfer credit. For courses in 
the natural sciences, the limit is five years. This 
time limit may be waived in specific instances. 

SECOND DEGREE PROGRAM 

Applicants holding a baccalaureate with a major 
other than nursing must follow transfer student 
admission procedures. They should also arrange 
for a personal interview with a representative of 
the School of Nursing. 

TEMPORARY TRANSFER 

With prior written approval, a nursing student 
may take courses during the summer at an accred- 
ited college* or university other than Duquesne 
University. A student wishing to do this will be- 
come a temporary transfer student, providing he 
or she receives the necessary clearance from both 
institutions. 

1. A student must bring to the Academic Advi- 
sor both the catalog description of courses he or 
she wishes to take and the schedule for the sum- 
mer session in which they are given. The Aca- 
demic Advisor will evaluate the proposed courses 
and confirm the other institution's accreditation 
status. 

2. Ordinarily, a student who has acquired 60 or 
more credits may not receive advanced standing 
for courses taken at accredited community or two- 
year colleges. Students desiring waiver of this pol- 
icy must request this from the Student Standing 
Committee of the School of Nursing. 

3. A candidate for the Bachelor's degree must 
complete the last 30 credits (exclusive of challenge 
credits) toward the degree at Duquesne Univer- 
sity. 



103 



4. The student is responsible for earning a mini- 
mum of a C grade, or its equivalent if he or she 
expects to receive advanced standing. The student 
must arrange to have an official copy of the tran- 
script of grades earned at the institution in which 
he or she is a temporary transfer sent to the Aca- 
demic Advisor in the School of Nursing in order to 
receive advance standing. This transcript must be 
sent immediately upon completion of the course. 
Credit can be only be given once for courses that 
are repeated. 

ADDITIONAL EXPENSES AND 
REQUIREMENTS 

Student Liability Insurance (Professional) 

for three years (approx.) $ 45.00 

Uniforms, nurse's cap, duty shoes, 

identification pin. (approx.) 107.00 

Transportation to and from clinical 

agencies (weekly) 10.00 (approx.) 

School of Nursing pin, if desired cost varies 

Physical examinations, diagnostic procedures, 

and immunizations (cost varies) 

Physical Assessment Kit 40.00 

Senior Assessment 

Examination 25.00 (approx.) 

All junior level students are expected to produce 
evidence of completion of first aid certification and 
CPR certification. Students will not be permitted 
to enter clinical without evidence of these compe- 
tencies. Students are expected to maintain cur- 
rency in these competencies as they progress 
through the program. 

An annual physical examination and certain im- 
munizations and health tests are required for all 
students in the School of Nursing. Pre-clinical stu- 
dents must complete specific health requirements 
by August 1 before proceeding to the Junior and 
Senior clinical practicum. The School of Nursing 
provides information on required school uniforms 
to students prior to entrance into the clinical area. 

Each student is responsible for transportation to 
and from hospital and other clinical agencies. Each 
student will be expected to have access to an auto- 
mobile to permit experience with home care of cli- 
ents and their families in Nursing VI. 

STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS 

Each nursing student is a member of the general 
student body and may select and participate in 
any of the campus organizations. There are nu- 
merous social sororities and organizations as well 
as professional organizations. These organizations 
exist for the promotion of the scholarly and profes- 
sional interests of members: 

Alpha Tau Delta (meaning "through force of char- 
acter") is a national professional fraternity for per- 
sons in nursing. Theta Chapter was chartered on 
the Duquesne University campus on April 21, 
1938. Eligibility is limited to full-time students who 



have completed a minimum of one semester in the 
School of Nursing with a cumulative quality point 
average of 2.5. 

Sigma Theta Tau is the national nursing honorary 
Society. The Duquesne University Nursing Honor 
Society was granted a chapter of Sigma Theta Tau, 
Epsilon Phi, in November of 1981. Membership is 
open to students, faculty, and alumni who meet 
the criteria for election. 

Class Organizations. Each class is an officially rec- 
ognized organization in the School of Nursing. As 
such, each class elects its own officers and con- 
ducts such programs and affairs as its members 
deem desirable toward achieving its goals. 

HONOR AWARDS 

In addition to graduation honors, these awards 
and others are presented at Honors Day: 

The Mary V\I. Tobin Gold Medal and The Dean John- 
son Memorial Medal are awarded annually to two 
outstanding seniors chosen by the faculty. The 
Mary W. Tobin Gold Medal is awarded by the 
Theta Chapter of Alpha Tau Delta National Profes- 
sional Fraternity for persons in nursing. It was es- 
tablished in 1945 to honor Mary Tobin on the 
occasion of her retirement from the University. The 
Dean Johnson Memorial Medal commemorates Dean 
Johnson's contributions to the growth of the 
School of Nursing. 

Four new awards were presented for the first 
time in 1983. The first award on behalf of Miles 
Laboratories, Inc., is awarded annually to the out- 
standing graduating senior in the area of acute 
care nursing. The award is called the Miles Labora- 
tories Award for Excellence in Nursing Practice in the 
Acute Care Setting. The second award is called the 
Lanza Award for Excellence in Home Health Nursing, 
and is sponsored by Lanza, Hospital Equipment 
for the Home. This award is presented annually to 
the student demonstrating outstanding ability in 
the area of community health. The third award is 
sponsored by the United States Air Force. This 
award, the Air Force Leadership in Nursing Award, is 
presented to the graduate best demonstrating out- 
standing leadership qualities (in general), contri- 
butions to the nursing program and/or class, and 
evidence of community service and commitment 
to the profession. The last new award is for general 
excellence in the area of nursing research and is 
awarded to a graduating senior. This award is 
sponsored by Sigma Theta Tau — Epsilon Phi 
Chapter. 

SENIOR ASSESSMENT EXAMINATION 

A Senior Assessment Examination is required of 
all second semester seniors. The purpose of this 
battery of tests is to provide a mechanism for feed- 
back to students to help in identifying strengths 
and weaknesses in preparation for the licensing 
examination. 



104 



GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 

General University requirements for graduation 
are in the Academic Policies section of this catalog. 
In addition, specific School of Nursing require- 
ments are: 

1. Completion of 120 credits. 

2. A minimum cumulative over-all quality point 
average of 2.0. 

3. Successful completion of all clinical practicum 
courses. 

4. Completion of the required curriculum plan. 

5. A candidate for the Bachelor's degree must 
complete the last 30 credits toward the degree at 
Duquesne University. Challenge credits are not in- 
cluded in this 30 credit requirement. 

6. Submission of an application for the degree. 
No student is considered a degree candidate until 
he/she files an application for the degree on a form 
provided by the Registrar. 

Degree requirements must be completed within 
10 years after initial enrollment. At the end of the 
10-year period, the student's record is re-evaluated 
in terms of the curriculum in effect at that time, 
and the student is advised of any additional re- 
quirements for graduation. The responsibility for 
fulfilling degree requirements rests with the stu- 
dent. 

RECOMMENDED COURSE 
SEQUENCE 



First Year 



Courses Credits 

Natural Science** 4 

Eng. 101. - 

English Comp. I 3 

Psych. 103.- 

Intro. to Psych 3 

Speech 3 



Courses Credits 

Natural Science** 3 

Eng. 102. - 

Eng. Comp. II 3 

Soc. 101.- 

Survey of Soc 3 

N. 199. -Nursing I** 3 

Phil. 104.- 

Intro. to Phil _3 

15 



Second Year 



Bio. 207 and 208. -Anatomy 
& Physiology** 4 

Psych. 225. -Developmental 
Psychology I** 3 

N. 255. -Nutrition** 3 

Philosophy 
or Theology 3 

N. 200. -Nursing II** _3 

16 



N. 212. -Pathology** 4 

Psych. 266. — Developmental 

Psychology II** 3 

Math 225. -Fund. 

of Stats 3 

Pharm. 3- 

Basic Pharm.** 3 

Nursing Elective 3 

16 



Third Year 



N. 340. -Nursing III* 9 

Soc. 325.- 

FamiJy Systems 3 

General Elective 3 

15 



N. 341. -Nursing IV* 9 

Philosophy 

or Theology 3 

General Elective 3 

15 



Fourth Year 

N. 460. -Nursing V* 9 N. 461. -Nursing VI* 9 

Nursing Elective 3 Nursing Elective 3 

N. 470. - General Elective 3 

Research Process 3 

15 15 

*These courses must be taken during the semester indicated. 
**Pre-requisite to Nursing III. 

Natural Sciences: Students are directed to enroll in Principles of 
Chemistry I during the Fall semester and General Biology II dur- 
ing the Spring semester. 

Student Rights 

Bill of Rights -A statement of the student Bill of 
Rights is available to all students in the Duquesne 
University Student Handbook. The Student 
Handbook can be acquired in the student govern- 
ment office located in the student union. 

School of Nursing Grievance Procedure 

Grievance procedures must be initiated within 30 
days of the occurrence which gave rise to the griev- 
ance. With the knowledge of the involved parties, 
either party may request that another person be 
present during the discussions. 

If difficulty arises between student and faculty, 
the student should first discuss the difficulty with 
the person directly involved. 

If the matter is not satisfactorily resolved, the ap- 
propriate level coordinator should be consulted. If 
the problem persists, the Associate Dean should 
then be contacted. 

In the event that a satisfactory agreement still 
has not been reached, the student should present 
his/her case before the Student Standing Commit- 
tee of the School of Nursing. 

If the problem is not satisfactorily resolved, a 
consultation with the Dean of the School of Nurs- 
ing should be arranged. 

Should the problem still remain unresolved, a 
"Request of Hearing" form should be filed with 
the Vice President for Academic Affairs within 20 
days of the Dean's decision. 

If the Vice President for Academic Affairs find- 
ings determine that a legitimate grievance exists he 
will convene the academic due process committee. 
In all cases, the decision of the academic due proc- 
ess committee is final. If the Vice President for Aca- 
demic Affairs finds that a legitimate grievance 
does not exist, he/she will inform the student 
within (30) days of his/her determination. 

REGULATIONS 

Students in the School of Nursing are preparing 
themselves for entry into a respected health pro- 
fession where the highest degree of character and 
sense of responsibility are basic requirements. As 
such, they are expected to conduct themselves, at 
all times, in a manner befitting this position and 
according honor to it. For these reasons, the 
School of Nursing insists on strict adherence to the 



105 



following regulations: 

1. Class Attendance. Attendance is expected for 
every class session of each course within the 
School of Nursing. Students are expected to at- 
tend the entire class session. Specific class attend- 
ance requirements (in relation to grading) will be 
stated in each course syllabus. Acceptable reasons 
for absence will be in accordance with the current 
Undergraduate Catalog statement of scholastic poli- 
cies. Consideration of any other request for an ex- 
cused absence will be at the instructor's discretion. 

A student who is unable to attend class because 
of serious illness, hospitalization, a serious acci- 
dent or other extenuating circumstances is respon- 
sible for notifying the appropriate faculty member 
or level coordinator and the offices of Student Af- 
fairs and Associate Dean of the School of Nursing. 
A student who is absent for cause is expected to 
complete all of the work in all courses. It is the stu- 
dent's responsibility to make up all assignments in 
all courses and to be familiar with any instructions 
which may have been given during the absence. 
Attendance is mandatory for all scheduled hours 
in the clinical area. This includes community clini- 
cal hours as well as those scheduled in the acute 
care area. Acceptable reasons for absence will be in 
accordance with the current Undergraduate Catalog 
statement of scholastic policies. The student is ex- 
pected to notify the clinical instructor of the ab- 
sence prior to the scheduled clinical time. The 
specific procedure for this notification will be at 
the discretion of the clinical instructor. Consider- 
ation of any other request for an excused absence 
will be at the instructor's discretion. Tardiness or 
unexcused absence(s) are serious offenses of pro- 
fessional responsibility and accountability that 
may result in failure to meet course goals and indi- 
cators. 

Handicapped students requiring special assist- 
ance are urged to notify the class instructor before 
or at the first class. 

2. Health Requirements. All School of Nursing stu- 
dents are required to conform to the health re- 
quirements of the School of Nursing. 

Curriculum Standards 

To progress to the nursing practice courses, a min- 
imum cumulative QPA of 2.0 is required with a 
minimum of a C grade in the natural sciences (Biol- 
ogy and Chemistry), Anatomy and Physiology (in- 
cluding laboratory). Nutrition, Pathology, Nursing 
I and II, Basic Pharmacology, and Developmental 
Psychology I and II. 

The School of Nursing faculty reserves the right 
to withdraw any student from the nursing major 
who, in its opinion, has not progressed satisfacto- 
rily in nursing practice even though the quality 
point average meets required standards. 

Students must maintain a minimum of a C grade 
in each clinical practice course. An F in either the- 
ory or clinical practice will result in an F grade for 
the course. 



Students may repeat non-nursing courses one 
time only. This includes support courses offered in 
and out of the School of Nursing: that is Anatomy 
and Physiology and Lab, Pathology, Basic Pharma- 
cology and Nutrition. Students may repeat only 
one course at the 300 level and one at the 400 level 
in the nursing major. 

The student is cautioned to seek regular advice 
from the faculty and to keep a record of credits 
earned and the calculated averages. The School as- 
sumes no responsibility for such errors appearing 
in student records which may prevent the student 
from being graduated. 

The faculty of the School of Nursing reserves the 
right to make any changes in the curriculum that 
seem necessary or desirable. 

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 

Descriptions of courses in liberal arts and sciences 
may be found in the College of Liberal Arts and 
Sciences section, pages 19 to 63. 

199. Nursing I. 3 cr. 

This course introduces the students to the disci- 
pline of nursing as a human science. Students ex- 
plore nursing as a human science in light of the 
major concepts of man and health. Students are 
introduced to key themes of the conceptual frame- 
work which have been identified as the processes 
of life, change, valuing, inquiry, caring and family/ 
nurse/client. Students explore the valuing process 
and look at self-esteem as a means of valuing self. 
The process of man coming to know and investi- 
gate the historical emergence of nursing as a pro- 
fession and a discipline is explored. 

200. Nursing II. 3 cr. 

This course builds on Nursing I. The students ex- 
amine nursing as a human science in light of inter- 
relating health and man-in-his-family. Students 
will examine man as he lives in his health situation 
and as he participates in the health care system. 
Students will explore the process of valuing nurs- 
ing research through systematic inquiry toward 
development of nursing theory. Students are en- 
couraged to identify the meaning of responsibility 
for self as learner moving toward becoming a pro- 
fessional nurse. Students will begin to explore the 
nursing process, the components of a basic nurs- 
ing assessment, and examine the communication 
process. Prerequisite: Nursing I. 

212. Pathology 4 cr. 

Students in this course are introduced to the basic 
pathological processes associated with disease. 
Students will learn the basic mechanisms in- 
volved, the pathogenesis, and the pathophysio- 
logical responses generated by the various organ 
systems. From this exposure students should be 
able to describe the processes involved in most of 
the common diseases and to explain the relation- 
ship between the pathology and pathophysiology 
that leads to symptom production and many clini- 
cal laboratory abnormalities. Lecture, four hours. 



106 



Prerequisites: Anatomy and Physiology Lecture 
and Laboratory. Ottered during Spring Semester 
only. 

255. Nutrition 3 cr. 

This course tbcuses on nutrition and the nursing 
role in primary prevention for individuals, families 
and groups throughout the life cycle. Nutrition as- 
sessment and intervention will be considered in 
relation to the nursing role. Food needs for energy, 
protein, fat, carbohydrate, vitamins and minerals 
will be considered in relation to maintaining nutri- 
tional status. Lecture, three hours. Sophomore 



340. Nursing III. 9 cr. 

This is the first clinical nursing course, building on 
Nursing II, in which the student begins to examine 
the processes of life, valuing, change, inquiry, car- 
ing and the nurse/client/family process. In Nurs- 
ing III, these processes will be further explored in 
relation to man's unidirectional movement as lived 
through health patterns. 

The nurse/client/family process is practiced as 
the method used by the discipline to promote 
health. Use of theory as a basis for practice is em- 
phasized. The student will utilize knowledge from 
the sciences and humanities as he/she practices 
the nurse/client/family process in a clinical setting, 
with clients experiencing changing patterns of 
health. Each student is required to attend two 
hours per week in the Heyison Resource Center. 

The course is offered during the Fall semester. 
Prerequisites: Natural Sciences, Anatomy and 
Physiology lecture and lab. Pathology, Nutrition, 
Pharmacology, Nursing I and II, Developmental 
Psychology I and II. Please contact the School of 
Nursing for information regarding health require- 
ments, uniforms, CPR and First Aid certification, 
etc. 

341. Nursing IV. 9 cr. 

Nursing IV is the second clinical nursing course 
and builds on the learnings of Nursing III. The 
course focuses on decision-making as a participa- 
tive endeavor within the nurse/client/family proc- 
ess. 

Nursing IV also provides the student the oppor- 
tunity to explore adult man as he experiences 
changing patterns of energy in select nurse/client 
situations. 

The course is divided into three units emphasiz- 
ing nurse/client decision-making. These decisions 
are made in the following health care situations: 
crisis, short-term and long-term. The family and 
community are discussed as client support sys- 
tems. 

Nursing IV offers a clinical component in which 
the student cares for select clients in the acute 
medical-surgical and psychiatric settings. The 
course is offered during the Spring semester. Pre- 
requisite: Nursing III. 

460. Nursing V. 9 cr. 

Nursing V, the third clinical nursing course, builds 



upon the learning in Nursing IV. The student ex- 
amines nursing as a participant with evolving fam- 
ilies. For the purpose of this course, the term 
evolving family will be viewed as a family primar- 
ily concerned with childbearing and childrearing. 
The student will focus on the interrelatedness and 
vulnerability of the family members as they strive 
towards family unity. The student will initiate in- 
terrelationships with evolving families as they ex- 
perience separateness/togetherness to describe 
their health, evaluate alternatives and mobilize re- 
sources in planning change. Nursing practice will 
be based upon caring, valuing, and change proc- 
esses to assist the family in the mobilization of re- 
sources for health care. 

The course is presented in two units. Unit I uti- 
lizes the nurse/client/family process with evolving 
families as they experience life processes. The con- 
cept, separateness/togetherness, is utilized to ex- 
plore the needs of the individual within the 
family; the interrelatedness of family members, 
and family dynamics as the family progresses to- 
wards unity. The major focus in Unit II is the con- 
cept of family vulnerability. The''concept, 
separateness/togetherness, continues to be used 
to explore man and his family's experience of 
health. This course is offered during the Fall se- 
mester. Prerequisites: Nursing IV, Family Systems. 

461. Nursing VI. 9 cr. 

Nursing VI is the final clinical nursing course and 
builds on prior learnings. The focus of the course 
is on the promotion of health with groups, in both 
community and acute care settings. The nurse/ 
client/family process is the vehicle through which 
the student participates in health promotion. Em- 
phasis throughout this course is on the collabora- 
tive function of the nurse leader. The collaborative 
process with multi-disciplinary health team mem- 
bers provider opportunity for the generation of 
nursing research possibilities. 

The course is presented in two units. The first 
unit deals with the nature of groups, groups of cli- 
ents, the family as a group, and the community as 
a group. The second unit deals with the nurse as a 
member and a leader of the nursing team, and as a 
member of the multi-disciplinary health care team. 
The course is offered during the Spring semester. 
Prerequisite: Nursing V. 

470. The Research Process. 3 cr. 

This introductory course offers students an oppor- 
tunity to examine the historical perspectives of 
nursing research as well as trends and issues 
which have emerged. These are discussed and 
critically analyzed. Ethical implications of nursing 
research are considered integratively. The students 
are encouraged to examine the research process 
from a natural scientific viewpoint as well as from 
a human science approach. Further application of 
the research process to nursing studies is explored 
through critical evaluation of current research. 
Prerequisite: Fundamentals of Statistics and Nurs- 
ing IV. 



107 



NURSING ELECTIVES 

260. Ways of Healing. 3 cr. 

This course will explore many of the ways in which 
clients and their families are involved in the proc- 
ess of healing which are not thought to be medi- 
cally traditional. This course will begin by looking 
at man's belief systems and how they affect his life 
and specifically, the healing process. The student 
will explore the mystery around unconventional or 
unexpected healing and look at this in relationship 
to man's belief systems, which are a reflection of 
how man participates in his own health. 

The student will then look at, in depth, two 
ways of healing. One way is biofeedback. The 
other is visual imagery with relaxation techniques 
as researched by Dr. Carl O. Simonton. The un- 
derlying theory wUl be explored, case histories will 
be discussed, and the student wUl get an opportu- 
nity to practice these techniques on him/herself. In 
addition, the application of these techniques to the 
nurse/client/family process will be explored. There 
will also be student group presentations around 
seven other ways healing can occur. These are: 
psychic surgery, hypnosis, spiritual healing, acu- 
puncture, acupressure, laying on of hands and 
hex/ voodoo. Prerequisite: Nursing I. 

299. Nursing and Spirituality. 3 cr. 

This course wUl initially identify the universal and 
timeless truth of the spiritual dimension of human 
nature. It will then investigate case histories in 
nursing which focus on spiritual needs encoun- 
tered in the nurse-client relationship. The student 
is encouraged to develop an awareness of his/her 
own spiritual dimension through nursing experi- 
ences. In addition, the student will discover the 
gift he/she brings to the nursing situation when 
spiritual needs are recognized and shared (entered 
into) with the client. 

300. Ways of Relating. 3 cr. 

This course offers the student basic communica- 
tion theory and skills. It provides the student the 
opportunity to enhance relationships through in- 
creasing self-awareness and critical analysis of 
one's own patterns. This knowledge promotes the 
motivation toward changing the individual's style 
of relating. The student learns to apply the skills of 
critical analysis, evaluation, and change, to simu- 
lated nurse/client/family situations. 

353. Health Care Ethics. 3 cr. 

This course focuses on the practical and theoretical 
issues in the ethics of health care. Students will ex- 
plore a number of ethical theories and will become 
aware of theological bases of and approaches to 
health care ethics. Students are introduced to a 
model which offers direction for ethical decision- 
making in the health care context. The role of the 
nurse in ethical decision-making is discussed and 
some case studies involving dilemmas that are 
faced by nurses are used to demonstrate the use of 



this model. However, the model is broad enough 
to be used in all areas of health care ethics and the 
student composition in the individual class will 
give direction for the case studies used in this 
course. This course is offered jointly by the School 
of Nursing and the Theology Department. 

380. Critical Care Nursing 

This course is built upon medical-surgical con- 
cepts learned in Nursing III and IV. Critical Care 
Nursing continues to examine the processes of life, 
valuing, change, inquiry, caring and Nurse/Client/ 
Family process. In an acute care setting, these 
processes will be further explored in relation to 
man's unidirectional movement as lived through 
health patterns. The course emphasizes the stu- 
dent's ability to perform indepth assessment and 
demonstrate a wholistic approach in providing 
care to the client with complex medical-surgical 
problems. This course is offered during the sum- 
mer and only by special permission. Prerequisite 
Nursing IV. 

397. Health Care of Women. 3 cr. 

Health Care of Women is a nursing elective that 
will provide students with an opportunity to ex- 
plore many of the prevalent health experiences of 
women in contemporary society. This course in- 
vestigates aspects of women's health that involve 
choices relative to the quality of their lives. It will 
provide students with an opportunity to analyze 
health promotion for women from a nursing per- 
spective. It will provide them with the knowledge 
of health resources available to meet the specific 
needs of women. 

398. Communicating with Children 

Through Play. 3 cr. 

Communicating with Children through Play is a 
non-clinical elective for any student who is inter- 
ested in pre-school-aged, school-aged and adoles- 
cent children. The focus of the course is on play as 
an evolutionary life experience. Emphasis is 
placed on play as a means of understanding chil- 
dren's behavior, as a valuable resource for antici- 
patory guidance with children, and as a means for 
the child to work through some of his/her immedi- 
ate life stresses. 

The participants will expand their perspectives 
of children's play as a form of communication by 
observation and evaluation of children's play by 
utilizing selected techniques. The selected play 
techniques that will be presented are: Drawings 
(draw-a-man, draw-a-family, draw-a-house-tree- 
person), Pigem's Question, Three Wishes, Story 
Completion, Make-up a Story, Puppet Play, and 
Therapeutic Play Interviews. Prerequisite: Psych 
225 Developmental Psychology I and Psych 206 
Developmental Psychology II or current enroll- 
ment in Developmental Psychology II. Open to 
any University student. 

399. Health Education. 3 cr. 

This course focuses upon the nurse's role as health 
educator and allows the student to explore the dy- 



108 



namic world of health education in today's society. 
The major issues confronting the nurse as a 
teacher are emphasized together with the proc- 
esses of valuing and change in health education. 
The learning needs of the client-family are care- 
fully scrutinized. The student has the opportunity 
to write and implement a teaching plan, design an 
evaluation tool, and create teaching aids. Prerequi- 
site: Nursing 111. 

400. Practical Approaches to Implementing 

the Nursing Process. 3 cr. 

This course is a clinical nursing elective designed 
to provide students with the opportunity to utilize 
the process of inquiry specifically through a prob- 
lem solving methodology. Students will re- 
examine the elements of the nurse/client/family 
process drawing upon past learning, utilizing data 
and information derived from the current practice 
setting. Students will then synthesize these ele- 
ments and formulate relevant nursing care plans 
which reflect a refinement of problem solving 
skills. Outcomes realized through the utilization of 
the nurse/client/family process will then be ana- 
lyzed and evaluated. Through the selected learn- 
ing experiences occurring within the actual 
practice setting, students will also have the oppor- 
tunity to examine the values that exist in the prac- 
tice setting itself and the impact that they have on 
the nurse/client/family process. This course is only 
offered in the summer by special permission. Pre- 
requisite: Nursing IV. 

458. Family Nursing in the 

Appalachian Community. 3 cr. 

This course offers the student an opportunity to 
implement the nurse/client/family process with 
families in a rural community whose cultural refer- 
ence is different from that usually encountered. 
Students examine history and cultural patterns of 
the geographical area for their influence on health 
and health care delivery systems. Group process is 
explored as it relates to communal living and in- 
tense working relationships with a temporary 



multidisciplinary team of volunteer health pro- 
viders. This course is offered during the summer 
and is by special permission only. Prerequisite: 
Nursing IV, Family Systems. 

463. Patterns of Aging. 3 cr. 

This course is an elective course designed to exam- 
ine the aging process with a focus on the older 
adult. Emphasis is placed on the meaning of in- 
creasing complexity in the life process. Learners 
will examine changing belief systems as they relate 
to health services for the older adult. Learners are 
expected to critically investigate the nurse/client/ 
family process through selected situations. 

466. Choosing the Living in Dying. 3 cr. 

Choosing the Living in Dying is a non-clinical elec- 
tive for nursing majors. The focus of the course is 
on dying as an evolutionary life experience. Em- 
phasis is placed on the quality of living throughout 
the dying process. The learners will expand their 
perspectives of the dying process and current is- 
sues in America related to that process. Meaning 
will be enhanced through the sharing of thoughts, 
feelings and perceptions within the group process. 

490. Senior Nursing Seminar. 3 cr. 

This senior nursing seminar focuses upon clients' 
experiencing a wide range of health related prob- 
lems throughout the life continuum. The synthe- 
sis of nursing theory and related science bases is 
accomplished through utilization of case studies 
and faculty /student led discussions. Inquiry and 
decision making are emphasized within the frame- 
work of nurse/client/family process. This course is 
offered only in the spring. Prerequisite: Nursing V. 

499. Directed Study. 3 cr. 

This course in Directed Studies provides students 
with the opportunity to pursue an area of individ- 
ual interest in nursing which is consistent with the 
curriculum. Students will have the opportunity to 
generate goals related to the area of interest they 
wish to pursue and to formulate and implement a 
plan for achieving these goals. By special permis- 
sion only. 




109 



School of Pharmacy 



HISTORY 

Plans for establishing a School of Pharmacy were 
instituted in 1911, when the charter of the Univer- 
sity was amended and authority obtained to grant 
degrees in Pharmacy. On April 20, 1925, the final 
work of organizing the School of Pharmacy was 
completed. The first class was received September 
21, 1925. 

Duquesne University School of Pharmacy is 
housed in Richard King Mellon Hall of Science, 
whose design by master architect Mies van der 
Rohe won the "Laboratory of the Year" award for 
1969 in the annual Industrial Research, Inc. survey 
of new science buildings across the country. The 
School's specialized facilities include the Hugh C. 
Muldoon Model Pharmacy, animal operating 
room, bionucleonics laboratory, eight additional 
teaching laboratories, and a manufacturing phar- 
macy laboratory containing basic pharmaceutical 
manufacturing equipment and separate tableting 
and aerosol technology areas. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

The School of Pharmacy, as an integral part of the 
University, embodies as its own, the mission and 
goals set forth by the University. 

The School of Pharmacy has many important 
missions, but the primary mission of the School is 
to prepare practioners for life-long careers in phar- 
macy and allied health sciences. Academic train- 
ing must build sufficient knowledge and skUl to 
allow graduates to practice in the present environ- 
ment and to grow and adapt as the practice envi- 
ronment changes. 

The curriculum in pharmacy represents a com- 
posite of educational experiences that results in a 
well-educated and well-trained professional and 
offers the undergraduate student a well-rounded 
and broad education which will inspire a perma- 
nent interest in learning. 

In order to be a competent pharmacist, the stu- 
dent must become a therapeutic specialist who has 
knowledge of drugs and their actions. Secondly, 
the pharmacist must possess skills and knowledge 
to manage a professional practice. The compre- 
hensive and specialized nature of the curriculum 
offers the Pharmacy graduate a choice of occupa- 
tions within the profession and its closely allied 
fields, as well as an adequate foundation for the 
continuation of studies on a graduate level in 
many areas. 

Within the profession of Pharmacy, a graduate 
may become a community pharmacist, hospital 
pharmacist, or a pharmacist in government serv- 
ice. Many pharmacists find employment as medi- 
cal service representatives for drug manufacturers. 
Some enter the wholesale drug business and the 
pharmaceutical manufacturing industry. Gradu- 
ates in pharmacy are exceptionally well-qualified 



to become agents for the enforcement of narcotic 
and pure food and drug laws. In recent years, 
pharmacists have entered the fields of nuclear 
pharmacy and drug information-poison control. 
Many pharmacists find employment as chemists 
or biologists in industrial and research organiza- 
tions in allied fields; others enter the profession of 
teaching. Additional study is required for some of 
these positions. A few pharmacists continue their 
study in other health professions leading to a sec- 
ond professional degree or an advanced degree in 
the basic pharmaceutical and medical sciences. 

The School of Pharmacy directs the professional 
program leading to the Doctor of Pharmacy de- 
gree. Those graduates are qualified for placement 
in clinical pharmacy positions in hospitals, in the 
pharmaceutical industry, and in academia. 

Medical technologists work under the direction 
of a pathologist or clinical scientist. In the field of 
Medical Technology, positions are available in hos- 
pital and industrial laboratories preparing tissue 
samples and slides for microscopic study, taking 
blood samples, storing plasma, and keeping re- 
cords of tests. 

In the field of Radiological Health, positions as 
health physicist are available in hospitals and any 
laboratories and industrial facilities which use ra- 
dioisotopes. 

The Graduate School of Liberal Arts and Sci- 
ences of Duquesne University offers programs 
through the Department of Pharmaceutical Sci- 
ences, leading to the Doctor of Philosophy degree 
in pharmaceutical chemistry and medicinal chem- 
istry, and the Master of Science degree in the fields 
of pharmaceutics, pharmaceutical chemistry, 
pharmacology-toxicology and medicinal chemis- 
try. 

DEGREES 

The School of Pharmacy offers programs leading 
to three undergraduate degrees: Bachelor of Sci- 
ence in Pharmacy, Bachelor of Science in Medical 
Technology, and Bachelor of Science in Radiologi- 
cal Health; these are described on the following 
pages. 

Descriptions of advanced degrees offered by the 
faculty of the School of Pharmacy are found in 
other catalogs available from the School of Phar- 
macy office. 

PROGRAMS 



PHARMACY 

The School of Pharmacy offers a Bachelor of Sci- 
ence degree in Pharmacy upon completion of the 
undergraduate professional program. The first 
two years encompass many courses offered by the 
College of Liberal Arts and Sciences in addition to 
several professional courses. The latter three years 
of study are taught mainly by the pharmacy fac- 
ulty, with electives being available from both that 
faculty and all other schools of the University. Stu- 



no 



dents are enrolled in the School ot Pharmacy for all 
years. Transfer students are enrolled according to 
qualifications in the first, second or third year of 
the five-year sequence. Legal requirements of all 
states are met with regard to graduation from an 
accredited college of pharmacy. Licensure in the 
several states may be acquired by meeting specific 
additional requirements of each particular state. 

Residency Requirements 

The pharmacy curriculum has been designed to 
provide a sequence of courses leading to profes- 
sional competence. The minimum time period in 
which this may be accomplished has been deter- 
mined by the faculty to be three years of full-time 
residency. This residency requirement for the final 
years of the professional curriculum is in accord- 
ance with a policy statement ratified by the Ameri- 
can Association of Colleges of Pharmacy and 
followed by all colleges of pharmacy in establish- 
ing minimum residency requirements, as well as 
guidelines for professional education. The resi- 
dency requirement is applicable to all students re- 
gardless of advanced standing status. 

Curriculum 

A minimum of 30 credits in the combined general 
education areas of humanities and social sciences 
is required for graduation from the School of Phar- 
macy (fifteen in the Humanities, including English 
Composition and Theology, six in the Social Sci- 
ences, and nine credits chosen from either area in 
consultation with the advisor). (In adherence to 
ACPE accreditation requirements on general edu- 
cation, the School of Pharmacy faculty has ruled 
that general electives must be non-science, non- 
math, non-professional course work.) Courses ful- 
filling the Theology requirement are listed under 
the Department of Theology in the College of Lib- 
eral Arts and Sciences section of this catalog. 

The faculty recommends and reserves the right 
to require completion of course clusters in the hu- 
manities and social sciences as a means to provide 
a strong general education for all health profes- 
sionals. A list of suggested course clusters appears 
at the end of this section. 

The student is cautioned to seek regular advice 
from the faculty and to keep a record of credits 
earned and the calculated averages. The School as- 
sumes no responsibility for such errors appearing 
in student records which may prevent the student 
from being graduated. 



PHARMACY CURRICULUM 








First Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


111 General Biology I 


3 


4 


4 


121 General Chemistry I 


3 


4 


4 


101 English Composition I 


3 


- 


3 


115 Calculus I 


4 


— 


4 


101 Pharmacy Orientation 


1 


- 


1 




14 


8 


16 


Spning Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


112 General Biology II 


3 


4 


4 


122 General Chemistry II 


3 


8 


5 


102 English Composition II 


3 


- 


3 


Humanities Elective 


3 


- 


3 




12 


12 


15 


Second Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


205 Organic Chemistry I 


3 


4 


4 


201 General Physics I 


4 


2 


4 


Humanities Elective 


3 


- 


3 


Social Science Elective 


3 


- 


3 


General Elective 


3 


- 


3 




16 


6 


17 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


206 Organic Chemistry II 


3 


4 


4 


Social Science Elective 


3 


- 


3 


Humanities Elective 


3 


- 


3 


General Elective 


3 


- 


3 


220 Human Anatomy 








& Physiology I 


4 


- 


4 




16 


4 


17 


Third Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


317 Human Anatomy & 








Physiology II 


3 


3 


4 


310 Basic 








Pharmaceutics - 








Pharmacy Math I 


3 


4 


4 


309 Biochemistry-Nutrition 


3 


3 


4 


230 Pharmacy Law 


3 


- 


3 




12 


10 


15 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


318 Pathophysiology 


3 


- 


3 


302 Basic Pharmaceutics II 


3 


4 


4 



319 Medical Microbiology - 

Immunology 
310 Analysis of 

Drug Substances 
326 Pharmacy 

Administration 



Ill 



Fourth Year 

Fall Semester 

321 Pharmacology-Drug 

Mechanisms I 
305 Pharmaceutics - 

Biopharmaceutics III 
313 Medicinal Chemistry — 

Natural Products I 
325 Pharmacy Management 

General or Professional 

Elective 



D* L* C* 
4-4 
3-3 



Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


322 Pharmacology -Drug 








Mechanisms 11 


4 


— 


4 


306 Pharmaceutics - 








Pharmacokinetics IV 


3 


4 


4 


314 Medicinal Chemistry - 








Natural Products II 


4 


— 


4 


431 Behavioral Aspects 








of Illness 


2 


— 


2 


General or Professional 








Elective 


3 


- 


3 




16 


4 


17 


Fifth Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


440 Therapeutics 


6 


- 


6 


323 OTC Drugs 


2 


- 


2 


430 Patient Counseling & 








Education 


2 


1 


3 


333 Drug Literature 








Resources 


1 


1 


1 


324 Public Health - 








Emergency Treatment 


3 


- 


3 


General or Professional 








Elective 


3 


- 


3 




17 


2 


18 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


441 Practical Pharmacy I - 








Clinical Clerkship 


— 


— 


3 


432 Practical Pharmacy II- 








Community 


- 


- 


3 


433 Practical Pharmacy III— 








Hospital 


- 


- 


3 


434 Practical Pharmacy IV- 








Optional 


- 


- 


3 




hours, C*-C 


12 


D*- Didactic hours, L* - Laboratory 


]redi 



hours. 

Courses are to be completed in the designated sequence. 
Minimum credits for B.S. in Pharmacy Degree -163; suf- 
ficient elective courses must be taken to satisfy the mini- 
mum credit requirements. 

Changes may be made in some parts of the curriculum 
indicated for the Class of 1988 and succeeding classes as a 
result of faculty evaluation of the new Pharmacy curricu- 
lum. 



AREAS OF CONCENTRATION 

During the fourth year (earlier if possible) each 
pharmacy student is urged to select an area of con- 
centration from one of the following areas: Com- 
munity Practice, Institutional Practice, Industrial 
Pharmacy, Nuclear Pharmacy, or Pre-Graduate 
Study. Six credits in Professional Pharmacy Elec- 
tives is the minimum requirement for graduation. 

The course clusters represent depth in a profes- 
sional area of choice. Independent Study in the 
School of Pharmacy is considered professional 
elective course work and may be used in any of the 
areas of concentration. Students may make their 
own selection of courses in consultation with their 
advisors. 

The following courses are approved for the re- 
spective areas of concentration: 

1. Community Practice 

481— Pharmacy Sales and Marketing 

482— Community Pharmacy Practice 
561— General Toxicology 

566— Clinical Toxicology 

2. Institutional Practice 

491— Hospital Pharmacy Management 

814— Parenteral Therapy 

815— Clinical Oncology 
819— Physical Assessment 
501 — Manufacturing Pharmacy 

539— Bionucleonics 

540— Advanced Bionucleonics and 
Radiopharmaceuticals 

561— General Toxicology 
566- Clinical Toxicology 

3. Industrial Pharmacy 

501— Manufacturing Pharmacy 

502— Pharmaceutical 
Formulation and 
Development 

504— Industrial Pharmacy and 

Governmental Affairs 
510— Advanced Pharmacokinetics I 
522- Spech-al Methods 
539— Bionucleonics 
Pharmacy students who select the Industrial 
Pharmacy area of concentration, may spend part 
of the required B.S. in Pharmacy practicum in an 
industrial setting. 

4. Nuclear Pharmacy 

539— Bionucleonics 

540— Advanced Bionucleonicsand 
Radiopharmaceuticals 

489- Problems in Health Physics 

(offered by Physics Department) 
Students who satisfactorily complete the nine- 
credit requirement of the Nuclear Pharmacy area 
of concentration, are awarded a certificate. Also, 
Pharmacy students who select the Nuclear Phar- 
macy area of concentration, may spend part of the 
required B.S. in Pharmacy practicum in a nuclear 
pharmacy and/or nuclear medicine setting. 



112 



3. Prc-Graduntc Study 

Students whei select this option must consult 
with the chairman of the department of their area 
of interest in order to select courses most adapt- 
able to the program they desire to pursue. A com- 
bined B.S. in Pharmacy/M.S. program is available 
to qualified students. 

MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 

The program, leading to the degree B.S. in Medi- 
cal Technology, is a joint effort between Duquesne 
University and Mercy Hospital, Pittsburgh, Pa. 
The program involves completion of 124 credits, 
Avith 30 of the credits being taken in the Mercy 
Hospital School of Medical Technology in the 
fourth year of the program. Graduates of the pro- 
gram are eligible for national certifying examina- 
tions. 

The School of Medical Technology at Mercy Hos- 
pital is approved by the National Accrediting 
Agency for Clinical Laboratory Sciences which 
acts as adviser to the Council on Medical Educa- 
tion of the American Medical Association. It is re- 
sponsible for establishing and maintaining high 
standards of education in A.M. A. -approved 
schools of medical technology. 

Students in the program enroll in the School of 
Pharmacy as medical technology majors. These 
students are advised through the Office of the 
Dean of the School of Pharmacy. 

Admission to the fourth year of the program will 
be on a competitive basis with these as the deter- 
mining factors: 

1. A minimum cumulative quality point average 
of 3.00 in the sciences is recommended. 

2. No student with a grade lower than C in any 
chemistry course will be considered for admission. 

3. Written recommendations. 

4. Personal interview with the Admissions Com- 
mittee of the Mercy Hospital School of Medical 
Technology. 

Applications for entrance to the fourth year are 
to be made before October 15 of the third year. In- 
formation and applications are available from the 
Office of the Dean of the School of Pharmacy. 

During the fourth year of the program, students 
will register and pay tuition to Duquesne Univer- 
sity. They will be permitted to reside in the Univer- 
sity dormitories and enjoy all of the privileges of 
Duquesne University students. 

Failure in any of the major courses included in 
the fourth year will lead to immediate dismissal 
from the Mercy Hospital School of Medical Tech- 
nology. 

Curriculum 

A minimum of 15 credits in the combined areas of 
humanities and social sciences is required for 
graduation (nine in the Humanities, including 
Theology, and six in the Social Sciences, including 



Principles of Management). Courses for fulfilling 
the Theology requirement are listed under the De- 
partment of Theology in the College of Liberal 
Arts and Sciences section of this catalog. 

The faculty recommends and reserves the right 
to require completion of course clusters in human- 
ities and social sciences. A list of the suggested 
course clusters appears at the end of this section. 

The student is cautioned to seek regular advice 
from the faculty and to keep a record of credits 
earned and the calculated averages. The School of 
Pharmacy assumes no responsibility for such er- 
rors appearing in student records which may pre- 
vent the student from being graduated. 



First Year 








Fall Sernester 


D* 


L* 


c* 


101 English Composition I 


3 


- 


3 


105 College Algebra and 








Trigonometry 


4 


- 


4 


111 General Biology I 


3 


4 


4 


121 General Chemistry I 


3 


4 


4 




13 


8 


15 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


102 English Composition 11 


3 


- 


3 


115 Calculus I 


4 


- 


4 


112 General Biology II 


3 


4 


4 


122 General Chemistry II 


3 


8 


5 




13 


12 


16 


Second Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


201 General Physics I 


4 


2 


4 


205 Organic Chemistry 1 


3 


4 


4 


Humanities Elective 


3 


- 


3 


Social Science Elective 


3 


- 


3 


Theology or Elective 


3 


- 


3 




16 


6 


17 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


306 Applied Electronics 


3 


2 


3 


206 Organic Chemistry II 


3 


4 


4 


319 Medical Microbiology - 








Immunology 


3 


3 


4 


220 Human Anatomy 








& Physiology I 


4 


- 


4 




13 


9 


15 


Third Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


317 Human Anatomy & 








Physiology II 


3 


3 


4 


309 Biochemistry-Nutrition 


3 


3 


4 


Humanities Elective 


3 


- 


3 


Electives 


6 


- 


6 




15 


6 


17 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


318 Pathophysiology 


3 


- 


3 


361 Principles of Management 


3 


- 


3 


421 Analytical Chemistry 


3 


8 


4 


202 General Physics II 


4 


2 


4 




13 


10 


14 



113 



D*- Didactic hours, L* — Laboratory hours, C* — Credit 
hours. 

Courses may be offered in semesters other than those in- 
dicated as the Pharmacy curriculum is revised. 

Fourth Year 

The fourth year of the program will begin in July 
and continue for twelve consecutive months. 
Courses and laboratory' assignments will be held 
at Mercy Hospital. The foUowing syllabus will be 
covered with 30 credits awarded for completion of 
the courses. 
Courses Credits 

61 Clinical Chemistry 7 

62 Urinalysis 2 

63 Hematology 5 

64 Blood Banking 3 

65 Bacteriology 5 

66 Parasitology 2 

67 Immunology 2 

69 Mycology 1 

70 Virology 1 

71 Nuclear Pathology 2 

Total 30 

All of the required course work, laboratories, sup- 
plies, facilities and faculty for the fourth year of the 
program will be provided by Mercy Hospital 
School of Medical Technology. The faculty of the 
School of Medical Technology is recognized as fac- 
ulty at Duquesne University. 

RADIOLOGICAL HEALTH 

Since 1972 the School of Pharmacy has offered a 
four-year 123-credit program leading to a Bachelor 
of Science in Radiological Health degree. Gradu- 
ates from the program qualify for positions of 
health physicist in any facilities using radioactive 
isotopes. 

Students in the radiological health program en- 
roll in the School of Pharmacy as radiological 
health majors. These students are advised 
through the Office of the Dean of the School of 
Pharmacy. 

Curriculum 

A minimum of 15 credits in the combined areas of 
humanities and social sciences is required for 
graduation (nine in the Humanities, including 
Theology, and six in the Social Sciences). Courses 
for fulfilling the Theology requirement are listed 
under the Department of Theology in the College 
of Liberal Arts and Sciences section of this catalog. 

The faculty recommends and reserves the right 
to require completion of course clusters in the hu- 
manities and social sciences. A list of the sug- 
gested course clusters appears at the end of this 
section. 

The student is cautioned to seek regular advice 
from the faculty and to keep a record of credits 
earned and the calculated averages. The School of 



Pharmacy assumes no responsibility for such er- 
rors appearing in student records which may pre- 
vent the student from being graduated. 



First Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


101 English Composition I 


3 


- 


3 


105 College Algebra and 








Trigonometry 


4 


- 


4 


111 General Biology I 


3 


4 


4 


121 General Chemistry 1 


3 


4 


4 




13 


8 


15 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


102 English Composition II 


3 


- 


3 


115 Calculus 1 


4 


- 


4 


112 General Biology 11 


3 


4 


4 


122 General Chemistry II 


3 


8 


5 




13 


12 


16 


Second Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


111 General Analytical 








Physics I 


3 


3 


4 


205 Organic Chemistry I 


3 


4 


4 


116 Calculus II 


4 


— 


4 


Theology or Elective 


3 


- 


3 




13 


7 


15 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


212 General Analytical 








Physics II 


3 


3 


4 


206 Organic Chemistry II 


3 


4 


4 


215 Calculus III 


4 


— 


4 


220 Human Anatomy and 








Physiology I 


4 


- 


4 




14 


7 


16 


Third Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


317 Human Anatomy and 








Physiology II 


3 


3 


4 


309 Biochemistry-Nutrition 


3 


3 


4 


225 Fundamentals of Statistics 


3 


- 


3 


539 Bionucleonics 


3 


3 


3 


Humanities Elective 


3 


- 


3 




15 


9 


17 


Spring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


306 Applied Electronics 


1 


2 


2 


101 Physical Geology 


3 


- 


3 


216 Ordinary Differential 








Equations 


3 


- 


3 


540 Advanced Bionucleonics 


3 


3 


3 


Social Science Elective 


3 


- 


3 




13 


5 


14 



114 



Fourth Year 








Fall Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


473 Atomic Physics 


3 


- 


3 


541 Radiological Health I 


4 


- 


4 


325 Applications in 








Statistics 


3 


- 


3 


Social Science Elective 


3 


- 


3 


Humanities Elective 


3 


- 


3 




16 


- 


16 


Spiring Semester 


D* 


L* 


C* 


483 Nuclear Physics 


3 


- 


3 


542 Radiological Health 11 


3 


4 


4 


204 Meterology 


3 


- 


3 


451 Practice in Radiological 








Health 


- 


16 


4 




9 


20 


14 



*D-Didactic hours, L*- Laboratory, C*-Credit hours. 
Courses may be offered in semesters other than those in- 
dicated as the Pharmacy curriculum is revised. 

ADMISSION 

Students who plan to enter any of the programs 
offered by the School of Pharmacy are encouraged 
to meet with the Dean, Assistant Dean, or the 
Dean's designate for a personal interview. En- 
trance requirements are listed under Admission 
Policies in the General Information section of this 
catalog. Applications should be submitted as early 
in the year of matriculation as possible. 

The national Pharmacy College Admissions Test 
(PCAT) may be taken by applicants. Results 
should be reported to the Admissions Office and 
to the School of Pharmacy. The test is not required 
for admission to the School, but the results are 
used by advisement personnel to assess the level 
of knowledge in pertinent areas related to the pro- 
gram. Superior performance in certain topics will 
alert the student to enroll for advanced placement 
examinations. 

The School of Pharmacy admits students into 
each of the first three years of the medical technol- 
ogy and radiological health programs and into the 
first, second, or third year of the pharmacy pro- 
gram. Procedures for entrance are outlined under 
Application Procedures in the General Informa- 
tion section of this catalog. 

All transfer students must be interviewed by the 
Dean, Assistant Dean, or Dean's designate in the 
School of Pharmacy. Students intending to trans- 
fer into the pharmacy program must have success- 
fully completed the appropriate math, science and 
liberal arts prerequisites for entrance into the sec- 
ond or third year of the curriculum. Advisors at 
the School of Pharmacy are available to meet with 
students to discuss the requirements necessary for 
possible future placement in the School of Phar- 
macy. 

Transfer pharmacy students must complete a 
minimum of three academic years of residence in 
the School of Pharmacy. 



In extenuating circumstances and with the per- 
mission of the School of Pharmacy Student Stand- 
ing Committee, a waiver of the three years of 
residence required by the American Association of 
Colleges of Pharmacy will be sought by the faculty 
on behalf of the student. Failure to request and ob- 
tain such a waiver requires the pharmacy students 
to complete a minimum of six semesters in resi- 
dence as full-time students. 

Advanced credit for courses completed at other 
institutions may be allowed for those courses 
which appear in the Duquesne curricula. No credit 
is allowed in any subject in which a grade lower 
than C was earned or for a course not equivalent to 
one among the University curricula. Once enrolled 
at Duquesne, students may not pursue courses at 
other institutions for transfer credit without spe- 
cific permission from the Office of the Dean. 

Advanced standing is conditional until the stu- 
dent completes a minimum of one semester's work 
(16 semester hours). If his work proves unsatisfac- 
tory, the student will be requested to withdraw. 

Applicants who have completed advanced 
courses in high school are encouraged to take ad- 
vanced placement tests (see Admission section of 
this catalog). Partial advanced placement credit for 
some courses may be awarded for these examina- 
tions. Students are advised to investigate carefully 
the credit equivalency. 

SCHOLARS PROGRAM 

Any student designated as an Admissions Scholar 
upon entrance to the University and to the School 
of Pharmacy or who has obtained a cumulative av- 
erage of 3.50, is named to the School of Pharmacy 
Scholars Program. Students enrolled in any major 
offered by the School are eligible. Selection is 
made annually on the basis of academic standing. 
No application is required. Scholars are recog- 
nized annually at the fall social gathering and en- 
couraged to investigate Advanced Placement, 
CLEP, and Challenge Examination opportunities, 
faculty research projects in which they may partici- 
pate, and independent study courses. 

SPECIAL FEES 



Laboratory 

Required laboratory courses scheduled by all 
schools of the University are subject to fees as pub- 
lished. Pharmacy laboratories require a fee of $40 
each a semester. This is a prorated charge derived 
from the total costs of all laboratory operations 
throughout the professional years. Other courses 
offered in the program of medical technology and 
radiological health are subject to special fees. No 
laboratory fees are assessed for courses scheduled 
in the fourth year of the medical technology pro- 
gram. 



115 



Activities 

Instituted by student request, this fee of $30 a se- 
mester for a minimum of six semesters covers such 
miscellaneous items as local and national Student 
American Pharmaceutical Association dues and 
journal subscription; laboratory jacket, towels and 
name pin fees; class dues and support of the phar- 
macy student newsletter, Phorian; and partial tra- 
vel expenses for one required field trip to a 
pharmaceutical manufacturing firm. Payment is 
made at registration each semester. This prorated 
fee is assessed only to those students in the last 
three years of the pharmacy program. 

School of Pharmacy Fee 

All students enrolled in any program of the School 
of Pharmacy are required to pay a fee designated 
by the University. This fee, which is assessed for 
each semester that a student is enrolled in the 
School of Pharmacy, assists with the special oper- 
ating expenses of the School of Pharmacy. 

REGULATIONS 

Students in the School of Pharmacy are preparing 
themselves for entry into a respected health pro- 
fession where the highest degree of character and 
sense of responsibility are basic requirements. As 
such, they are expected to conduct themselves, at 
all times, in a manner befitting this position and 
according honor to it. For these reasons, the 
School of Pharmacy insists on strict adherence to 
the following regulations. 

1. Class Attendance. Regular class attendance in 
the School of Pharmacy is normally required for 
maximum educational advantage. The responsi- 
bility for all course material rests wholly with the 
student. Under no circumstances will class attend- 
ance be used as the sole basis for altering a grade 
in a course. This principle shall not modify the 
prerogative of each instructor to establish specific 
policies for attendance at tests, examinations, class 
lectures, deadlines for reports, and other specific 
school or course requirements. 

A student who is unable to attend class because 
of serious illness, hospitalization, a serious acci- 
dent or other extenuating circumstances is respon- 
sible for notifying the Office of the Dean of the 
School of Pharmacy. The student should supply a 
written verification as soon as possible. A student 
who is absent for cause is expected to complete all 
of the work in all courses. It is the student's re- 
sponsibility to make up all assignments in all 
courses and to be familiar with any instructions 
which may have been given during the absence. 

Handicapped students requiring special assist- 
ance are urged to notify the class instructor before 
or at the first class. 

2. Academic Standards. All students who are ad- 
mitted to the School of Pharmacy must maintain a 
2.0 QPA (quality point average) in the required 
courses in the professional pharmacy curriculum. 



throughout the program. Students who do not 
achieve a 2.0 QPA by the end of the first profes- 
sional year may be admitted to the second year on 
a probationary basis. No student will be admitted 
to the third, fourth, or fifth years of the program 
with less than a 2.0 QPA in all courses and in pro- 
fessional courses. A minimum cumulative 2.00 
QPA in the pre-pharmacy science and math 
courses is required for entrance into the third year 
of the pharmacy program. A student will not be 
admitted to the fifth year of the Pharmacy program 
without successful completion of all required 
courses in Pharmacy I, II, III, IV. 

3. Required Programs. Pharmacy students in the 
fourth year of the curriculum are required to par- 
ticipate in one industrial visit arranged by the 
School. 

The faculty of the School of Pharmacy may re- 
quire Pharmacy student attendance at other semi- 
nars and special programs. 

4. Health Requirements. Any School of Pharmacy 
student entering studies in a hospital or other in- 
stitutional setting may be required to conform to 
the health requirements of that institution. 

STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS 

The Student American Pharmaceutical Association 
whose membership includes all pharmacy stu- 
dents registered in the last three years of the 
School of Pharmacy aims to promote their inter- 
ests, academic, social and professional. Under its 
auspices, many worthwhile events are arranged 
during the school year. The executive committee 
meets regularly with the Dean and the faculty 
moderator to act as liaison between students and 
faculty. The annual membership fee includes one 
year's student membership in the American Phar- 
maceutical Association and a year's subscription to 
its Journal. Interested pharmacy students enrolled 
in their first and second years at the University are 
also eligible for membership and are encouraged 
to become actively involved in SAPhA. 

The Alpha Beta Chapter of Rho Chi, national phar- 
macy honor society at Duquesne University, was 
organized to promote the advancement of the 
pharmaceutical sciences. Pharmacy students who 
have completed three and one-half years of work 
at the University level and have achieved a B aver- 
age are eligible for membership. A maximum of 20 
percent of the class enrollment may be admitted to 
membership. Faculty, graduate students in the 
pharmaceutical sciences, and Doctor of Pharmacy 
students may also be invited to join. 

Eta Chapter of Phi Lambda Sigma, a national pro- 
fessional pharmaceutical society, was chartered at 
Duquesne University in 1980. The society recog- 
nizes and encourages leadership in the profession 
of pharmacy. The society selects members who 
have completed at least two and one half years in 
the pharmacy program and have demonstrated ex- 
emplary leadership qualities. 



116 



Tan Chapter of Lambda Kappa Sigtua, an interna- 
tional pharmaceutical fraternity tor women, was 
established at Duquesne University in 1932. The 
organization numbers among its members some of 
the most outstanding women in pharmacy. Its 
purposes are to promote the profession of phar- 
macy and to create a center of culture and enjoy- 
ment for its members. 

The Beta Gamma Chapter of Phi Delta Chi, an inter- 
national pharmaceutical fraternity, was chartered 
at Duquesne University in 1960. The fraternity en- 
deavors to integrate academic, spiritual and social 
activities and thereby foster the highest profes- 
sional and personal ideals among its members. 
Membership is open to students in pharmacy. 

The Delta Epsilon ChapHer of Kappa Psi Pharmaceuti- 
cal Fraterniti/ was chartered in 1967. This interna- 
tional fraternity strives to develop industry, 
sobriety, and fellowship and to foster high ideals, 
scholarship, and pharmaceutical research while 
supporting all projects advancing the profession of 
pharmacy. Membership is open to students in 
pharmacy. 

Class Organization. Each of the five classes is an 
officially recognized organization in the School of 
Pharmacy. Each class elects its own officers and 
conducts such programs and affairs as its mem- 
bers deem desirable toward achieving its goals. All 
students are included in these organizations re- 
gardless of degree curriculum. 

HONOR AWARDS 

American Institute of the History of Pharmacy 
Award. A recognition certificate and gift publica- 
tions are awarded annually by the American Insti- 
tute of History of Pharmacy for superior 
achievement in pharmacohistorical study or activ- 
ity. 

McKesson American Pharmaceutical Association 
Award. A plaque provided by the McKesson Com- 
pany is presented annually to the graduate who 
has made the most significant contribution to the 
Student American Pharmaceutical Association at 
Duquesne University. 

Mary McPartland Beck Award. An award of $25 is 
presented annually to the graduate who has 
shown outstanding ability and interest in the clini- 
cal practice of pharmacy. 

Bristol Award. An award is presented annually by 
the Bristol Laboratories, Inc., Syracuse, NY, to a 
Doctor of Pharmacy candidate for excellence in 
scholastic achievement. 

Bristol Award. A plaque and a standard reference 
book is awarded annually by the Bristol Laborato- 
ries, Inc., Syracuse, NY, to the graduate who has 
in the opinion of the faculty attained unusual dis- 
tinction in the work of pharmaceutical administra- 
tion. 

Sara A. Corey Award. An award presented annu- 
ally to a graduating Pharmacy student who has 



demonstrated considerable involvement in com- 
munity professional programs. 

Faculty Award. The faculty of the School of Phar- 
macy may present an appropriate award to an out- 
standing member of the graduating class who has 
displayed exceptional qualities of academic excel- 
lence and a QPA of over 3.75. 

Maurice H. Finkelpearl Award. An award of $50 is 
presented annually to a student who intends to 
practice Community Pharmacy. 

Galen Society Award. The Galen Society of Pitts- 
burgh annually offers two $25 awards to the two 
members of the graduating class who have 
achieved the highest standing in the departments 
of pharmacology and pharmaceutical chemistry. 

Samuel W. Curtis Award. Annually an award of 
$50 is presented to the graduate who has shown 
outstanding ability and interests in the field of 
pharmaceutics. 

McNeil Dean's Award. A replica of an Early Amer- 
ican Mortar and Pestle is awarded annually to an 
outstanding student of Pharmacy Administration. 

Lilly Achievement Award. A gold medal is pre- 
sented annually to a member of the graduating 
class who has demonstrated superior scholastic 
and professional achievement as well as qualities 
of leadership. 

Merck Sharp and Dohme Award. Each year Merck 
and Company, Rahway, New Jersey, offers a set of 
valuable reference books to members of the gradu- 
ating class who attain the highest averages in me- 
dicinal chemistry. 

Rho Chi Award. Alpha Chapter of Rho Chi 
awards annually a suitably key to the student who 
earns the highest general average in all subjects 
during the first two years of the pharmacy pro- 
gram. It is presented at a meeting of the Student 
Chapter of the American Pharmaceutical Associa- 
tion. 

Roche Pharmacy Communications Award. A per- 
sonalized plaque is awarded annually to the grad- 
uating student who has shown exceptional ability 
in patient communication through course work 
and application. 

Smith Kline & French Laboratories Award. A per- 
sonalized plaque is presented annually by the 
Smith Kline & French Laboratories, Philadelphia, 
Pennsylvania, for superior achievement in Clinical 
Pharmacy by a graduating student. 

Student American Pharmaceutical Association 
Award. Annually a certificate of recognition is pre- 
sented to the graduating student who has demon- 
strated through service, reporting and activity, an 
avid interest in organization work. 

Syntex Preceptor of the Year Award. An appropri- 
ately designed plaque is awarded annually by the 
Syntex Laboratories, Inc., of Palo Alto, California 
to the preceptor who, in the opinion of the Phar- 
macy Interns, best exemplifies professionalism, 
ethics, and clinical practice. 



117 



Upjohn Award. A suitably inscribed plaque and 
$100 are awarded annually by the Upjohn Com- 
pany, Kalamazoo, Michigan, in recognition of out- 
standing public service by a graduating student. 

Western Pennsylvania Society of Hospital Pharma- 
cists Award. Annually an award of $50 is presented 
to the graduating senior who demonstrates out- 
standing ability and interest in the area of Hospital 
Pharmacy. 

Lemmon Company Award. A certificate and award 
of $150 to the graduating senior who has com- 
pleted the degree program through unusual and 
extraordinary perseverance and determination in 
the opinion of the graduating class. 

Pennsylvania Pharmaceutical Association Award. A 
certificate of recognition and one-year member- 
ship in the PPA awarded annually to the graduate 
who has been most actively involved in pharmacy 
organizations. 

/. Cornetti Tucci Award. An award is presented to 
the graduating student who has demonstrated ex- 
cellence in pharmaceutics. 

Sandoz Doctor of Pharmacy Award. A commemora- 
tive plaque and $100 which is provided by Sandoz, 
Inc., East Hanover, NJ, is awarded annually to an 
outstanding Doctor of Pharmacy graduate. 

Fisher Scientific Award for Outstanding Medical 
Technology Student. A personalized plaque is pre- 
sented annually to the graduate Medical Technol- 
ogy student who achieved the highest standing 
during the four-year program of study. 

GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 

A committee of the faculty will review the record of 
each candidate for graduation to ascertain full 
compliance with specific School of Pharmacy cur- 
ricula requirements and the general University 
Graduation Requirements, as stated in the Aca- 
demic Policies section of this catalog. This commit- 
tee will then recommend candidates for faculty 
certification for graduation or for remedial work to 
be fulfilled during the last semester of residence. 
Communications pertaining to this certification 
may be entered in the Office of the Dean. 

STATE LICENSING PENNSYLVANIA 

A candidate for licensure as a Registered Pharma- 
cist in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania must 
meet the following requirements before he/she 
may be admitted to the licensing examinations 
which are conducted by the Pennsylvania State 
Board of Pharmacy: 

1. Character -be of good moral character. 

2. Professional Training - have a degree in Phar- 
macy granted by a School or College of Pharmacy, 
which is accredited by the American Council on 
Pharmaceutical Education. 

3. Practical Experience and Internship — any per- 
son enrolled as a student of pharmacy in an ac- 
credited college may at the end of the second year 



of college file with the Pennsylvania State Board of 
Pharmacy an application for registration as a phar- 
macy intern. 

To insure proficiency in the practical aspects of 
pharmacy, the State Board shall by regulation pre- 
scribe internship requirements which must be sat- 
isfactorily completed prior to sitting for the 
licensure exam and to issuance of a Pharmacist's 
License. 

Specific information concerning practical experi- 
ence requirements as well as all other require- 
ments concerning licensure may be obtained from 
the State Board of Pharmacy, Department of State, 
Box 2649, Transportation and Safety Bldg., 6th 
Floor, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania 17120. 

STATES OTHER THAN PENNSYLVANIA 

According to law, the licensing of an applicant 
seeking to become registered as a pharmacist is 
under the sole jurisdiction of the state in which he 
seeks to practice. Although the requirements for 
licensure in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania 
are similar to those of other states, differences may 
exist. Space limitations preclude a complete listing 
of the requirements of other states and the District 
of Columbia. The candidate for licensure in an- 
other state is advised to consult the Board of Phar- 
macy in that particular state for complete and 
current information. 

CAREER GUIDANCE CENTER 

A Guidance Center has been established within 
the School of Pharmacy to keep students informed 
about the latest career opportunities available to 
those possessing a pharmacy education and to at- 
tract high school and college students to the pro- 
fession. 

The Center consists of faculty members. School 
of Pharmacy alumni, and pharmacy practitioners. 
It provides upon request speakers for career day 
programs and information to high school coun- 
selors on all matters relating to a pharmacy educa- 
tion and career. 

Pamphlets containing career information on 
pharmacy are also available through the Guidance 
Center. Inquiries should be directed to the Phar- 
macy Career Guidance Center, School of Phar- 
macy, Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, 
Pennsylvania 15282. 

RESEARCH FOUNDATION 

The Hugh C. Muldoon and Pharmacy Alumni 
Foundation of Duquesne University, established in 
1950 to celebrate the twenty-fifth anniversary of 
the founding of the School of Pharmacy, is an in- 
creasingly valuable aid in helping to achieve the 
aims of the University and of the School of Phar- 
macy. The foundation provides funds for improv- 
ing the instructional and research facilities of the 
School; it assists in the advancement of pharmacy 
by providing scholarship assistance to Pharmacy 
students and by supporting the training of under- 



118 



graduate and graduate students in industrial and 
research procedures; it helps to extend the knowl- 
edge from research being conducted under the 
auspices of the School. Contributions are solicited 
from graduates and others interested in the work 
of the Foundation. They may be addressed in care 
of the School of Pharmacy. 

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 

The courses of instruction are numbered in accord- 
ance with a plan uniform throughout the Univer- 
sity. 

University courses numbered 100 are Freshman 
courses; 200 Sophomore; 300 Junior; 400 Senior. 
Courses described in this section are required 
courses in the professional curriculum and those 
courses offered by the School of Pharmacy faculty 
as a Universitv ser\'ice. Courses numbered 500 are 
graduate level courses in which qualified under- 
graduate students may be enrolled with the per- 
mission of the instructor of the course. Credit for 
these courses cannot be used to satisfy require- 
ments for a second degree. Most courses in the 800 
series are generally restricted to Doctor of Phar- 
macv candidates. 



DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACEUTICAL 
CHEMISTRY AND PHARMACEUTICS 

Chairman: Lawrence H. Block, Ph.D. 

101. Pharmacy Orientation. 1 cr. 

Introduction to the profession of pharmacy. Dis- 
cussion of various aspects of pharmacy education 
and professional practice. Pharmaceutical organi- 
zations are discussed and evaluated. The pharma- 
ceutical literature is reviewed and a brief history of 
pharmacy is presented. Lecture, one hour. 

301. Basic Pharmaceutics — 

Pharmacy Math I. 4 cr. 

A study of the basic physiochemical principles ap- 
plicable to an understanding of drugs and the 
pharmaceutical systems in which they are con- 
tained. Subject areas include: solubility and solu- 
tions; pH; diffusion; osmocity; drug stability, 
packaging, storage and administration; physioco- 
chemical evaluation of pharmaceutical products; 
the clinical applications of pharmaceutics. Mathe- 
matical methodologies (algebraic and graphical) 
relevant to modern pharmaceutical practice are in- 
tegrated into both the didactic and laboratory pro- 
tions of the course. Laboratory emphasis is on 
practical and clinical application. Prerequisites: 
Calculus 115. General Physics (one semester). Or- 
ganic Chemistry 1, II. Lecture, three hours; Recita- 
tion, conference, and laboratory, four hours. 

302. Basic Pharmaceutics II. 4 cr. 

A continuation of Pharmaceutics I. Prerequisite: 
Pharmaceutics I. Lecture, three hours; Recitation, 
conference, and laboratory, four hours. 



305. Pharmaceutics-Biopharmaceutics III. 3 cr. 

A study of the physio-chemical, biological, and 
pharmaceutical factors which affect absorption, 
distribution, metabolism, and excretion of drugs 
in man. Emphasis is placed on the utilization of 
biopharmaceutical and pharmacokinetic knowl- 
edge in problems of bioavailability and bioequiva- 
lence of drug products and in the determination of 
appropriate drug dosage regimens. Prerequisite: 
Basic Pharmaceutics I, II. Lecture, three hours. 

306. Pharmaceutics-Pharmacokinetics IV. 4 cr. 

A continuation of Pharmaceutics III with emphasis 
on pharmacokinetics and on drug delivery sys- 
tems. Prerequisite: Pharmaceutics III. Lecture, 
three hours; Laboratory, four hours. 

309. Biochemistry— Nutrition 4 cr. 

A course designed to integrate basic biochemistry 
with the application to selected clinical cases. Em- 
phasis is placed on metabolism of carbohydrates, 
lipids and proteins as the source of energy derived 
from foods; certain aspects of nutrition are dis- 
cussed. The function of enzymes, vitamins and 
hormones is presented in relation to their role in 
metabolism. Clinical applications, including labo- 
ratory tests encountered on patients' charts, par- 
enteral nutrition, and pertinent clinical cases 
which illustrate the interrelationship of biochemis- 
try with physiology, are discussed. Prerequisite: 
Organic Chemistry I, II. Lecture, three hours; Lab- 
oratory, three hours. 

310. Analysis of Drug Substances. 4 cr. 

A survey course covering the basic principles of 
analytical chemistry, statistics as applied to mea- 
surement, the analytical process, problem solving 
and data interpretation. Examples used come from 
pharmaceutical manufacturing, clinical and bio- 
chemical analysis, pharmacokinetics, pharmacol- 
ogy and drug therapeutics. Prerequisites: General 
Chemistry, Organic Chemistry, and Biochemistry. 
Lecture, four hours. 

313. Medicinal Chemistry- 
Natural Products I. 4 cr. 

Relationship between chemical structure and the 
biological action of natural and ;synthetic drug 
molecules. Emphasis is on underlying principles 
as well as on specific therapeutic agents. Organi- 
zation is by pharmacological classification, with 
chemical properties relating to mechanism of 
action, drug disposition (absorption, distribution, 
metabolism, and excretion) and chemical incom- 
patibilities considered for each class. Prerequi- 
sites: Organic Chemistry I, II and Biochemistry. 
Lecture, four hours. 

314. Medical Chemistry- 
Natural Products II. 4 cr. 

A continuation of Medicinal Chemistry I. Lecture, 
four hours. 

499. Independent Study 

and Research. 1-2 cr./sem. 

To stimulate interest in furthering a student's edu- 
cation, the School of Pharmacy uses this course as 



119 



a vehicle to provide the means whereby those who 
wish to be involved in a programmed self-study 
educational experience may do so. To accomplish 
this aim, the student in cooperation with a specific 
instructor chosen by the student, will develop a 
course of study that will realistically be able to fill 
the learning objectives stated by the student. The 
student and instructor will meet at stipulated reg- 
ular time intervals for guidance and evaluation of 
progress being made by the student. Contact 
School of Pharmacy office for restrictions on total 
credits allowed and on eligibility for registration. 



DEPARTMENT OF 
PHARMACOLOGY-TOXICOLOGY 

Chairman: Gene A. Riley, Ph.D. 

2. Drug Abuse. 1 cr. 

A course designed to present the pharmacological 
and toxicological properties of substances of 
abuse. The major classes of drugs are described 
with direct reference to toxic and adverse effects. 
The myths and misconceptions commonly attrib- 
uted to some substances of abuse are clarified. The 
philosophy of the course is to present an objective 
picture of the "drug abuse era" in this country. The 
course is intended for all students beginning their 
collegiate studies. Admission to this course for 
students who have completed Pharmacology- 
Drug Mechanisms I or its equivalent is by approval 
of the instructor. Lecture, one hour. 

3. Basic Pharmacology. 3 cr. 

A course dealing with the major classes of thera- 
peutic agents, designed for students with a limited 
background in biological sciences. Drugs are con- 
sidered from a "disease state" point of view and 
include basic mechanisms of action. Important 
drug interactions as they relate to patient care are 
included. Not open to Pharmacy Students. Pre- 
requisites: Six credits of biological science, includ- 
ing physiology. Lecture, three hours. 

4. Social Diseases. 1 cr. 

Causes, course of diseases, prevention, treatment 
and social effects of venereal diseases. Awareness 
and common sense should be awakened in stu- 
dents by the course. Open to students who have 
completed Pharmacology-Drug Mechanisms I 
only with the permission of the instructor. Lec- 
ture, one hour. 

130. History of Pharmacy. 2 cr. 

A survey of the origins of science, medicine, and 
pharmacy from the earliest recorded events to the 
present with emphasis on nineteenth and twenti- 
eth century pharmacy in the United States. Lec- 
ture, two hours. 

220. Human Anatomy and Physiology I. 4 cr. 

A lecture course dealing with the structure and 
function of the various cells, tissues and organ sys- 
tems of the body. Emphasis is on the complexities 



of regulation and integration of function of these 
organ systems. Prerequisites: General Biology I, 
II. Lecture, four hours. 

317. Human Anatomy and Physiology II. 4 cr, 

A continuation of the Human Anatomy and Physi- 
ology I lecture series, with laboratory. The labora- 
tory portion of the course deals with gross 
anatomy, a histological study of tissues, and the 
clinical appraisal of physiological functions. Lec- 
ture, three hours; Laboratory, three hours. 

318. Pathophysiology. 3 cr. 

A lecture presentation of the cellular, organ and 
systemic changes associated with the human dis- 
ease process. Also discussed are the physiological 
responses of the body's organ systems to the dis- 
ease process and the contibution these responses 
make to the production of signs and symptoms 
that are normally associated with each disease 
state. Prerequisites: Human Anatomy and Physi- 
ology I, II. Lecture, three hours. 

319. Medical Microbiology— 

Immunology. 4 cr. 

Covers the general characteristics and morphology 
of bacteria, the important staining techniques, 
methods of growing bacteria on artificial media, 
testing the effects of chemotherapeutic agents on 
pathogenic bacteria, and immunology. It includes 
discussions of the important bacterial, rickettsial, 
bedsonial, viral, and protozoal diseases along with 
worm infestations, their causes, symptoms, and 
treatment. Lecture, three hours; Laboratory, three 
hours. 

321. Pharmacology-Drug Mechanisms I. 4 cr. 

A course in the mechanisms and pharmacody- 
namic actions of drugs. Side effects, toxicity, drug 
interactions and the rational for therapeutic use in 
relation to drug mechanism and actions are 
stressed. Prerequisites: Human Anatomy and 
Physiology I, II and Pathophysiology. Lecture, 
four hours. 

322. Pharmacology-Drug Mechanisms II. 4 cr. 

A continuation of Pharmacology-Drug Mecha- 
nisms I. Lecture, four hours. 

323. OTC Drugs. 2 cr. 

A course designed to familiarize students with the 
pharmacological and toxicological properties of 
over-the-counter drugs. The course will prepare 
the student to counsel the public on the appropri- 
ate use of OTC drugs, to select the proper non- 
prescription drug for a particular disease state, 
and to determine if treatment with a non- 
prescription drug is appropriate. Prerequisites: 
Pharmacology-Drug Mechanisms I, II. Lecture, 
two hours. 

324. Public Health-Emergency Treatment. 3 cr. 

A discussion of public health measures such as im- 
munization, water purification, sewage disposal, 
disinfection of individuals and objects, control of 
rodents and insects, and the relationship of these 
to the spread of disease. Health statistics, disaster 



120 



preparedness, and the health effects of environ- 
mental pollutants are also discussed. In the first 
aid portion, the course teaches how to render first 
aid in cases of emergency, while awaiting the ar- 
rival of a phvsician. Special emphasis is placed on 
emergencies which the pharmacist is most likely 
to experience: epileptic seizures, heart attacks, 
fainting, diabetic coma, and others. Lecture, three 
hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACEUTICAL 
ADMINISTRATION 

Chairman: Anthony J. Amadio, M.B.A. 

230. Pharmacy Law. 3 cr. 

A course designed to acquaint the student with 
the philosophy of law and its relationship to phar- 
macy. Federal, state, and local laws and regula- 
tions pertinent to the handling and sale of drugs, 
cosmetics, narcotics, poisons, and alcohol are dis- 
cussed. A review of antitrust laws, trade regula- 
tions, and court decisions of importance to the 
pharmacist is included. Elements of business law 
and civil responsibilities of the pharmacist are also 
covered. Lecture, three hours. 

262. International Health Issues. 3 cr. 

The course will explore factors that influence 
health care in diverse countries. Topics covered in- 
clude: a comparison of health services; the use of 
regional planning by groups of small countries; 
prevention and control of specific diseases with 
special emphasis on communicable diseases; pri- 
mary health care; the role of international agencies 
from the perspective of developed and developing 
countries; the constitutional, administrative and 
financial influences on health care; health priori- 
ties in the context of general needs. Lecture, three 
hours. 

325. Pharmacy Management. 4 cr. 

A course designed to familiarize students with the 
fundamentals of personnel, inventory, and finan- 
cial management decisions with the overall objec- 
tive of improving pharmacy practice efficiency. 
Lecture, four hours. 

326. Pharmacy Administration. 3 cr. 

A course designed to familiarize the student with 
the diverse social, political, economic, and legal 
forces affecting the practice of pharmacy. The 
course considers the persons, places, and activi- 
ties involved in providing health care services with 
special emphasis on the role of the community 
pharmacist. Lecture, three hours. 

430. Patient Counseling and Education. 3 cr. 

A course designed to examine current counseling 
and communication techniques in terms of how 
they relate to patient education regarding personal 
health problems and compliance with medication 
regimens. The course will examine in detail basic 
interviewing techniques. Lecture, two hours; Lab- 
oratory, one hour. 



431. Behavioral Aspects of Illness. 2 cr. 

A course designed to examine the current theory 
and research in the psycho-social correlates and 
consequences of illness and health. Topics will in- 
clude the general areas of social stress research, 
theories of psycho-somatic medicine, the impact 
of social environment upon health, and the impact 
of illness upon the emotional and social function- 
ing of the person. Prerequisite: Introductory 
course in sociology and/or psychology is highly 
recommended. Lecture, two hours. 

432. Practical Pharmacy II — Community. 3 cr. 

Required of all final-year Pharmacy students and 
involving placement in an operating community 
pharmacy with a pharmacist-preceptor. Off- 
campus placement is necessary. Note: Calendar 
change for fifth-year Pharmacy students may be 
required. 

433. Practical Pharmacy III -Hospital. 3 cr. 

Required of all final-year Pharmacy students and 
involving placement in an operating hospital phar- 
macy with a pharmacist-preceptor. Off-campus 
placement is necessary. Note: Calendar change for 
fifth-year Pharmacy students may be required. 

434. Practical Pharmacy IV— Optional. 3 cr. 

Required of all final-year Pharmacy students and 
involving placement in an operating pharmacy or 
related practice setting with a pharmacist- 
preceptor. Off-campus placement is necessary. 
Note: Calendar change for fifth-year Pharmacy 
students may be required. 

481. Pharmacy Sales and Marketing. 2 cr. 

An introduction to the pharmaceutical manufac- 
turer's role in marketing drug products. The con- 
cepts, elements, and functions involved in the 
distributive chain between the manufacturer of the 
drug and the ultimate user are considered. Lec- 
ture, two hours; Practicum, one hour. 

482. Community Pharmacy Practice. 3 cr. 

The course considers the operational aspects of a 
community pharmacy with emphasis on the busi- 
ness or commercial, matters pertinent to a success- 
ful operation. Lecture, three hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF CLINICAL 
PHARMACY 

Chairman: Thomas J. Mattei, Pharm. D. 

333. Drug Literatua^e Resources. 1 cr. 

This course is intended to acquaint the student 
with various drug information resources and how 
to appropriately utilize these references in re- 
sponding to information requests. The course will 
review the primary and secondary literature, in- 
dexing and abstracting systems, the systematic 
search process, principles of literature evaluation, J 
and the approach for answering common drug in- 1 
formation questions. Lecture, one hour; Labora- 
tory, one hour. 



121 



440. Therapeutics. 6 cr. 

A course designed to provide the student with the 
information necessary to demonstrate competency 
related to the therapeutic principles of selected 
disease states. Prerequisites: Pharmacology-Drug 
Mechanisms I, II and Medicinal Chemistry- 
Naturals Products I, II. Lecture, six hours. 

441. Practical Pharmacy I — 

Clinical Clerkship. 3 cr. 

An educational process designed to provide the 
student with clinical experiences necessary to 
demonstrate competency in the areas of providing 
patient education, ascertaining drug histories, 
participating in the selection and monitoring of 
therapeutic modalities, and other pharmacist- 
related functions. The fifth-year Pharmacy student 
will be assigned to a member of the clinical faculty 
and a given practice site. Note: Calendar change 
for fifth-year Pharmacy students may be required. 
Prerequisite: Therapeutics. 

491. Hospital Pharmacy Management. 3 cr. 

A course designed to introduce the student to hos- 
pital pharmacy resource management and to serv- 
ices frequently associated with hospital pharmacy. 
Lecture, three hours. 

801. Hospital Pharmacy 

Administration. 3 cr. 

The students are drawn into active discussions in- 
volving the administration of modern hospital 
pharmacy services. Literature, report assign- 
ments, and case studies complement the lecture 
and discussion material. Restricted to Pharm.D. 
students. Lecture, three hours. 

804. Drug Literature Evaluation. 2 cr. 

The course will provide an overview of various is- 
sues of study design and the use of descriptive and 
inferential statistics. Lectures include a discussion 
of the structure of experimental designs, random- 
ization, control groups and the role of statistics in 
experimental design. Principles will be applied by 
evaluating selected articles from the primary litera- 
ture. The student will be expected to evaluate the 
appropriateness of study design, statistical tests 
and the extrapolation of results to clinical practice. 
Lecture, two hours. 

806. Drug Information Resources. 2 cr. 

This course is structured to familiarize the student 
with the various primary and secondary literature 
sources of pharmacology and medicine. The stu- 
dent is prepared to utilize the indexing, abstract- 
ing and select on-line computer systems 
associated with clinical practice. Each student par- 
ticipates in the activities of the Drug Information 
Center to allow for practical application of material 
presented in the classroom. Lecture, two hours. 
811. Drug Induced Diseases. 2 cr. 

The adverse effects of drug administration on vari- 
ous body systems are reviewed. Emphasis is 
placed on methods for their proper recognition, 
monitoring, evaluation and management. Discus- 
sion is directed toward the mechanism, incidence 



and clinical presentation of these consequences of 
drug therapy. Lecture, two hours. 

812. Clinical Pharmacokinetics. 2 cr. 

The course is designed to discuss the major pa- 
rameters affecting the clinical pharmacokinetics of 
specific drug entities. Lecture material will be ap- 
plied in the design of patient-specific dosage regi- 
mens for actual patient cases. Computerized 
applications in clinical pharmacokinetics are an in- 
tegral component of the case studies. Lecture- 
laboratory, two hours. 

814. Parenteral Therapy. 3 cr. 

A lecture/laboratory course designed to present 
the principles of sterilization, aseptic processing 
and membrane filtration in the preparation of par- 
enteral products and intravenous admixtures in 
pharmacy practice. Emphasis on the principles of 
fluid and electrolyte therapy, acid-base balance 
and total parenteral nutrition is included in lec- 
ture. Lecture, three hours; Pre-laboratory and 
laboratory /demonstration . 

815. Clinical Oncology. 2 cr. 

The course will provide insight into the patho- 
physiology, diagnosis, and treatment of cancer. 
The pharmacist's role in the total management of 
the cancer patient is emphasized. Principles for 
clinical monitoring, palliative and symptomatic 
management, management of complications from 
cancer and its treatment, nutritional support, con- 
siderations for handling of antineoplastics, clinical 
considerations for use of antineoplastics and the 
multi-disciplinary approach to cancer will be dis- 
cussed. Selected cancers such as breast, leukemia 
and Hodgkin's disease will be covered. The objec- 
tives of the course will be fulfilled through lec- 
tures, readings, class discussions and patient 
followups. Lecture, two hours. 

817. Advanced Therapeutics I. 5 cr. 

The course is designed to introduce the student to 
the therapeutic principles of selected disease 
states. Includes lecture, prospective and retrospec- 
tive review of case histories and rounding with 
clinical faculty on patient assignments. Restricted 
to Pharm.D. students. Lecture, five hours. 

818. Advanced Therapeutics II. 5 cr. 

A continuation of Advanced Therapeutics I. Re- 
stricted to Pharm.D. students. Lecture, five hours. 

819. Physical Assessment. 2 cr. 

The course is designed to present the assessment 
techniques and basic knowledge of physical as- 
sessment utilized in monitoring the therapeutic ef- 
fects of drugs. The Bates Physical Exam 
Videotapes are incorporated into the course. 
Lecture-discussion, two hours. 

899. Research- Pharm.D. 2 cr. 

A report of experimental, administrative or behav- 
ioral investigational procedures and outcome car- 
ried on by the student under faculty advisement. 
Independent research. Restricted to Pharm.D. stu- 
dents. 



691, 692. Seminar in 

Clinical Pharmacy. 1 cr. each 

Oral presentation by graduate students, faculty 
and possibly visiting lecturers on topics of current, 
clinical, scientific and professional interest. Partici- 
pation is required of all students in the Pharm.D. 
Program during each semester of registration. Re- 
stricted to Pharm.D. students. 



MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 

Director: Jeanne A. Cooper, M.D. Program Di- 
rector: Michael Israel, M.D. Education Coordi- 
nator: M. Elaine Linkhauer, M.T. (ASCP) 

61. Clinical Chemistry. 7 cr. 

A comprehensive study of the chemistry and me- 
tabolism of proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and 
electrolyte, enzyme, and hormone systems as re- 
vealed by the various examinations performed on 
blood and other body fluids. 

62. Urinalysis. 2 cr. 

The study of renal function and its abnormalities 
as portrayed by alterations in the composition of 
the urine. 

63. Hematology 5 cr. 

Detailed study of the anatomy and physiology of 
the blood and various laboratory methods used in 
establishing inherited or acquired abnormalities of 
blood and blood forming organs. 

64. Blood Banking. 3 cr. 

Essentials and importance of proper selection of 
blood for transfusion, pretesting methods, 
records, and administration of blood. Also in- 
cluded are studies of tests pertaining to isosensiti- 
zation. 

65. Bacteriology. 5 cr. 

The study of clinical bacteriology, including cul- 
ture methods, biochemical and immunological as- 
pects of identification, and the application of these 
to the disease state. 

66. Parasitology, 2 cr. 

Methods of identification of the various parasites 
infesting man, with detailed study of their mor- 
phology and habit. 

67. Immunology. 2 cr. 

Study of the procedures used in analysis of im- 
mune mechanisms of the body, and their applica- 
tion in disease processes. 

69. Mycology. 1 cr. 

The study of the pathogenic fungi, the diseases 
they cause, and the technical methods of identifi- 
cation. 

70. Virology. 1 cr. 

The study of the viruses causing disease and the 
technical methods of identification. 

71. Nuclear Pathology. 2 cr. 

The study of the use of radioisotopes in the diag- 
nosis and treatment of disease. 



RADIOLOGICAL HEALTH 

Coordinator: Mitchel L, Borke, Ph.D. 

451. Practice in Radiological Health. 4 cr. 

Designed to provide the student with practical ex- 
perience in at least four broad areas of radiological 
health; industrial, hospital, reactor, and univer- 
sity. This experience will be acquired through ob- j 
servation and participation in daily practical I 
problems of radiation protection within local orga- ' 
nizations representative of the four broad areas of 
radiological health. Emphasis will be placed on 
personnel monitoring and dosimetry, radiochemi- 
cal assaying of biological and environmental mate- 
rials, field surveying of plant operations involving 
large quantities of fission products and other ra- 
dioactive materials, environmental monitoring 
practices, decontamination procedures, and radia- j 
tion protection record keeping. Prerequisites: 1 
Bionucleonics 539; Radiological Health 541; Co- ' 
requisite: Radiological Health 542. Laboratory, 16 
hours. 

539. Bionucleonics. 3 cr. 

A study of the fundamental techniques of manipu- 
lation and measurement of radioisotopes. Experi- 
ments performed individually by each student 
include: measurement of radioactivity with G-M 
counters, flow counters, ionization chambers, pro- 
portional counters, crystal and liquid scintillators; 
study of the characteristics of radiation, gamma 
spectrometry; some applications of radioisotopes 
in pharmacy, chemistry, biology, etc. Prerequi- 
sites: General Chemistry, General Physics. Lec- 
ture, three hours; Laboratory, three hours. 

540. Advanced Bionucleonics and 
Radiopharmaceuticals 3 cr. 

A course devoted to the practical applications of 
radioactive isotopes in chemistry, biology, phar- 
macy, and medicine. The scope of the course in- 
cludes neutron activation analysis, gamma 
spectrometry, tracer methods, and radiopharma- 
ceuticals. Prerequisite: Bionucleonics 539. Lecture, 
three hours; Laboratory, three hours. 

541. 542. Radiological Health I 

and II. 4 cr. each 

A course designed to review the fundamental 
physical and biological principles of radiation pro- 
tection, and the application of these principles to 
the measurement techniques, radiation hazard 
evaluation, radiation protection surveillance and 
administration. Scientific principles most applica- 
ble to solving the problems of protecting humans 
from unacceptable levels of radiation exposure 
both in occupational and public environments are 
emphasized. Lecture, three hours; Laboratory, 
four hours. 



123 



RECOMMENDED PROFESSIONAL 
ELECTIVES 

The following courses offered by the Graduate De- 
partment of Pharmaceutical Sciences are available 
to qualified upperclassmen in the School of Phar- 
macy. 

501. Manufacturing Pharmacy. 

502. Pharmaceutical Formulation and 
Development. 

504. Industrial Pharmacy and 
Governmental Affairs. 

510. Advanced Pharmacokinetics I. 

522. Spectral Methods. 

523, 524. Advanced Medicinal 

Chemistry I and II. 

539. Bionucleonics. 

540. Advanced Bionucleonics and 
Radiopharmaceuticals. 

541. 542. Radiological Health I and II. 

560. Biosynthesis of Natural Products. 

561. General Toxicology. 
563. Pathology. 

566. Clinical Toxicology. 
569. Toxins. 

Descriptions of these courses may be found in 
the Graduate School of Liberal Arts and Sciences 
Catalog. 

RECOMMENDED ELECTIVES FOR 
MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 

107. Medical Ethics. 

101. Survey of Sociology. 

323. Medical Sociology. 

103. Introduction to Psychology. 

305. History of Medicine. 

307, 308. History of Science. 

204. Interpersonal Communications. 

121. Elements of Economics. 



RECOMMENDED ELECTIVES FOR 
RADIOLOGICAL HEALTH 

106. Logic. 

104. Introduction to Philosophy. 

105. Ethics. 

107. Medical Ethics. 

101. Introduction to Political Science. 
312. International Law and Organization. 
103. Introduction to Psychology. 
101. Survey of Sociology. 
323. Medical Sociology. 



201, 202. English Literature Survey. 

103, 104. Development of the United States. 

305. History of Medicine. 

307, 308. History of Science. 

204. Interpersonal Communications. 

121. Elements of Economics. 

203. Genetics. 

206. Environmental Biology. 

ELECTIVES-COURSE CLUSTERS 

The following courses in liberal arts and sciences 
were especially selected by the several depart- 
ments to support and complement pharmacy pro- 
grams. Students are encouraged to view these 
electives with the aim of providing an appropriate 
depth of knowledge in the areas. Each cluster is 
intended to offer an interesting sequence of elec- 
tives that will count toward minimum elective re- 
quirements of all programs in the School. 

Department of English — 

1) 201, 202. English Literature Survey. 

2) 205, 206. American Literature Survey. 

3) 210, 211. World Literature Survey. 

4) Special Studies in English or World Literature. 

5) 207, 208, 209. Study of Literary Form. 

6) English Honors Program 12 credits. 

7) All 12 credit minors listed by the Department 
in the current catalog. 

Department of History— 

1) 305. History of Medicine. 307, 308. History of 
Science. 

2) 103, 104. Development of the U.S.; 309. Amer- 
ican Science and Technology. 

3) World History, Western Civilization. 

4) Non- American History Sequence. 
Department of Classics — 

1) 121 or 122, 123, 245, 246, 240. Greek Civiliza- 
tion. 

2) 121 or 122, 123, 246, 247, 248, 241. Roman Civi- 
lization. 

3) 245, 246, 247, 248. Ancient History. 

4) 103, 104, 203, 204, 301, 302, 303. Greek Lan- 
guage and Literature. 

5) 101, 102, 201, 202, 305, 306. Latin Language 
and Literature. 

Department of Sociology - 

1) 101, any one of areas of concentration sug- 
gested under minor. 



124 



Department of Psycholo;^}/ — 

1) 103, courses suggested under minor. 
Department of Speecli Conununicatiofi — 

1) Courses suggested under minor. 
Department of Philosophy— 

1) 104, 105 or 107, 106. 

2) Courses suggested under minor. 
Department of Political Science - 



1) 101, courses suggested under minor. 
Department of Theology - 

1) Courses suggested under minor. 
Fine A rts - 

1) Courses suggested under minor. 

Any course taught in the University may be cho- 
sen as an elective course by students who have 
met the prerequisites. Descriptions for courses 
outside the School of Pharmacy may be found in 
the appropriate section of the University catalog. 




125 



Reserve Officers' Training 
Corps 



DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 
(ARMY OFFICERS' COMMISSIONING 
PROGRAM) 

PROGRAMS 

The Army Reserve Officers' Training Corps 
(ROTC) Program has been a member of the "Du- 
quesne Family" since 1936. It is a completely vol- 
untary program which is open to all male and 
female students at Duquesne. It provides students 
with the opportunity to earn a commission as an 
officer in the U.S. Army, U.S. Army Reserves or 
Army National Guard. After commissioning, stu- 
dents serve as an officer in the Reserves or Na- 
tional Guard while pursuing their chosen civilian 
careers or compete for active duty. The program is 
structured to give the student a variety of practical 
experiences in leading and managing people and 
resources while learning about the military profes- 
sion and the role it plays in our system of govern- 
ment. Four-year and two-year programs are 
offered, both of which are taken in conjunction 
with a student's required or normal course of 
study leading to a degree. 

FOUR YEAR 

The four-year program is divided into two parts: 
the Basic Course and the Advanced Course". The 
Basic Course is usually taken in the freshman and 
sophomore years during which time the student 
would take ROTC courses as they would any other 
college courses. There is no military service obliga- 
tion or special requirements of any kind. The 
freshmen and sophomore courses follow an ad- 
venture, skill learning and leadership track which 
is designed to enhance self-confidence, provide 
new experiences, and place students in realistic 
leadership situations. Freshmen learn survival 
techniques, how to handle and fire a rifle, and how 
to navigate cross-country using a map and a com- 
pass. Sophomores learn about leadership, man- 
agement and the role of the military in the United 
States. The Basic Course may be scheduled into 
less than a two-year period if the student meets 
certain prerequisite conditions. 



Sophomores (MS II) 



Basic Course Curriculum: 

Freshmen (MS I) 



Fall Semester 



MS 101. 



Survival 
Techniques 
0-1 cr. 



Spring Semester 

MS 102. Individual 
Skills 
0-1 cr. 



Fall Semester 

MS 201. Leadership 
and 
Management 

0-1 cr. 


MS 202. Introduction 
to 

Military 
Skills 
0-1 cr. 



After completing the Basic Course, students 
who have demonstrated officer potential and meet 
Army physical standards are eligible to enroll in 
the Advanced Course. The Advanced Course is 
normally taken in the final two years of college. 
Therefore, at the beginning of the junior year, the 
student must decide whether he/she wishes to be- 
come an officer and enter the advanced phase of 
the program. Students who enter the Advanced 
Course receive a tax-free living allowance of $100 
per month during the school year. The junior year 
is training-oriented and prepares students for six 
weeks of rigorous field and leadership training 
that they receive at Fort Bragg, NC at the end of the 
academic year. The senior year further prepares 
the student to perform the duties of an officer. It 
covers such subjects as military law, administra- 
tion, logistics, staff functions, professionalism, 
ethics, and military training. Leadership develop- 
ment is continuously emphasized. 

Advanced Course Curriculum: 

Juniors (MS III) 

Fall Semester Spring Semester 

MS 301. Military MS 302. Military 
Skills Skills 

Development Development 

0-2 cr. 0-2 cr. 

Summer Between Junior and Seriior Year 
Attend a six-week ROTC Advanced Camp 

Seniors (MS IV) 
Fall Semester Spring Semester 

MS 401. Professional 



MS 401. Professional 
Seminar 
0-2 cr. 



Seminar 
0-2 cr. 



DIRECT ENTRY INTO THE ADVANCED 
COURSE 

Students may receive placement credit for MS I 
and II and be granted direct entry into the Ad- 
vanced Course. This placement credit may be 
granted for: 

1. Completion of Army Basic Training or its 
equivalent in the Navy, Air Force, Coast Guard or 
Marine Corps. 

2. Attendance at a service academy for one or 
more years. 



126 



3. Completion of equivalent level training in 
Navy or Air Force ROTC. 

4. Completion of three or more vears training in 
Junior ROTC (any service) or NDCC. 

EARLY COMMISSIONING 

Many students are able to complete the require- 
ments for commissioning prior to graduation 
through the direct entry concept. These students 
may be commissioned upon completion of the Ad- 
vanced Course, permitting them to serve in sala- 
ried positions with the National Guard or 
Reser\es while completing their degree work. 

SIMULTANEOUS MEMBERSHIP 
PROGRAM (SMP) 

This program permits students to participate in 
the Army ROTC Advanced Course and serve in a 
Reserve or National Guard unit as an officer 
trainee at the same time. The advantage to SMP is 
that the student will receive regular drill pay from 
the Reserve or National Guard as well as the $100 
per month living allowance for participating in the 
Army ROTC. 

TWO-YEAR PROGRAM 

This two-year program is designed primarily for 
transfer students and students who did not partic- 
ipate in ROTC as freshmen or sophomores. Any 
student with at least two academic years remain- 
ing (undergraduate and/or graduate) is eligible. 
Students may qualify for this program and enroll- 
ment in the Advanced Course by successfully 
completing a paid summer camp at Fort Knox, KY. 

ARMY ROTC SCHOLARSHIPS 

Army ROTC offers four, three, and two-year schol- 
arships which are awarded on a competitive basis. 
ROTC students as well as those students not cur- 
rently participating in ROTC are eligible to apply. 
Each scholarship pays for tuition, textbooks, labo- 
ratory fees and other purely academic expenses. 
Scholarship students also receive a tax-free living 
allow^ance of $100 each month during the school 
year while on scholarship status. For details, see 
the ROTC Scholarship listing in the Financial Aid 
Section of this catalog on page 144. 

MILITARY SCIENCE CURRICULUM 

THE BASIC COURSE 

(Military Science Levels I and II). 

Military Science (MS) 101. Survival Techniques. 

This is an introductory course designed to prepare 
students to recognize survival situations, deter- 
mine directions, navigate at night, rappel, find 
and prepare food, find water, apply first aid, cross 
obstacles and constuct shelters. 

Military Science (MS) 102. Individual Skills. 

The course will provide an introduction to the 
sport of orienteering, which is a combination of 



cross-country running and land navigation with I 
the aid of a topographical map and a compass. In- ^ 
struction is presented on map reading, the use of 
the compass, and how to move quickly and safely 
through all kinds of terrain. 

Military Science (MS) 201. Leadership and 
Management Techniques. 

This is an introductory course into basic manage- 
ment and leadership techniques and includes ef- 
fective communications techniques, small group 
processes, leadership traits and styles, decision- 
making and problem-solving techniques. The 
course is also designed to provide the student with 
the tools for a self-analysis of his/her management 
capability and the methods for improvement. 

Military Science (MS) 202. Introduction to 
Military Skills. 

This course introduces the student to the United 
States Army and provides an inside view of ROTC 
and the Army, to include its organization, mis- 
sions, and functions. The course will discuss offi- 
cer career fields, duties and responsibilities of 
junior leaders, additional education programs, 
pay, promotion, assignments, customs and tradi- 
tions of the Army, and the significance of military 
courtesy and discipline. The student will also be 
introduced to the operation of the basic military 
team -the squad. 

THE ADVANCED COURSE 
(Military Science Levels III and IV) 

Military Science (MS) 301 and 302. 
Military Skills Development. 

This course requires a full school year to complete. 
In addition to the two hours per week of instruc- 
tion and practical application exercises on campus, 
the student periodically attends training exercises 
on weekends throughout the school year. The 
course provides the student with instruction and 
practical experience in tactical and technical mili- 
tary subjects with particular emphasis on leader- 
ship development. The central theme and primary 
purpose of the course is to prepare the student for 
attendance at the six-week ROTC Advanced Camp 
at Fort Bragg, NC which is normally attended dur- 
ing the summer following the completion of this 
course. 

Military Science (MS) 401 and 402. 
Professional Seminar. 

To take this course, the student must have satisfac- 
torily completed MS 301 and 302 as well as ROTC 
Advanced Camp. The course meets two hours per 
week and is a systematic and comprehensive 
study of professional subject matters designed to 
facilitate the transition from student/cadet to offi- 
cer. It is comprised of two modules. Module I (MS 
401), Administrative/Staff Operations and Proce- 
dures, is taught in the fall semester. Module II (MS 
402), Military Law, Justice, and Ethics, is taught 
during the spring semester. 



127 



LEADERSHIP LABORATORY 

Military Science (MS) 100. Cadet Corps Labora- 
tory. This class is scheduled both semesters, meet- 
ing once a week for 75 minutes. The Cadet 
Commander uses the lab to disseminate informa- 
tion and to organize the activities of the Corps of 
Cadets. All students are required to attend unless 
a conflict exists between this class and their aca- 
demic course work. 

VOLUNTARY ADVENTURE AND 
SOCIAL ACTIVITIES 

In an urban environment, it is often not possible to 
provide students with the kind of surroundings 



suitable for the conduct of such activities as rap- 
pelling and small unit tactics. Therefore, off- 
campus sites on weekends are utilized in order to 
effectively apply techniques taught in the class- 
room. 

Weekend activities are student run and instruc- 
tor supervised. For this reason, these activities are 
ideally suited for cadets to practice leadership and 
organizational and military technical skills. 

Some weekday or weekend evenings are set 
aside for social activities which incorporate expo- 
sure to military customs and traditions. These 
events include a Dining-In, the Military Ball, an 
Awards Ceremony, and the Annual ROTC Com- 
missioning Program. 




128 



Part III: 
Student Life: 
Programs, Services 
and Organizations 

A. DIVISION OF STUDENT LIFE 
MISSION 

The mission of the Division of Student Life is to 
establish and maintain a total living, learning and 
developmental environment that will enhance stu- 
dents' growth for the individual self-actualization 
and positive involvement in the world community. 

PHILOSOPHY 

Consistent with the educational philosophy of the 
Univ^ersity and the above stated mission, the Stu- 
dent Life Division provides the student with op- 
portunities to participate in a variety of 
experiences with fellow students, faculty members 
and administrators. The Student Life Staff encour- 
ages students to initiate new programs, imple- 
ment change and participate in the essential 
processes of University governance on many lev- 
els. 

ORGANIZATION 

The Vice President for Student Life and his Assist- 
ant coordinate the Departments of Athletics, Ca- 
reer Planning and Placement, Dean of Students 
Office, Duquesne Union, Health Services, Resi- 
dence Life, Retention and the Counseling and 
Testing Center. These Departments are briefly de- 
scribed below. Additional information may be ob- 
tained directly from each Department and through 
the Student Handbook and Code of Student Rights, Re- 
sponsibilities and Conduct. 

ATHLETICS 

Duquesne University is a member of the National 
Collegiate Athletic Association (Division I) and the 
Atlantic 10 Conference. All rules of these two orga- 
nizations, including those pertaining to a stu- 
dent's eligibility for a varsity team, are followed. 
Duquesne University believes in and promotes the 
concept of the student athlete, manifested in part 
by the appointment of the Academic Supervisor 
for Intercollegiate Athletics. Athletic grants-in-aid 
are available for most varsity sports. 

The Athletic Department fields men's varsity 
teams in baseball, basketball, cross-country, foot- 
ball (Division III), swimming, tennis and volley- 
ball; women's varsity teams in basketball, 
cross-country, swimming, tennis, track and volley- 
ball; coed varsity teams in golf and rifle; and club 
teams in bowling and hockey. 

Duquesne sponsors a very active intramural pro- 
gram in such fields as tennis, touch football, vol- 



leyball, street hockey, basketball, softball, indoor 
soccer, coed wiffle ball, and marathons. 

CAREER PLANNING AND PLACEMENT 

Students and graduates of Duquesne University 
have available to them the full services and pro- 
grams of Career Planning and Placement. Persons 
with uncertain or changing vocational goals may 
seek career planning through personal contact 
with the professional staff and use of the career re- 
sources. Early use of this service is encouraged. 

The individual with well-defined career goals 
may seek employment advice including resume 
preparation, job application and interview tech- 
niques, job referrals and credentials. The graduat- 
ing student may also be interested in campus 
interviews with visiting employers. 

Undergraduate students may earn academic 
credit for approved preprofessional work under 
the University's Cooperative Education Program 
which is administered by the Career Planning and 
Placement Center. 

The part-time and summer employment pro- 
gram is important to students in financing their 
education and to those seeking practical experi- 
ence to augment college training. Placement in 
campus jobs is largely, though not totally, depen- 
dent upon financial need. Part-time and summer 
jobs in the community are also available. 

DEAN OF STUDENTS OFFICE 

This office is directly responsible for implementing 
several programs and services which provide indi- 
vidual students and groups with opportunities for 
personal, intellectual and social growth. Chief 
among these programs and services are the Uni- 
versity Judicial System, Orientation, Freshman/ 
Transfer Assistance Program, Special Scholarships 
and Awards, Disabled Student Services, Life Plan- 
ning Seminars, Positive Profile Records, Com- 
muter Concerns, National Honor Societies and 
Counseling Services. 

The University Judicial Board plays an important 
role in developing responsible student conduct, 
serving to protect the rights and freedoms of all 
students while insuring that these rights and free- 
doms are not misused within the context of stu- 
dents' responsibilities to the University. The 
Board, comprised of administrators, faculty, stu- 
dents and a student chairperson, minimizes legal 
technicalities and instead focuses on the develop- 
mental process. 

DUQUESNE UNION 

The Duquesne Union is more than a unique build- 
ing. It is a unique partnership of professional staff, 
faculty and students working together to provide 
the experience necessary to develop mature, effec- 
tive members of society. The Union staff provides 
advice and assistance for all phases of campus pro- 
gramming and establishes goals for, as well as pro- 
ducing and presenting, a balanced series of 
cultural, educational, recreational and social pro- 



129 



grams. With the goal of community, all aspects of 
the Union are open to the entire campus. It is not 
the "Student" Union, but the Duquesne Union. 

The Union staff works most closely with the Un- 
ion Program Board, which is the student organiza- 
tion exercising primary coordination and 
implementation of University-wide programming 
through a series of special committees. The UPB 
offers its members the opportunity to develop ef- 
fective skills in leadership, communication, orga- 
nization and group process. 

Facilities within the Union include administra- 
tive and student organization offices, meeting 
rooms, information center, recreation center, book- 
store, cafeteria, video arcade, ballroom. Rathskel- 
ler Restaurant and student lounge. 

HEALTH SERVICE 

Medical /Nursing Services 

The Health Service provides for the evaluation and 

treatment of illness and injury. 

-Allergy injections are given when ordered by a 
physician. You must provide serum and instruc- 
tions. 

-Starter doses of medication are given when in 
stock. However, you must pay to have prescrip- 
tions filled off campus. 

-Breast Cancer Screening, Immunization, TB. skin 
testing. 

-First aid supplies and crutches are provided when 
indicated. 

-Health counseling and referrals to medical, social, 
welfare agencies as needed. 

-Routine screening physicals are provided for driv- 
er's license, teacher certification, premarital, pre- 
employment. Nominal fee. 

-A phlebotomist will be available in the Health 
Service to draw blood samples Monday thru Fri- 
day, afternoons, as needed. 

Women's Clinic 

-Routine gynecological health care examination, 

including the PAP smear. 
-Pregnancy testing and health counseling. 
-Evaluation and referral for sexually transmitted 

diseases. 

-Family planning referral. 
-Premenstrual Syndrome referral 
-Health education programs on sexuality for both 

men and women. 
-Gynecologic assessment and treatment by board 

certified nurse practitioner. 
-Referrals to Health Service physician or health 

care providers as requested or needed. 

Mental Health Services Include: 

-Short term insight oriented psychotherapy. 

-Supportive counseling. 



-Psychiatric diagnosis by a board certified psychia- 
trist. 

-Crisis intervention. 

Counseling is available for personal problems i.e., 
adjustments to college life, problems with room- 
mates, family, friends, loneliness, depression, 
anxiety reaction, eating disorders. 
Counseling is aimed at increasing the student's 
self-awareness, self-understanding, and ability to 
cope. 

Education information on numerous Mental 
Health topics is available. 

A "Counseling Network" has been developed to 
facilitate university wide Mental Health services 
and educational programs. 

Health Education 

The Health Service provides numerous quality 
health education programs for the University com- 
munity. These programs promote good health 
safety, and the early detection of illness, thereby 
preventing consequences of disease, injury and ac- 
cidents. 

-The staff develops programs dealing with any as- 
pect of health education for campus groups or or- 
ganizations as requested. 
-Literature on current health topics. 
staff 

The medical/nursing professional staff consists of 
all registered Nurses, Nurse Practitioners and a 
Board Certified Family Practitioner. The Mental 
Health Staff include a Board Certified Psychiatrist, 
a Counseling Coordinator and five therapists. 

In-Hospital Care 

-Students are transported to nearby medical cen- 
ters when in-patient care is needed. 

Insurance 

-It is strongly recommended that each student 
carry some form of health insurance. The Univer- 
sity provides a Student Health Care Plan de- 
signed to meet the needs of students and is priced 
lower than individual health insurance policies. 
Inquiries about health insurance should be di- 
rected to the Office of Contracts and Enterprises 
(434-6058). 

Hours 

NURSING-Monday through Friday 

8:30 a.m. to 8:00 p.m. 

Saturday and Sunday 

11:00 a.m. -2:00 p.m. 
PHYSICIAN-Monday through Friday 

12:00 to 3:00 p.m. 
Hours subject to change in spring and summer 
sessions and during holidays. 

Location 

The Health Service is located on the second floor. 

Towers Living Learning Center 434-1650/1651/1652 



130 



Appomhnents 

The Health Sennce operates on an appointment basis, 
except for emergencies. This system decreases the 
time spent waiting to be seen. If you walk in with- 
out an appointment, you will be seen at the first 
opening in the schedule. If you cannot keep your 
appointment, let us know so that someone else 
can be scheduled for that time. The last appoint- 
ment will be made 15 minutes before closing. 
Please call 434-1650/1652 for an appointment. 

Eligibility 

All resident and full-time undergraduate students: 

Prepaid 
All Graduate and part-time students: First aid and 
referral services without charge. All 
the benefits of on-going primary care 
such as physician visits, lab work, al- 
lergy injections starter doses of med- 
icines; by electing to join the Health 
Service program. A nominal fee of 
$25 per semester is required. 
Faculty, 

Staff, Visitors: First aid, blood pressure monitor- 
ing and referral services provided 
without charge. Primary health 
care for non-students cannot be 
provided by the Health Service ex- 
cept for job related injuries. 
All medical and mental health records are confi- 
dential and will not be released without your per- 
mission. 

EMERGENCY 

-A Crisis Coordinator is available 24 hours a day to 
assist in any type of emergency. 

-Emergencies resulting from: Illness, Injury, Psy- 
chological Problems 

-Call Campus Security 434-6002. They will provide 
assistance and will contact Paramedics, Health 
Service and the Crisis Coordinator as needed. 

RESIDENCE LIFE 

The Office of Residence Life is committed to creat- 
ing an environment in each of the four (4) Living 
Learning Centers in which the student may grow 
and develop as a total person. Its philosophy and 
programs are based on the belief that the Living 
Learning Center experience is an important part of 
the total University education. Therefore it is the 
purpose of the Office of Residence Life to facilitate 
the personal and academic growth of the resident 
student. To this end, the professional and resident 
assistant staff will provide the means to foster such 
development. 

All freshmen students, except those residing 
with their parents or relatives, are required to live 
in one of Duquesne's Living Learning Centers. All 
students living on campus are further required to 
take their meals at the Residence Cafeteria. Hous- 
ing Agreement terms are effective for the entire ac- 



ademic year, with room and board rates being 
determined on an annual basis. Additional infor- 
mation regarding programs, policies and regula- 
tions for the Living Learning Centers is included 
in the Residence Life Handbook. 

RETENTION OFFICE 

The Retention Office, under the direction of the 
Vice President for Student Life/Retention, coordi- 
nates the efforts of the entire University commu- 
nity to ensure that the personal and educational 
experience for all students is the best possible. Pol- 
icies, programs, services and opportunities are 
constantly reviewed, refined and improved in an 
effort to meet the legitimate needs of students con- 
sistent with the mission and goals of the Univer- 
sity. 

COUNSELING AND TESTING CENTER 

The primary purposes of the Counseling and Test- 
ing Center is to provide academic, vocational and 
personal counseling. Students are shown how to 
systematically explore and investigate their inter- 
ests and abilities. The results relate to the world of 
work, personal preferences and education, help- 
ing the student to begin to clarify his goals. Once 
an occupational direction has been established, 
the student is then in a well informed position to 
choose an academic major and minor. 

Personal counseling is provided in a confidential 
manner by professionally trained counselors. Stu- 
dents may call or stop in for an appointment to 
discuss any of their concerns. Counseling assist- 
ance with study skills, test anxiety and stress man- 
agement is available in both individual and group 
formats. 

Information about the applications for national 
qualification examinations (CLEP, DAT, GRE, 
LSAT, CM AX SAT, etc.) is also available. 

B. OTHER DEVELOPMENTAL 
SERVICES 

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 

One of the five (5) primary tenets of Duquesne 
University centers on International Education. 
Consistent with this focus, an increasing number 
of International Students from an increasing vari- 
ety of countries are pursuing undergraduate and 
graduate degrees at the University. 

The responsibility of the International Student 
Advisor is to be of service to all International Stu- 
dents in the areas of adjustment, personal coun- 
seling, preparation of forms and facilitating the 
integration, understanding and communication 
among International Students and American stu- 
dents. Additionally, the International Student Ad- 
visor coordinates opportunities for Duquesne 
students interested in studying abroad as part of 
their education. 



131 



LEARNING SKILLS PROGRAM 

The Learning Skills Program is an ancillary aca- 
demic service whose primary charge is the intel- 
lectual development of students. Services are 
provided in coordination with academic offices of 
the University. 

As part of its academic assistance efforts, the 
Learning Skills Program delivers diagnostic and 
prescriptive services. Individualized developmen- 
tal programs in reading, writing, mathematics and 
science are offered to students who seek to up- 
grade their academic skills and advance their intel- 
lectual growth. 

A free tutorial service provides students with 
competent tutors in numerous subject areas. In 
addition, a comprehensive study skills program is 
available to help prepare study skills as well as to 
assist students experiencing academic difficulties. 

PSYCHOLOGICAL CENTER FOR 
TRAINING AND RESEARCH 

The Psychological Center for Training and Re- 
search is staffed by the clinical faculty and staff of 
the Psychology Department and is available to stu- 
dents for personal counseling. Counseling inter- 
views provide the student with an opportunity for 
personal growth through the development of the 
individual's ability, working together with a 
trained counselor, to find one's own compatible 
solutions for difficulties of a personal nature. Sin- 
gle conferences or a series of interviews in individ- 
ual or group counseling can be arranged at the 
Center's office. 

C. STUDENT GOVERNANCE 

STUDENT GOVERNMENT 
ASSOCIATION 

The Student Government Association is a student- 
created structure designed to provide a forum for 
the expression of student views and interests, to 
maintain academic freedom and responsibility and 
to foster intelligent interest and participation in all 
phases of university life. Two major functions of 
the S.G.A. are to serve as student representatives 
on important University committees and to serve 
as the sole body that recognizes and funds student 
organizations. 

COMMUTER COUNCIL 

The Commuter Council is an officially recognized, 
funded student governmental organization open 
to all students at the University. The purpose of 
the Council is to identify commuter concerns and 
to provide educational, social, and service- 
oriented programs for the University's large com- 
muter population. To involve the entire 
community in its program, the Council works 
closely with the Student Government Association, 
Residence Council, Union Program Board and the 
administration. 



RESIDENCE COUNCIL 

The Residence Council coordinates Living Learn- 
ing Center activities and is involved with the Of- 
fice of Residence Life in developing and 
implementing Living Learning Center policies and 
procedures. All resident students are automati- 
cally members of Residence Council and are en- 
couraged to attend meetings, functions, etc. 
sponsored by the group. 

It is the aim of the Residence Council to serve as 
a link between the resident students and the ad- 
ministration. Aside from the council activities, 
representatives of the Residence Council serve on 
the Student Life Advisory Committee and the 
Food Service Committee to provide student input 
for the formulation and review of University poli- 
cies affecting residence living. 

INTER-FRATERNITY COUNCIL 

The Inter-Fraternity Council serves as a clearing 
house for general fraternity social information and 
as a forum for airing constructive proposals for the 
improvement of the fraternity system. Member- 
ship in the Council is composed of three elected or 
appointed representatives from each of the eight 
member fraternities. The IFC establishes all rules 
governing inter-fraternity sports and regulates 
pledging. 

PANHELLENIC COUNCIL 

The Panhellenic Council was established for the 
purpose of strengthening women's fraternities as 
organizations and for promoting cooperation 
among the groups through scholastic, athletic, 
and social activities. Membership in the Panhel- 
lenic Council is composed of the presidents and 
elected representatives of each of the six women's 
social fraternities. Panhellenic Council establishes 
all rules concerning the rushing and pledging of 
new fraternity members. 

D. STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS 
GENERAL 

These are more than 80 active student organiza- 
tions at Duquesne. Some serve the needs of spe- 
cific interest groups as well as those of residents 
and commuters. Others relate directly to major ar- 
eas of study. Some honor academic achievement. 
Many are formed to meet religious, service or so- 
cial needs and interests. Whatever their purpose, 
these organizations and their activities comprise a 
major part of campus life. 

HONOR SOCIETIES 

These societies have as their primary purpose rec- 
ognition of academic excellence and leadership 
achievement and are members of the Association 
of College Honor Societies. 

PROFESSIONAL AND DEPARTMENTAL 
ORGANIZATIONS 

These professional organizations exist to provide 



132 



the fertile ground for the growth of informal ex- 
change of ideas pertinent to the students academic 
pursuits. With this purpose in mind, these organi- 
zations sponsor numerous programs including de- 
bates, symposiums, and lectures. 

SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS 

The purpose of these nationally-affiliated organi- 
zations is to provide a high standard of service to 
the campus and local communities while, at the 
same time, developing the leadership qualities of 
the cooperation among each member of the orga- 
nization. With this purpose in mind, service orga- 
nizations sponsor a wide variety of professional, 
service, charitable, and social programs. 

SOCIAL ORGANIZATIONS 

Social organizations are composed of college men 
and \vomen who have joined together to enhance 
their identities by sponsoring and promoting so- 
cial, athletic, cultural, and academic events. Many 
of these organizations belong to Inter-Fraternity 
Council or Panhellenic Council. 

PERFORMANCE GROUPS 
TAMBURITZANS 

The Duquesne University Tamburitzans were 
founded in 1937 at the University and were the 
first university-based performing folk ensemble in 
the United States. The group takes its name from 
the Tamburitza family of stringed instruments, in- 
digenous to the folk cultures of Southeastern Eu- 
rope. The group exists for the dual purpose of 
preserving and perpetuating the Eastern Euro- 
pean cultural heritage in the United States and of- 
fering scholarship opportunities to deserving 
students. 

THEATRE 

The Red Masquers serves to provide an extracur- 
ricular outlet for students who wish to participate 
in the theatre. Its aim is to provide the University 
and its students with educational and cultural 
benefits that accrue from a dramatic program. In 
line with these objectives, the Masquers' program 
offers a variety of state entertainment— one-act 
plays, musicals, comedies, tragedies. Any Du- 
quesne student is eligible for membership. 

MEDIA ORGANIZATIONS 
WDUQ RADIO AND TELEVISION 

The University's radio station (WDUQ -90. 5 EM.) 
and television (closed circuit) provide academic 



support to the individual schools and departments 
through seminars, workshops, laboratory experi- 
ence, and extracurricular opportunities in com- 
munication skills for individuals and groups. Most 
positions on the staff are filled by students. The 
University radio station operates on a 25,000 Watt 
frequency over a radius of seventy miles. 

WDRC 

This radio station, purchased by Residence Coun- 
cil and operated by students, provides music and 
announcements in the Duquesne Tower's Cafete- 
ria during the lunch and dinner hours. Students 
interested in being disc jockeys and/or announcers 
on WDRC should contact Residence Council. 

PUBLICATIONS 

The Duquesne University Code of Student 
Rights, Responsibilities and Conduct 

The Student Code is the definitive statement of 
standards, policies and procedures regarding stu- 
dent rights and responsibilities, campus organiza- 
tions, student governance, student records, 
student conduct and the University Judicial Sys- 
tem. Copies are available at the Duquesne Union 
Informational Center. 

The Duquesne Duke, the University campus 
newspaper is written and edited by the students 
for the students. It appears every Thursday during 
the academic year except during examination peri- 
ods and holidays, and provides an array of cam- 
pus news, student opinions, editorials and 
advertisements. The paper is geared to all mem- 
bers of the University: administrators, faculty 
members, employees, and most of all students. 
Membership in the Duquesne Duke is open to all 
students. 

The Duquesne Magazine is a literary publication, 
published each semester which affords students 
the opportunity to submit writing, artwork and 
photographs. 

L'Esprit du Due, the yearbook, highlights the 
events of the previous year to remind all graduates 
of their alma mater. It is mailed to all seniors after 
their graduation. 

The Student Handbook contains information 
about the University which concerns the students. 
Copies are available at the Duquesne Union Infor- 
mation Center. 



133 



Part IV: 

Campus Ministry 



The Campus Ministry is deeply concerned with 
the religious life and growth of Duquesne students 
and all campus residents. Its policies and pro- 
grams are oriented to furthering that growth at the 
personal as well as the community level. For Cath- 
olic students, Eucharistic liturgies are celebrated 
daily, and the Sacrament of Reconciliation is avail- 
able by appointment. For all students, whatever 
their faith, the Campus Ministers are available to 
help with spiritual direction, counseling, advice, 
or sympathetic listening. The Campus Ministry 



provides a listing of Sunday services in nearby 
churches or synagogues and referrals can be made 
to introduce the student to the various ministers or 
rabbis in the area. The University Chapel is open 
each day for private prayer and quiet meditation. 
It is available too, to groups for specific services of 
a religious nature. 

The Campus Ministry sees itself at the service of 
all in an open, unstructured, nonthreatening rela- 
tionship and invites the entire Duquesne Commu- 
nity to make use of its services. 

The Ministry's activities are announced by 
posters in residence halls, and almost all other 
campus buildings. Its main office is Room 102 on 
the first floor of the Administration Building, with 
additional offices in Duquesne Towers, Assump- 
tion Hall, St. Ann's and St. Martin's dormitories. 




134 



Part V: 

Admission, Financial 

Aid, Tuition and Fees 

Admission 

OFFICE OF ADMISSIONS 

The Office of Admissions is located on the first 
floor of the Administration Building. 

Telephone: (412) 434-6220, 434-6221, 434-6222. 

Office hours: Monday through Friday from 8:30 
A.M. to 4:30 P.M. 

POLICY 

It is the policy of Duquesne University to admit ap- 
plicants who are best qualified to profit from op- 
portunities which the University offers for 
intellectual, spiritual, and social growth. In gen- 
eral, admission is based upon past academic per- 
formance, scholastic ability, and personal 
characteristics. Information about religious prefer- 
ence, sex, racial characteristics, and ethnic origin is 
not taken into consideration by the Committee on 
Admissions. 

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

1. A candidate should have been graduated from 
an approved secondary school in the upper three- 
fifths of the class, and demonstrated exemplary 
personal conduct in that institution. Applicants 
who have not completed four years of high school 
must submit a High School Equivalent Diploma is- 
sued by their state department of education. 

2. High School curriculum must include 16 units 
distributed as follows: four units in English; eight 
units in any combination from the area of social 
studies, language, mathematics, and science; and 
four elective units for which the secondary school 
offers credit toward graduation. In specific in- 
stances, and at the discretion of the Committee on 
Admissions, the genuine equivalent of these re- 
quirements may be accepted in lieu of the precise 
requirements specified. (Note: Candidates plan- 
ning to enroll in Pharmacy or Pre-Health pro- 
grams. Medical Technology, Radiological Health, 
or as science or mathematics majors should have 
completed a minimum of seven units in mathe- 
matics and sciences.) 

3. Scores in accordance with the standards ad- 
hered to by the University must be presented for 
the required College Entrance Examination Board 
Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American 
College Testing Program (ACT). (Note: for admis- 
sion to the School of Music, an audition is re- 
quired.) 



EARLY DECISION j 

Students who desire Duquesne University as their 
first choice for college should consider the Early 
Decision plan. This plan requires that the student J 
apply by November 15 of his/her senior year. The I 
student is notified of the decision by December 15, 
and is required to send his/her non-refundable de- 
posit within two weeks. This offers the candidate 
the advantage of knowing of the admissions deci- 
sion early in his/her senior year. 

APPLICATION -NEW FIRST-YEAR 
STUDENTS 

Applications should be addressed to the Director 
of Admissions, Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, 
Pennsylvania 15282. It may be submitted at any 
time during the candidates' senior year up to July 
1. 
The application procedure is as follows: 

1. Obtain, complete, and file the Application for 
Admission with the Office of Admissions. 

2. Include the $20 non-refundable application 
fee with the application form. International stu- 
dents must pay a $30 non-refundable application 
fee. No application will be processed for consider- 
ation by the Committee on Admissions unless ac- 
companied by the required fee. 

3. Request the secondary school principal or 
guidance counselor to submit a transcript of the 
candidate's academic record. A recommendation 
is requested. 

4. Complete the required SAT or ACT examina- 
tion during the spring of junior year and/or fall of 
senior year. It is the personal responsibility of each 
candidate to have test scores forwarded to the Uni- 
versity. 

5. An interview is highly recommended for pro- 
spective students. Auditions are required for 
School of Music applicants. 

6. Students interested in being considered for 
University Scholarships should submit their ap- 
plication by February 1 of their senior year. 

7. Early Decision Deadline (for students who 
have Duquesne as their first College choice) is No- 
vember 15. Notification will be by December 15. If 
accepted under the Early Decision Plan, commut- 
ing students are asked to submit a non-refundable 
tuition deposit of $100 within two weeks. Resident 
students are asked to submit a $250 non- 
refundable deposit. 

8. Notification of decisions for regular admission 
begin once Early Decision applicants have been 
notified. If accepted, students are asked to submit 
non-refundable tuition deposit of $100 for com- 
muters or $250 for resident students by May 1 of 
their senior year. International students must sub- 
mit a non-refundable tuition and room and board 
deposit of $650. 

It is the responsibility of the applicant to arrange to 
have all supporting credentials on file with the Office of 
Admissions and Financial Aid Office prior to the dead- 



135 



line dates. 

EARLY ADMISSION 

Although the University believes that most stu- 
dents profit from four years in the secondary 
school, the Early Admission Plan is open to out- 
standing students. This is a plan whereby unusu- 
ally able and mature candidates who have 
completed less than four years of a secondary 
school program may apply for consideration to be- 
gin college after their junior year. The high school 
diploma is awarded following successful comple- 
tion of their freshman year in college. Two sepa- 
rate interviews are required. Further details may 
be obtained by telephoning or writing to the Ad- 
missions Office. 

APPLICATION-OTHER CATEGORIES 

It is the responsibility of persons who apply for evening 
study, or as international students, postgraduate, read- 
mission students, transfers, temporary transfers, and 
veterans, or for the Summer Session to arrange to have 
all supporting credentials on file with the Office of Ad- 
missions and the Financial Aid Office before deadline 
dates. 

ADMISSION OF UNDERGRADUATE 
INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS 

All international applicants must meet the admis- 
sions requirements for freshmen and/or transfer 
candidates as determined by the academic unit in 
which they propose to study. In addition, official 
transcripts of all degrees, diplomas, mark sheets, 
and examination records in original or photostatic 
copies must be sent with certified translations, 
where applicable, from all schools, colleges and 
universities attended, to the Admissions Office. 

A declaration of finances must be submitted 
which has been completed and certified by the ap- 
propriate persons. The Form 1-20 will not be issued 
until the Admissions Office is in receipt of this 
form and approval has been granted. 

If English is the applicant's principal language of 
instruction, SAT results must be submitted. If Eng- 
lish is not the applicant's native language or princi- 
pal language of instruction, the Test of English as a 
Foreign Language (TOEFL)* is required unless the 
applicant has finished one year of college in the 
United States and has successfully completed at 
least 16 semester credit hours and demonstrated 
proficiency in English. All TOEFL accepted inter- 
national students must take English diagnostic 
tests upon arrival at the University, for appropriate 
placement, regardless of the academic level of ac- 
ceptance. If the results of the diagnostic examina- 
tions indicate the need for remedial work in 
English to assure satisfactory progress in the pro- 
jected plan of study, the student must enroll in a 
course in developmental English during his/her 
first semester at the University. 

A letter of reference from at least one school offi- 
cial which contains information on the applicant's 
academic, personal and social strengths and weak- 



nesses, and, also the length of time the writer has 
known the student is required. 

Admissions decisions will not be made until all 
information has been received, completed and cer- 
tified. 

Upon acceptance, the International Students 
Advisor will issue the necessary documents for 
obtaining a student visa to the United States. To 
complete on-campus registration, international 
students who are admitted should plan to arrive 
one week before the term begins. 

POST-GRADUATES 

Post-graduates are students who already have a 
Bachelor's degree, but desire to take undergradu- 
ate courses at Duquesne. 

A Post-graduate student must submit a Post- 
graduate application to the Division of Continuing 
Education if the Bachelor's degree was received 
from an institution other than Duquesne. If the 
bachelor's degree was received from Duquesne an 
application for readmission must be submitted. In 
both instances, proof of degree is required either 
by an official transcript or a certificate of gradua- 
tion. 

READMISSION 

Any student who withdraws from the University 
must apply for readmission through the Office of 
Admissions regardless of the time interval in- 
volved since withdrawal. A student who is dis- 
missed for academic reasons must appeal to the 
Committee on Student Standing of the school to 
which application of admission or readmission is 
being made, once the application has been submit- 
ted to the Admissions Office. 

TRANSFERS 

A student who wishes to transfer from another 
college or university must have the complete tran- 
scripts of high school and college records for- 
warded to the Office of Admissions and must 
submit an application for admission. When ac- 
cepted, the student must supply to the dean of his 
school a description of the courses which appear 
on the transcript. The student should contact the 
Advisement Office of his school for placement and 
curriculum planning following a reasonable per- 
iod for evaluation of transcript. 

The College of Liberal Arts and Sciences and 
School of Education award 60 semester hours of 
credit to accepted transfer applicants who have an 
Associate Degree in Arts from a regionally accred- 
ited two-year institution. 

Students transferring from a regionally accred- 
ited institution must present academic records 
which show an overall average of C (2.0 on a 4.0 
quality point system). 

Persons seeking admission to the University as 
transfer students from a state approved college 
which does not have regional accreditation must 
have attained a cumulative average of 3.0 based on 
a 4.0 quality point system. In addition, such pro- 



136 



spective students must take the College Entrance 
Examination Board tests and attain the appropri- 
ate scores. 

An intercmc is highly recommended for all transfer 
students and will be required of those studetits which the 
Admissions Office notifies personally. 

TEMPORARY TRANSFERS 

Temporar\' Transfers are students who are en- 
rolled in another college or university but who de- 
sire to take a course or courses at Duquesne for 
one semester. 

No Temporary Transfer Student will be granted 
admission without formal application and an offi- 
cial transcript or permission from an official at the 
University at which the student is enrolled. A 
Temporary Transfer Student must reapply if he/ 
she should desire to take a course or courses at Du- 
quesne University beyond one semester. 

No Temporary Transfer shall be permitted to reg- 
ister for more than two semesters without making 
arrangements to become a permanent transfer. 

SUMMER SESSION 
DUQUESNE STUDENTS 

Any Duquesne University undergraduate student 
who was granted continuance at the close of the 
preceding Spring Semester is authorized to regis- 
ter in the Summer Session. Students who were 
dismissed by their school at the close of the pre- 
ceding Spring Semester for academic reasons may 
register for summer classes by permission of the 
Committee on Student Standing of their school. 
All students must have their course selections ap- 
proved by their academic advisor. 

Graduates and other former students, including 
any who withdrew from the University, must ob- 
tain readmittance before they may register for 
summer classes. 

STUDENTS FROM OTHER 
INSTITUTIONS 

A student of another college or university who 
wishes to enroll for the summer session, and who 
intends thereafter to return to the original institu- 
tion and is eligible to continue there may be admit- 
ted to the Summer Session. A tear-out admissions 
application and registration form for the summer 
study is provided in the announcement of summer 
offerings, which may be obtained from the Office 
of Admissions at mid-March. These students are 
considered to be Temporary Transfer Students. 

ADVANCED PLACEMENT 

Students who have followed the College Entrance 
Examination Board college level program in sec- 
ondary schools and have performed satisfactorily 
in the advanced placement examinations are eligi- 
ble for advanced placement. Duquesne University 
grants credit, as well as placement, for achieve- 
ment that merits such consideration. Subjects in- 
cluded in the program are: English composition. 



history, (American and European), history of art, 
modern foreign languages (French, German, 
Spanish), Latin, mathematics AB, mathematics 
BC, physics B and C, chemistry, biology and com- 
puter science. 

Credit will be given on a minimum advanced 
placement score determined yearly by the College 
of Liberal Arts and Sciences. For current informa- 
tion about the minimal score acceptable for each 
subject and the credits granted, consult with the 
University's Director of Testing Bureau or the Of- 
fice of Academic Advisement, College of Liberal 
Arts and Sciences. 

Applicants who hope to receive advanced place- 
ment credits must request that scores be sent to 
the University. Information about equivalent Uni- 
versity courses for which qualifying students may 
receive credit may be obtained from the Univer- 
sity's Director of Testing Bureau or the Assistant 
Dean for Administration, College of Liberal Arts 
and Sciences. 

COLLEGE LEVEL EXAMINATION 
PROGRAM 

The special examinations for which the College of 
Liberal Arts and Sciences will award credits, with 
acceptable scores, are: , 

1. General Examinations: Humanities, social sci- 
ences. 

2. Subject Examinations: American government, 
American history, analysis and interpretation of 
literature, biology, college algebra, college algebra- 
trigonometry, college composition, computers and 
data processing, elementary computer program- 
ming, FORTRAN IV, general chemistry, general 
psychology, introductory calculus, introductory 
business management, introductory marketing, 
introductory money and banking (only validation 
of comparable course(s) taken at regionally accred- 
ited schools where courses were offered at the 200 
level or above. Students must have completed the 
course(s) with a "c"'or better to be eligible.), intro- 
ductory sociology, microbiology, macro- 
economics, micro-economics, statistics, western 
civilization. 

A student who has accumulated 30 or more 
credits is not eligible to take the General Examina- 
tion for credits. When a student has acquired 60 
credits he will not be given credits on the basis of 
CLEF exams. This total of 60 includes the CLEF 
credit; i.e., if a student has completed 57 credits, 
he could not receive more than 3 credits on CLEF 
exams. The University is continuing to evaluate 
CLEF subject scores and performance at Du- 
quesne. Credit will be given on a minimum score 
determined yearly by the College of Liberal Arts 
and Science. 

Exams must be taken according to the usual pro- 
gression of courses. The exam in College Algebra 
or College Algebra/Trig must be taken before a stu- 
dent registers for Calculus I. 

Information about the time and place that exami- 



137 



nations are given may be obtained from the Uni- 
versity Testing Bureau, or the College Level 
Examination Program, Box 977, Princeton, New 
Jersey 08540. Information about equivalent Uni- 
versity courses for which qualifying students may 
receive credit may be obtained from the Univer- 
sity's Director of Testing Bureau or the Assistant 
Dean for Administration, College of Liberal Arts 
and Sciences. 

CREDIT HOUR BANK 

The Credit Hour Bank is designed for high school 
students and adults who would like to sample col- 
lege courses prior to official enrollment. The maxi- 
mum number of credits that may be taken is 15. 
Credits completed in the Credit Hour Bank are 
held in escrow until the applicant applies and ful- 
fills all regular admission requirements. Upon reg- 
ular admittance, all credits are then evaluated 
toward a degree program. 

To apply to the Credit Hour Bank Program, sub- 
mit the $20 non-refundable application fee, and at- 
tach a letter indicating full comprehension and 
acceptance of the conditions of the Credit Hour 
Bank Program. A form is available for this purpose 
and can be obtained by contacting the office of Ad- 
missions. 

Generally, all first year courses in the College of 
Liberal Arts and Sciences are open to Credit Hour 
Bank students. The School of Music also partici- 
pates in the Credit Hour Bank program providing 
the applicant passes a music audition. 



Financial Aid 

Duquesne University subscribes to the philosophy 
that "no student should be denied the education 
of his/her choice for lack of sufficient financial re- 
sources." The Office of Student Financial Aid has 
been established to help students locate the finan- 
cial support they require. Students and parents 
should not be overwhelmed by the variety and ap- 
parent complexities of modern student financial 
aid. Rather, a patient thorough examination of aid 
opportunities should be undertaken to locate the 
most advantageous forms of assistance available to 
the individual student. 

PRINCIPLES OF AID 

FINANCIAL NEED 

The major criterion of most aid programs is the 
student's need for funds. In general, parents and 
the student are expected to pay the expenses of ed- 
ucation. However, to the extent they cannot rea- 
sonably be expected to meet this expense, there is 
a demonstrated financial need or eligibility for aid. 
Methods of determining need may vary slightly 
among aid sources, but all have the common ob- 
jective of identifying the difference between edu- 
cational costs and the individual family's ability to 



contribute to these costs. The costs considered in- 
clude tuition, fees, room and board or an allow- 
ance for maintenance at home, travel or 
commuting expenses, books, and necessary per- 
sonal expenditures. Need analysis presumes the 
family's ability to contribute to these costs will ap- 
proximate that of families of similar size and finan- 
cial strength, with consideration given for 
individual circumstances. It is extremely impor- 
tant that all financial information reported by the 
family be complete, accurate, and updated for any 
major changes. Such information is considered 
and treated confidentially by aid administrators. 

AWARD CONDITIONS 

All financial aid awards are subject to terms and 
conditions set forth in applications and award no- 
tifications. It is important that the student care- 
fully read all information provided by aid sources 
and promptly notify them of changes pertinent to 
their applications or awards. 

STUDENT SELI^HELP 

As the primary beneficiary of higher education, 
the student is expected to accept at least partial fi- 
nancial responsibility for the cost. This principle is 
reflected in both the determination of need and the 
types of aid available. In determining need, con- 
sideration is given for at least a minimum contri- 
bution to cost from the student's summer 
earnings, savings, and resources. Two types of 
self-help programs of aid are available: loans and 
work. Student loans provide rates, terms, and 
conditions superior to those offered by commer- 
cial lenders, and offer the student the opportunity 
to help himself /herself by accepting future repay- 
ment responsibility. Student employment pro- 
grams provide the opportunity to help earn a 
portion of the educational costs. 

GIFT ASSISTANCE 

Non-repayable scholarships or grants are available 
in accordance with one or a combination of the fol- 
lowing criteria: 1) Financial Need; 2) Superior Aca- 
demic Potential or Achievement; and 3) Special Ability, 
which reflects proficiency in a specialized field or 
activity, such as music, debate, athletics, etc. It 
should be noted that many sources of gift aid ex- 
pect the student to accept some form of self-help 
assistance. 

MEETING STUDENT NEED 

The Financial Aid Office attempts to provide aid 
equal to need for all student applicants. Normally, 
this requires an "aid package" consisting of funds 
from multiple aid sources and programs. Those 
programs which are under the direct control of the 
Aid Office are not usually sufficient to meet full 
need or provide an aid package of the most benefi- 
cial composition. It is expected that students who 
apply for assistance to the University will also ap- 
ply to federal, state, and other available sources. 



138 



PROGRAM FUNDING 

All programs of financial aid are subject to limita- 
tions of available funds. Therefore, in addition to 
the eligibility requirements of a particular pro- 
gram, assistance depends upon the level of fund- 
ing in the program. First consideration always 
goes to applicants who apply within deadline 
dates and who provide complete and accurate infor- 
mation. All programs are subject to change, elimi- 
nation, or replacement. Changes in government 
programs are routine, since these require periodic 
legislative review. 

CURRENT INFORMATION 

Because programs of aid and conditions of eligibil- 
ity do change from time to time, the student 
should attempt to keep abreast of new develop- 
ments. The high school guidance office, the Uni- 
versity Financial Aid Office, and the office of 
education in the student's home state are excellent 
sources of information. Students should avoid the 
error of disqualifying themselves for specific forms 
of aid because of hearsay or dated information. A 
decision not to apply to particular aid source 
should be made only upon the advice of an aid of- 
ficer. 

UNIVERSITY AID 
APPLICATION PROCEDURE 

1. Applicants must be currently enrolled in the 
University or be in the process of applying for ad- 
mission. Incoming students should not wait for of- 
ficial acceptance to the University before applying 
for financial assistance. 

2. Obtain the formal application for financial as- 
sistance. (Freshmen and transfer students may ob- 
tain the form through Admissions Office 
publications or through the Financial Aid Office. 
Currently enrolled students may obtain the form 
only through the Financial Aid Office.) Complete 
this application and submit it to the Financial Aid 
Office. Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, Pennsyl- 
vania 15282 PRIOR to these deadline dates: For the 
Fall Semester or the academic year, no later than 
May 1; for the Spring Semester, no later than De- 
cember 1. Late applicants will be considered on the 
basis of available funds. Students interested in be- 
ing considered for scholarships should submit 
their financial aid application by February 1. 

3. Obtain from the high school guidance office or 
the Financial Aid Office a Financial Need Docu- 
ment. Complete and submit it according to in- 
structions. Statements take four to eight weeks to 
process and therefore should be submitted as early 
as possible. 

4. A reply to this application, if filed by deadline 
dates, should be anticipated as follows: Freshmen 
and new transfers: between mid-February and late 
March (providing student has been accepted for 
admission). Upperclassmen: Replies should be 
anticipated in June or July. 



5. Applications must be filed annually. 

PROGRAMS 

The following programs for which the foregoing 
application procedures apply, are administered di- 
rectly by the Financial Aid Office. 

University Scholars Awards. The University awards 
scholarships annually to exceptional high school 
scholars. These awards are not based on a demon- 
strated need and may be renewed each year pro- 
vided the student maintains a high level of 
academic achievement. The minimum academic 
requirement is a cumulative Quality Point Average 
of 3.0. 

Competitive Scholarships. These awards are given to 
students of outstanding ability and achievement 
who also demonstrate financial need. They are re- 
newable yearly based on continued academic 
achievement, and continued demonstrated need. 
Continued academic achievement is normally re- 
flected by a cumulative Quality Point Average of 
3.0 or above. Renewal amounts may vary relative 
to the level of need. 

Parish Grant-In-Aid Program. Available to incoming 
freshmen from the parishes in the Diocese of Pitts- 
burgh. Students are recommended by their pastor 
to the University's Admissions Office. Awards are 
based on academic achievement and demon- 
strated need. They are renewable yearly based on 
continued academic achievement and continued 
need. Continued academic achievement is nor- 
mally reflected by a cumulative Quality Point Aver- 
age of 2.75 and above. Renewal amounts may vary 
relative to the level of need. 

Spiritan Grant-In-Aid Program. Available to minor- 
ity students who are incoming freshmen. Awards 
are based on academic achievement and demon- 
strated financial need. They are renewable yearly 
based on continued academic achievement and 
continued need. Continued academic achieve- 
ment is normally reflected by a cumulative Quality 
Point Average of 2.75 and above. Renewal amounts 
"may vary relative to the level of need. 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants. Fed- 
eral grant assistance is available to full or half-time 
undergraduate students with financial need. It 
should be noted that due to limited funding, these 
grants are normally awarded only to full-time stu- 
dents. Recipients are selected in accordance with 
guidelines published by the Federal Government. 

National Direct Student Loans. National Direct 
Loans are available to both full-time and half-time 
students who demonstrate financial need and are 
making acceptable progress toward a degree. It 
should be noted that due to limited funding, these 
loans are normally awarded only to full-time stu- 
dents. Recipients are selected in accordance with 
guidelines published by the Federal Government. 
Loan repayment does not begin until six months 
after the borrower terminates at least half-time 



139 



study, and is scheduled over a 10-year period at an 
interest rate of five percent a year. 

Federal Nursing Loans. These loans are available to 
full-time undergraduate nursing students who 
demonstrate financial need and are making ac- 
ceptable progress toward a degree. Recipients are 
selected in accordance with guidelines published 
by the Federal government. Loan repayment does 
not begin until nine months after the borrower ter- 
minates at least half-time study in nursing, and is 
scheduled over a 10-year period at an interest rate 
of six percent a year. 

Health Professions Loans. Health Profession Student 
Loans are available to full-time undergraduate stu- 
dents in the Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy pro- 
gram who demonstrate financial need and are 
making acceptable progress toward a degree. Re- 
cipients are selected in accordance with guidelines 
published by the Federal government. Loan repay- 
ment does not begin until one year after the stu- 
dent ceases to pursue a full-time course of study in 
pharmacy, and is scheduled over a 10-year period 
at an interest rate of nine percent a year. 

Alcoa Loan Fund. Loan fund established through 
the Alcoa Foundation. Awarded to full-time stu- 
dents who demonstrate financial need. Repay- 
ment begins 6 months after termination of 
enrollment, with a 5 year repayment period. Inter- 
est rate is 9 percent. 

Gulf Loan Fund. Loan fund established through the 
Gulf Oil Corporation. Awarded to full-time stu- 
dents who demonstrate financial need. Repay- 
ment begins 6 months after termination of 
enrollment, with a 5 year repayment period. Inter- 
est rate is 4 percent. Funds are normally awarded 
to students in their final year who have exhausted 
other loan eligibility. 

Student Employment. Two programs of employ- 
ment are available to financial aid applicants who 
demonstrate need. The first is the College Work- 
Study Program which is financed principally by 
Federal appropriations and awarded as aid in ac- 
cordance with guidelines published by the Federal 
government. The second program is referred to as 
the General Program which is funded by the Uni- 
versity. In addition to considerations of financial 
need, placement in a part-time position depends 
upon the student's qualifications for performing 
successfully in the job. Student employment is 
limited to maximum of fifteen working hours a 
week when classes are in session. Students work- 
ing under either program may not retain outside 
jobs during academic periods. 

OTHER SOURCES OF AID 
PELL GRANT PROGRAM 

Direct grant assistance through the Federal gov- 
ernment is available to undergraduates based on 
an eligibility determination reviewed and adjusted 
each year by Congress. All undergraduates are ad- 



vised to apply for this form of aid. Student receiv- 
ing aid through the University are required to 
apply for a Pell Grant. Necessary forms may be ob- 
tained through the Financial Aid Office or the 
High School Guidance Office. 

STATE GRANT ASSISTANCE 

General: Depending upon the student's legal state 
of residence, direct grant assistance from the state 
may be available for study at Duquesne Univer- 
sity. 

Non-Pennsylvania residents should contact their 
high school guidance counselor or state Depart- 
ment of Education to determine if grants are avail- 
able, and to determine application procedures. 

Pennsylvania residents should obtain the State 
Grant Application from high school guidance of- 
fices, the University Financial Aid Office, or the 
Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance 
Agency (PHEAA). At current levels, grant ranging 
from $100 to $1500 a year are available to full-time 
undergraduate students, based on considerations 
of financial need. Filing deadline is normally May 
1. 

GUARANTEED STUDENT LOANS 

This program provides long-term, low interest stu- 
dent loans available through the cooperative ef- 
forts of federal and state governments and 
participating private lending institutions. These 
loans are available to students enrolled in an insti- 
tution of higher learning on at least a half-time ba- 
sis. They are provided by commercial lending 
institutions in every state. To apply, the student 
should inquire at a local lending institution where 
the student or parents have an account. The maxi- 
mum that an undergraduate student may borrow 
for any academic level is $2,500. A four to six week 
processing period should be anticipated. 

Parent Loans for Undergraduate Students/ 
Auxiliary Loans to Assist Students. Loans are 
available to parents of DEPENDENT undergradu- 
ate students; INDEPENDENT undergraduates 
and graduates may apply themselves. The maxi- 
mum amount that can be borrowed for any aca- 
demic level is $3000. Repayment begins 60 days 
after disbursement of funds. Applications and in- 
formation are available through banks and other 
lending institutions. 

OTHER POSSIBILITIES 

In addition to mass programs of aid previously de- 
scribed, financial assistance may be obtained from 
a wide variety of sources. Since application proce- 
dures and requirements differ greatly, it is not pos- 
sible to provide specific information. In general 
the student seeking potential sources of aid may 
inquire of: 1) high school guidance counselors; 2) 
parents' employers or labor unions; 3) fraternal, 
social, religious or professional organizations; 4) 
major organizations utilizing the skills of the field 



140 



for which the student is preparing; and 5) specific 
departments within the University. 

AID FROM DEPARTMENTS AND 
SCHOOLS 

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS AND 
SCIENCES 

Pittsburgh Communications Foundation Loans. The 
Foundation has established a loan fund for deserv- 
ing junior and senior full-time students in the De- 
partment of Journalism. Students will be required 
to repay the loan within two years after graduation 
at three percent a year. Such loans will be granted 
on the recommendation of the Chairman of the 
Journalism Department assisted by the Journalism 
faculty. Loan inquiries and applications should be 
made to the Chairman of the Department of Jour- 
nalism. 

The Eleanor Polis Capone Memorial Award. The 
award honors, in perpetuity, the memory of 
Eleanor P. Capone. The scholarship consists of the 
total annual income from a restricted growth en- 
dowment fund and is awarded to an undergradu- 
ate student enrolled at the University, who will be 
selected on the basis of merit in the field of creative 
writing, with need a secondary consideration. In- 
terested students should contact the Chairman. 
Honors and Awards Committee, English Depart- 
ment, prior to January 15. 

Andrew Kowra Memorial Scholarship. This award 
was established to honor, in perpetuity, the mem- 
ory of Andrew Kozora. Full-time third or fourth 
year students enrolled at Duquesne University 
and having declared a major field of study to be 
either Physics or Mathematics, are eligible for such 
scholarship. The primary considerations will be fi- 
nancial need with academic achievement second- 
ary. Recipients are selected by the University's 
Director of Financial Aid upon nominations by the 
Chairman of the Physics or Mathematics Depart- 
ments after they have previously consulted with 
the Dean of the College of Arts and Sciences. 

The Rev. Joseph A. Lauritis, C.S.Sp., Journalism 
Scholarship. This is an annual scholarship in tribute 
to the Rev. Joseph A. Lauritis, C.S.Sp., founder of 
the Department of Journalism and the University's 
radio station, WDUQ-FM. It is available to a fresh- 
man entering Duquesne University who is plan- 
ning to major in journalism. The award is 
administered by the Lauritis Scholarship Commit- 
tee of Journalism faculty and friends. Deadline for 
application is April 1. 

Edward T. Leech Scholarship. This annual scholar- 
ship was established in 1971 by the Scripps- 
Howard Foundation for journalism junior/senior 
students who demonstrate outstanding academic 
promise, concurrent financial need, and are pre- 
paring for a journalism career in the newspaper or 
broadcasting fields. It is administered by the fac- 
ulty of the Department of Journalism. 



Colecchia Scholarship Azvard. The award honors in 
perpetuity, the memory of Albert and Ambrosina 
Colecchia. The Scholarship award is available to 
juniors and seniors in the undergraduate College 
of Arts and Sciences majoring in any of the follow- 
ing disciplines: Modern Language, Literature, the 
Classics, Philosophy, English, Math, Chemistry, 
Computer Sciences, Physics, or Biology. All recipi- 
ents must be full-time students of proven scholas- 
tic achievement, be of good moral character, and 
demonstrate a potential for leadership. The schol- 
arship is awarded annually. 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS AND 
ADMINISTRATION 

Alcoa Scholarships. Two awards are made annually, 
one in transportation, and one in accounting, to 
undergraduate students in the School of Business 
and Administration. Recipients are selected by the 
School on the basis of academic achievement. 

Ryan Homes Scholarship. This award is made to an 
undergraduate senior student in production. Re- 
cipient is selected by the School based upon aca- 
demic achievement. 

Traffic Club of Pittsburgh Scholarship. This award is 
made to an undergraduate student in transpor- 
tion. Recipient is selected by the School based 
upon academic achievement. 

Charles E. Artzberger Memorial Scholarship. 
Awarded to needy students in the School of Busi- 
ness. Applications available from Financial Aid 
Office. 

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

School of Education Scholarships are available to 
freshmen and transfer students who were among 
the top fifth of their high school class or who main- 
tained a 3.0 high school average. Transfer students 
applying for these scholarships must have a "B" 
average from the school, they last attended. Appli- 
cants are required to submit three recommenda- 
tions representing the areas of academic 
performance and personal achievement. An inter- 
view is also required to discuss individual percep- 
tions and ideals, as well as a statement of career 
goals. Freshmen applicants must have an SAT 
score of at least 900, with a minimum of 400 on any 
one test. Transfer applicants must be new students 
to Duquesne. To apply, contact the School of Edu- 
cation. For renewal requirements and procedures 
contact the Office of Financial Aid. 

Lawrence Roche Memorial Scholarship. The award 
will be made to a student who, as a junior in the 
School of Education, has in the judgment of the 
Awards Committee, demonstrated those qualities 
of scholarship, character, and professionalism 
which merit special recognition. The awardee 
must have a minimum Quality Point Average of 3.0 
at the time of application. The student must be of- 



141 



ficially registered as a senior in the School of Edu- 
cation of the University at the time of receiving the 
award. Applications must be submitted to the 
Dean's office no later than March 1. 

SCHOOL OF MUSIC 

Women's Advisory Board Scholarships. This fund pro- 
vides scholarships in varying amounts each year 
to vocal performers. These scholarships are availa- 
ble to entering freshmen and upperclassmen. 

]a22 Scholarship. Available to all full-time under- 
graduate music students involved in the jazz pro- 
gram. Applications available in the Dean's Office. 

George Barrere Memorial Scholarship. The Pittsburgh 
Flute Club offers a scholarship in flute in memory 
of George Barrere, founder of the first flute club in 
the United States. This $300 scholarship is 
awarded to a freshman or a sophomore flute ma- 
jor. 

Polish Arts League Scholarship. This award is made 
annually by the Polish Arts League of Pittsburgh 
to an outstanding performer in the School of Mu- 
sic. Preference will be given to a student of Polish 
ancestry. Other students will not be excluded from 
consideration. 

Music School Scholarships. These awards are made 
possible by donations from individuals and orga- 
nizations in appreciation of performances by 
School of Music students. 

University Solo Wind Scholarships. These scholar- 
ships in varying amounts are awarded only to po- 
tential "First Chair" performers. 

University String Scholarships. These scholarships 
for tuition and applied music fees have been estab- 
lished by the University to promote the study of 
string instruments. 

Pittsburgh Flute Club Award. This award is given to 
an outstanding woodwind student. 

University Piano Scholarships. These scholarships 
are awarded to students showing outstanding tal- 
ent in piano. 

Robert Minardi Memorial Scholarship Fund. Awarded 
to needy undergraduate Music students, with aca- 
demic considerations a secondary criterion. Recip- 
ients are selected by the School of Music, but must 
also file application through the Financial Aid Of- 
fice. 



SCHOOL OF NURSING 

Behan Scholarship. The R. J. Behan Annual Nursing 
Scholarship is a $500 scholarship awarded annu- 
ally to a nursing student who is in good academic 
standing. The award is based on need, profes- 
sional involvement and future aspirations. Stu- 
dents may apply in the School of Nursing in early 
fall. 



SCHOOL OF PHARMACY 

Women of Galen. The Women's Auxiliary of the Ga- 
len Pharmaceutical Society of Pittsburgh annually 
provides scholarship funds to be awarded to de- 
serving pharmacy students in their last years of at- 
tendance in the School of Pharmacy. 

Beaver County Pharmaceutical Association Grant and 
Aid Fund. This revolving loan fund provides finan- 
cial assistance to students in the School of Phar- 
macy who are residents of Beaver County, 
Pennsylvania. Applications are to be made to the 
Dean of the School of Pharmacy. 

Samuel W. Curtis Loan Fund. This fund is intended 
to provide financial assistance for students in the 
School of Pharmacy. 

Chilson Loan Fund. A revolving loan fund estab- 
lished in 1946 through the generosity of Francis P. 
Chilson and expanded by the contributions of 
Pharmacy alumni provides financial assistance to 
worthy students in the School of Pharmacy. 

Joel P. Laughlin Scholarship. In honor of Joel P. 
Laughlin, a fraternity brother whose life was ter- 
minated early in his professional program. The 
Graduate Chapter of Phi Delta Chi annually 
awards three $200 scholarships to one fraternity 
brother in each of the three professional years. The 
recipients must have demonstrated academic 
achievement and active participation in the func- 
tion of the Fraternity. 

Peter and Dorothy Manzione Memorial Fund. A re- 
volving fund, donated by Rosetta and Geraldine 
Manzione and friends of the family, is available to 
all students in the School of Pharmacy. 

Clinton Eddy Goodwin Memorial Scholarship. This 
scholarship was established to honor the memory 
of Clinton Eddy Goodwin by making annual 
awards to deserving Pharmacy students. Candi- 
dates must be a declared Pharmacy major, attained 
a minimum quality point average and have an in- 
terest in and demonstrated support of the Univer- 
sity's Athletic Program. Apply through the Dean 
of Students Office. 

Mary McPartland Beck Scholarship Award. Scholar- 
ship funds are available from earnings on a fund 
started by a bequest to the School of Pharmacy in 
1970. 

NARD Foundation. Established by the National As- 
sociation of Retail Druggists. This foundation pro- 
vides loans to students of pharmacy in their last 
five semesters for payment of tuition, fees, and 
books. 

Galen Pharmaceutical Society Loan Fund. This revolv- 
ing fund was established in 1963 for the purpose of 
providing financial assistance to worthy students 
of pharmacy during times of urgent financial dis- 
tress. 

Fred Schiller Loan Fund. This loan fund was 
founded by Mr. Fred Schiller, Pittsburgh pharma- 
cist, in memory of the late Emanuel Spector, for 



142 



worthy and qualified students in the School of 
Pharmacy. This revolving fund makes available tu- 
ition loans of var)'ing amounts depending on the 
applicant's need and general ability. 

John Clothier Sims Memorial Fund. This revolving 
fund, established in 1954, was made possible 
through the generosity of the friends of the late 
Mr. Sims, executive of Sun Drug (now Eckerd) 
Company, Pittsburgh. Partial tuition loans are 
made available to students under the conditions 
that applv to the Fred Schiller Loan Fund. 

Pittsburgh Graduate Chapter of Kappa Psi Pharmaceu- 
tical Fraternity. Maintains a revolving loan fund for 
members of the undergraduate chapters. Details 
are available from the School of Pharmacy. 

Rite Aid Scholarship. Scholarships from the Rite Aid 
Corporation available to students entering the fi- 
nal year of the pharmacy program. Selection is 
based on financial need, demonstration of normal 
progress, and good standing in the pharmacy pro- 
gram. 

Tau Alumni Chapter of Lambda Kappa Sigma. This 
professional Pharmacy fraternity for women has 
established financial awards for members in their 
last three years of the pharmacy program. Awards 
are based on financial need and participation in 
the organization. 

Dr. B. Olive Cole Graduate Educational Grant. A $300 
grant is offered by Lafnbda Kappa Sigma to finan- 
cially assist an alumnae member who is enrolled in 
a program of graduate study and research in the 
pharmaceutical sciences. Applications must be re- 
ceived by the chairman of the grant committee by 
November 15. Applications are available in the 
School of Pharmacy Office. 

Burroughs Wellcome Loan Fund. A revolving loan 
fund established by donations of Pharmacy 
alumni who are awarded Burrows Wellcome Edu- 
cational Grants. Interest-free loans are available to 
qualified Pharmacy students. 

Gray Drug Fair, Inc. Scholarship Fund. Educational 
grants are available to qualified Pharmacy stu- 
dents, based on good academic standing and nor- 
mal progress in the pharmacy program and 
demonstrated financial need. 

WONARD Scholarship. The Women's Organization 
of the National Association of Retail Druggists of- 
fers annual scholarships for pharmacy study in ac- 
credited colleges within the United States. The 
award amount is determined by the established 
need and the academic standing of the applicant. 
Apply directly to WONARD by June 1. 

Thrift Drug Company Scholarship Fund. Scholar- 
ships are awarded annually to deserving Phar- 
macy students who are entering the third or fourth 
year in the B. S. in Pharmacy curriculum. Selec- 
tion is based on a combination of scholarship and 
need and a demonstrated interest in community 
pharmacy practice. 



Geraldine (Muia) Furgiuele Scholarship Fund. A me- 
morial scholarship fund to honor Geraldine 
(Muia) Furgiuele, P'50. The fund will provide 
scholarships for needy and deserving female stu- 
dents in the School of Pharmacy. 

Rosemarie Bevacqua Scholarship Fund. A memorial 
scholarship fund to honor Rosemarie Bevacqua, 
P'55, which will provide financial assistance to 
needy and deserving Pharmacy students. 

School of Pharmacy Alumni Scholarship Fund. Schol- 
arships are made available to needy and academi- 
cally deserving Pharmacy students through the 
generous support of the alumni of the School of 
Pharmacy. Requests for financial assistance should 
be directed to the School of Pharmacy Faculty 
Scholarship Committee, Office of the Dean. 

School of Pharmacy Class of 1959 Scholarship Fund. A 
scholarship, established on the 25th anniversary of 
the graduation of the Class of 1959, to be awarded 
annually to a deserving and needy final-year Phar- 
macy student. 

National Association of Chain Drug Stores Pharmacy 
Education Foundation Scholarship. One scholarship 
awarded annually to a Pharmacy student in the 
fourth or fifth year of the B. S. in Pharmacy curric- 
ulum, who has expressed an interest in commu- 
nity pharmacy practice. 

American Pharmaceutical Association Auxiliary Irene 
Parks Loan Fund. Loan funds available to Pharmacy 
students in the final two years of the B. S. in Phar- 
macy degree program. 

GENERAL 

The Pittsburgh /Centennial Scholarship was created at 
the close of Duquesne University's Centennial 
year (1978) in the spirit of the University's found- 
ing mission to provide ready access to higher edu- 
cation for all. The scholarship will be provided to 
deserving students who have demonstrated high 
academic performance and need. Emphasis will be 
on performance in selection of recipient. Inquiries 
should be directed to the Office pi Financial Aid. 

DUSSO Scholarship Fund. Annually the Duquesne 
University Student Scholarship Organization 
sponsors scholarships to help make it possible for 
deserving students to attend Duquesne. Appli- 
cants must be enrolled on a full-time basis, show 
proven academic ability, be of good moral charac- 
ter, and demonstrate financial need. Application 
materials may be obtained through the SGA office 
and must be filed by April 1. 

McCloskey Memorial Fund is awarded to students 
who have demonstrated scholastic ability, good 
character, and volunteer service to the community. 
Applications are to be made directly to the Office 
of the Dean of Students. 

Vira I. Heinz Travel Award. This fund was estab- 
lished to provide an educational and cultural op- 
portunity for promising young women students. 



143 



Recipients are selected on the basis of academic 
achievement and evidence of interest in intercul- 
tural or international relations. Inquiries should be 
directed to the Office of the Dean of Students. 

Nathan and Harry Daly Scholarship. This is an an- 
nual award that is to be made to "such deserving 
person or persons from Butler County, Pennsylva- 
nia attending Duquesne University." Selection is 
made by a committee upon the recommendation 
of the University's Financial Aid Office. Candi- 
dates are considered for academic achievement 
and financial need. Interested students should ap- 
ply through the Financial Aid Office. 

Elizabeth Elsie McDonough Scholarship. This award 
was established to assist needy students from Al- 
legheny County to continue their educational en- 
deavors at Duquesne University. Recipients are 
selected by the University and awards are based 
on both academic achievement and financial need. 

Minnie Hyman Scholarship. A gift from the Hyman 
Family Foundation. Awards are based on academic 
criteria and need. The amount of the awards var- 
ies. Recipients are selected by the Financial Aid 
Office and the Hyman Family Foundation. Inter- 
ested students should apply through the Financial 
Aid Office. 

James H. and Margaret Lavelle Ferry Memorial Scholar- 
ship. This award was established to honor, in per- 
petuity, the memory of James H. and Margaret 
Lavelle Ferry by awarding annually a prize to a de- 
serving student in their name. Recipients are se- 
lected by the University, with the primary 
consideraton being financial need and academic 
achievement as a secondary consideration. Recipi- 
ents must be enrolled as undergraduate students. 
Interested students should apply through the Fi- 
nancial Aid Office. 

Louis and Ida Amdursky and Benjamin Amdursky Me- 
morial Fund. This fund was established to assist 
Jewish students who are residents of Allegheny 
County. Recommendations are made by the Uni- 
versity to the Trustees of the fund, and are on the 
basis of merit and need. Interested students 
should apply through the Financial Aid Office. 

/. VV^ Rahde Memorial Scholarship Fund. A fnud in 
honor of J. W. and Ruth Lewis Rahde in recogni- 
tion of their long-time affection for the City of 
Pittsburgh. Factors to be considered for selection 
include leadership qualities, good character, 
strong potential for civic contributions (especially 
to the City of Pittsburgh) and the ability to relate 
well with others. Interested students should reply 
through the Financial Aid Office. 

Stella and Charles Guttman Scholarship Foundation. 
Awards are based on need with academic consid- 
erations secondary. Interested students should ap- 
ply through the Financial Aid Office. 

John Joseph Mongillo Memorial Scholarship Fund. 
Awards are based on financial need. The fund was 
established through a gift to the University from 



Marie Locher in memory of her brother, John 
Mongillo. Interested students should apply 
through the Financial Aid Office. 

Century Club Scholarship. Awarded to needy stu- 
dents in their final undergraduate year. QPA of 3.5 
or higher is required. Applications available from 
Financial Aid Office. 

Monsignor Michael J. Conroy Endowed Scholarship 
Fund. Awarded to needy, full-time undergraduate 
student who is a child of a member, or a member, 
of Our Lady of Grace Parish. Eligible students 
must apply through Our Lady of Grace Parish and 
the Financial Aid Office. 

Hungarian Heritage Endowed Scholarship Fund. 
Awarded to student in the College of Arts and Sci- 
ences or the School of Music, based on need and 
academic achievement. Order of selection will be 
(1) Student from Hungary; (2) Student studying in 
Hungary; (3) Student studying Hungarian; (4) 
Student of Hungarian Heritage; and, (5) a needy 
and worthy student of any cultural derivation if 
there are no students who qualify under the first 
four categories. Applications available from Finan- 
cial Aid Office . 

Frank H. Kirk Memorial Scholarship Endowment 
Fund. Awarded to needy and deserving students. 
Applications available from Financial Aid Office. 

Mary H. & Peter Loftus Scholarship Fund. Awarded 
to needy and deserving students. Applications 
available from Financial Aid Office. 

James L. & Paul L. McGrath Scholarship. Awarded to 
needy and deserving students. Applications avail- 
able from Financial Aid Office. 

William J. Hart Scholarship. Awarded to needy stu- 
dents for books and personal expenses. Award can 
also be used for room and board. Applications 
available from Financial Aid Office. 

Jerry Smith, II Memorial Scholarship Award. 
Awarded to needy students with average grade 
point average. Applications available from Finan- 
cial Aid Of fice . 

Springhill Foundation. Awards for Wayne County 
Residents, with consideration given to children of 
employees or residents of Sterling Township. 
Q.P.A. of 2.6 required for renewal. Applications 
available from Financial Aid Office. 

Maria B. Statler Trust. Awarded to needy and de- 
serving students. Applications available from Fi- 
nancial Aid Office. 

Donald L. Very Memorial Scholarship. Awarded to 
needy students who have demonstrated academic 
achievement. Applications available from Finan- 
cial Aid Office. 

Rev. Joseph A. Young Endowed Scholarship Fund. 
Awarded to needy and worthy students. Prefer- 
ence given to members of St. Aloysius Parish, 
Pittsburgh. Applications available from Financial 
Aid Office. 



144 



Allan Reynolds Memorial Fund. Awarded to needy 
and deserving students. Applications available 
from Financial Aid Office. 

UNIVERSITY DISCOUNTT 

Clergy /Religious Disanmt. Members of University- 
recognized Christian and Jewish Religions, who 
have been ordained or professed, may be eligible 
to receive a discount of one-half tuition for under- 
graduate or graduate studies. 

Restrictions 

1. University fees, laboratory costs, room and 
board, and other non-tuition related expenses will 
be charged at full rate. Discount is one-half tuition 
only. 

2. Only one Duquesne degree may be obtained 
utilizing the discount and no other form of dis- 
count or remission may be received simultane- 
ously. 

3. Discount is not extended for studies in the In- 
stitute of Formative Spirituality, Law School, Mas- 
ter of Liberal Studies, doctoral degree programs, 
or any disignated special programs with differen- 
tial rates. 

Catholic School Lay Teacher Discount. Full-time 
teachers in catholic schools, who have completed a 
minimum of two years teaching at an approved di- 
ocesan school, may be eligible to receive a dis- 



count of one-half tuition for undergraduate or 
graduate studies. The same restrictions indicated 
under the section on clergy/religious discounts ap- 
ply. 

Senior Citizen Discount. Men and women who are 
60 years of age or older may be eligible to receive a 
discount of one-half tuition for undergraduate or 
graduate studies. The same restrictions indicated 
under the section on clergy/religious discounts ap- 
ply 

RESERVE OFFICER TRAINING CORPS 
(ROTO SCHOLARSHIPS 

Army ROTC offers a number of four-year scholar- 
ships for qualified students on a very competitive 
basis. These scholarships pay for tuition, fees, re- 
quired textbooks, and other purely academic ex- 
penses as well as providing a $100 per month 
subsistence allowance. Interested high school stu- 
dents may apply by writing: Army ROTC, Du- 
quesne University, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, 
15282. The application period begins in April of 
the student's junior year and ends in December of 
their senior year. 

For students already enrolled at Duquesne Uni- 
versity, three-year and two-year scholarships are 
available. Individuals need not be participating in 
the ROTC program to apply. For additional infor- 
mation, contact the Military Science Department 
at 434-6664. 




145 

Tuition and Fees 

The University reserv-es the right to change tuition and fee charges if exigencies require such action. The 
figures shown apply to the 1986-87 term only, unless otherwise indicated. 

TUITION 

Undergraduate Tuition for each semester hour credit $198 

Graduate Tuition for each semester hour credit $209 

Auditors pay the same as students taking courses for credits. 

FEES 

Application (non-refundable) $20 

Matriculation Deposit (non-refundable) 100 

Residence Hall Pre-Payment (non-refundable) 150 

Change of Schedule for processing each form 5 

Credit by Examination for each semester hour for recognition of proficiency 

of course credit (See policy in Section VI, page 144) 20 

Orientation (New Students) 25 

Late Registration 25 

Removal of I Grade 5 

Registration Correction Fee 15 

Continuing Registration Fee 50 

*Undergraduate Business and Administration Student 

when carr}'ing 12 or more credits 5 

Less than 12 credits 3 

*Undergraduate Music Student when carry^ing 

12 or more credits 50 

*School of Pharmacy Undergraduate Fee 150 

*Undergraduate Pharmacy Student Activities (for Third, 

Fourth, and Fifth Year Students) 30 

*University Fee $11 per credit 

*Charged on each semester registration. 




146 

LABORATORY FEES 

All amounts are for one semester; where applicable, the yearly charge is double. In addition to the labora- 
tory fee, some programs also require a breakage charge of $15.00 a semester; this is proportionately re- 
fundable, depending upon the loses incurred. 

Laboratory fees apply to the 1985-1986 academic year. 

Biology (each laboratory) $35 

Business 491 (Simulation) 5 

Chemistry (each laboratory) 50 

Computer Science 10 

Education 232, 315, 317 10 

English 203, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 385 5 

English 439, 379 10 

Journalism 330, 380, 405, 409, 485 10 

Journalism 367, 369, 370, 379, 381, 413 15 

Journalism 375, 267, 268, 378 25 

Mathematics 307, 308 10 

Music-Applied Music Major 220 

Music-Applied Music Minor 110 

Music-Class Piano 35 

Music-Class Methods 35 

Music-Ensemble 35 

Music-Sacred Music Choir 75 

Music-Seminar 35 

Music-Therapy Practicum 35 

Personal Computer Writing 15 

Pharmacy 301, 302, 306, 309, 317, 319 40 

Physics (each laboratory) 40 

Speech 101, 204, 206, 208, 220, 251, 263, 264, 302, 311, 351 5 

Graduate Biology With Laboratory 35 

Graduate Chemistry 520, 561 40 

Graduate Classics 551 170 

Graduate Communications 512 25 

Graduate Modem Languages 051 & 052 170 

Graduate Psychology 571 15 

Graduate Pharmacy (each laboratory) 501, 502, 521, 522, 539, 540, 541, 542, 565, 671 30 

Graduate Education 512, 692, 693 10 

Graduate Education 515, 516, 517, 518 15 

Graduate Music Major 220 

Graduate Music Minors 110 

**Laboratory Breakage Fee 15 

One breakage card per semester will cover laboratory breakage in Chemistry. 

SUMMER AND SPECIAL SESSION TUITION AND FEE CHARGES 

Undergraduate Tuition for each semester hour credit $198 

Graduate Tuition for each semester hour credit $209 

University Fee $11 per credit 

GRADUATION FEES 

Bachelor Degree $30.00 

Master Degree 40.00 

Doctor of Pharmacy Degree 40.00 

Juris Doctor Degree 85.00 

Doctor of Philosophy Degree 55.00 

Thesis Binding Fee -Doctoral Dissertation 93.50 

Thesis Binding Fee -Master Thesis 83.50 



147 



WITHDRAWAL AND TERMINATION OF 
ATTENDANCE 

Upon officially withdrawing from the University, a 
student receives remission of part of the tuition 
charged for the semester or session in accordance 
with the Tuition Remission Schedule. The amount 
of the remission is added to payments, and a re- 
fund is made upon request where a credit balance 
is created on the student's total account. 

The Effective Date of Withdrawal for determin- 
ing the percent of remission is that on which the 
appropriate Academic Dean was notified by letter 
of the student's decision to terminate attendance 
and requested official withdrawal. It is also the re- 
corded date of the student's separation from the 
University and regarded as the last day of attend- 
ance. A student is considered enrolled and "in at- 
tendance" until he or she acts to terminate 
attendance in conformity with this policy even 
though absences from classes were observed and 
recorded before the Effective Date of Withdrawal. 

When a student's attendance is involuntarily ter- 
minated in a semester because of personal disabil- 
ity arising from injury or illness, any remission of 
tuition beyond the limits prescribed by the with- 
drawal refund policy is subject first to the approval 
of the Academic Dean, then the Vice President for 
Academic Affairs, and finally, the Vice President 
for Business and Management. 

TUITION REMISSION SCHEDULE 

This schedule applies to tuition only; it does not 
apply to other charges, such as the University Fee, 
course fee, and laboratory fees, nor to the reduc- 
tion of credits resulting from course withdrawals 
made after the Change of Schedule period. 

Within the Semester Percent of Remission 

First Week 80 

Second Week 80 

Third Week 40 

Fourth Week 20 

After Fourth Week None 

Within the Summer Session — Based on a 
Six Week Session Standard 

First Week 60 

Second Week 20 

After Second Week None 

ROOM AND BOARD 

The request for on-campus residence is made on 
the same form used for application for admission 
to the University. After the student has completed 
the admission procedure and has paid the matric- 
ulation deposit, the residency request is referred 
automatically to the Assistant Director of Resi- 
dence Life. The request is processed and necessary 
application forms are forwarded to the student. 

The University requires that a prepayment of 
$150, which is applicable to the following semes- 
ter's room and board account, accompany all ap- 
plications for room reservations or renewals. This 
pre-payment is non-refundable. 



Reservations are made on a semester basis - 
August to December, January to May. Rooms may 
be occupied no earlier than noon of the day pre- 
ceding the beginning of the orientation or registra- 
tion periods. 

Room assignments are made on a first-come, 
first-serve basis. Therefore, it is extremely impor- 
tant for the student to return his/her housing ap- 
plication immediately upon receipt of it. 
Over-crowded conditions have occurred in the 
past and students have been temporarily assigned 
three to a room or in lounges. Therefore, students 
returning their applications after all rooms have 
been assigned will be housed in temporary hous- 
ing, be placed on a waiting list, or not assigned a 
space in the residence area. 

All students occupying rooms in the University 
residence halls are required to take their meals at 
the Resident Dining Hall. Charges are for 20 meals 
a week, with meals served commencing with the 
evening meal of the day before the first day of 
classes. A commuter meal plan and a 14-meal plan 
for sophomores, juniors and seniors are also avail- 
able. 

Residence Halls are closed during vacation 
(Thanksgiving, Christmas and Easter) periods. 

All resident students must present evidence of 
health and accident insurance coverage; such cov- 
erage is available through the University. 

The University reserves the right to modify these 
charges if exigencies require such action. 

Regular Session— Room and Board (20 meals a 
week; includes cleaning public damage, health 
services fees) 

Single for each semester $1,825.00 

Double for each semester $1,524.00 

Summer Sessions— Room and Board* 

6 Weeks $713.16 (Single Room and Board) 

$592.62 (Double Room and Board) 
8 Weeks $950.88 (Single Room and Board) 

$790.16 (Double Room and Board) 

ROOM AND BOARD- WITHDRAWAL 
AND REFUND 

A resident student must notify the Assistant Di- 
rector of Residence Life in advance of the planned 
withdrawal. No refund of room charges will be 
made where withdrawal occurs after the opening 
classes. In the event of withdrawal, board will be 
refunded at the rate of 75 per cent of the balance 
remaining on the student's meal plan, up until 
mid-semester. After the mid-semester point, no re- 
fund will be made. No reduction of charges nor 
refund of payments to which a student may have 
been otherwise entitled will be made if withdrawal 
is not in accordance with the official withdrawal 
procedure. 

No student is permitted to remain in the resi- 
dence halls after academic withdrawal from the 
University has been completed. 



''Those desiring residency for the Summer Session should make 



148 



resen^atious with the Assistant Dirtxtor of Resideucc Life three 
weeks prior to opetiitig date of your session. A non-refundable 
deposit of $20 must accompany each application. After occu- 
pancy, the def.K)sit is applied toward the room and board ex- 
penses. This deposit is not refunded if the room is not occupied. 
Rates shown are for 1985 summer session only. For day rates 
and three, four and five week rates, contact the Office of Resi- 
dence Life. 

FINANCIAL MATTERS 

All charges for tuition, fees, room and board, less 
financial assistance authorized by the Financial 
Aid Office, are payable at registration. For your 
convenience, MasterCard and VISA (Bank Ameri- 
card) can be utilized to pay tuition and fees. 

BILLING PROBLEMS 

Take the billing statement to the office indicated for 
an explanation or correction concerning these bill- 
ing matters. 

a) Balance Forward, Credits, Payments 
Deposits- Accounts Receivable Office. 

b) Financial Aid Awards, Federal Loans, Guar- 
anty Loans, and Employer Billing— Office of 
the Director of Financial Aid. 

c) Student Finance Program, (Deferred Pay- 
ment Flan) -Accounts Receivable Office. 

d) Housing Reservations and Housing 
Charges -O^'ce of the Assistant Dean of Resi- 
dence Life. 



STUDENT FINANCING PROGRAM: 

(All prior balances must be paid in full before the 
student is eligible for this plan.) Duquesne Univer- 
sity students desiring payment of their tuition and 
other charges for the semester by installment, con- 
tact in person the Student Finance Section at Final 
Registration. The Student Financing Program pro- 
vides financing for up to 50*^0 of the current se- 
mester charges less financial aid authorized and 
other payments, to be repaid to the University in 
two equal installments. Interest is charged at the 
rate of 2/3 of 1% per month. A delinquency charge 
on each monthly installment in default for a period 
of ten days or more will be charged in an amount 
equal to 5*Vo of such installment or $5.00, which- 
ever is less, except that a minimum charge of $1.00 
may be made. 

CASHING CHECKS 

A student may cash a check up to a maximum of 
$50 at the Cashier's Office on the Ground Floor of 
the Administration Building between 9:00 A.M. 
and 4:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, except 
during registration, with a validated ID Card for 
the current semester. 

BAD CHECKS 

It is the policy of the University to charge bad 
checks to the student who cashes them regardless 
of the maker. A $3.00 service charge will be as- 
sessed on checks that are returned from a bank for 
lack of funds. 




149 



Part VI: 

Registration and 
Scholastic Policies 

REGISTRATION 

Students who attend the Fall Semester, which be- 
gins in late August, receive academic advisement 
and register for classes during the preceeding 
months of April, May, June, and July. Spring Se- 
mester students register in the Fall Semester dur- 
ing November and early December. 

Orientation programs for new students are con- 
ducted by the schools in late spring and summer 
in conjunction with academic advisement and reg- 
istration. 

A comprehensive invoice that confirms the class 
schedule of courses for which the student is regis- 
tered and lists fees, tuition, dormitory charge, de- 
posits, financial aid awards, and balance due is 
mailed to the student at his or her permanent ad- 
dress a month before classes begin, thus enabling 
the student or parent to make payment by mail. 

A three-day final registration for students who 
have neither obtained registration for classes nor 
concluded financial arrangements is held just be- 
fore the opening of classes. 

The financial obligation for class places reserved 
by a registered student who does not subse- 
quently attend cannot be canceled unless written 
notification of the decision not to attend is given to 
the Registrar before the first class day. Notification 
received on or after the opening day of classes is 
subject to the official withdrawal policy. With- 
drawal from room and board reservation contracts 
is to be made in accordance with the provisions of 
the contract. See Room and Board — Withdrawal Re- 
fund, page 147 of this catalog. 

OFFICIAL REGISTRATION 

Only students who are recognized as officially regis- 
tered are bona fide students of Duquesne Univer- 
sity. Unless students are officially registered, they 
are not permitted to attend classes, engage in stu- 
dent affairs, or, generally, have access to the build- 
ings and grounds or use of the University's 
facilities. 

Official registration is the recognition given by 
the University to persons who have met these con- 
ditions: 

1. Appropriate authority for admittance to study 
in a school or department has been given by an 
authorized officer of the University. The admitting 
authority for undergraduate students resides in 
the Director of Admissions. 

2. Authorization to continue in the program se- 
lected has been given and registration for classes 
has been accomplished in compliance with all aca- 



demic requirements and precedures. 

3. Arrangements have been made to the satisfac- 
tion of the University for payment in full of all fi- 
nancial charges, including fees, tuition, and 
housing charges, all of which are due and payable 
in full before the beginning of classes. 

CHANGE OF SCHEDULE 

Students requiring a change of class schedule, to 
change class times or to add or to drop a class, are 
permitted to do so during the pre-registration per- 
iod, the final registration period, and the first class 
week of the semester. Change of class schedule is 
not permitted after the Latest Date for Change of 
Schedule as announced in the semester academic 
calendar. 

All schedule changes must be approved by the 
academic adviser and processed with the Regis- 
trar. Schedule change requests processed with the 
Registrar during the first class week must also 
have the signatures of the instructors whose 
classes are being added or dropped. 

Students who tardily process change forms are 
not entitled to refund for the course credits 
dropped. Courses dropped after the deadline for 
making schedule changes are classified as course 
withdrawals. (See 'Withdrawal from a Course', 
and 'Withdrawal from the University' mentioned 
elsewhere in this catalog.) 

Except for changes requested by the dean or ad- 
visor, a fee of $5.00 is charged for each change 
form processed after the close of pre-registration. 

CROSS-REGISTRATION 

Cross-college and -university registration provides 
opportunities for enriched educational programs, 
approved by a student's advisor or dean, at any of 
the following institutions: 
Carlow College La Roche College 

Carnegie-Mellon Pittsburgh Theological 

University Seminary 

Chatham College Point Park College 
Community College Robert Morris College 

of Allegheny University of Pittsburgh 

County 

The opportunity for cross-registration will be 
available to each full-time student enrolled in any 
program leading to a degree. Full credit and grade 
will be transferred. 

Each college or university accepts registration in 
regularly accredited courses designated by it as 
open to cross-registration. First priority in regis- 
tration shall go to the students of the host college. 

The student's advisor or dean is responsible for 
assuring eligibility for the course in which the stu- 
dent intends to enroll. Each qualified student may 
enroll in no more than one course off campus in 
any one term or semester under this program. 
Cross-registration is conducted through the office 
of the home registrar. 

Duquesne University students who are partici- 
pating in this program are charged tuition and 
University Fee in accordance with the current rates 



150 



charged by Duquesne University; however, stu- 
dents are responsible for paying any course or lab- 
oratory fees to the host institution. 

These policies on cross-registration are not effec- 
tive at this time for enrollments in summer ses- 
sions, including the spring term at the University 
of Pittsburgh. 

LATE REGISTRATION 

With approval of the appropriate dean and upon 
payment of the penalty fee, late registration may 
be permitted for a serious reason; however, no stu- 
dent may be registered and begin attending 
classes later than the Latest Date for Registration 
and Change of Schedule as announced in the Aca- 
demic Calendar. 

RECORDS AND REPORTS 

SEMESTER GRADE REPORTS 

Ever}' registered student who is free of financial 
obligations to the University is sent a report of 
grades to the permanent address on record soon 
after the close of each semester. 

TRANSCRIPTS 

Each student receives a summary transcript of his 
or her complete academic record at the close of 
each academic year. Students should carefully ex- 
amine their records for accuracy and immediately 
report errors to the Registrar. 

To obtain additional copies of their academic re- 
cords students must write to the Registrar for tran- 
scripts for themselves or for the other institutions 
and agencies. All official transcripts issued by the 
Office of the Registrar bear the signature of the 
Registrar and the embossed seal of the Office of 
the Registrar. Whenever an official transcript is re- 
leased directly to the student it will also bear the 
stamped designation. Issued to Student. 

No transcript will be issued unless all financial 
obligations owed by the student to the University 
have been fulfilled. A fee of $2.00 is charged for 
the issuance of each transcript. 

CONFIDENTIALITY OF STUDENT 
RECORDS 

The University regards the student's personal in- 
formation and academic record as a matter of con- 
fidence between the student and the University. 
The contents of either may be revealed only in ac- 
cordance with the Family Educational Rights and 
Privacy Act of 1974 (Public Law 93-380, Section 
438, as amended). 

In order that parents of students may receive 
from University officials information concerning 
the college attendance academic record of their 
child, it is required by the Family Educational 
Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (FERPA) (Public 
Law 93-380, as amended, section 99, 31 (8) that ei- 
ther the parents must prove financial dependence 
of their child upon them according to the depen- 
dency test as defined in section 152 of the Internal 



Revenue Code of 1954, or the child must grant a " 
waiver of rights given by FERPA. 

Students wishing to waive the requirement of 
FERPA relating to the release of academic informa- I 
tion to parents must complete the waiver obtain- " 
able at the office of the academic adviser. 



Academic Policies 



POLICIES 
ACADEMIC ADVISOR 

Every student attending the University is assigned 
or selects an academic advisor. It is the student's 
responsibility to ascertain the advisor's name 
which may be obtained from the office of the 
school in which the student is enrolled. 

The student should consult with the academic 
advisor about the program and any questions of 
an academic nature. No student may register with- 
out the academic advisor's approval and signa- 
ture. 

ACADEMIC SUPERVISOR OF 
INTERCOLLEGIATE ATHLETICS 

The academic progress of student athletes en- 
gaged in intercollegiate competition is monitored 
by the ASIA. The delivery of academic support 
systems to those student athletes who need them 
is facilitated via this office. 

AUDITING COURSES 

Regularly enrolled Duquesne students are permit- 
ted to audit courses. In addition, non-degree stu- 
dents from the general community who would like 
to audit courses for personal enrichment and who 
are not matriculated nor pursuing a degree pro- 
gram are also eligible to audit. Regular students 
should consult their academic advisor for details 
on auditing. Non-degree students should contact 
Duquesne's Division of Continuing Education to 
complete a brief application form. Admission is 
granted on a space available basis by consulting 
the Office of the Registrar and the individual 
schools. Fees for auditing are uniform for all stu- 
dents. 

Registration in a course as an auditor must be 
declared at registration and is irrevocable after the 
last date for change of schedule each semester, as 
indicated in the University Calendar (see pages 2- 
7). Records will show "Audit" in the grade space 
on the transcript of a regularly matriculated stu- 
dent. A "Certificate of Attendance" for non-degree 
students will be awarded by the Division of Con- 
tinuing Education. Audited courses are not eligi- 
ble to be converted to matriculated credits. 
Courses audited may not be challenged later or 
completed via CLEP or other advanced standing 
tests. 

Courses eligible for auditing are determined by 
the individual colleges and schools of the Univer- 
sity. A partial list of school policies follows, but 



151 



students are advised to consult with the Offices of 
the Deans for the most current hstings: 1) No 
courses in the School of Law are available for au- 
dits; 2) No clinical courses in the School of Nurs- 
ing and Pharmacy can be audited; 3) In the 
College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, courses in 
humanities and social sciences can be audited, but 
communications and science laboratory courses 
may not be audited. 

Students enrolling for audit may attend lectures, 
complete course readings and, at the discretion of 
the professor in charge of the course, may partici- 
pate in classroom discussion and examinations. 

CANCELLATION OF COURSES 

The University makes every reasonable effort to of- 
fer courses as announced in the Semester Sched- 
ule of Courses and the Summer Session Bulletin. 
It reserves the right, however, to make changes or 
cancel courses in the academic schedule because 
of insufficient enrollment or for any other equally 
valid reason. 

CLASS ATTENDANCE 

Regular class attendance is normally essential for 
maximum educational advantage and is strongly 
encouraged. The responsibility for all course mate- 
rial rests wholly with the student. Schools may re- 
quire attendance at every class. 

It is the prerogative of each school to establish 
policy for attendance at classes, laboratories, tests, 
examinations, deadlines for reports, and specific 
school requirements. It is the instructor's responsi- 
bility to make the school's policy known at the first 
class session as it pertains to the course and 
school. 

The student who is unable to attend class be- 
cause of serious illness, hospitalization, a serious 
accident or other extenuating circumstance is re- 
sponsible for notifying the office of his academic 
dean. He should supply the necessary written ver- 
ification as soon as possible. 

The student must submit the work assigned and 
take the examination in the course at the specified 
time. If the work is not submitted or an examina- 
tion is not taken at the scheduled time, the policy 
is to assign a zero for that part of the course. An 
accumulation of zero grades could result in a final 
grade of 'F'. If a student has for significant reasons 
missed a part of the course or an examination, the 
grade may be submitted as an T. If the temporary 
T grade is to be replaced by a passing grade, the 
work must be completed by the time stated in the 
Academic Calendar. Failure on the part of the stu- 
dent to remove the temporary grade results in con- 
version of that grade to an 'F' recorded on the 
transcript. 

CLASSIFICATION OF STUDENTS 

Freshman: less than 30 credits completed. 
Sophomore: 30 to 59 credits completed. 
Junior: 60 to 89 credits completed. 
Senior: 90 or more credits completed. 



1. Full-time Student. A student with an academic 
schedule of at least 12 credits is considered a full- 
time student. With this status a student is entitled 
to the benefits of various activities. A student may 
not change status during the semester without the 
permission of the academic advisor and the Dean 
of the student's school. 

2. Part-time Student. Anyone who carries under 
12 credits is regarded as a part-time student. 

3. Post-graduate Student. A person who has com- 
pleted a baccalaureate degree and is seeking addi- 
tional undergraduate credits. 

COURSE EXAMINATIONS 

Unit examinations are given on the dates an- 
nounced by the instructor at the beginning of each 
semester. Grades for these are obtained from the 
instructor. 

Final examinations are given at the end of each se- 
mester and summer session. No student is ex- 
cused from taking the final examination. 

CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Examinations for recognition of proficiency in a 
subject, or for course credit, as authorized by the 
College or a particular School of the University, are 
available to currently enrolled students who by 
previous experience or exposure have acquired 
mastery of the knowledge in certain courses. An 
application fee of $20.00 is charged for each course 
credit; application forms may be obtained from the 
Office of the Registrar. 

As policies vary among the Schools, students 
who feel they may qualify for credit by examina- 
tion should consult the Dean of the School in 
which they are enrolled for specific information 
about courses open to this examination procedure. 

UNDERGRADUATE GRADING SYSTEM 

The following is the officially recognized method 
of grading course work and rating academic per- 
formance of undergraduate students at the Uni- 
versity, effective for the 1985 Fall Semester: 
Grade Explanation 

A -I- Supreme 

A Excellent 

A— Superior 

B + Very Good 

B Good 

B — Satisfactory 

C + Above Average 

C Average (Minimum General 

Average for 
Graduation) 

C — Below Average 

D Lowest Passing Scale Grade 

P Pass (Used in some courses 

where scaled grading is inappro- 
priate. Indicates satisfactory com- 
pletion of course work with 
credits earned but without qual- 
ity points and is independent of 
the quality point system) 



152 



S- Satisfactory (Used in pass/fail elected 
courses and is independent of the quality 
point system) 

F- Failure (Course must be repeated for credit) 

U- Unsatisfactory -Failure (Used in pass/fail 
elected courses and is independent of the 
quality point system; course must be re- 
peated for credit) 

N- Not Passing. Used to indicate Failure in a P 
Graded course. Is independent of the Qual- 
ity Point System. Course must be repeated 
for credit. 

I - Incomplete (A temporary grade given by an 
instructor when neither a passing nor fail- 
ing grade can be determined because of in- 
complete course work. Unless a cogent 
explanation of extenuating circumstances, 
acceptable to the instructor, is presented 
and the missed examination or required as- 
signment is made up by the date specified 
in the Academic Calendar, the I becomes a 
permanent F grade) 

W- Official Withdrawal (Used on a student's 
permanent record to indicate termination of 
attendance in courses under conditions of 
official withdrawal. See pages 158 and 151, 
Withdrawal from a Course and Withdrawal 
from the University) 

PLUS/MINUS GRADING OPTION 

Instructors are to announce at the first class meet- 
ing whether or not plus and minus grade values 
will be used in grading course work and rating aca- 
demic performance of the students in their class. 

A class inaugurated in plus/minus grading may 
not revert to non plus/minus grading, and vice 
versa. 

The grading system for graduate students is 
published in the catalog of the particular graduate 
school. 

COMPUTATION OF THE QUALITY 
POINT AVERAGE 

The Quality Point Average is the ratio expressed to 
the decimal thousands of the sum of course credits 
for which the grades of A + , A, A - , B -t- , B, B - , 
C -I- , C, C - , D, and F were received to the sum of 
quality points earned. The Quality Point value of 
these grades are: 

Grade Quality Points per Credit 

A-^ =4.0 

A =4.0 

A- =3.7 

B+ = 3.3 

B = 3.0 

B- =2.7 

C+ =2.3 

C =2.0 

C- = 1.7 

D = 1.0 

F =0.0 

Grades S, F, U, N, I, and W are independent of the 



Quality Point System. Courses credits graded F, U, 
N, I, and W do not earn credit, and if required for 
graduation, must be repeated and passed. 

REPEATING COURSES AND COURSE 
RETROGRADATION 

Students ordinarily are permitted to repeat 
courses in which D and F grades were received. 
The request for permission to repeat a course is to 
be submitted in letter form to the academic ad- 
viser, before registering in the repeat course. All 
grades are retained on the permanent academic re- 
cord. The result of the final attempt in a repeated 
course is, however, the student's status in the 
course with regard to attempted credits, earned 
credits, and the completion of requirements. 

Retrogradation, a corollary of the repeat credit 
rule under which a student may earn credit once 
only for a course, prescribes that a student may 
not move backward from an advanced course to a 
lower level course and receive credit for both. Any 
doubtful situation must be decided by the depart- 
ment chairperson or dean involved. 

PASS/FAIL ELECTIVES 

One course a semester, elected by a junior or sen- 
ior and approved by the academic advisor as pro- 
viding an opportunity to expand and enrich the 
student's experience, may be taken on a pass/fail 
(S-U) basis. If passed, the credits will count for 
graduation, but neither grade nor credits will be 
calculated in the quality point average. 

Once a course has been identified as a pass/fail 
elective, the course must be completed as such, 
and the grade submitted must be an S or a U. No 
required course may be taken on this elective pass/ 
fail basis. 

The decision to elect the pass/fail option must be 
made during registration or no later than the close 
of the period provided for making schedule 
changes. 

STUDENT STANDING 

Progress toward a degree is measured by the cu- 
mulative quality point average. The scholastic re- 
cords of students who fail to meet the minimum 
requirements as established by the faculty of each 
college or school will be submitted to the College 
or School Committee on Student Standing for re- 
view and appropriate action. Normally, academic 
records will be reviewed annually at the conclu- 
sion of each academic year. 

The policy of the Council of Academic Deans on 
Student Athletes vis-a-vis academic standards 
reads as follows: 

a) "To participate in the formal athletic programs 
at the University, a student must be currently en- 
rolled as a full-time student. Full-time status is de- 
fined by University catalog as enrollment of 12 
credits minimum per semester. Such a program 
would allow a shident to graduate within five 
years. 

b) A student athlete must be making satisfactory 



153 



academic progress. This means that a student 
must have successfully completed 24 credits dur- 
ing the previous academic year. This would allow a 
student the fall, spring, and summer semesters in 
which to earn these 24 credits. In addition the stu- 
dent athlete must satisfy the student standing pol- 
icy as outlined in the Student Handbook and 
University catalogs. 

c) A student athlete (as all students in the Uni- 
versity) is academically dismissed if the student 
athlete fails three courses in one semester. Student 
athletes can be readmitted by the student standing 
committee of the college or school to which the 
student athlete is returning. If a student transfers 
to another school within the University, the stu- 
dent athlete can be admitted only by the Dean of 
that school." 

For students who have attempted 15-30 credits, 
or more than 30 credits in one year, the guidelines 
are: 
Academic Warning: 1.75 to 1.99 QPA (Letter of 

warning may be sent by appropriate Dean) 
Probation: 1.50 to 1.74 QPA (Subject to the juris- 
diction of the appropriate Committee on Stu- 
dent Standing and may be required to modify or 
restrict academic program) 
Dismissal: Less than 1.50 QPA (Readmission may 
be permitted on recommendation of the appro- 
priate Committee on Student Standing) 
For the students who have attempted 31-60 
credits or who have attempted up to 61 credits 
within four semesters, these guidelines prevail: 
Academic Warnings: 1.85 to 1.99 QPA (Letter or 

warning may be sent by appropriate Dean) 
Probation: 1.75 to 1.84 QPA (Subject to the juris- 
diction of the appropriate Committee on Stu- 
dent Standing and may be required to modify or 
restrict academic program) 
Dismissal: Less then 1.75 QPA (Readmission may 
be permitted on recommendation of the appro- 
priate Committee on Student Standing) 
Students who have attempted 61 or more credits 
and who have a QPA of between 1.85 and 1.99 may 
continue on probation for one semester. However, 
students who have earned 90 credits or more are 
subject to dismissal unless they have a QPA of 2.0 
or better. Students who accumulated three F 
grades in one semester are subject to dismissal. 
Appeals of academic dismissal must be directed to 
the appropriate College or School Committee on 
Student Standing. Students subject to the jurisdic- 
tion of the appropriate Committee on Student 
Standing in accordance with the established 
guidelines who are permitted to re-enroll on a full- 
time basis but continue participation in noncurri- 
cular and extra-curricular activities shall be 
without appeal if they are subsequently dismissed 
from the University for poor scholarship. 



DEAN'S LIST 

To achieve distinction of being named to the 
Dean's List, a student must have a record for a se- 
mester that shows completion of a full-time sched- 
ule, a quality point average of at least 3.25, and no 
grade lower than a C. The full-time schedule must 
include at least 12 credits exclusive of pass/fail 
credits. 

GRADUATE COURSES FOR 
UNDERGRADUATE CREDIT 

Qualified seniors may be permitted to register in 
certain graduate courses at the 500 level for under- 
graduate credit on the recommendation of the ad- 
visor and with the approval of the dean of the 
graduate school involved. All 500 courses are de- 
scribed in the graduate school catalogs. 

GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 

The candidate for a University degree must be a 
person of good moral character who has satisfacto- 
rily completed aU academic requirements for the 
degree program and in addition has the recom- 
mendation of the appropriate Academic Dean, 
filed the Application for the University Degree 
with the Office of the Registrar on or before the 
latest date to apply for graduation as announced in 
the Academic Calendar, and paid all indebtedness 
to the University. 

It is the student's responsibility to determine 
that the courses taken in each semester are se- 
quentially correct and necessary for the degree 
program. 

The student must periodically review in consul- 
tation with the appropriate academic advisor pro- 
gress toward graduation and seek, with the 
advisor, the resolution of any question about ful- 
fillment of graduation requirements. 

Each school and each department sets forth in 
this catalog requirements for graduation which the 
student is expected to know, as well as the afore- 
mentioned general requirements, and the follow- 
ing: 

1. The bachelor's degree requires a minimum of 
120 semester hours of course credits in all except 
Radiological Health, Medical Technology, and 
Pharmacy which require, respectively, 123, 124, 
and 163 credits. 

2. All bachelor's degrees require an overall mini- 
mum quality point average of 2.0, which is a C 
grade average in a 4.0 system. (Students should 
further determine the need for minimum QPA re- 
quirements in their major, science course, etc.) 

3. The last year's work (a minimum of 30 semes- 
ter hours of credit) must be completed in residence 
at the University. 

4. Not less than three credits (or one course) in 
theology are required for all undergraduate Catho- 
lic students in every program at the University. 

5. Students on academic probation may be can- 
didates for graduation only with permission of the 
Committee on Student Standing of their school. 



154 



The candidate who has satisfied graduation re- 
quirements by a Challenge Examination (credit by 
examination), when taken timewise within the last 
30 semester hours of study for the degree, will ful- 
fill the residence requirement provided a mini- 
mum of 30 semester hours of credit has been 
earned in course work at the University in the last 
year's study. 

HONORS 

Degrees are awarded with special mention cum 
laude, magna cum laude, or summa cum laude to stu- 
dents who have completed the regular course with 
unusual distinction and who have completed a 
minimum of 60 credits in residence. Honors are 
based on these standards: 
Cum Laude -Quality Point 

Average 3.50 to 3.74 

Magna Cum Laude - Quality Point 

Average 3.75 and above 

Summa Cum Laude -Upon recommendation of 
the Faculty and a 3.90 QPA, the Magna Cum 
Laude citation may be raised to Summa Cum 
Laude. 

UNIT OF CREDIT 

The unit of credit is the semester hour; i.e., one 
credit equals one semester hour. One semester 
hour of credit is granted for the successful comple- 
tion of one hour a week of lecture of recitation, or 
at least two hours a week of laboratory work for 
one semester of 15 weeks. 



TRANSFER WITHIN THE UNIVERSITY 

It would be to the student's advantage to discuss 
the proposed transfer with the academic advisor of 
the new school no later than two weeks prior to 
preregistration. The advisor will then use the form 
and procedure established as uniform for the Uni- 
versity to effect any change. 

WITHDRAWAL FROM A COURSE 

First semester freshmen may withdraw from 
courses with the approval of their advisor up to 
the period of final examinations and recieve a 
grade of W by processing the proper form. 

If a student, other than a first semester fresh- 
man, wishes to withdraw from a course, he may 
do so with the approval of his academic advisor 
and by processing the proper form up to the date 
announced in the Academic Calendar for with- 
drawal with a W grade. 

If a student wishes to withdrawal from a course 
after the date announced in the Academic Calen- 
dar, the student must seek approval of the Com- 
mittee on Student Standing of the student's 
School. The student will be notified of the Com- 
mittee's decision. If approval is granted, the stu- 
dent then initiates the appropriate form through 
the advisor. 

A student who is not granted approval of the re- 
quest and withdraws froni the course unofficially 
will receive a F grade for the course. 




155 



Part VII: Directories 



Directors and Officers 

THE DUQUESNE CORPORATION 

Edward L. Murray, C.S.Sp Chairman 

John E. Nader, C.S.Sp Vice Chairman 

Francis M. Philben, C.S.Sp Secretary 

Louis F. Dolan, C.S.Sp. William R. Headley, C.S.Sp. 

Joseph A. Duchene, C.S.Sp. David L. Smith, C.S.Sp. 

Charles J. Fenner, C.S.Sp. Joseph L. Varga, C.S.Sp. 

BOARD OF DIRECTORS 

Officers 

A. William Capone Chairman of the Board 

Joseph A. Katarincic, Esq Vice Chairman of the Board 

Charles J. Fenner, C.S.Sp Secretary of the Board 

Term Members 

Norman E. Bevan, C.S.Sp. Joseph A. Massaro 

Robert J. Buckley Raymond J. Mulligan 

J. Earl Burrell Thomas J. Murrin 

Richard Caligiuri Mary Louise McDowell 

Mrs. James L. Coleman, Jr. Most Rev. John B. McDowell, D.D. 

Robert A . dePalma Donald S . Nesti, C . S . Sp ., S . T. D . 

John F. Donahue Henry X. O'Brien 

Francis R. Duffy, C.S.Sp. James F. O'Day 

George T. Farrell Antonio J. Palumbo 

Herman Fineberg John L. Propst 

Merle E. Gilliand Joseph H. Ridge 

Edward I. Goldberg, Esq. Daniel M. Rooney 

CarlG. Grefenstette Frank J. Schneider 

John J. Henry Mrs. Elizabeth M. Scott 

Robert E. Irr Richard S. Smith 

John M. Jendzura, C.S.Sp. W. Bruce Thomas 

Aaron P. Levinson William A. Uricchio 

E. D. Loughney Albert C. Van Dusen 

Francis W. Wright, C.S.Sp. 

Associate Members 

Murry P. Berger Charles D. Home 

Francis A. Devlin Daniel R. Lackner 

Sidney Dworkin James L. Snyder 

Edward F Eddy Richard L. White 

OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Donald S. Nesti, C.S.Sp., S.TD President 

Henry J. McAnulty, C.S.Sp Chancellor 

Rolando E. Bonachea, Ph.D Vice President for Academic Affairs 

Isadore R. Lenglet, M.P.A Vice President for Management and Business 

Dennis C. Golden, Ed.D Vice President for Student Life 

Kenneth P. Service, B.A Vice President for University Relatipns 

Charles J. Fenner, C.S.Sp., Ph.D Secretary 



156 

Administration and Faculty 

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS AND SCIENCES 
ADMINISTRATION 

Wallace S. Watson, Ph.D Dean 

Marguerite S. Puhl, M.Ed Assistant Dean for Administration 

Mary Frances Antolini, M. A Interim Director of Academic Advisement 

Anne D. Gyurisin, B. A Academic Advisor 

Ecivvard H. Noll, M.Ed., M. A Academic Advisor 

FACULTY 

Roger M. Angelelli Kenneth Richard Boyd 

Lectii rer in Speech Associate Professor of Biology 

B.S., California State College B.S., Denison University 

M.S., West Virginia University M.S., Ph.D., University of Illinois 

Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh George Russell Bradley 

Mar\' Frances Antolini Associate Professor of Mathematics 

Assistant Professor of Sociology B.S., Allegheny College 

B.A., M.A., Duquesne University Ph.D., University of Notre Dame 

Shirley Arch Clement C. Braszo 

Lecturer in Sociology Lecturer in Sociology 

B.A., University of Buffalo B.A., Duquesne University 

M.S.W., University of Pittsburgh M.S.W., University of Pittsburgh 

Daniel E. Barbush Rev. Edward A. Bushinski, C.S.Sp. 

Instructor in Mathematics Professor of Theology 

B.S., Duquesne University B.D., St. Mary's Seminary 

M.A., University of Pittsburgh S.T.L. University of Fribourg 

Frank J. Baron ^•^•' Duquesne University 

Professor of Biology ^^■^■' Fordham University 

B.S., Ph.D., University of California Rev. Leonard A. Bushinski, C.S.Sp. 

Anthony Barton Professor of Theology 

Professor of Psychology ^■^■' ^t- Mary's Seminary 

B.A., Ohio Wesleyan University M.A., Duquesne University 

M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago S.T.L. Gregorian University 

^ ^ S.S.L., Pontifical Biblical Institute 

E . Jane Beckwith 

Lecturer in Journalism Ronald G. Butler 

B.A., Seton Hill College Assistant Professor of Biology 

M.RA., Pratt Institute l^^' ^tate University of Oswego 

Ph.D., Syracuse University 

George Richard Benzinger, Jr. 

Assistant Professor of English Gillian G. Gannel 

B.A., Washington and Jefferson Lecturer in Art History 

M.A., University of Florida ^■^■' ^-A., University of Pittsburgh 

Bernard R Beranek P^!f ^^A. Gastric 

Associate Professor of English Professor of Biology 

B.A., Notre Dame ^-S- Oregon State University 

M.A., Ph.D., Duquesne University ^^■^■' Montana State University 

Robert E. Beranek Shih-Chi Chang 

Professor of Political Science I'f'Z'^'^fi'' tt • • 

B.A., St. Vincent College ?^S National Taiwan University 

M.A., Fordham University M.S., Ph.D., Kansas State University 

Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh Jerry Clack 

Ralph C . Boettcher Professor of Classics 

Professor of English A.B., Princeton University 

B.A., University of Detroit M.A., Duquesne University 

M. A., Columbia University M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Rolando E. Bonachea John A. Clair 

Professor of History Professor of English 

M.A., University of New Mexico B- A., M. A., Duquesne University 

M.A., Ph.D., Georgetown University ^^■^■' Western Reserve University 



i 



157 



Vicky A. Clark 
Lecturer in Art History 
A.B., UCLA 

A.M., University of California, Davis 
Ph.D., University of Michigan 

Francesca Colecchia 
Professor of Modern Languages 
B.Ed., Duquesne University 
M.Litt., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Primitivo Colombo 
Professor Emeritus of French 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of 
Pittsburgh 

Albert B. Costa 

Professor of History 
B.S., St. Mary's College, California 
M.S., Oregon State University 
Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 

Frank J. D'Amico 
Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., Southern Connecticut State College 
M.Sc, Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Loren K. Davidson 

Associate Professor of English 
B.S., Asbury College 
M.A., University of Kentucky 
Ph.D., Duke University 

Anna D'Eramo 
Instructor of Physics 
B.S., Carlow College 

Donato A. DeFelice 
Associate Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., M.S., University of Pittsburgh 

Rev. Daniel N. DiNardo 
Lecturer in Special Studies 
B.A., M.A., Catholic University of America 
S.T.B., Pontifical Gregorian University 
S.T.L., Augustianum University 

Patricia M. Dunham 
Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.S., M.A., Ball State University 
Ph.D., Miami University of Ohio 

Howard G. Ehrlich 
Professor of Biology and 
Department Chairman 
B.S., Marquette University 
Ph.D., University of Minnesota 

Lester Embree 
Professor of Philosophy 
B. A., Tulane University 
Ph.D., New School for Social Research 

Eleanor V. Fails 
Professor of Sociology and 
Department Chairman 
B.A., Saint Mary's College 
M.A., University of Notre Dame 
Ph.D., Loyola University of Chicago 

Norma Feinberg 

Associate Professor of Sociology 

M.S.W., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



Rev. Charles J. Fenner, C.S.Sp. 
Associate Professor of Theology 
B.A., B.D., St Mary's Seminary 
J.C.B., Gregorian University 

Rome, Italy 
M.A., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., Catholic University 

Constance Taylor Fischer 
Professor of Psychology 
B.A., University of Oklahoma 
M. A., Ph.D., University of Kentucky 

William Frank Fischer 
Professor of Psychology 
B.A., University of Michigan 
M. A., Ph.D., University of Connecticut 

Lee Frank 
Lecturer in Sociology 
B.A., M.Ed., Indiana University of 

Pennsylvania 
M.A., Duquesne University 

Robert A. Friday 
Assistant Professor of Speech 

Communication 
B.A., College of Steubenville 
M.A., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Lawrence E. Gaichas 

Professor of Classics and 
Department Chairman 
B.A., Xavier University 
M. A., Ph.D., Ohio State University 

Edward L. Gelblum 
Assistant Professor of Philosophy 
B.A., St. John's College 
M.A., University of Chicago 

John D. Gibbs 
Assistant Professor of 

Journalism 
B.S., West Virginia University 

Amedeo P. Giorgi 
Professor of Psychology 
A.B., St. Joseph's College 
M. A., Ph.D., Fordham University 

Andrew J. Glaid III 

Professor of Chemistry and 

Department Chairman 
B.S., M.S., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., Duke University 

John B. Greenshields 

Associate Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon 
University 

Edward J. Gregory 
Professor of Journalism 
B.S., Pennsylvania State University 
M.Ed., Duquesne University 



158 



Donald R. Hands 

Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.A., Fordham University 
M.A., Columbia University 
Ph.D., State University of New York, 
Buffalo 

John Kenneth Hanes 
Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., St. Francis College 
M.A., Niagara University 

James P. Hanigan 

Associate Professor of Theology 
A.B., M.A., Fordham University 
B.D., Woodstock College 
Ph.D., Duke University 

Solange Bastelica Harrison 
Associate Professor of French 
B.A., Academy of Aix-Marseilles 
B.S., Faculte de Medicine, Marseilles 
M.A., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Jack W. Hausser 
Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., Case Institute of Technology 
Ph.D., University of Illinois 

Samuel J. Hazo 
Professor of English 
B.A., University of Notre Dame 
M.A., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Margaret R. Hicks 
Assistant Professor of 
Modem Languages 
B.A., Belhaven College 
M.A., Emory University 
Ph.D., University of North Carolina 

Rev. J. Clifton Hill, C.S.Sp. 
Professor of Physics 
B.S., Louisiana State University 
M.S., Catholic University of America 
B.D., St. Mary's Seminary 
M. A., Ph.D., Rice University 

Beatrice T. Hirschl 
Lecturer in Journalism 
B.A., University of Pittsburgh 

Eleanore Walkowski Holveck 
Associate Professor of Philosophy 
B.A., Duquesne University 
M. A., Ph.D., University of North 
Carolina 

Jean E. Hunter 
Professor of History 
B.S., Ursinus College 
M. A., Ph.D., Yale University 

Patricia S. Ingram 

Associate Professor and Director 

of Art History 
A.B., A.M., Oberlin College 



Jerome Edward Janssen 

Professor of History 

B.A., St. Norbert College 

M.A., University of Wisconsin 

Peter R. Johnson 
Lecturer in Speech 

B.S., Northern Illinois University 
M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

James J. Johnston, Jr. 

Assistant Professor of Speech 
B.A., University of Pittsburgh 
M.A., Duquesne University 

Nancy C. Jones 
Professor of Journalism 
B.A., University of Pittsburgh 
M.S.J., Northwestern University 
Ph.D., University of Missouri 

Eric Joy 

Lecturer in Sociology 

B.A., M.A., Duquesne University 

Chester A. Jurczak 
Professor of Sociology 
B.A., St. Mary's College 
M.A., Fordham University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Joseph J. Keenan 

Associate Professor of English 
and Department Chairman 
B.A., M.A., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 

Donald H. Kellander 

Assistant Professor of French 
B.A., M.A., Pennsylvania State 
University 

Rev. David R Kelly 

Associate Professor of Theology 
B.A., College of the Holy Cross 
M.A., S.T.B., Catholic University 

of Louvain 
M.Rel.Ed., Loyola University, Chicago 
Ph.D., University of St. Michael's College 

Rev. Charles D. Keyes 
Professor of Philosophy and 

Department Chairman 
B.A., University of Oklahoma 
B.D., S.T.M., Seabury- Western 

Theological Seminary 
M.A., University of Toronto 
Th.D., Trinity College, Toronto 
Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Yong I. Kim 
Professor of English 
B.A., Aoyama Gakuim, Tokyo 
B.A., Florida Southern College 
M.A., University of Kentucky 

Richard T. Knowles 

Associate Professor of Psychology 
B.A., M.S., Fordham University 
Ph.D., Purdue University 



159 



Kathy Kovach 

Lecturer in Speech Communication 
Certified Comprehensive Interpreter 

Paul Krakowski 
Professor Emeritus of Journalism 
B.A., Westminster College 
M.A., University of Wisconsin 

Michael Kupersanin 
Professor of Sociology 
A.B., M.A., Kent State University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Albert C. Labriola 
Professor of English 
B.Ed., Duquesne University 
M.A.T., Columbia University 
M. A., Ph.D., University of Virginia 

Rosaline H. Lee 
Associate Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., Webster College 
M.E., University of Michigan 
Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Norman C. Li 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 
B.S., Kenyon College 
M.S., University of Michigan 
Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 

Pei-Tsing Liu 
Professor of Biology 

B.S., University of Shanghai, China 
M.S., Boston University 
Ph.D., Catholic University of America 

Charles A. Loch 

Associate Professor of Mathematics 

and Department Chairman 
B.A., M.A., Duquesne University 

Carla E. Lucente 
Professor of Modem Languages 
B.A., M.A., Duquesne University 
M. A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

James G. Lydon 
Professor of History 
B.A., Harvard University 
M.A., Boston University 
M.A., Ph.D., Columbia University 

Robert E. Madden 
Associate Professor of Philosophy 
B.S., St. Joseph's College 
M.A., Villanova University 
Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Charles D. Maes 
Associate Professor of Psychology 
B.A., University of Denver 
M.S.W., Tulane University 
Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Anne M. Maier 

Assistant Professor of German 
B.A., Columbia University 
M.A., University of Illinois 



Rev. Francis X. Malinowski, C.S.Sp. 
Associate Professor of Theology 
B.A., St. Mary's Seminary 
B.S.Th., University of Fribourg 
Ph.D., Duke University 

Brian Malloy 
Assistant Professor of Computer Science 
B.S., LaSalle College 
M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 

Susan Maloney 

Assistant Professor of Journalism 
B.A., B.S., Syracuse University 
M.A., Duquesne University 

Edward J. Markoff 
Lecturer in Mathematics 
B.S., M.A., Duquesne University 

Paul Tyler Mason 
Professor of History 
B.S., M.A., Ph.D., St. Louis University 

Mark S. Mazur 
Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., John Carroll University 
M.S., John Carroll University 
M.S., University of Notre Dame 
Ph.D., University of Notre Dame 

Cornelius S. McCarthy 
Professor Emeritus of Journalism 
B.S.J., Ed.M., Boston University 

James A. McCuUoch 
Professor of Classics 
B.A., Duquesne University 
M.Litt., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Maureen C. McHugh 

Assistant Professor of Psychology 

B.A., Chatham College 

M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Patrick J. Moore 
Lecturer in Sociology 
B.A., M.A., Duquesne University 

Kent F. Moors 

Associate Professor of 

Political Science and Department Chairman 
A.B., St. Anselm's College 
M.A., University of New Hampshire 
Ph.D., Northern Illinois University 

Joseph R. Morice 

Professor of History 
B.A., LaSalle College 
M.A., Fordham University 
- M.Litt., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Rev. Edward L. Murray, C.S.Sp. 
Professor of Psychology 
B.A., M.A., St. Vincent College 
M.A., Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Stephen T. Newmyer 

Professor of Classics 

B.A., Duquesne University 

Ph.D., University of North Carolina 



160 



Reginald A. Ney 

Assistant Professor of Physics 

and Utiiversity Health Physicist 

and Acting Dept. Chairman 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.S., University of Pittsburgh 

Sarah C. Nichols 

Lecturer in Art Histon/ 

B.A., University of East Anglia 

M.A., University of Delaware 

Jerome L. Niedermeier 
Associate Professor of English 
B.A., University of Pittsburgh 
M.A., Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Hon. Raymond A. Novak 
Lecturer in Sociology 
B.A., St. Vincent College 
B.A., S.T.B., S.T.L., St. Mary's University 
M.S.W., J.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Nardi Obarski 
Lecturer in Speech Communication 
B.A., M.A., University of Pittsburgh 

Rev. John F. O 'Grady 

Professor of Theology 

and Department Chairman 
B.A., M.Div., Mary Immaculate College 

and Seminary 
S.T.L., College of St. Anselm 
S.T.D., University of St. Thomas 
S.S.L., S.S.D., Pontifical Biblical 

Institute 

Rev. William M. Ogrodowski 
Lecturer in Classics 
B.A., Duquesne University 
S.T.L., S.T.D., Pontifical Gregorian University 

John Opie, Jr. 
Professor of History 
B.A., DePauw University 
B.D., Union Theological Seminary 
M. A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 

Margaret J . Patterson 
Assistant Professor of Journalism 
B.S., Ohio University 
M.A., University of Pittsburgh 

Dr. James F. Fletcher 
Adjunct Professor of Physics 
B.S., Franklin and Marshall 
M.A., Ph.D., Columbia University 

Ronald M. Polansky 
Professor of Philosophy 
B.A., Yale University 
M.A., Ph.D., Boston College 

G. Foster Provost, Jr. 
Professor of English 

B.S., Ph.D., Louisiana State University 
M.A., University of Oregon 

Peter A. Puccetti 

Associate Professor of Philosophy 

B. A., M.Ed., Duquesne University 



Terry Pulver 

Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.A.,M.A.,Ph.D., University of Colorado 

Constance Deucher Ramirez 

Associate Professor of English 
B.A., Duquesne University 
M.A., University of North Carolina 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

J. Roland Ramirez 
Professor of Philosophy 
B.A., University of Notre Dame 
Licentiate, Le Saulchoir, Etiolles, France 
Ph.D., Catholic University of Paris 

Paul A. Richer 

Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.A., Bard College 

M.A., Ph.D., New School for Social Research 

Joseph Francis Rishel 

Assistant Professor of History 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.S., M.L.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Rev. Robert Roach, C.S.Sp. 

Lecturer in Theology 

B.A., B.D., St. Mary's Seminary 

M.A., Notre Dame University 

Eva Cappellanti Robotti 

Associate Professor of Speech 

Communication 
A.B., M.A., West Virginia University 

Hershel Sacks 
Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 
M.A., Yeshiva University 

Marie Ciccone Sakmar 
Instructor in Spanish 
A.B., Geneva College 
M.A., Western Reserve University 

John D. Scanlon 

Professor of Philosophy 
B.A., St. Mary's Seminary 
M.A., University of Detroit 
Ph.D., Tulane University 

Marilyn Schaub 
Professor of Theology 
B.A., Rosary College 
Ph.D., University of Fribourg 

Rev. Andre L. Schuwer, O.F.M. 
Adjunct Professor of Philosophy 
B.Ph., State University of Amsterdam 
Licenciate, Ph.D., University of Louvain 

David W. Seybert 
Associate Professor of 

Chemistry 
B.A., Bloomsburg State College 
Ph.D., Cornell University 

William W. Shaw 
Assistant Professor of Computer Science 
B.S., National Taiwan Normal University 
M.A., Pennsylvania State University 



161 



Stephen J. Shulik 
Assistant Professor of Physics 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Aris Sideropoulos 
Professor of Biology 
B.A., Concordia College 
M.S., North Dakota State University 
Ph.D., University of Kansas 

Robert M. Skwarecki 
Lecturer in Speech Communication 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.A., CCC/Sp. 

Eugenia M. Skwarecki 
Associate Professor of Modern Languages 
Doctor of Modern Languages and 
Literature, University of Turin, Italy 

John W. Smeltz 
Associate Professor of English 
B.A., M.A.,Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Rev. David L. Smith, C.S.Sp. 
Associate Professor of Psychology 
B.A., St. Mary's Seminary 
S.T.L., University of Fribourg 
M.A., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Montreal 

Martin D. Snyder 
Professor of Classics 
A.B., Loyola College, Baltimore 
M.A., Ph.D., Catholic University of 
America 

PaulB. Stein 
Associate Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., University of Massachusetts 
Ph.D., University of Oregon 

Omar W. Steward 
Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., University of Delaware 
Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University 

Michael W. Strasser 
Professor of Philosophy 
B.S., St. Louis University 
M. A., Ph.D., University of Toronto 

Tata Subhas 
Professor of Biology 
B.Sc, Utkal University, India 
Bachelor of Veterinary Science, 

University of Madras, India 
M.S., Utah State University 
Ph.D., University of Georgia 

Kathleen A. Taylor 
Professor of Mathematics 
B.A., University of Dayton 
M.S., Ph.D., Michigan State University 

Richard H. Thames 
Associate Professor of Speech 

Communication 
B.A., South western-at-Memphis 
M.Div., Pittsburgh Theological Seminary 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



Steven P. Thomas 
Professor of Biology 

B.A., Pennsylvania State University 
M. A., Ph.D., Indiana University 

William M. Thompson 
Associate Professor of Theology 
B.A., St. Thomas College 
M.Div., St. Thomas Seminary 
S.TM., St. Mary's University 
Ph.D., University of Toronto 

Frank]. Thornton 

Associate Professor of Speech 

Communication 
B.S., M.A., Villanova University 

Samuel J. Tindall, Jr. 
Associate Professor of English 
A.B., Columbia University 
M. A., Ph.D., University of South 
Carolina 

Rev. Cornelius Van der Poel, C.S.Sp. 
Associate Professor of Theology 
M.Ed., lona College 

Steven Bela Vardy 
Professor of History and 
Department Chairman 
B.S., John Carroll University 
M.A., Ph.D., Indiana University 

Rev. Joseph L. Varga, C.S.Sp. 
Lecturer in Modern Languages 
B.A., St. Mary's Seminary 
M.Ed., Duquesne University 

Rolf H. Von Eckartsberg 
Professor of Psychology 
A.B., Dartmouth College 
M. A., Ph.D., Harvard University 

Jin Tsai Wang 
Associate Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., Oregon State University 
M.S., Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Daniel Paul Watkins 
Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., University of North Alabama 
M.A., Auburn University 
Ph.D., University of Maryland 

Wallace S. Watson 
Professor of English and 

Dean of the College 
B.A., Wofford College 
M.A., Duke University 
Ph.D., Indiana University 

Harold Webb, Jr. 
Professor of Political Science 
B.A., M.A., University of Pennsylvania 
Ph.D., Brown University 

Theodore J. Weismann 

Adjunct Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Duquesne University 



162 



Bernard J. Weiss 
Professor of History 
B. A., Ph.D., University of Illinois 
M.A., University of Chicago 

Charles I. Westbrooks 
Lecturer in Sociology 
B.A., University of Pittsburgh 
M.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 

George S. Worgul, Jr. 
Professor of Theology 
B.A., M.D., M.A., Niagara University 
Ph.D., S.T.D., Catholic University of 
Louvain 



William Stephan Wurzer 
Associate Professor of Philosophy 
B.A., Oakland University 
Ph.D., University of Freiburg 

Joseph Yenerall 
Associate Professor of Sociology 
B.S., California State College 
M.A., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University 

Frank T. Zbozny 
Professor of English 
B.A., M.A., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND 
AUDIOLOGY- ADJUNCT FACULTY 

Harmarville Rehabilitation Center 

Diane Ziggas, M.A. 

Director, Communication Skills Department 

Speech Language Pathologist 
Sandy Sutton, M.A., CCC/Sp. 
Terri Lohman, M.A., CCC/SLA 
Barbara Vento, M.A., CCC/A 
Lori Roberts, M.A., CCC/SLA 
Elizabeth Smith, M.S., CCC/A 

Rehabilitation Institute of Pittsburgh 

Mark Ylvisaker, M.A. 

Director, Speech-Language Therapy Department 

Speech-Language Pathologist 
Susan Hough, M.A. 

Speech-Language Pathologist 

St. Francis Hospital 

Rosemary Tomko, M.A., CCC-Sp. 

Director, Department of Communication Skills 
EveBinstock, M.A.,CCC 

Speech-Language Pathologist 
Barbara Boas, M.S. 

Speech-Language Pathologist 
Vicki Goldstein, M.A., CFY Year 
Janet Hodnik, M.A. 

Speech-Language Pathologist 
Hubert Martin, M.A. 

Speech-Language Pathologist 
Suzanne Seckinger, M.A., CCC/Sp. 



Allegheny General Hospital 

BethHaag,M.A., CCC/Sp. 
LoriTobin, M.S., CCC/Sp. 
Nancy Moschetta, M.A., CCC/Sp. 

Western Pennsylvania School 
For Blind Children 

Deborah J. Coletta, M.A. 

Language Development Specialist 
Diane Bidoli, M.Ed., CCC/Sp. 

Western Pennsylvania School 
For the Deaf 

Rosemary Garretty 

Administrative Assistant 



I 



163 
SCHOOL OF BUSINESS AND ADMINISTRATION 
ADMINISTRATION 

Glen Beeson, B.A., M.A., Ph.D Dean 

Bernadine Meyer, B.Ed., M.S., Ed.D., J.D Assistant Dean 

Thomas A. Pollack, B.S.B.A., M.Ed., Ph.D Assistant Dean 

Robert Borman, B.S., M.B.A., C.P.A Chairman, Quantitative Sciences Division 

William D. Presutti, Sr., B.S.B.A., M.A., Ph.D Chairman, Behavioral Sciences Division 

Geza Grosschmid, J.U.D Chairman, Economic Sciences Division 

Amy C. Jones, B.A., M.S.Ed Academic Advisor 

Lani Tower, B.S.Ed., M.S.Ed Academic Advisor 

FACULTY 

James F. Acklin William Carlson 

Associate Professor of Accounting Assistant Professor of Finance 

B.S., M.B.A., Duquesne University B.C.E., M.S., Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon 

C.P.A. , CM. A., Pennsylvania University 

Priscilla Austin Raymond Cegelski 

Assistant Professor of Accounting Associate Professor of Accounting 

F.^o' P^'^^^^^l University ^^ ^^j^ Duquesne University 

M.B.A., Duquesne University ^^ p^^ Pennsylvania 

C.P.A., Pennsylvania 

Glen Beeson P^tros C. Christofi 
Professor of Economics Assistant Professor of Management Science 

Dean, School of Business and ^■^■' Graduate Industrial School of Thessaloniki 

Administration M.A., University of New Orleans 

B.S., West Virginia Wesleyan Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University 

M. A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh g^j^.^ j^^^^^ 

Thomas J. Benecki Assistant Professor of Law Administration 

Assistant Professor of Human Resource B.A., M.A., J.D., Duquesne University 

Management 

B.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania John Gardner 

M.B.A., Doctoral Candidate, University Assistant Professor of Taxation 

of Pittsburgh B . A . , King's College 

Vashishta Bhaskar J-^-' ^^q^^sne University 

..,,„. rr- L.L.M., Temple University 

Assistant Professor of Finance ^ ■' 

B.S., St. Stephens College Lee Click 

M.B.A., Ph.D. Candidate, Pennsylvania Associate Professor of Economics 

State University B.A., M.A., M.Litt., Ph.D., University 

Stanley Bober oi Pittsburgh 

Professor of Economics Geza Grosschmid 

B.A., M.A., Ph.D., New York University Professor of Economics 

George Bodnar Chairman, Economics Division 

Associate Professor of Accounting J.U.D., Royal Hungarian University 

B . S . , B . A . , Bucknell University Pazmany Peter 

M.B.A., Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania 

Serge Grosset 

Richard Bond Professor of International Business 

Associate Professor of Economics License es Sciences Commerciales 

A B Boston College Doctorat es Sciences Economiques, 

Ph.D., University of Maryland University of Geneva 

Robert Borman 

Associate Professor of Accounting David Hanson 

Chairman, Quantitative Sciences Division Associate Professor 

B.S., Duquesne University ^•^•' Haverford College 

M.B.A., University of Pittsburgh ^^■^■' University of Florida 

C.PA., Pennsylvania J^^' University of Michigan 

Peter Brown Clarence Jones 
Associate Professor of Analytic Methods Associate Professor of Analytic Methods 

B . S . , Canisius College B . S . E . E . , University of California 

M.B.A., Duquesne University M.S.E.E., West Virginia University 

Ph . D . , University of Pittsburgh Ph . D . , Carnegie-Mellon University 



164 



Blair J. Kolasa 
Professor of Behavorial Science 

and Dean Emeritus 
B.S., Allegheny College 
M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 
J.D., Duquesne University 

Marshall Levinson 
Associate Professor of Economics 
B.S., City College of New York 
M.A., Princeton University 
M.A., Columbia University 

S. Jay Liebowitz 
Assistant Professor of 

Human Resource Management 
B.A., State University of New York 

(Cortland) 
Ph.D., University of Tennessee 

Gustav Lundberg 
Assistant Professor of Economic Geography 
B.A., Swedish School of Economics 
B.Sc, M.Sc, University of Helsinki 
Ph.D., State University of New York 
(Buffalo) 

Elaine McGivern 
Assistant Professor of Marketing 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Aubrey Lipman Mendelow 

Assistant Professor of Management 

Information Systems 
B.Sc. Plhodes University 
B. Compt., University of South Africa 
M.B.A., University of Cape Town 
D.B.L., University of South Africa 

Bernadine Meyer 
Professor of Law Administration 
Assistant bean For Administration 
B.Ed., M.S., J.D., Duquesne University 
Ed.D., Columbia University 

George Might 
Assistant Professor of Analytic Methods 
B.S., Harvard University 
M.A., Boston University 

Edward A. Milcic 
Associate Professor of Accounting 
B.S., M.S., Duquesne University 
C.P.A., Pennsylvania 

James Poindexter 
Associate Professor of Industrial Relations 
B.S.B.A., University of Southern California 
M.B.A., Roschester Institute of Technology 
J.D., Texas Southern University 

Thomas A. Pollack 
Associate Professor of Management 

Information Systems 
Assistant Dean for Computers and Management 

Information Systems 
B.S.B.A., Pennsylvania State University 
M.Ed., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



William D. Presutti, Sr. 
Assistant Professor of Management and 

Marketing 
Chairman, Behavorial Science Division 
B.S.B.A., Duquesne University 
M.A., Northeastern University 
Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Rev. Joseph Pudichery 
Associate Professor of Analytic Methods 
B.A., M.A., University of Kerala 
M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Kurt Rethwisch 
Professor of Economics 
B.A., Nebraska Wesleyan University 
M.A., Kansas State 
Ph.D., University of Maryland 

Lewis Schipper 

Associate Professor of Economics 
B.A., M.A., Wayne State University 
Ph.D., University of Michigan 

R. Stanley Seymour 
Assistant Professor of Commerce 
B.S., University of Notre Dame 
M.S., Kansas State Teachers College 

Karen A. Shastri 
Instructor of Finance 
B.S., University of Baltimore 
M.B.A., University of Pittsburgh 
C.P.A., Maryland 

William Sher 
Professor of Economics 
B. of Law, National Yunnon University 
M.A., Ph.D., University of Minnesota 

Seleshi Sisaye 
Assistant Professor of Accounting 
B.A., Haile Sellassie University 
M.A., University of Illinois 
M.L.S., State University of New York 

(Albany) 
Ph.D., Cornell University 
M.B.A., University of Pittsburgh 

John C. South 

Professor of Organizational Behavior 

B.A., Muskingum College 

M. A., Ph.D., Ohio State University 

John Timko 
Associate Professor of Marketing 
B.S., M.S., Duquesne University 

Frank J. Wright 
Associate Professor of Accounting 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Wesley Yang 
Assistant Professor of Taxation 
B.A., J.D., University of Pittsburgh 
C.P.A., Pennsylvania 



165 

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 
ADMINISTRATION 

Dorothy A. Frayer, Ph.D Dean 

Kenneth L. Burrett, Ed.D Associate Dean, Undergraduate Education 

St. Mary Frances Grasinger, Ph.D Associate Dean, Graduate Education 



FACULTY 

V. Robert Agostino 
Professor of Education 
B.S., Boston College 
M.S., University of Bridgeport 
Ed.D., Ball State University 

William P. Barone 
Professor of Education 
B.S., M.A., West Virginia University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Paul Bernstein 
Associate Professor of Education 
B.A., Hart wick College 
M.S., Springfield College 
Ph.D., Ohio University 

RuthG. Biro 

Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., Chatham College 

M.L.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Joseph T. Brennan 
Professor of Education 
B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D-, University of 
Pittsburgh 

Kenneth L. Burrett 

Associate Professor of Education; 

Associate Dean, Undergraduate 

Education; Director of Student 

Teaching and Field Experience 
B. A., M.S.Ed., Canisius College 
Ed.D., State University of New York, 

Buffalo 

William H. Cadugan 
Professor Emeritus of Education 
B.S. in B.A., M.Ed., Duquesne 

University 
Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Bruno A. Casile 
Professor Emeritus of Education 
B.S., Slippery Rock State College 
M.S., Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh 

William J. Casile 
Associate Professor of Education 
B.S.Ed., Duquesne University 
M.Ed., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Rev. Louis F. Dolan, C.S.Sp. 
Professor of Education 
B.A., B.D., St. Mary's Seminary 
M.A., Ed.S., Eastern Michigan 

University 
Ph.D., University of Michigan 



William R Faith 
Professor of Education 
B.Ed., Duquesne University 
M.Ed., Ph.D., Specialist Diploma, 
University of Pittsburgh 

Constance L. Fox 
Associate Professor of Education 
B.S.Ed., Ohio State University 
M.A., George Peabody College of 

Vanderbilt University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Dorothy A. Frayer 

Associate Professor of Education and 

Dean of the School of Education 
B.A., M.S., Michigan State University 
Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 

Mary Frances Grasinger, C.S.J. 
Professor of Education 

and Associate Dean, Graduate Education 
B.Ed., Duquesne University 
M.T.S., Catholic University of 

America 
Ph.D., Syracuse University 

Nicholas J. Hanna 
Professor of Education 
B.S., M.S., The Pennsylvania State 

University 
Ph.D., Ohio University 

Sister Julia Ann Hartzog, S.C. 
Associate Professor of Education 
B.A., Seton Hill College 
M.Ed., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Joseph F. Maola 
Professor of Education 
B. A., M.Ed., Duquesne University 
M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
Ph.D., The University of Akron 

Rick R. McCown 

Associate Professor of Education 
A. B., Ph.D., Indiana University 

Michael F. Moran 
Associate Professor of Education 
B.S., Shippensburg State College 
M.S., The Pennsylvania State University 
M.A., Michigan State University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Frank M. Ribich 
Associate Professor of Education 
B.Ed., M.Ed., Duquesne University 
Ed.D., The Pennsylvania State University 



166 



Alfonso A. Rizzo 

Professor of Education 
B.S., Massachusetts State College 
M.S., Springfield College 
Ph.D., University of Connecticut 

J. Bernard Smith 
Professor of Education 
B.S., M.Ed., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Maureen Sullivan 
Assistant Professor of Education 
B.Ed., M.Ed, in L.S., Duquesne University 
M.L.S., University of Pittsburgh 
Ed.D., University of Sarasota 

LECTURERS 

Donna C. Borza 
B.S.RA., Nazareth College 
M.A., University of Iowa 

Ronald C. L. Conant 
A.B., Suffolk University 
M.Ed., Boston College 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Charlotte Diffendale 
B.S., State University of New York 

at Oneonta 
M.A., University of Iowa 
Ph.D., Candidate, University of Pittsburgh 



Celine K. Long 
B.S.Ed., M.S.Ed., Duquesne University 
Graduate study. University of Pittsburgh 
and Indiana University of Pennsylvania 

Annie Preis 
B.S., M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Theodore A. Siedle 
B.S., Allegheny College 
M. A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

SUPERVISORS 

Quincy DiYenno 
M.S.Ed., Shippensburg University 
M.Ed., Doctoral Study, University 
of Pittsburgh 

Jeanne Graff 
B.S.Ed., M.S.Ed., Duquesne University 

Daniel P. Spillane 



B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D. 
of Pittsburgh 

Marcia Steinberger 
B.S., M.Ed., Ph.D. 
of Pittsburgh 



University 



University 



SCHOOL OF MUSIC 
ADMINISTRATION 

Michael Kumer, M.M.Ed Dean 

Cindy Boyer, B.S Assistant to the Dean 

Gerald E Keenan, Ph.D Dean Emeritus 

FACULTY 

Deborah Adams Kenneth Burky 
Adju net Professor of Piano - Associate Professor of Piano 

B.A., Boston University and Chair of Piano Department 

M.M., Boston University B.M., Oberlin Conservatory of Music 

Sr. Donna Marie Beck M.M., Indiana University 

Associate Professor of Music Therapy and Robert Cameron 

Chair of Musk Therapy Assistant Professor of Music 

Registered Music Therapist Education and Director of Bands 

B.S.M.E, M.M.Ed., Duquesne University B.A., University of Miami 

David Billings M.M., University of Michigan 

Adjunct Professor of Organ D.M. A., University of Maryland 

B . R A . , Penn State University Christine Capecci 
M.M., Eastman School of Music Adjunct Professor of Voice 

Keith Bishop B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 

Adjunct Professor of Saxophone Yee-ha Chiu 
B.EA., Carnegie-Mellon University Adjunct Professor of Piano 

Judith A. Bowman Diploma, Julliard School of Music 

Assistant Professor of Music Education M.M., Duquesne University 

B.S., Nazareth College Robert Clarke 
M.M., Ph.D., Eastman School of Music Adjunct Professor of Guitar and Chair 

David Bud way of Guitar Department 

Adjunct Professor of Piano B.F. A., Carnegie-Mellon University 

B.M., M.M., Duquesne University M.M., Duquesne University 



167 



Robert J. Croan 
Professor of Voice and 

Chair of Voice Department 
B.A., M.A., Columbia University 
Ph.D., Boston University 

Frank Cunimondo 

Adjunct Professor of Jazz Piano 

Charlotte Day 

Adjunct Professor of Piano 

Anthony Di Vittorio 
Adjunct Professor of Piano 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 

Robert F. Egan 
Professor of Music Education 
B.S., Case Western Reserve University 
M.A., Ph.D., New York University 

Sumner Erickson 
Adjunct Professor of Tuba 
Curtis Institute of Music 
Duquesne University 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Joy Freidlander 
Adjunct Professor of Dance 
B.A., in Dance, University of California 
M.F.A., University of California 

Marino Galuzzo 
Adjunct Professor of Saxophone 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 
M.M., University of Michigan 

James Gorton 
Adjunct Professor of Oboe 
B.M., Eastman School of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Alan Grishman 
Associate Professor of Music 
Chair of String Department 
B.S., Mannes College of Music 
M.A., New York University 

Robert D. Hamrick 
Adjunct Professor of Trombone 
B.M., M.M., West Virginia University 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

L.J. Hancock 

Adjunct Professor of Marching Band Methods 
B. S.M.Ed., Gettysburg College 

Richard Hiller 
Adjunct Professor of Jazz Studies 
B.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Rosette S. Hillgrove 
Adjunct Professor of Voice 
B.S.M.E., M.M.Ed., Duquesne 
University 

Joseph Willcox Jenkins 
Professor of Theory and Composition 
B.S., St. Joseph's College 
B.M., M.M., Eastman School of Music 
Ph.D., Catholic University of America 



Carlton Jones 
Adjunct Professor of Bassoon 
B.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 
M.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Christine Jordanoff 
Associate Professor of Music Education 
Coordinator of Music Enrollment 

and Chair of Music Education 
B.S., M.M., Duquesne University 
Diploma, Kodaly Music Training 

Institute 
Certificate, Liszt Academy of Music 

Nicholas Jordanoff 

Artistic Director for the 
Performing Ensemble, Tamburitzan 
Institute of Folk Arts and Associate 
Professor of Folk Arts 

B.S., M.Ed., Duquesne University 

Annabelle Joseph 
Adjunct Professor of Eurhythmies 
B.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 
M.M., Duquesne Uruversity 
D.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Eugenia Popescu Judetz 
Artistic Advisor and Adjunct Professor 
B.A., University of Bucharest 
M.A., Duquesne University 

Robert Kesselman 
Adjunct Professor of String Bass 
Certificate from the Curtis Institute of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Eric Kloss 
Adjunct Professor of Saxophone 
B.A., Duquesne University 

Walter W.Kolar 
Director, Tamburitzan Institute of 

Folk Arts and Associate Professor of Folk Arts 
B.S., M.Ed., Duquesne University 

Stephen Kovacev 

Assistant to the Director, Business 
Affairs, Tamburitzan Institute of 
Folk Arts and Associate Professor of Folk Arts 

M.Ed., Duquesne University 

Nestor Koval 
Associate Professor of Woodwinds and 

Chair of Woodwind Department 
Paris Conservatory 

Jan Kraynok-Hawes 
Adjunct Professor of French Horn 
B.M., Duquesne University 

Michael Kumer 
Dean, and Assistant Professor 

of Music Education 
B.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 
M.M.Ed., Duquesne University 

Wendy Webb Kumer 
Adjunct Professor of Flute 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 
M.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 



168 



Robert Leininger 

Adjunct Professor of String Bass 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Pamela Lewis 
Adjunct Professor of Voice and 

Alexander Technique 
B.A., Middlebury College 
M.A., Stanford University 
M.F.A., D.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Charles E. Lirette 
Adjunct Professor of Trumpet 
B.M., Oberlin Conservatory of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Donald Luizzi 

Adjunct Professor of Percussion 
B.M., University of Michigan 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Michael Maglio 
Associate Professor of Music Education 
B.S.E., Lowell University 
M.A., Teachers College, Columbia University 
Certificat, L'Ecole Normale de Musique, Paris 

John G. Maione 
Adjunct Professor of Guitar 
B.A., University of Pittsburgh 

Jeffery Mangone 

Adjunct Professor of String Bass 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 

Elizabeth Moll 
Adjunct Professor of Solfege 
B.M.E., Indiana University 
Graduate work at Indiana University, and 

University of Pittsburgh 
Liszt Academy of Music 

Vincent J. Monteleone 
Adjunct Professor of Trumpet 
B.S.M.E., M.M., Duquesne University 

John Moyer 
Adjunct Professor of Vocal Coaching 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 
M.M.E., Duquesne University 

Louis Munkachy 
Professor of Music Theory and Chair 

of Musicianship Department 
Diploma, Liszt Academy of Music 
Doctor of Laws and Political Science, 

Eotvos University, Budapest, Hungary 
B.S., M.M., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Joseph H. Negri 
Adjunct Professor of Guitar 
Carnegie-Mellon University 

Beverly Nero 
Adjunct Professor of Piano 
B.S.M.E., M.M., Duquesne University 

Mi) a Novich 
Associate Professor of Voice and 

Director of Opera Workshop 
B.M.E., Northwestern University 
M.M., Duquesne University 



Patsy Oliver 

Adjunct Professor of Trumpet 

Ruth B. Osgood 

Adjunct Professor of Strings 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 

Frank Ostrowski 
Adjunct Professor of Trumpet 
New England Conservatory 
Former Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Joanne Pasquinelli, R.M.T. 
Adjunct Professor of Music Therapy 
B.F.A., M.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Gary Piecka 

Adjunct Professor of Lower Brass Instruments 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 
M.M., Duquesne University 

Claudia Pinza 

Adjunct Professor of Voice 

Leonard Pruszynski 
Adjunct Professor of Percussion 
B.S.M.E., Duquesne University 

John M. Raevens 
Associate Professor of Music Theory 
Lemmens Institute, Mecheln, Belgium 

(Laureat) 
Royal Conservatory, Ghent, Belgium— 

First Prize in Organ, Theory, History 

Peggy Kelley Reinburg 
Adjunct Professor of Organ and Sacred Music 
B.A., Mary Washington College 
M.M., Northwestern University 

Sister Carole Riley, CD. P. 
Professor of Piano 
B.S., M.M., Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Carmen Rummo 

Adjunct Professor of Piano 

Linda Sanders, R.M.T. 
Adjunct Professor of Music Therapy 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.R.E., Pittsburgh Theological Seminary 
B.M., Westminster College 

Ronald Schneider 
Adjunct Professor of French Horn 
B.M., Eastman School of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Carolyn Shankovich 
Adjunct Professor of Choral Activities 
B.S.M.E., Indiana University of Pa. 
M.M., University of Michigan 

Robert Shankovich 
Director of Graduate Division 
Professor of Music and 
Director of Choral A:tivities 
B.S.M.E., M.M., Duquesne University 
D.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 

Allen Sher 

Adjunct Professor of Violoncello 
B.A., Brooklyn College 
M.A., Columbia University 



169 



Roger Sherman 
Adjunct Professor of Trumpet 
B.M.E., M.M.E., Eastman School 

of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Matthew Shiner 

Professor Emeritus of Brass and 
Chair of Brass Department 

Paul Silver 

Adjunct Professor of Viola 
B.M., Eastman School of Music 
M.M., Cleveland Institute of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 
Lisa Silko Spang 
Adjunct Professor of Piano 
B.S.M.E., M.M., Duquesne University 

Benjamin Speigel 
Adjunct Professor of Bassoon 
Former Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Ann Labounsky Steele 
Associate Professor of Organ, Chair 

of Organ and Sacred Music 
B.M., Eastman School of Music 
M.M., University of Michigan 
Diploma (Mention Maximum), Schola 

Cantorum 
Diploma, Ecole Normale 

Gladys Stein 
Associate Professor of Piano 
Diploma, B.S., M.S., Julliard 

School of Music 
Special Artist Degree, Vienna 
State Academy 
Rev. Moshe Taube 
Adjunct Professor of Voice 
Diploma, Julliard School of Music 



David P. Tessmer 
Adjunct Professor of Flute 
B.A., Houston Baptist College 
M.M., Duquesne University 

Thomas D. Thompson 
Adjunct Professor of Clarinet 
B.M.E., American Conservatory 
M.M., Northwestern University 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Gerald Unger 
Adjunct Professor of Percussion and Chair 

of Percussion Department 
B.S., B.M., Ohio State University 
M.A., University of Northern Colorado 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Gretchen Van Hoesen 
Adjunct Professor of Harp 
B.M., Julliard School of Music 
M.M., Julliard School of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Sandra Staley Vaporetti 

Adjunct Professor of Voice 

Anne Martindale Williams 
Adjunct Professor of Cello 
New School of Music 
Curtis Institute of Music 
Member, Pittsburgh Symphony 

Jean Wilmouth 
Adjunct Professor of Percussion 
B.F.A., Carnegie-Mellon University 

John H. Wilson 

Professor of Music and 

Director of jazz Studies 
B.S., M.A., Ed.D., New York University 



SCHOOL OF NURSING 
ADMINISTRATION 

Ruth Maszkiewicz, R.N., Ph.D 

Joanne R White, R.N., Ph.D 

FACULTY 

Monavar, Abbassian, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Sacramento State College 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Doctoral Student, University of Pittsburgh 

Catherine Arenz, R.N. 

Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Seton Hall College 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 

Charlotte Cooper, R.N. 
Associate Professor of Nursing 
B.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
M.Ed., University of Minnesota 
M.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



.Dean and Professor 
. . . .Associate Dean 



Joan Dague, R.N. 

Instructor in Nursing 

B.S.Ed., California State College 

M.N., University of Pittsburgh 

Lynda Davidson, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Mankato State University 
M.N., University of Washington (Seattle) 

Irene Dittemore, R.N. 
Associate Professor of Nursing 
Curriculum Coordinator 
B.S.N., Vanderbilt University 
M.Litt., University of Pittsburgh 
M.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



170 



Martha Doyle, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Doctoral Student, University of Pittsburgh 

Sally Faulkner, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., University of Iowa 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 

Sophia Gardner, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Carlow College 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 

Eileen Gimper, R.N. 

Associate Professor of Nursing 
Level I Coordinator 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
M.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Gladys Husted, R.N. 

Associate Professor of Nursing 
Curriculum Facilitator 
B.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
M.N.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Nancy Kostura, R.N. 

Instructor in Nursing 

B.S.N., Ohio State University 

M.S., Ohio State University 

Judith Magill, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Pennsylvania State University 
M.S.N., University of Maryland 

Patricia Mihalcin, R.N. 

Instructor in Nursing 
Director of Student Affairs 
B.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Doctoral Student, University of Pittsburgh 

M. Carroll MUler, R.N. 
Associate Professor of Nursing 
Level III Coordinator 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
M.S.N., University of Pennsylvania 

Constance Miller, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Carlow College 
M.N., University of Pittsburgh 

Margaret Muntz, R.N. 
Associate Professor 
Level II Coordinator 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
M.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 



Margaret McKenna, R.N. 

Associate Professor of Nursing 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
M.N.Ed., Uruversity of Pittsburgh 

Kathryn Oliverio, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
R.N. Program Coordinator 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
M.S.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 
Doctoral Student, University of Pittsburgh 

Natalie Pavlovich, R.N. 
Professor of Nursing 
Director of Faculty Research 

and Development 
B.S.N., University of Arizona 
M.A., University of Michigan 
M.S.N., University of Michigan 
Ph.D., University of Michigan 

Joan Reale, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Doctoral Student, University of Pittsburgh 

Joanne Tate, R.N. 
Assistant Professor of Nursing 
B.S.N., Point Park College 
M.S.Ed., Duquesne University 
M.N.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Louise Verdile, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Russell Sage College 
M.S.N., Russell Sage College 

Shirley Wheeler, R.N. 
Associate Professor of Nursing 
B.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
M.N.Ed., University of Pittsburgh 

Evelyn Wilczynski, R.N. 

Associate Professor of Nursing 
Curriculum Facilitator 
B.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
M.S.Ed., Duquesne University 

M. Kathleen Winter, R.N. 
Associate Professor of Nursing 
Level IV Coordinator 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
M.P.H., University of Pittsburgh 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Sr. Carol Zupancic, R.N. 
Instructor in Nursing 
B.S.N., Duquesne University 
B.S.Ed., Carlow College 
M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 
Doctoral Student, University of Pittsburgh 



171 



COOPERATING HEALTH AGENCIES 

Allegheny County Health Department 

SallyBauer,R.N., B.S.N. 

Chief of Public Health Nursing 

Allegheny General Hospital 

Deborah Straka, R.N. 
Student Affiliation Coordinator 

Central Medical Center & Hospital 

R J. Dolan, R.N. 

Sr. Vice President, Patient Care 

Children's Hospital of Pittsburgh 

Kathleen Sullivan, Ph.D. 
Director of Nursing for Patient 
Care and Quality Assurance 

Forbes Health System 

Oxsana Byczkalo, M.Ed. 
Training Manager 

Forbes Metropolitan Health Center 

April Stevens, R.N., M.N.Ed. 
Assistant Executive Director 

Forbes Regional Health Center 

Marie Langan, R.N., B.S.Ed. 

Assistant Executive Director 

Forbes Center for Gerontology 

Eileen Meyer, R.N., M.N.Ed. 
Assistant Executive Director 

Jefferson Hospital 

Joan Rosgony, R.N. 

Administrator, Acute Care 

Magee-Womens Hospital 

Lucille Reynolds, R.N., M.N.Ed. 
Assistant Vice President 
Patient Care Services 



Mercy Hospital 

Margaret Taylor, R.N. 
Centralized Nurse Educator 
Nursing Resource Department 

Montefiore Hospital 

Joan W. Beyer, R.N., M.RH. 

Associate Administrator 

Presbyterian-University Hospital 

Maureen Rusnock, R.N., M.N., M.N.Ed. 
Senior Vice President 
Nursing Service 

South Hills Health System 
Home Health Agency 

Mary Ann Miller, R.N., B.S.N., M.RH. 

Director of Staff Development 

South Side Hospital 

Mary Paula Pavinich, R.N., B.S.N., M.N.Ed. 
Assistant Vice President, Nursing 

St. Clair Memorial Hospital 

Yvonne Silverberg, R.TJ., M.N.Ed. 
Director of Nursing 

St. Francis General Hospital 

Agnes Marner, R.N., B.A. Soc. 
Director of Nursing Service 

Visiting Nurse Association of 
Allegheny County 

Barbara Piskor, B.S.N., M.RH. 

Director of Community Services 

Western Psychiatric Institute and Clinic 

Jacqueline Dunbar, R.N., Ph.D. 

Director of Nursing 




172 

SCHOOL OF PHARMACY 
ADMINISTRATION 

Douglas H. Kay, Ph.D Dean 

AMn M. Galinsky, Ph.D Assistant Dean 

Stephen C. Morrison, M.A Special Assistant to the Dean 



FACULTY- PHARMACY 

Anthony J. Amadio 
Professor of Pharmaceutical 

Administration 
B.S., M.Litt., University of Pittsburgh 
B.S. (Pharmacy), M.B.A., Duquesne 
University 

Lawrence H. Block 

Professor of Pharmaceutics 
B.S. (Pharmacy), M.S., Ph.D. 
University of Maryland 

Mitchell L. Borke 
Professor of Pharmaceutical Chemistry 
B.S. (Pharmacy), M.S., Ph.D., 
University of Illinois 

J. Douglas Bricker 
Associate Professor of Pharmacology 

and Toxicology 
B.A., University of Steubenville 
Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Charles C. Collins 
Assistant Professor of Pharmaceutics 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Ph.D., 
West Virginia University 

Wellon D. Collom 
Instructor in Toxicology 
B.S., University of California 
M.S., Duquesne University 

Raymond A. Eder 
Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Pharm.D., 
Duquesne University 

Joseph A. Feldman 
Professor of Pharmaceutical Chemistry 
B.S. (Pharmacy), University of 

Rhode Island 
M.S., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 

Frederick W. Fochtman 
Associate Professor of Pharmacology and 

Toxicology 
B.S. (Pharmacy), M.S., Ph.D., 
Duquesne University 

Henry R. Freedy, Jr. 
Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Pharm.D., Duquesne 
University 

Alvin M. Galinsky 
Professor of Pharmaceutics 
B.S. (Pharmacy), M.S., Ph.D., 
University of Illinois 



Aleem Gangjee 
Associate Professor of Pharmaceutical 

Chemistry 
B.S., M.S. (Chemistry), Indian 

Institute of Technology 
Ph.D., University of lov^a 

Mary Ann Gasowski 
Health Physics Consultant 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.S. Health Physics, University of 
Pittsburgh 

Vincent J. Giannetti 
Associate Professor of Pharmaceutical 

Administration 
B.A., M.A., Duquesne University 
M.S.W., M.S. (Hyg.), Ph.D., University of 

Pittsburgh 

Raymond A. Giudici 

Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Pharm.D., Duquesne 
University 

Marilyn F. Harris 

Associate Professor of Pharmaceutical 

Administration 
B.S. P., University of Saskatchewan 
M.S., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Benjamin Hodes 
Professor of Pharmaceutics 

B.S. (Pharmacy), Albany College of Pharmacy 
M.S., Ph.D., University of Michigan 

Charles N. Karnack 
Clinical Instructor in Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Pharm.D., Duquesne 
University 

Douglas H. Kay 
Dean of the School of Pharmacy and Professor of 

Pharmaceutical Chemistry 
B.S. (Pharmacy), M.S., Ph.D., Massachusetts 
College of Pharmacy and Allied Health 
Sciences 

Patricia A. Keys 
Assistant Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), S.U.N.Y. -Buffalo 
Pharm. D., Duquesne University 

Joseph M. Kristofik 
Associate Professor of Pharmaceutical 

Administration and Director of Externship 
B.S. (Pharmacy), J.D., Duquesne University 



173 



John G. Lech 

Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Pharm.D., Duquesne 
University 

Bruce Livengood 
Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Temple University 
Pharm.D., Duquesne University 

Bruce D. Martin 
Professor of Pharmaceutical Chemistry 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Albany College of Pharmacy 
M.S., Ph.D., University of fllinois 

Thomas J. Mattel 

Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy and 
Director of Pharmacy, Mercy Hospital 

B.S. (Pharmacy), Pharm.D., Duquesne 
University 

Reginald A. Ney 
Assistant Professor of Radiological Health and 

University Health Physicist 
B.S., Duquesne University 
M.S., University of Pittsburgh 

Norbert A. Pilewski 

Associate Professor of Pharmacognosy 

B.S. (Pharmacy), M.S., University of Pittsburgh 

Ph.D., Ohio State University 

Therese I. Poirier 

Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 

B.S. (Pharmacy), Albany College of Pharmacy 

Pharm.D., University of Michigan 

M.P.H., University of Pittsburgh 

Thomas L. Rihn 
Assistant Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Pharm.D., Duquesne 
University 

Gene A. Riley 

Professor of Pharmacology 

B.S. (Pharmacy), Duquesne University 

Ph.D., Western Reserve University 

Lisa N. Schatz 
Assistant Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), University of Pittsburgh 
Pharm.D., University of Cincinnati 

Sydney P. Shanor 
Professor of Pharmacology, Emeritus 
R.N., St. John's Hospital 
B.S., M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Atul Shukla 
Assistant Professor of Pharmaceutics 
B.S. (Pharmacy), University of Bombay 
M.S., Ph.D., University of Georgia 

Wagdy W. Wahba 
Instructor in Pharmacology and Toxicology 
B. Pharm., Alexandria University 
Ph.D., Duquesne University 

Charles L. Winek 
Professor of Toxicology 

B.S. (Pharmacy), M.S., Duquesne University 
Ph.D., Ohio State University 



Gerard J. Wolf 
Instructor in Pharmacy 
B.S. (Pharmacy), Duquesne University 



FACULTY- MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 

Jeanne A. Cooper 

Professor of Medical Technology and Director, Mercy 

School of Medical Technology (Parasitology) 
B.S., Waynesburg College 
M.D., Hahnemann Medical College 

Michael Israel 

Instructor in Medical Technology (Hematology) and 
Program Director, Mercy School of Medical 
Technology 

M.D., University of Vermont 

M. Elaine Linkhauer 
Instructor in Medical Technology and Education 
Coordinator, Mercy School of Medical Technology 
(Microbiology, Parsitology, Mycology) 
B.A., Carlow College 
M.T. (ASCP) 
M.S., Duquesne University 

Martin Cohen 
Instructor in Medical Technology (Hematology) 
M.D., California College of Medicine 

Ezio Compare 

Associate Professor of Medical Technology 

(Endocrinology) 
M.D., Padua, Italy 

John Georgescu 
Instructor in Medical Technology (Virology) 
M.S., Duquesne University 
S.M. (AAM) 

Linda Hahn 

Instructor in Medical Technology (Blood Banking) 
B.S., University of Pittsburgh 
M.T. (ASCP) 

Spyros Kominos 
Associate Professor of Medical Technology 

(Microbiology) 
B.S., M.S., Duquesne University 
D.Sc, University of Pittsburgh 

WiUiam I. Smith 
Instructor in Medical Technology (Clinical 

Chemistry, Immunology) 
M.D., University of Pittsburgh 

Rita M. Windisch 
Associate Professor of Medical Technology (Clinical 

Chemistry) 
B.S., Ph.D., Duquesne University 



AUXILIARY FACULTY 

John J. Abbott, R.Ph. 
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Pharmaceutical 

Administration 
Sales Manager 
The Upjohn Company 



174 



Harvey M. Arbit, Pharm.D. 
Director of Scientific Affairs 
Upsher-Smith Laboratories, Inc. 
Minneapolis, MN 

Thomas F. Bache, Pharm.D. 
Adjunct Clinical Instructor 
Department of Pharmacy 
Allegheny General Hospital 

Robert Evans, Pharm.D. 
Adjunct Clinical Instructor 
Department of Pharmacy 
Allegheny General Hospital 

Edward G. Kalish, R.Ph. 
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Pharmacy 

Administration 
Special Sales Representative 
Eli Lilly and Company 

Carl Kaplan, M.D. 
Division of Radiation Therapy 
Radiology Department 
Mercy Hospital 

Arthur Katoh, Ph.D. 
Research Associate 
Radiology Department 
Mercy Hospital 

Philip W. Keys, Pharm.D. 
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 
Director of Pharmacy 
Department of Pharmacy 
Allegheny General Hospital 

Delbert D. Konnor, M.S., R.Ph. 
Adjunct Professor of Pharmaceutical Administration 
Director of Professional Services 
Retired Persons Services, Inc. 
AARP Pharmacy Service 
Alexandria, VA 



Marvin J. Lalli, R.Ph. 

Adjunct Assistant Professor of Pharmacy 

Administration 
Hospital Sales Coordinator 
Eli Lilly and Company 

James A. Lyon, Jr., Pharm.D. 
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Clinical Pharmacy 

Harold N. McFarland, Ph.D. 
Adjunct Professor of Toxicology 

John Mucenski, Pharm.D. 
Adjunct Clinical Instructor 
Department of Pharmacy 
Allegheny General Hospital 

Maria Paccioretti, Pharm.D. 
Adjunct Clinical Instructor 
Department of Pharmacy 
Allegheny General Hospital 

Edward J. Pavsek, M.D. 
Associate Professor of Medical Technology 
Chairman 

Department of Radiology 
Mercy Hospital 

Silvestri Silvestri 
Judge 

Court of Common Pleas 
Fifth Judicial District 
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania 

Elliott Turbiner, D.O. 
Associate Professor of Medical Technology 
Division of Nuclear Radiology and 
Ultrasound 
Mercy Hospital 

Joseph A. Watson, Ph.D. 
Adjunct Professor of Radiology 
Graduate School of Public Health 
University of Pittsburgh 

Cyril H. Wecht, M.D., J.D. 
Adjunct Professor of Pathology 



PHARMACIST-PRECEPTORS 
PRACTICAL PHARMACY II, III, IV 

Joseph F. Aiello 
Elk County General Hospital 
Ridgway, PA 

Peter Alt 
Jewish Home and Hospital for the Aged 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Thomas Altieri 
Director of Pharmacy 
St. Clair Memorial Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Dr. Ted Anderer 
Williamsport Hospital 
Williamsport, PA 

Thomas F. Bache 
St. Francis General Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 



Fred H. Bender 
St. Vincent Health Center 
Erie, PA 

Anthony J. Betz, III 
Betz Pharmacy 
McMurray, PA 

Gene Bevacqua 
Whitaker Drug 
Whitaker, PA 

Mildred R Bezjak 
Director of Pharmacy 
Brownsville General Hospital 
Brownsville, PA 

T. J. BiancuUi 
Sycamore Pharmacy, Inc. 
Pittsburgh, PA 



175 



John D. Bridges 
South Side Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Kristen L. Buckley 
Clearfield Pharmacy 
Clearfield, PA 

MaxE. Callaghan 
Callaghan's Pharmacy 
Franklin, PA 

Frank Capelloni 
Frank's Drug Store 
Moscow, PA 

Barbara Carson 
Director of Pharmacy Services 
Medical Center of Beaver County 
Beaver, PA 

Cathy Clark 
Director of Pharmacy 
Columbia Health Center 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Kathy Contrucci 
Armstrong County Memorial Hospital 
Kittanning, PA 

Virgil J. Davis 
Lee Hospital Pharmacy 
Johnstown, PA 

Michele DeBalko 
Nesbitt Memorial Hospital 
Kingston, PA 

Phillip V. DeMarco 
Westmoreland Hospital Association 
Greensburg, PA 

Carmen DiCello 
Pennsylvania Pharmaceutical Association 
Harrisburg, PA 

Allen H. Dicken 
Memorial Hospital of Bedford County 
Everett, PA 

Nick DiSilvio 
West Penn Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Georgine A. Dorundo 
Westmoreland Hospital 
Greensburg, PA 

Ernest F. Dostalik 
Ernie's Pharmacy 
Midland, PA 

Janice J. Druschel 
Westmoreland Hospital Association 
Greensburg, PA 

Leo Einloth 
Robinson Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Raymond J. Farkas 
National Institute of Health 
Department of Nuclear Medicine— 
Radiopharmaceutical Section 
Bethesda, MD 



Jay E. Feld 
The Medicine Shoppe 
New Castle, PA 

Jeffrey W. Rowers 
The Apothecary Shoppe 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Michael Fording, Pharm.D. 
Bernard Pharmacy Services 
West Homestead, PA 

Thomas J. Fowler 
Sewickley Valley Hospital 
Sewickley, PA 

Ronald J. Franck 
Avalon Community Pharmacy 
Avalon, PA 

John Fris 
Ebensburg Center 
Ebensburg, PA 

Daniel Fritz 
Central Medical Health Services 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Anthony (Steve) Giordano 
Temple Pharmacy 
Kane, PA 

Marshall Goldstein 
Pinebridge Apothecary 
Upper St. Clair, PA 

Richard S. Goldstein 
Goldstein's Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Thomas Grande, Pharm.D. 
Allegheny General Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Robert R Hahn 
Director of Pharmacy 
Canonsburg General Hospital 
Canonsburg, PA 

George Haslett 
SavMore Prescription Center 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Karen Hayes 
John J. Kane Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Ronald G. Hietsch 
The Medicine Shoppe 
Sharon, PA 

Irvin Hirsh 
Murray Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Rosella C. Hoffman 
Shadyside Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Thomas J. Hoffman 
Butler County Community Hospital 
Butler, PA 

William M. Irvin 
Central Drug Store 
Uniontown, PA 



176 



Thomas E . Jackovic 
McCracken Pharmacy, Inc. 
VVaynesburg, PA 

Gerald VV. John 
Ohio Valley Hospital 
Steubenviile, OH 

Patricia C. Kienle 

Pharmacy Manager 
Mercy Hospital 
Wilkes Barre, PA 

Francis A. Kittell 
Rite Aid Pharmacy 
Portage, PA 

Edward Krenzelok, Pharm.D. 
National Poison Network 
Pittsburgh, PA 

John J. Krzan 
Medical Center Pharmacy 
Gibsonia, PA 

Andrew F. Kuzy 
Western Center Pharmacy 
Canonsburg, PA 

Robert Lefkowitz 
Penn Taft Pharmacy 
West Mifflin, PA 

Stanford A. Lefkowitz 
Penn Taft Pharmacy 
West Mifflin, PA 

John R. Lewis 
Hamot Medical Center 
Erie, PA 

William S. Liepack 
Beacon Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Janet Lindner 
North Hills Passavant Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Patricia Lizak 
Medical Center of Beaver County 
Beaver, PA 

John Lowe 
VA Hospital 
Leech Farm 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Thomas A. Magnifico 
Magnifico's Pharmacy, Inc. 
Ellwood City, PA 

Thomas Maloney 
Ingram Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Debbie Marshall 
Director of Pharmacy 
Uniontown Hospital 
Uniontown, PA 

Robert Martello 
North Hills Passavant Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 



Dean Matanin, Pharm.D. 
Latrobe Area Hospital 
Latrobe, PA 

Ronald Matson 
Brock way Drug Co., Inc. 
Brockway, PA 

Carol Matthews 
West Allegheny Hospital 
Oakdale, PA 

Connie (Cubelis) Mayle 
Shenango Valley Osteopathic Hospital 
Farrell, PA 

Harry Menk 
Director of Pharmacy 
Monongahela Valley Hospital 
Monongahela, PA 

Don Miller 
St. Clair Memorial Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

William Montgomery 
Franklin Hospital Pharmacy 
Franklin, PA 

Joseph Mosso 
Mosso's Pharmacy, Inc. 
Latrobe, PA 

David Nedzinski 
Director of Pharmacy 
Andrew Kaul Memorial Hospital 
St. Mary's, PA 

Richard A. Nickel 
Mallinckrodt Inc. 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Elaine Nigro 
Jefferson Medical Center 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Deborah Nobile-Milito 
Monsour Medical Center 
Jeannette, PA 

Sr. Alma O'Brien 
Holy Spirit Hospital 
Camp Hill, PA 

Leonard O'Hara 
Chief Pharmacist 
Mercy Hospital 
Scranton, PA 

Mark H. O'Toole 
Braddock General Hospital 
Braddock, PA 

Loretta Patton 
High Point Pharmacy 
Erie, PA 

Bruce Predebon 
Divine Providence Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Thomas Riley 
Lebanon Shops Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 



177 



John Rosencrance 
Richland Drug Store, Inc. 
Johnstown, PA 

Charles Rosko 
South Side Hospital of Pittsburgh 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Jamie Rossano 
St. Francis Hospital of New Castle 
New Castle, PA 

Lee Ann Rossman 
Hamot Medical Center 
Erie, PA 

James F. Rovegno 
Lawrence Park Apothecary 
Erie, PA 

Ronald Rovnak 
Aliquippa Hospital 
Aliquippa, PA 

John Russo, Jr 
Russo's Pharmacy, Inc. 
New Castle, PA 

John O. Sansone 
Woodville State Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Frank Scalise 
Beverly Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Dennis Sebastian 
West Penn Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Sidney Shabrin 
Americus Pharmacy 
AUentown, PA 

Harold Singleton 
Gaughn's Drug Store 
Warren, PA 

John Sirera 
Director of Pharmacy 
St. John's General Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Phillip B. Sollon 
Sollon Pharmacy 
Canonsburg, PA 

Donald L. Spencer 
Executive Director 
Cumberland Area Health 
Education Center 
Cumberland, MD 

David Spenik 

Director of Pharmacy 
Windber Hospital 
Windber, PA 

Robert B. Stanek 
Director of Pharmacy Services 
Good Samaritan Hospital 
Pottsville, PA 



Williard A. Stephens 
Stephens Prescription Drug Store, Inc. 
Moscow, PA 

Lee Stilley 
Sharon General Hospital 
Sharon, PA 

Frank J. Stroker, Jr. 
Warren General Hospital Pharmacy 
Warren, PA 

Tim Stukus 
Central Medical Health Services 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Robert D. Swenson 
Westmoreland Hospital 
Greensburg, PA 

Edward P. Szamicki 
Eckerd Drug Store/Heights Plaza 
Natrona Heights, PA 

Charles Tarasovic 
St. Margaret Memorial Hospital 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Charles D. Thomas 
Charles D. Thomas Drug Store 
Pittsburgh, PA 

George Toth 
Director of Pharmacy 
Altoona Hospital 
Altoona, PA 

Charles F. Traeger 
Ayres Drug Store 
McKeesport, PA 

Richard F. Urbani 
Director of Pharmacy 
Jeannette District Memorial Hospital 
Jeannette, PA 

Geraldine Vukelich 
Meadville City Hospital 
Meadville, PA 

Daniel Wagner 
Medi Pharmacy 
Gibsonia, PA 

Louis Wakefield 
Director of Pharmacy Services 
St. Joseph Hospital 
Reading, PA 

Donald Waltmire 
Waltmire's Pharmacy 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Thomas Weimer 
McKeesport Hospital 
McKeesport, PA 

Jack Welch 
Jameson Memorial Hospital 
New Castle, PA 

Ray Westbrook 
Westbrook Pharmacy and Surgical Supply 
Pittsburgh, PA 



178 



Lavonne VVieczorek 
H.C. Frick Community Hospital 
Mt. Pleasant, PA 

Stephen VV. Wiley 
Director of Pharmacy 

The Milton S. Hershey Medical Center 
Hershey, PA 

Man' Winek 
The Apothecary Shoppe 
Allison Park, PA 

Nancy Zitko 
Ideal Drugs 
Washington, PA 

MURPHY MART PHARMACY 

Suzanne Zavora 

Beverly Hamilton 

Tim Donohue 

Bob Miller 

Robert Pruss 

James Clougherty 
Home Office 
Bethel Park, PA 

THRIFT DRUG 

Clifford Beisel, #51 
McKnight Seibert Shopping Center 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Joseph Bell, #27 
623-625 East Ohio St. 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Larry Buffalini, #5 
425 Beaver Road 
Sewickley, PA 

Paul Culan 
Kenmawr Plaza 
McKees Rocks, PA 



David Dolan 
Ritzland Shopping Center 
Pittsburgh, PA 

William F. Donley 
1956 Greentree Road 
Pittsburgh, PA 

James P. Kerr 
5 Foster St. 
Crafton, PA 

Frank Konieczny, #90 
2200 Northway Mall 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Mort Kuber, #24 
300 Mt. Lebanon Boulevard 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Joe Lettrich, #80 
Hillcrest Shopping Center 
New Kensington, PA 

Gary Spiers, #100 
2 Olympia Shopping Center 
McKeesport, PA 

Jack Rohland 
411 Corbet Street 
Tarentum, PA 

David Sas 
1212 Route 30 
North Huntingdon, PA 

John Saversky, #78 
South Park Shops 
Bethel Park, PA 

Ron Skornicka 
6th St. and Penn Ave. 
Pittsburgh, PA 

Fred WoDcen 
Oakland/ Squirrel Hill Area 
Pittsburgh, PA 



U.S. ARMY RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CORPS (ROTC) 

ADMINISTRATION 

FACULTY- DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 

Major Robert N. Mirelson Major Gerald L. Boldt 

Professor of Military Science Assistant Professor of Military Science 

B.A., M.A., University of Florida B.S., M.A., Mankato State University 

Major Jay E. Rossi Captain Gerald F. Lambert 

Assistant Professor of Military Science Assistant Professor of Military Science 

B.S., United States Military Academy B.S., United States Military Academy 

ADMISSIONS OFFICE STAFF 

Frederick H. Lorensen, Ph.D Director 

Judith A. Diorio, M.B.A Associate Director 

Jeffrey E. Arnold, B.A Assistant Director 

Lynn L. Brown, B.A Assistant Director 

Othello P Todd, M.Ed Assistant Director 

Diana L. Woods, B.A Assistant Director 

Walter J. White, B.S.M.E Admissions Counselor 

Jane A. Fiore, M.Ed Assistant Director Eastern Representative 



Index 



179 



Academic 

Advisor 150 

Calendar 2 

Load- Arts and Sciences 18 

Policies 150 

Regulations- Arts and Sciences 18 

Summer Sessions 136 

Supervisor of Intercollegiate Athletics 150 

Academic Policies 150 

Academic Advisor 150 

Academic Supervisor of Intercollegiate 

Athletics 150 

Auditing Courses 150 

Cancellation of Courses 151 

Class Attendance 151 

Course Examinations 151 

Classification of Students 151 

Credit by Examination 151 

Dean's List 153 

Grading System 151 

Graduate Courses for Undergraduate Credit 153 

Graduation Requirements 153 

Honors 154 

Pass/Fail Electives 152 

Quality Point System 152 

Repeating Courses and Course 

Retrogradation 152 

Student Standing 152 

Transfer Within the University 154 

Unit of Credit 154 

Withdrawal Course 154 

Accounting Curriculum 66 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Administration and Faculty 156 

Administration Building 10 

Administrative Officers 155 

Admissions 134 

Advanced Placement 136 

Applications 

First Year Students 134 

Other Categories 135 

International Students (Undergraduate) 135 

Post-Graduates 135 

Readmission 135 

Temporary Transfers 136 

Transfers 135 

College Level Examination Program 136 

Credit Hour Bank 137 

Early Admissions 135 

Early Decision Plan 134 

Office 134 

Policy 134 

Requirements 134 

Summer Session 136 

Duquesne Students 136 

Other Students 136 

Admission, Special Requirements 

Education 71 

Music 85 

Nursing 101 

Pharmacy 114 

Advanced Placement 136 

Advisor 

Academic 150 

International Student 130 

Application 

Credit Hour Bank 137 

Fee 134, 145 



for Financial Aid 138 

New First- Year Students 134 

Early Admission 135 

Early Decision B4 

Other Categories 135 

International Students 135 

Post-Graduates 135 

Readmission 135 

Summer Session 136 

Duquesne Students 136 

Students from Other Institutions 136 

Transfers 135 

Temporary 136 

Applied Music Courses 95 

Applied Technology, Associate Degree 18 

Army ROTC 125 

Art History Division 19 

Courses 19 

Requirements for Major 19 

Requirements for Minor 20 

Arts and Sciences 

See Liberal Arts and Sciences, College of 
Associate Degree Programs, College 

of Arts and Science 15 

Assumption Hall 10 

Athletics 128 

Attendance, Class 151 

Auditing Courses 150 

Auditor's Fee 145 

Bachelor-Master's Program 18 

Bachelor's Degree Fee 146 

Bachelor's Degree-Second 18 

Bachelor's Degree, Three- Year 18 

Bachelor's-Professional School Program 18 

Bad Checks 148 

Behavioral Sciences, Division of 71 

International Business 71 

Law Administration 72 

Management 72 

Marketing 74 

Pre-Legal 72 

Billing Problems 148 

Biochemistry 24 

Biological Sciences 21 

Courses 21 

Department of 21 

Requirements for Major 21 

Requirements for Minor 21 

Board of Directors 155 

Bureau of Research and Community Services 64 

Business and Administration 

School of 64 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Bureau of Research and Community Services 64 

Bureau of Research 64 

Center for: 

Administration of Legal Systems 65 

Economic Education 65 

International Management 65 

Course Descriptions 

Accounting 66 

Economic Science 74 

Finance 67 

International Business 71 

Law Administration 72 

Management 72 

Management Information Systems 69 



180 



Marketing 74 

Pre-Legal 72 

Quantitative Methods 69 

Curriculums 

Accounting 66 

Economic Science 74 

Finance 67 

International Business 71 

Law Administration 72 

Management 72 

Management Information Systems 69 

Marketing 74 

Pre-Legal 72 

Quantitative Methods 69 

Degree 64 

Divisions and Programs 65 

Behavioral Science 71 

Economic Science 74 

Quantitative Science 66 

Histor\^ 64 

Philosophy and Objectives 64 

Sample Program 66 

Scholarships 140 

Student Organizations 65 

Calendar, Academic 2 

Cancellation of Courses 151 

Campus Ministry 133 

Canevin Hall 10 

Career Planning and Placement 128 

Cashing Checks 148 

Catholic Lay Teacher Discount 144 

Center for 

Academic and Career Development 128 

Administration of Legal Systems 65 

Economic Education 65 

International Management 65 

Certification 

Music Education 86 

Teacher Education 80 

Certified Public Accountant Requirements 66 

Change of Schedule 149 

Fee 145 

Checks 148 

Bad 148 

Cashing 148 

Chemistry 24 

Courses 24 

Department of 24 

Requirements for Major 24 

Requirements for Minor 24 

Class Attendance 151 

Classics 25 

Courses 26 

Department of 25 

Requirements for Major 25 

Requirements for Minor 25 

Classification of Students 151 

Full-time 151 

Part-time 151 

Post-Graduate 151 

Clergy Discounts 144 

Clinical Pharmacy, Department of 120 

Code of Student Rights, 

Responsibilities and Conduct 132 

College Hall 10 

College Level Examination Program (CLEP) 136 

College of Liberal Arts and Sciences 



See Liberal Arts and Sciences, College of 
Communications for Industry, 

Associate Degree 18 

Competitive Scholarships 138 

Computer Sciences 42 

Courses 42 

Division of 42 

Requirements for Major 42 

Requirements for Minor 42 

Confidentiality of Student Records 150 

Concentrated Studies Program 16 

Cooperative Education 17 

Core Curriculum 14 

Corporation, The Duquesne 155 

Costs, See Fees and Tuition 

Counseling Center 10 

Course 

Examination 151 

Retrogradation 152 

Course Descriptions 

Arts and Sciences 15 

Business and Administration 66 

Education 80 

Music 95 

Nursing 105 

Pharmacy 118 

ROTC 126 

Courses 

Auditing 150 

Cancellation of 151 

Repeating 152 

Criminal Justice, Associate Degree 18 

Credit 

By Examination 151 

Hour Bank 137 

Unit of 154 

Cross-Registration 149 

Curriculums 

Arts and Sciences 15 

Bachelor-Master's 18 

Bachelor's/Professional School 18 

Liberal Arts Engineering 18 

Pre-Law 18 

Second Bachelor's Degree 18 

Three Year Bachelor's 18 

Cooperative Education 17 

Business and Administration 64 

Accounting 66 

Economic Science 74 

Finance 67 

International Business 71 

Law^ Administration 72 

Management 72 

Management Information Systems 69 

Marketing 74 

Pre-Legal 72 

Quantitative Methods 69 

Education 

Early Childhood 78 

Elementary 78 

Music 79 

Secondary 79 

Special Education 79 

Music 

Jazz 97 

Music Education 86, 95 

Music Therapy 97 

Orchestral Instrument 91 



181 



Organ 88 

Piano 89 

Voice 90 

Sacred Music 98 

Nursing 100 

Pharmacy 109 

Medical Technology 112, 122 

Radiological Health IB 

ROTC 125 

Dean of Students, Office of the 128 

International Students 130 

Dean's List 153 

Degree 

Arts and Sciences 16 

Awarded with Honors 154 

Business and Administration 64 

Education 11 

Music 85 

Nursing 101 

Pharmacy 109 

Degrees and Programs Offered 8 

Departments, College of Liberal Arts and Science 

Biological Sciences 21 

Chemistry 24 

Classics 25 

Computer Science 42 

Economics 34 

English 34 

Fine Arts (Art Division) 19 

History 37 

Journalism 27 

Mathematics 40 

Media Arts 30 

Modern Languages 43 

Philosophy 49 

Physics 51 

Political Science 54 

Psychology 56 

Sociology 58 

Speech Communication and Theatre 31 

Theology 60 

Departments, School of Pharmacy 

Clinical Pharmacy 109 

Medical Technology 112 

Pharmaceutical Administration 120 

Pharmaceutical Chemistry and 

Pharmaceutics 118 

Pharmacology-Toxicology 119 

Radiological Health 122 

Des Places Communications Center 10 

Development Services 130 

Career Planning and Placement 128 

Learning Skills Program 131 

Psychological Center for 

Training and Research 131 

Testing Bureau 130 

Directors and Officers 155 

Board of Directors 155 

The Duquesne Corporation 155 

Officers of the University 155 

Discounts, University 144 

Divisions, School of Business and Administration 

Behavioral Science 71 

Economic Science 74 

Quantitative Science 66 

Dormitories 
Assumption Hall 10 



Duquesne Towers 11 

Expenses 147 

St. Ann Hall 12 

St. Martin Hall 12 

Dropping and Adding Courses 149 

Duquesne 

Corporation 155 

Duke (Newspaper) 132 

Magazine 132 

Towers 11 

Union 11 

Early Admission 135 

Early Childhood Education 

Courses 78 

Program 78 

Early Decision 134 

Earth Science Courses 53 

Economic Science, Division 74 

Curriculum 74 

Economics 

Courses 74 

Department of 74 

Requirements for Major 34 

Requirements for Minor 34 

Education, School of 11 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Admission T7 

Class Attendance 80 

Competency Core Curriculum 78 

Course Descriptions 80 

Early Childhood 81 

Educational Foundations and Psychology 80 

Elementary 82 

Secondary 83 

Special 83 

Curriculum H 

General Education H 

Professional Education H 

Professional Laboratory Experiences H 

Degree 77 

Dual Certification 80 

General Education Required Courses T7 

History 77 

Honor Awards 80 

Program Credit Requirements 

Early Childhood 81 

Elementary 82 

Music 79 

Secondary 79 

Special Education 79 

Scholarships 140 

Student Organizations 80 

Teacher Certification 80 

Educational Foundation and Psychology 80 

Edward J. Hanley Hall, The 11 

Effective Catalog- Arts and Sciences 19 

Elementary Education 

Courses 82 

Program Credit Requirements 78 

English 

Courses 35 

Department of 34 

Honors Program 35 

Requirements for Major 35 

Requirements for Minor 35 

Evening Study 13 



182 



Examinations 

Advanced Placement 136 

CLEP Examinations 136 

Course Examinations 151 

Unit 151 

Final 151 

Credit by 151 

Expenses. See Tuition and Fees 



Facilities, Physical 10 

Faculty, Administration and Arts 

and Sciences 156 

Business and Administration 163 

Education 165 

Music 166 

Nursing 169 

Pharmacy 172 

ROTC 178 

Federal Nursing Loans 139 

Fee, University 145 

Fees, General. See Tuition and Fees 

Finance Curriculum 67 

Financial Aid 137 

Application Procedure 138 

Award Conditions 137 

Competitive Scholarships 138 

Current Information 138 

Federal Nursing Loans 139 

Financial Need 137 

Gift Assistance 137 

Guaranteed Student Loan 139 

Health Profession Loans 139 

Meeting Student Need 137 

National Direct Student Loans 138 

Other Sources of Aid 139 

Parish Scholarship 138 

Pell Grant Program 139 

Principles of Aid 137 

Program Funding 138 

Programs 138 

State Grant Assistance 139 

Student Employment 139 

Shident Self-Help 137 

Supplemental Educational 

Opportunity Grants 138 

University Aid 138 

University Scholars Award 138 

Financial Aid -Departments and School 137 

Business and Administration 140 

College of Liberal Arts and Sciences 140 

Education 140 

Music 141 

Nursing 141 

Pharmacy 141 

General University Scholarships 142 

ROTC Scholarships 144 

University Discounts 144 

Financial Matters 148 

BUling Problems 148 

Student Financing Program 148 

Cashing Checks 148 

Bad Checks 148 

Fine Arts (See Art Division) 

First-Year Students, Admission of 134 

French Courses 44 

Full-Time Students 151 



G and G Building H 

General Education 78 

General Information 9 

German Courses 45 

Grade Reports, Semester 150 

Grading System 151 

Graduate Courses for Undergraduate Credit 153 

Graduation 

Fees 146 

Honors 154 

Requirements 153 

Greek Courses 26 

Guaranteed Student Loans 139 

Guitar Courses 87 

Gymnasium 11 

Handbook, Student 132 

Hanley Hall, The Edward J 11 

Health Profession Loans 139 

Health 

Insurance 129 

Services 129 

History 37 

Courses 37 

Department of 37 

Requirements for Major 37 

Requirements for Minor 37 

History of Duquesne 9 

Honors, Graduation 154 

Honors Awards 

Education 80 

Music 86 

Nursing 103 

Pharmacy 116 

Honor Societies 131 

Housing. See Dormitories 

Inter-Fraternity Council 131 

International 

Business Curriculum 71 

Education, Policy Statement on 9 

Communications, Associate Degree 18 

International Relations, Political Science 54 

Student Advisement 130 

Students, Admission of 135 

Inter-School Minors 18 

Italian Courses 46 

Journalism 

Courses 27 

Department of 27 

Requirements for Major 28 

Requirements for Minor 28 

Scholarships 140 

Laboratory Fees 

General 146 

Pharmacy 114, 146 

Late Registration 

Fee 145 

Policy 150 

Latin Courses 26 

Law Administration Curriculum 72 

Learning Skills Program 131 

CEsprit du Due (Yearbook) 132 

Liberal Arts and Sciences, College of 15 

Academic 
Load 18 



183 



Regulations 18 

Requirements 16 

University-Level Courses Taken While 

in High School 19 

Course Descriptions 19 

Art Division 19 

Biological Sciences 21 

Chemistry 24 

Classics 25 

Computer Science 42 

Economics 74 

English 35 

History 37 

International Relations 54 

Journalism 27 

Mathematics 40 

Media Arts 30 

Modern Languages and Literature 43 

Philosophy 49 

Physics 51 

Political Science 54 

Psychology 56 

Sociology .58 

Speech Communications and Theatre 31 

Theology 60 

World Literature 19 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Curricular Requirements 15 

Degrees '. 16 

Effective Catalog 19 

Electives 18 

History 15 

Majors and Minors 19 

Philosophy and Objectives 15 

Special Programs 16 

Associate Degrees 18 

Concentrated Studies 16 

Cooperative Education 17 

World Literature Program 17 

Bachelor of Arts in Liberal Arts and 

General Sciences 17 

Pre-Law 18 

Pre-Professional Health Education 18 

Inter-School Minors 18 

Bachelor-Master's 18 

Bachelor/Professional School 18 

Liberal Arts Engineering 18 

Second Bachelor's Degree 18 

Three-year Bachelor's 18 

CLEP and Advanced Placement 18, 136 

Scholarships 140 

Library Resource Center 11 

Loans. See Scholarships and Loans 

Management Curriculum 72 

Management Information Systems 69 

Marketing Curriculum 74 

Mathematics 

Courses 40 

Department of 40 

Requirements for Major 40 

Requirements for Minor 40 

Matriculation Deposit 145 

McCloskey Field 11 

Media Arts 

Courses 30 

Requirements for Major 30 

Requirements for Minor 30 



Medical Technology, Department of 112 

Mellon Hall of Science 11 

Military Science, Department of 126 

Ministry, Campus 133 

Modern Languages & Literature 

Courses 44 

Department of 43 

French Courses 44 

German Courses 45 

Italian Courses 46 

Requirements for Major 43 

Requirements for Minor 44 

Russian Courses 47 

Spanish Courses 47 

Music Education 86 

Music, School of 85 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Admission 85 

Advisement 85 

BuUding 11 

Course Descriptions 95 

Performance 95 

Ensemble/Chamber Music 95 

Music Education 95 

Musicianship 96 

Jazz Studies 97 

Music Therapy 97 

Sacred Music 98 

Non-Music Majors 98 

Ensemble 95 

Music Education 86, 95 

Course Descriptions 95 

Music Therapy 97 

Non-Music Majors 98 

Sacred Music 98 

Tamburitzans Institute of Folk Arts 98 

Degrees 85 

Equipment 85 

Fees, Special 85 

History 85 

Honor Awards 86 

Philosophy and Objectives 85 

Programs 87 

Major in Guitar 87 

Major in Organ 88 

Major in Piano 89 

Major in Voice 90 

Major in Orchestral Instruments 91 

Bachelor of Science in Music Education 

Choral Track 92 

Bachelor of Science in Music Education 

Instrumental Track 93 

Bachelor of Science in Music Education 

Music Therapy 94 

Sacred Music 98 

Scholarships 141 

Student Organizations 86 

National Direct Student Loans 138 

Nursing, School of 100 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Admission of Registered Nurse Students 102 

Admission Requirements 101 

Course Descriptions 105 

Curriculum Standards 105 

Definition/Philosophy 100 

Degree 101 

Expenses, Additional 103 



184 



Graduation Requirements 104 

Grievance Procedure 104 

History 100 

Honor Awards 103 

Nursing Electives 107 

Program Purposes, Goal & Indicators 101 

Program of Study 101 

Recommended Course Sequences 104 

Scholarships and Loans 141 

Second Degree Program 102 

Student Organizations 103 

Student Rights 104 

Temporary Transfer 102 

Transfer Student Admissions 102 

Official Registration 149 

Officers, Administrative 155 

Organizations. See Student Organizations 

Pan-Hellenic Council 131 

Parish Scholarship 138 

Part-Time Students 151 

Pass/Fail Electives 152 

Pell Grant Programs 139 

Pharmaceutical Administration, 

Department of 120 

Pharmaceutical Chemistry and Pharmaceutics, 

Department of 118 

Pharmacists, State Licensing of 117 

Pharmacology-Toxicology, Department of 119 

Pharmacy, School of 109 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Admission 114 

Areas of Concentration Ill 

Career Guidance Center 117 

Course Descriptions 118 

Clinical Pharmacy 120 

Medical Technology 122 

Pharmacy Curriculum 110 

Pharmaceutical Administration 120 

Pharmaceutical Chemistry 

and Pharmaceutics 118 

Pharmacology-Toxicology 119 

Professional Electives 123 

Radiological Health 113 

Curriculum Majors Ill 

Degrees 109 

Graduation Requirements 117 

History 109 

Honor Awards 116 

Philosophy and Objectives 109 

Programs 109 

Pharmacy 109 

Medical Technology 112 

Radiological Health 113 

Research Foundation Ill 

Residency Requirements 110 

Regulations 115 

Scholars Programs 114 

Scholarships and Loans 141 

Special Fees 114 

Activities 115 

Laboratory 114 

School of Pharmacy Fee 115 

State Licensing 

Pennsylvania 117 

States Other Than Pennsylvania 117 

Student Organizations 115 



Philosophy and Objectives, University 9 

Philosophy 

Courses 49 

Department of 49 

Requirements for Major 49 

Requirements for Minor 49 

Physics 51 

Courses 51 

Department of 51 

Earth Science 51, 53 

Requirements for Major 51 

Requirements for Minor 51 

Physical Facilities 10 

Piano Courses 89 

Placement Center, Career Planning and 128 

Policy Statement on International Education 9 

Political Science 

Courses 54 

Department of 54 

Requirements for Major 54 

Requirements for Minor 54 

Post-Graduate Students, Admission of 135 

Pre-Law Program 18 

Pre-Legal Program 72 

Pre-Professional Health Education 18 

Professional and Department Organizations 131 

Psychological Center for 

Training and Research 131 

Psychology 

Courses 57 

Department of 56 

Requirements for Major 56 

Requirements for Minor 57 

Public Safety Building 11 

Publications, Student 132 

Code of Student Rights, 

Responsibilities & Conduct 132 

Duquesne Duke (Newspaper) 132 

Duquesne Magazine 132 

L'Esprit du Due (Yearbook) 132 

Student Handbook 132 

Quality Point System 152 

Quantitative Science 

Division of 66 

Accounting 66 

Finance 67 

Quantitative Methods 69 

Radio and Television, WDUQ 132 

Radiological Health, Department of 113 

Readmission 135 

Records and Reports 150 

Confidentiality of Student Records 150 

Semester Grade Reports 150 

Transcripts 150 

Red Masquers 132 

Refund 

Room and Board, Withdrawal and 147 

Tuition 147 

Registration 149 

Change of Schedule 149 

Cross 149 

Late 150 

Regulations for Pharmacy Students 115 

Requirements for Graduation 153 

Repeating Courses and 
Course Retrogradation 152 



185 



Reserve Officer Training Corps 125 

Army ROTC Scholarships 126 

Course Descriptions 126 

Department of MUitary Science 125 

(Army ROTC) 125 

Early Commissioning 126 

Programs 125 

Four- Year 125 

Advanced Course 126 

Basic Course 126 

Leadership Laboratory 127 

Direct Entry, Advanced 125 

Simultaneous Membership 126 

Two- Year 126 

Voluntary Adventure and 

Social Activities 127 

Scholarships 126 

Residence 

Council 131 

Life 130 

Residence, Student. See Dormitories 

Residence Hall Pre-Payment Fee 145 

Rockwell Hall 11 

Room and Board 147 

Costs 147 

Withdrawals and Refunds 147 

ROTC. See Reserve Officer Training Corps 

Russian Courses 47 

St. Ann Hall 12 

St. Martin Hall 12 

Scholarships and Loans — 

University Aid 138 

Application Procedure 138 

Competitive Scholarships 138 

Health Profession Loans 139 

National Direct Student Loans 138 

Federal Loans B8 

Parish Scholarships 138 

Student Employment 139 

Supplemental Educational 

Opportunity Grants 138 

University Scholars Awards 138 

Scholarships and Loans - 

Other Sources 139 

Guaranteed Student Loans 139 

Other Possibilities 139 

Pell Grant Program 139 

State Grant Assistance 139 

Scholarships and Loans — 
Department and Schools 

Arts and Sciences 138 

Business and Administration 140 

Education 140 

General 142 

Music 141 

Nursing 141 

Pharmacy 141 

ROTC 144 

School Year 2 

Schools 

Arts and Sciences 14 

Business and Administration 64 

Education 71 

Music 85 

Nursing 100 

Pharmacy 109 

Second Bachelor's Degree 18 



Secondary Education 

Courses 83 

Programs 79 

Semester 

Grade Reports 150 

Tuition 145 

Senior Citizen Discount 144 

Service Organizations 132 

Social Organizations 132 

Sociology 

Areas of Concentration 58 

Courses 58 

Department of 58 

Requirements for Major 58 

Requirements for Minor 58 

Spanish Courses 47 

Speech Communication and Theatre 

Areas of Concentration 31 

Courses 32 

Department of 31 

Special Education 79 

Courses 83 

Programs 79 

Sports. See Athletics 

State 

Licensing of Pharmacists 117 

Grant Assistance 139 

Student 

Employment 139 

Government Association 131 

Housing. See Dormitories 

Financing Program 148 

Records, Confidentiality of 150 

Standing 152 

Student Services, Programs and 
Organizations 128 

Student Life 128 

Athletics 128 

Dean of Students 128 

Health Insurance/Health Services 129 

Residence Life 130 

Learning Skills Program 131 

Testing Bureau BO 

Psychological Center for 

Testing and Research Bl 

Student Governance Bl 

Student Government Association Bl 

Commuter Council Bl 

Residence Council Bl 

Inter-Fraternity Council Bl 

Pan-Hellenic Council Bl 

Union Program Board 129 

Student Organizations Bl 

Honor Societies Bl 

Media B2 

WDUQ Radio and Television B2 

WDRC B2 

Performance Groups B2 

Tamburitzans B2 

Red Masquers Theatre B2 

Professional and Departmental 

Business and Administration 65 

Education 80 

Music 86 

Nursing 103 

Pharmacy 115 

Publications B2 

Duquesne Duke Newspaper B2 



186 



Duquesne Magazine 132 

Code of Student Rights 132 

Student Handbook 132 

Yearbook 132 

Ser\ice 132 

Social 132 

Summer and Special Sessions 

Tuition and F^e Charges 146 

Summer Session 13, 136 

Duquesne Students 136 

Transfer Students 136 

Supplemental Educational 

Opportunity Grants 138 

Systems Center Computer Resources 13 

Tamburitzans 132 

Teacher Certification 

Education 80 

Television, WDUQ Radio and 132 

Temporar)' Transfer Students, Admission of 

Academic Year 136 

Summer Session 136 

Testing Bureau 130 

Theatre 132 

Theology 

Courses 60 

Department of 60 

Three-Year Bachelor's Program 18 

Transcripts 150 

Transfer Within the University 154 

Transfer Students 

Admission of 135 

Temporary 136 

Temporary — Summer . . . ^ 136 

Trinity Hall 12 

Tuition and Fees 145 

Application Fee 145 

Auditor's Fee 145 

Change of Schedule Fee 145 

Credit by Examination Fee 145 

Graduation Fees 146 

Laboratory Fees 146 

Late Registration Fee 145 

Matriculation Deposit 145 



Remission of Tuition 147 

Removal of I Grade 145 

Residence Hall Pre-Payment 145 

Room and Board 147 

Withdrawal and Refund 147 

Scholarships 138 

Special Fees 

Business and Administration 145 

Music 145 

Nursing 103 

Pharmacy 114, 145 

Summer and Special Sessions 146 

Tuition 145 

University Fee 145 

Withdrawal and Termination of 

Attendance 147 

Tuition Remission Schedule 147 

Within the Semester 147 

Within the Summer Session 147 

Union Program Board 129 

Unit of Credit 154 

University 

Accreditation and Affiliation 12 

Administrative Officers 155 

Board of Directors 155 

Buildings 10 

Discounts 144 

Duquesne Corporation 155 

History 9 

Philosophy and Objectives 9 

Policy Statements on International 

Education 9 

Scholars Awards 138 

Setting 10 

WDUQ Radio and Television 132 

Withdrawal 

From a Course 154 

From the University 147 

Women's Sports. See Athletics 

World Literature F^rogram 17 



Duquesne University Campus 



I 




City of 

Pgh. 

Fire Co. 

#3 


O 


1 


03 


II II III 

Parking 

II II III 


W 
O 

z 

m 
m 

H 








^d 


a 


5r 


c 


cr 


c 


c 


ro 


i-t 


^/i 


OQ 


3 


pr 


ro 


;? 


!3 


3 


< 


cr 


^ 


^ 


Ci3 


2 


^ 






^« 




D> 




a 




Is} 




00 




K» 





2 






V5 




z 

^3 


03 


[_j 


-13 


^ 


?3 


C 


H 


^ 


1 


?3 


Z 

o 


a 


^ 


H 






O 1 


"^ 


vD 




m 


?3 


> 


o 






P 



__j1